Nov 25

Today’s News 25th November 2024

  • US Officials Discussed Giving Nuclear Weapons To Ukraine
    US Officials Discussed Giving Nuclear Weapons To Ukraine

    Authored by Kyle Anzalone via AntiWar.com,

    According to the New York Times, US and European officials have discussed a range of options they believe will deter Russia from taking more Ukrainian territory, including providing Kiev with nuclear weapons. The outlet reports that Western officials believe the Kremlin will not significantly escalate the war before Donald Trump is sworn in as President in January.

    Following the election of Trump earlier this month, the US and its NATO allies began taking steps to rush weapons to Ukraine and give Kiev the ability to strike targets inside Russian territory with long-range weapons.

    American officials who were briefed on the intelligence community’s assessments told the Times that weapons will not alter the challenging situation that Kiev is currently facing. “US spy agencies have assessed that speeding up the provisions of weapons, ammunition and matériel for Ukraine will do little to change the course of the war in the short term,” the Times reports.

    Image: Wiki Commons

    Desperate to bolster Ukraine’s standing in the war before the transition of power on January 20, the Biden administration is looking at a range of serious escalations. “US and European officials are discussing deterrence as a possible security guarantee for Ukraine, such as stockpiling a conventional arsenal sufficient to strike a punishing blow if Russia violates a cease-fire.”

    The article continues, “Several officials even suggested that Mr. Biden could return nuclear weapons to Ukraine that were taken from it after the fall of the Soviet Union.”

    According to some officials who spoke with the Times, the administration believes that Russian President Vladimir Putin won’t significantly escalate the war until Trump returns to the Oval Office.

    “But the escalation risk of allowing Ukraine to strike Russia with US-supplied weaponry has diminished with the election of Mr. Trump,” the report says, adding, “Biden administration officials believe, calculating that Putin of Russia knows he has to wait only two months for the new administration.”

    That assessment is based on the belief that Trump and his incoming Director of National Intelligence, Tulsi Gabbard, will take a more favorable stance on Russia. However, Trump proved to be a Russia-hawk during his first administration by ramping up sanctions on Moscow, providing lethal arms to Ukraine, and expelling a large number of Russian diplomats from the US.

    In September, Putin said he preferred Vice President Kamala Harris to win the White House. “Trump has imposed as many sanctions on Russia as any president has ever imposed before, and if Harris is doing well, perhaps she will refrain from such actions,” he explained.

    US officials actually discussed a nuclear option, via the NY Times report:

    Much of the American political class has cast Trump and Gabbard as agents of Russia. However, extensive investigations into Trump’s ties to the Kremlin have come up empty. Additionally, the Times reported last week that there was no evidence Gabbard was in any way an asset of Putin.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 11/24/2024 – 23:20

  • The Choice
    The Choice

    Authored by MN Gordon via EconomicPrism.com,

    “And cast ye the unprofitable servant into outer darkness: there shall be weeping and gnashing of teeth.” 

    – Matthew 25:30

    Daycare for Adults

    Sometimes things must get worse before they get better. Reducing deficit spending and eliminating government waste, for example, will initially have a negative impact on GDP and employment. Though, this is exactly what is needed to restore America’s economic health.

    U.S. government spending has run riot for over 50 years. Over the last two decades, it has gone completely berserk. In fact, since 2004, the national debt has jumped from $8 trillion to $36 trillion.

    All this debt-based government spending has created massive distortions in the economy. The price of consumer goods, a glut of unproductive government jobs, the appearance of economic growth, and more. The effects of government spending range far and wide.

    Without question, government spending is responsible for the inflation of consumer prices. However, it is also responsible for the inflation of key government statistics. Specifically, GDP and employment.

    In 2023, nearly 25 percent of all job additions were government jobs. And over the last 12 months, government jobs increased by an average of 43,000 per month. In addition, according to the latest GDP figure, government spending accounted for 30 percent of the annualized growth.

    Should Elon Musk and Vivek Ramaswamy make good on their intentions to hit the delete button on numerous federal agencies and eliminate $2 trillion in government spending, two notable things will happen. GDP will topple over and the unemployment rate will skyrocket.

    Nonetheless, if you care about America’s long term financial and economic health, this is the best thing that can happen. Jobs that are nothing more than daycare for adults shouldn’t exist.

    Egg Hunts

    Statistics like GDP and employment can be misleading if you don’t consider what goes into them. Are they the aggregate of real economic activity or are they composed of something phony?

    In short, when GDP and employment statistics are inflated by reckless fiscal policies, they stop being measurements of economic health and become barometers of self-destruction.

    How did we get here?

    The fall from grace can be traced to several sources. The passage of the federal income tax and the creation of the Federal reserve, both in 1913, are certainly part of the genesis.

    However, the rationale for using deficit spending to boost GDP and employment was triggered by the 1936 publication of John Maynard Keynes’ The General Theory of Employment, Interest and Money.

    Not only is the book rigorously indecipherable. It also has the ill-effect of making those who read it dumber. Unfortunately, Keynes’ drivel became the standard for reckless economic thinking, which still drives economic policy to this day.

    Many politicians and establishment economists remain enamored with Keynes’ gibberish. They love that it provides an academic rationale for governments to do what they love to do most – borrow money and spend it on ridiculous programs. Central planners also love that it gives them an economic basis for carrying out their absurd designs.

    For example, Keynes advocated filling bottles with money and burying them in coal mines for people to dig up as a way to end unemployment. According to Keynes, this would provide jobs and money for the unemployed. Somehow, these public works egg hunts would create an economic boom and make everyone rich.

    Alien Invasions

    Over the years this reasoning has inspired countless government stunts to save the economy from itself. The American Recovery and Reinvestment Act of 2009 and the American Rescue Plan of 2021 are two mega Keynesian inspired spending bills passed this century. The U.S. will never be able to overcome the consequences of these asinine programs.

    In practice, the execution of Keynesian inspired spending programs never live up to their promises of economic vitality. Debt ends up outpacing GDP growth by leaps and bounds.

    In 1980, federal debt was about $1 trillion while GDP was $2.8 trillion. Today, federal debt is over $36 trillion while GDP is around $29 trillion. Thus, over the last 44 years GDP has increased by a factor of 10 while federal debt has increased by a factor of 36.

    With this track record of economic growth significantly lagging the growth of government debt, any justification for using deficit spending as a means to grow the economy out of debt is absolute nonsense. Still, Nobel Prize winning economists are fully committed to chasing Keynesian economics to insanity.

    Just over a decade ago, Keynes devotee, Paul Krugman, took the logic of Keynesian economics and ran with it to the outer limits of deep space. In the process, he lost his mind.

    Following his righteous departure from planet earth, Krugman went on cable television and explained that the proper way to propel an economic growth chart up and to the right is to borrow massive amounts of money and spend it preparing for an alien invasion.

    The Choice

    Absurd fiscal policies over many decades have created an economy, and hundreds of thousands of employees, that are largely dependent on government spending. This is the economy that President-elect Trump is inheriting when he comes into office.

    He is up against an unworkable task. He must address a mega debt crisis that’s partly of his own making. The last time Trump was President the national debt increased by $8 trillion.

    At this point, the only way to fix the economy and America’s finances is to first burn them to the ground. The distortions accumulated over many decades are too great. They cannot be undone without first making things worse.

    Many years ago, Ludwig von Mises, in Human Action, presented the unpleasant choice team Trump must make.

    “There is no means of avoiding the final collapse of a boom brought about by credit expansion. The alternative is only whether the crisis should come sooner as the result of a voluntary abandonment of further credit expansion, or later as a final and total catastrophe of the currency system involved.”

    What Musk and Ramaswamy are advocating as part of their Department of Government Efficiency (DOGE) is the alternative of the crisis coming “sooner as the result of a voluntary abandonment of further credit expansion.” The crisis, to be clear, is a deep recession or depression.

    It is the right choice, given the poor state of Washington’s finances. But is it already too late to avoid a total catastrophe of the dollar?

    There is no way to know for sure. What is known is this:

    The mass culling of federal workers. The abrupt eradication of deficit spending. The collapse of GDP and the rise in unemployment. These things are needed to return the USA to a place of good health.

    Yet the interim period, which may last for a generation or two, will be of much weeping and gnashing of teeth.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 11/24/2024 – 22:10

  • Western Officials Claim North Korean General Wounded In Recent Ukrainian Strike
    Western Officials Claim North Korean General Wounded In Recent Ukrainian Strike

    Western officials have claimed that a senior North Korean general was recently wounded in a Ukrainian strike on Russia’s Kursk region. 

    Details are scant, but the incident was vaguely described to The Wall Street Journal, which wrote, “It is the first time Western officials have said that a high-ranking North Korean military officer has become a casualty in the escalating Russia-Ukraine conflict.”

    “Western officials didn’t disclose how the senior North Korean officer was wounded or his identity,” WSJ continued. “North Korea’s mission to the United Nations didn’t immediately respond to a request for comment on the strike, which has been described in Western intelligence reports.”

    Illustrative file image: AFP

    Recent international reports have separately alleged that thousands of North Korean troops are in Kursk region assisting Russian efforts to repel occupying Ukrainian troops, which have held hundreds of square kilometers of territory since the August cross-border incursion.

    Last month, spokesman for the US National Security Council John Kirby warned that any North Korean troops fighting in Ukraine are “fair game and fair targets.”

    The US and UK (and more recently France) have authorized Ukraine to strike Russian territory using long-range weapons, citing as a rationale for the escalation the infusion of North Korean troops and foreign fighters into the Russian side.

    If it is accurate that a high-ranking North Korean officer was hurt in recent attacks on Russia, could it have been the result of sophisticated long-range Western missiles?

    The WSJ report cites a Russian blogger who says North Koreans were present at a location which was struck by Storm Shadows days ago:

    The Storm Shadows launched Wednesday struck an estate in Marino, a town in the Russian-controlled part of the Kursk region, according to videos geolocated by the Center for Information Resilience, an online investigation organization, that were verified by The Wall Street Journal. Marino is about 20 miles from the front lines in the province.

    The estate contains vast gardens and an underground area with domed ceilings lined with bricks and is run by the Russian government, according to its official website. Loud whooshes followed by thunderous explosions that set off car alarms could be heard on video taken by bystanders and shared on social media.

    Recent reports have also alleged that in return for sending troops, Russia has rewarded Pyongyang with new anti-air defense missile systems, along with other weaponry.

    Some hawkish officials in Europe are using the reports of N.Korea-Russia cooperation to urge limitless support for Kiev:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Presidents Putin and Kim Jong-Un signed a joint defense pact this summer. The Kremlin has thus sought to present the transfer of North Korean troops into Russia (and possibly into Ukraine) as consistent with this legal agreement.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 11/24/2024 – 21:35

  • Florida's Surgeon General Comes Out Against Fluoride In Water Supply
    Florida’s Surgeon General Comes Out Against Fluoride In Water Supply

    Authored by T.J. Muscaro via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    Florida’s Surgeon General Joseph Ladapo issued a new guidance on Nov. 22, advising against the long-standing practice of adding fluoride to the public drinking water supply.

    Florida Surgeon General Dr. Joseph Ladapo. York Du/The Epoch Times

    “Adding fluoride to water increases the risk of neuropsychiatric disease in children and reduces their IQ,” Ladapo said in a post on X. “We can strengthen teeth without consuming this neurotoxin.”

    In his guidance, Ladapo states that fluoride, which is known to strengthen teeth and make them more resistant to decay, is “widely available from multiple sources,” such as toothpaste and mouthwashes, and cites several studies that found a connection between negative mental side effects and fluoride exposure during childhood and pregnancy.

    Those side effects include an association with lowered IQ, attention deficit and hyperactivity disorder (ADHD), as well as decreased child inhibitory control and cognitive flexibility.

    His guidance also cited a report published in August 2024 by the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services National Toxicology Program, which also suggested a connection between fluoridated water and lower IQ in children, and U.S. District Court ruling that found “community water fluoridation at 0.7 milligrams per liter presents an unreasonable risk of injury to health under the Amended Toxic Substances Control Act” and called upon the Environmental Protection Agency to take action.

    The surgeon general announced his position in Winter Haven, Florida, which recently announced its own decision to remove fluoride from its public water supply.

    Winter Haven Commissioner Brad Dantzler said that the district judge’s ruling in September and Rober F. Kennedy Jr.’s potential nomination to lead the Department of Health and Human Services are reasons that fluoride should likely be removed from the city’s drinking water. Kennedy has previously argued for removing fluoride from the entire nation’s water supply.

    Ladapo admitted during his press conference to previously being in favor of fluoridation, which was seen as a public health measure. But, the toxicology report and the district court ruling made him take another look at the issue, and he said that he was appalled by the findings.

    “Due to the neuropsychiatric risk associated with fluoride exposure, particularly in pregnant women and children, and the wide availability of alternative sources of fluoride for dental health, the State Surgeon General recommends against community water fluoridation,” the guidance stated.

    Ladapo’s guidance also said that the Department of Health recognized the benefits of fluoride and advocated for “oral and overall health” through other means, such as expanding education, screening and operation of dental services in schools, and promotion of healthier habits in communities across the state.

    Water systems of more than 70 percent of Florida communities currently receive fluoridated water.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 11/24/2024 – 21:00

  • France Backs Ukraine Firing Its Long-Range Missiles At Russia
    France Backs Ukraine Firing Its Long-Range Missiles At Russia

    This weekend France has belatedly made clear that it has joined allies Britain and US in authorizing Ukraine to use long-range missile for strikes on targets in Russian territory.

    The past week has witnessed significant escalation after Ukraine used both UK-made Storm Shadow missiles and US-supplied ATACMS in at least two separate cross-border assaults. And now:

    French Foreign Minister Jean-Noel Barrot told the BBC that Ukraine can shoot French longer-range missiles into Russia in the “logics of self-defense.” The French Scalp missiles are the same as the UK’s Storm Shadow missiles, which Ukraine had already used in attacks on Russia.

    French Minister for Europe and Foreign Affairs Jean-Noel Barrot and Ukrainian Foreign Minister Andrii Sybiha, via Reuters

    “The principle has been set… our messages to President Zelensky have been well received,” he said in the Saturday interview, however without disclosing whether French Scalp missiles have already been used in such a way.

    He argued that the Western allies should not put any limits on supporting Ukraine’s effort fighting back Russia. He called for the West to “not set and express red lines.“

    After saying this, he was then pressed by interviewer Laura Kuenssberg over if that could even mean sending French troops into the war. “We do not discard any option,” he responded.

    The top French diplomat continued, “We will support Ukraine as intensely and as long as necessary. Why? Because it is our security that is at stake. Each time the Russian army progresses by one square kilometer, the threat gets one square kilometer closer to Europe.”

    On the question of Zelensky’s push to join NATO, Barrot strongly hinted that Paris considers it as a possibility: “We are open to extending an invitation, and so in our discussions with friends and allies, and friends and allies of Ukraine, we are working to get them to closer to our positions,” he said.

    “Of course we will have to spend more if we want to do more, and I think that we have to face these new challenges,” he said of broader French and European defense spending.

    The Kremlin’s response to all of this was swift, with Foreign Ministry spokeswoman Maria Zakharova declaring that FM Barrot’s comments are “not support for Ukraine, but rather a death knell for Ukraine.” 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Meanwhile, Russia and Ukraine have continued exchanging drones over each other’s territory at an intense pace. “Ukraine’s air force said that at least 73 Russian attack drones entered the country’s airspace on Saturday into Sunday morning, after a week in which both sides made battlefield history with new advanced weapons systems,” ABC reports.

    And Russia’s defense ministry said during the same period its military downed a reported 36 Ukrainian drones. Russia further described that in Ukraine it targeted “military airfields, production facilities and storage sites for drones, as well as concentrations of enemy manpower and military equipment.”

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 11/24/2024 – 20:25

  • Trump Has Vowed To Close The Department Of Education – How Would That Work?
    Trump Has Vowed To Close The Department Of Education – How Would That Work?

    Authored by Aaron Gifford via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    In September 2023, Donald Trump’s presidential campaign announced 10 principles for reforming education. Chief among them was closing the Department of Education in Washington, and sending “all education work and needs back to the states.”

    U.S. Department of Education building in Washington on July 6, 2023. Madalina Vasiliu/The Epoch Times

    The president-elect has maintained that pledge, even though he appointed a secretary of education (Linda McMahon) to lead a federal agency he vowed to eliminate.

    He also promised to support universal school choice, reverse “gender-affirming” care practices in schools, and leverage the department’s funding mechanisms to end Critical Race Theory and Diversity, Equity, and Inclusion programs in K–12 and higher education.

    But how exactly would Trump go about making these changes, and close the $80 billion department?

    Neal McCluskey, director of the Cato Institute Center for Education Freedom in Washington, said Congress created the Department of Education and is, therefore, the only agency that can eliminate it.

    Under Senate filibuster rules, support is required from 60 of the 100 members, but McCluskey doesn’t think there are enough votes to make that happen.

    “He can’t just snap his fingers and make it [Department of Education] go away,” McCluskey told The Epoch Times. “It seems unlikely if no Democrats get on board.”

    The department, established in 1979, is also the smallest federal cabinet with about 4,100 employees, McCluskey said.

    As something not considered a sacred pillar of the U.S. government, there may be enough bipartisan support to shrink the agency by moving some functions to other federal agencies.

    McCluskey said the Constitution does not guarantee the right to education.

    Public schools and higher education institutions are mainly funded at the state and municipal levels, while state and local boards of education mandate curriculum, graduation requirements, employee credentials, and annual operating budgets.

    Private colleges, though mainly funded by tuition and donations, still get federal financial aid for students.

    Higher education financial aid programs, for example, could be moved to the Treasury.

    Civil Rights functions for investigating discrimination and harassment complaints at schools and college campuses could easily be handled by the Department of Justice.

    The funding programs for low-income school districts and special needs programs would have a place with Health and Human Services.

    And The Census Bureau within the U.S. Department of Commerce is well-equipped to take on the data and services that have been provided by the Department of Education’s National Center for Education Statistics and Institute of Education Sciences, McCluskey said.

    Through block grants, state education departments could easily handle the smaller federally funded programs for accelerated learning loss recovery in core subjects, nutrition, career and technical education, and various other areas related to academics or student wellness, McCluskey said.

    “It’s just a matter of how much control the federal government wants over these programs,” he said, adding that hundreds of millions of dollars could be saved if state employees administered a program instead of both state and federal employees.

    In awarding block grants, McCluskey added, Trump could withhold funding from state education agencies that continue DEI and CRT policies if the president deems, they “discriminate based on race.”

    Will Congress Support Downsizing?

    Changes to the Department of Education will be a high priority in the next legislative session.

    On Nov. 21, Sen Mike Rounds (R-S.D.) introduced the “Returning Education to Our States Act,” which would eliminate the Department of Education and move its critical programs to other federal agencies.

    In a news release, Rounds said the department’s budget increased by 449 percent in its 45-year history, while student test scores have dropped in the past decade.

    “The federal Department of Education has never educated a single student, and it’s long past time to end this bureaucratic department that causes more harm than good,” Rounds said in the release.

    “We all know local control is best when it comes to education.”

    Similar legislation from Rep. Barry Moore, a Republican from Alabama, also called for abolishing the department and moving its funding to states.

    It was introduced in February 2023 but never passed the House Committee on Education and the Workforce.

    The chair of that committee, Rep. Virginia Foxx, a Republican from North Carolina, states on her website that she supports returning “decision-making power and resource flexibility to the local level while keeping schools accountable for results to taxpayers, parents, and students.”

    Sen Bill Cassidy, a Republican from Louisiana, is expected to take over as chair of the Senate Health, Education, Labor and Pensions Committee.

    He has criticized the Department of Education in recent years but stopped short of calling for its elimination.

    In June, Cassidy, Ohio Senator and now Vice President-elect JD Vance, and 20 other republican legislators introduced the Dismantle DEI Act that would cut federal funding for any federal department, contractors, or programs that institutionalize discrimination in hiring and employee training.

    The list of contractors and programs includes educational accreditation agencies.

    “Taxpayers expect the most qualified candidates to be hired, not the most favored,” Cassidy said in a June 13 news release.

    Will Policies Be Reversed?

    An Epoch Times review of announcements, news releases, and speeches on the Department of Education website under the Biden administration found that initiatives related to DEI and student loan forgiveness have been the department’s most publicized activities.

    Sarah Spreitzer, American Council on Education (ACE) chief of staff of government relations, said during a Nov. 7 ACE panel discussion that voters care about education reform and are pressuring the next administration to downsize the department “and give it a smaller role.”

    “When they think about their complaints about education, you know, blame the Department of Education,” she said.

    “I can see them moving some of the big pieces from the Department of Education, and you’re kind of left with a much smaller footprint of the department.”

    ACE leaders echo the Cato Institute’s sentiments that Trump is poised to use his executive authority to remove DEI and CRT from federally funded programs.

    Spreitzer said the president-elect did so on a limited basis with federal contractors during his previous term—without any court challenges she’s aware of—so he could easily dust that policy off and expand it after he’s sworn in.

    “The hook they’ll always have is that federal funding,” she said. “Whether it’s through your grant agreement, or whether it’s through your program participation agreement, you know putting new requirements in there is the hook they will use.”

    Will Teachers Accept Changes?

    American Federation of Teachers President Randi Weingarten expressed mixed reactions to Trump’s election and his recent appointment of McMahon at a time when the U.S. Department of Education could face major change.

    “We look forward to learning more about Linda McMahon, and if she is confirmed, we will reach out to her as we did with Betsy DeVos at the beginning of her tenure.

    “We hope Donald Trump means it when he says he wants a focus on project-based instruction, career and technical education, and apprenticeships.

    “This will improve education and job options, making schools more relevant and engaging for young people,” Weingarten said in a Nov. 19 news release.

    “But we question the future of these popular ideas and more if the Trump administration follows through with plans to close the Department of Education, leaving in doubt a federal funding lifeline that disproportionately goes to children in need, children with disabilities, and young adults who are the first in their families to go to college.”

    The Epoch Times reached out to the Department of Education, but a response was not provided.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 11/24/2024 – 19:50

  • North Carolina's Hurricane Rebuilding Director Is "No Longer Employed" With The State
    North Carolina’s Hurricane Rebuilding Director Is “No Longer Employed” With The State

    Laura Hogshead, who led North Carolina’s rebuilding efforts after hurricanes Matthew and Florence, is “no longer employed” with the North Carolina Department of Public Safety as director of recovery and resiliency for ReBuild NC, according to WRAL. 

    Chief communications officer Jody Donaldson announced Wednesday that Pryor Gibson, a lobbyist for Gov. Roy Cooper and former state representative, is now interim director of the North Carolina Office of Recovery and Resiliency.

    WRAL reported that Hogshead is no longer listed on the state’s website.

    Previously, her position was characterized on ReBuild NC’s website saying: “Hogshead oversees the expenditure of hurricane recovery funds from the U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development (HUD) for areas hit by hurricanes Matthew and Florence.”

    “Hogshead also oversees the expenditure of U.S. Department of Treasury Coronavirus Relief Fund and Emergency Rental Assistance allocations through the state’s pandemic-related emergency rental assistance program,” it continued. 

    Hogshead, long criticized for her leadership and the slow progress of ReBuild NC, faced tough questioning Monday from lawmakers during an Oversight Committee hearing. Gibson was also grilled over the office’s budgetary issues.

    ReBuild NC, established by Gov. Roy Cooper to aid low-income hurricane victims, managed nearly $800 million to rebuild homes after Hurricanes Matthew (2016) and Florence (2018) devastated the state.

    Despite years of criticism, Hogshead resisted calls to resign, asserting she was the best person for the role, even as Cooper acknowledged the program’s slow pace and called for improvement. Republican lawmakers criticized Cooper for not removing her.

    The program’s financial challenges have grown, with a reported $175 million shortfall for housing projects increasing to over $220 million. These funds are allocated to the Homeowner Recovery Program, which assists residents in repairing or rebuilding homes.

    State Sen. Danny Britt, R-Hoke, Robeson and Scotland counties commented: “Together in the House and Senate we have tried to hold [ReBuild NC’s] feet to the fire for their failures.”

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 11/24/2024 – 19:15

  • 30 Detroit Police Officers Pulled Off Street Due To Inactive Law Enforcement Licenses
    30 Detroit Police Officers Pulled Off Street Due To Inactive Law Enforcement Licenses

    This is what ‘defunding the police’ does…

    The Detroit Police Department has removed at least 30 officers from active duty after discovering they were operating without valid law enforcement licenses.

    The officers come from various divisions, including homicide, road patrol, and the special victims unit, which handles cases of child abuse, domestic violence, and sex crimes, according to WXYZ.

    Assistant Chief Charles Fitzgerald commented: “As of this morning, their guns and badges were taken from them. They’ll be on administrative duty until we get this cleared up, hopefully as soon as possible.”

    The Michigan Commission on Law Enforcement Standards said there were 32 officers without a license. 

    The ABC 7 WXYZ report said that the issue came to light two months ago when DPD found an officer without an active license, prompting an audit that initially uncovered three more cases and has since grown to 30.

    Fitzgerald added: “That is a big problem. We’re working through the list, we’re trying to figure out what’s needed, where we need to get the documentation necessary.”

    MCOLES said the officers “were hired between November 2019 and August of 2024. Initial indications suggest DPD did not request reactivation of these officer’s law enforcement licenses when they were hired or rehired. The investigation is ongoing and at this point involves at least 32 officers.”

    MCOLES Executive Director Tim Bourgeois added: “On a case-by-case basis the Commission will review the status of affected officer to determine if they are eligible for reactivation of their law enforcement licenses. The Commission collaborating with DPD to audit its entire roster and ensure all officers are actively licensed.”

    Commissioner Ricardo Moore commented: “It’s very shocking. I think that our personnel director needs to answer a couple questions to the board.”

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 11/24/2024 – 18:05

  • An Amazing Country (With Some Questions)
    An Amazing Country (With Some Questions)

    By Peter Tchir of Academy Securities

    An Amazing Country (With Some Questions)

    A 10-day road trip visiting clients in San Diego, Austin, San Antonio, Houston, Baltimore, (and of course New York and Connecticut), as well as numerous Zoom calls, was a great reminder that there are more similarities than differences across this amazing country! There was some palpable concern amongst some, and something resembling giddiness amongst others. There were some deviations depending on the location and the industry – but as a whole, what stood out, was that people were trying to figure out what is next and what to do about it. Those whose party or candidate didn’t win even expressed some optimism about how things could go. Those who did win also questioned some of the early moves. Very healthy dialogues and introspection. Maybe, just maybe, this is driven by the fact that media rhetoric has toned down significantly since the election? It is almost amazing how quickly things have ratcheted down since the election across much of mainstream media. I do think, and I’m biased, that financial media generally does a better job at this because their main goal is to help managers and investors understand the broader landscape.

    Admittedly, many of our conversations were focused on Geopolitical Risk (with members of Academy’s Geopolitical Intelligence Group), but even on that front there is reason for some optimism.

    If you missed our recent Podcast, this is a good time to listen, as we tackle a lot of issues in the Middle East and how we see a potential end to the conflict in Ukraine evolving.

    This report should, hopefully, act as a bookend to recent reports on Learning to Speak Trump and 3D Chess or 52-Card Pickup?

    The only issue is that since I spent so much time away from my data and charts (I do miss them), this report will be high-level and more of a guide for Thanksgiving conversations than markets. We will follow up early this week on that front, once I’ve managed to get fully caught up on these choppy markets.

    So today, we will quickly address some of the questions that came up regularly.

    Hitting the Ground Running

    While we discussed appointments in some detail last week, there is one clear theme so far:

    • In 2016 the President-Elect was slow to pick his posts and left many jobs vacant – which slowed things down. He is obviously trying to change that this time.
    • Many people who were left in place during Trump’s first term did not fully support his agenda and it is believed (probably accurately) that they slow-played things and tried to subvert his agenda from the inside – something that he is trying to change this time.

    Whether you agree with some, all, or very few of his picks, this is clearly what is motivating him.

    Tariffs

    Tariffs were a big part of any discussion. This could play out in many ways, but our base case remains the same:

    • A negotiating ploy to bring countries (namely China) to the table. Many seem very concerned by his statements (which, if taken on face value, are concerning), but if Trump states that this is merely to get China to the table, they lose their power.
      • He did put tariffs in place, so his threat carries weight.
      • The last time he imposed tariffs, there were weeks, if not months, of trade negotiations, so fully I expect that to occur again.
    • China is weak right now economically, and will likely have to bear some of the cost through reduced profits (or more subsidies) and a weaker currency. I expect a stronger dollar to offset much of any impact from tariffs that do get implemented.

    I’m not overly worried about tariffs. My hope is that well-targeted tariffs, along with well-targeted subsidies for U.S. corporations, could really jump start “reshoring.”

    The Chips Act, and how many strings were attached to it, and why so little money had actually been sent to corporations ahead of the election, came up repeatedly in meetings. Primarily, sadly, this is an example of good/important policy (building foundries) being diminished by adding too many bells and whistles, thereby diluting the initiative. It does seem like there is an increased effort to get the money out the door as this administration winds down.

    Why Not a Better Discussion on Mexico?

    Right now, Mexico seems likely to be hit with tariffs and immigration related issues. Most, including me, seem to be trying to figure out why we are not having more holistic conversations with Mexico.

    If we can get things “right” with Mexico – it could be a boon for both countries.

    • We need to stop the flow of fentanyl (and other drugs) and the potential risk of terrorists coming through. Much of which is being aided (if not directed) by the cartels.
    • Many Mexicans need better jobs and a way to thrive in Mexico outside of the cartels.
    • U.S. companies need to be able to set up businesses in Mexico, but are finding many constraints – including, though not limited to, the reach of the cartels.

    I think many would like to see a much bigger dialogue about how the U.S. and Mexico could tackle problems together – many of which stem from the influence of the cartels. So far that doesn’t seem to be on the agenda, which is frustrating to many, as it seems like an obvious avenue to help both countries with their current (and future) concerns.

    Immigration

    This might be the “trickiest” Trump topic right now.

    My view, which is simplistic, and with less basis than my view on tariffs (where we have a lot of color from several of our GIG members), is still my best estimate at the moment.

    • Expect “high profile wins” that have largely universal support. In this category I would highlight criminals, especially where criminal activity has allegedly taken over small areas. I do think that places like the Roosevelt Hotel in New York, meant to be temporary relocation centers, have morphed into something, that while well-intentioned, isn’t working. That could be another “win” (and it seems like Mayor Adams is moving in that direction as well).
    • Don’t expect a full-blown effort to remove every undocumented (often illegal) worker. As you move to a “local” level, many companies depend on these people and are likely to use their influence to limit what happens to these workers, who as a group, have been here long before the term “border crisis” was a regular talking point. While there are various humanitarian and even broader economic reasons not to do this, it might just come down to being too expensive.
    • While there are a variety of opinions on the subject, many of our GIG members think there is a high likelihood that Trump will mobilize the national guard on the border. It does fit with the theme of “easy” wins. It will not be a particularly dangerous assignment (there should be no U.S. reserve casualties) and it shows that “he is doing something” and it will create some powerful photo ops. Basically, it just enforces the rules on the books.

    If there is one area where I’m really concerned that I’m downplaying how aggressive the administration will be (which would impact our nation in many ways), this is it.

    Wars

    A push to end the war in Ukraine.

    • Trump will come up with a deal that he thinks makes sense. Then with a combination of carrots and sticks, for both sides, with Russia’s frozen dollar reserves as a big bargaining tool, he will make something happen.
      • We don’t talk much about this in the U.S., but there is increasing concern that Ukrainians who have left almost 3 years ago are already questioning the idea of returning as they have made new lives for themselves. That risk only increases the longer the war goes on.
      • Georgia – no response. Crimea – blink, but just barely blinked. Donbas – minor pushback. Yes, it would be awful to give Putin his “win”, but effectively we have been doing that with far less pushback for over a decade now.

    Permission to destabilize Iran.

    • Israel has been making progress in its efforts to reduce the fighting ability of Iran’s proxies. It has demonstrated that Iran itself is vulnerable to attack and possibility limited in its ability to respond.
    • Much of the Middle East views Iran as the problem, which may also encourage efforts to continue to push back militarily on Iran.
    • It is probably too much to wish for regime change in Iran, but maybe this is the opportunity to press and try?

    Africa

    Our stance on Africa is unclear. Actually, that is too generous. Russia and China are gaining influence in the region. We paid little attention to it (we didn’t even have ambassadors in some prominent nations). We are paying the price. Deaths are occurring in the region in numbers that dwarf anything going on anywhere else in the world, but this isn’t making it to our headlines.

    Not sure what to do here, but it is time that we all pay more attention.

    NIMBY and D.O.G.E.

    As a whole I think people are curious to see how “Not In My Backyard” plays out. We have a lot of rules and regulations that might get re-evaluated.

    • Since the collapse of the Soviet Union, we have had the luxury of being the sole superpower. We implemented a lot of rules and regulations that made sense in that context.
    • As China’s rise, both militarily and especially economically, alters the global landscape, it may be time to revisit some of those issues.
    • Chips and processed materials (rare earths and critical minerals) all need to be part of what we re-evaluate to make sure we are not fighting with one arm tied behind our backs.

    Everyone is curious to see how this Department of Government Efficiency plays out! One thing being floated is offering large severances, which I think (and this ties back to my use of the QUIT rate last week) leads to a very negative self-selection process, and isn’t particularly efficient.

    Crypto

    Everyone who loved crypto and helped pump it higher continues to love it and pump it higher.

    No one who didn’t love crypto has changed their view and they think that it is something the U.S. government shouldn’t be buying (it doesn’t mean they haven’t bought crypto to ride this move, but their view on the use of crypto hasn’t changed).

    Bottom Line

    No shortage of things to talk about as you prepare for Thanksgiving, but I have the overwhelming sense that this is being done in a constructive way.

    And, so we can end on the lightest note possible (I think it is a light note), you can always bet the over/under on how long Trump and Musk can remain besties!

    Have a great holiday week and nothing on my market view has really changed (be underweight risk, overweight duration, but only modestly) and try to trade positions around until a real clear trend emerges.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 11/24/2024 – 17:30

  • Major Cold Blast To Hit Helene-Ravaged NC With Families Living In Tents & Cars Amid FEMA Blunder
    Major Cold Blast To Hit Helene-Ravaged NC With Families Living In Tents & Cars Amid FEMA Blunder

    Nearly two months after Hurricane Helene devastated Western North Carolina, the controversies surrounding FEMA’s botched response could have been avoided if the federal agency had apolitical managers overseeing operations and had not diverted funds for illegal aliens. With winter looming over the Appalachian region, at least a thousand people—some of them children—are still living in temporary housing, such as tents.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    “Attention Joe Biden or whoever is running this country  its 24/7 all hands on deck this week for  Helene ravaged areas to make sure people are sheltered properly for the coming cold.  The blundering so far has been inexcusable, You have a chance to finish strong here,” Meteorologist Joe Bastardi wrote on X. 

    Bastardi’s weather models forecast that a cold blast will descend into the region next week. 

    The incoming cold weather coincides with a report from local media outlet WLOS stating that “hundreds of local families are left with nowhere to go” in Western North Carolina, adding, “Now some of these children are living in tents and cars…”

    Bloomberg data shows temps across Asheville are expected to crash to sub-freezing levels through the end of the month into early December. 

    This is shocking, as WLOS provides new figures: 

    The Buncombe County Family Resource Center tells News 13 that they’ve identified 878 new homeless students since the storm. That is in addition to the 274 students identified in Buncombe County as homeless before Helene. It totals 1,152 kids without permanent homes, some living in tents, cars and campers.

    Scenes on the ground show “tent cities” in Swannanoa, North Carolina…

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Whole families live in tents with children. These people need help. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    “Do you realize that it’s gonna be below freezing in Asheville, North Carolina tonight? And in some parts of North Carolina it’s already below freezing. Do you realize how many people are living in tents? . @fema workers (who aren’t doing anything) are hanging out in heated trailers. While at the same time, we’re housing illegal immigrants in luxury hotels,” one X user said. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Meanwhile, the controversies at FEMA are piling up for the American people to see:

    FEMA ran out of money promoting “equity.” 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Pushing free money to illegal aliens for luxury hotels and food.

    Yet residents of storm-ravaged North Carolina received?? 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    What a shitshow. And now a humanitarian crisis as winter approaches.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 11/24/2024 – 16:55

  • Loony Joy Reid Urges Viewers To Avoid Trump-Voting-Relatives Who Might "Turn You In"
    Loony Joy Reid Urges Viewers To Avoid Trump-Voting-Relatives Who Might “Turn You In”

    Authored by Steve Watson via Modernity.news,

    Crazed MSNBC hack Joy Reid has again suggested that her viewers should avoid their own family members if they voted for president Trump.

    In a demented rant, Reid suggested that leftists shun their relatives at Thanksgiving, and that they be afraid because they might get “turned in” to the MAGA authorities… or something.

    “People are rightfully alarmed. They have a reason to be alarmed,” Reid rambled in the video posted to social media. 

    She continued, “And if you would vote for that, people may not feel so confident that they’re safe with you.”

    “This is not crazy,” she said, sounding crazy.

    “This is legitimate feelings of fear of you and a feeling that you might not be someone they could trust,” Reid added.

    “If this thing goes way south, autocracies go south real fast, and things get ugly, and people get asked to do things, and turn people in, and point people out, and turn on them,” she further garbled.

    “Autocracy and fascism are things that are legitimate to be afraid of. So you may want to step back,” Reid proclaimed.

    Imagine being this paranoid, thinking that everything you don’t agree with is fascism.

    Imagine permanently believing you’re going to be rounded up and thrown into a camp by imaginary MAGA jackboots.

    It’s completely mental.

    Reid also made similar remarks on her show last week while interviewing Dr. Amanda Calhoun, a third-year Psychiatry Resident at Yale School of Medicine who suggested that people avoid their own family members following Trump’s victory.

    When Reid is inevitably fired, whether Elon Musk decides to become her boss or not, this is all you’ll see of her. Deranged selfie rant videos filmed on her iPhone from her living room.

    Something to look forward to.

    * * *

    Your support is crucial in helping us defeat mass censorship. Please consider donating via Locals or check out our unique merch. Follow us on X @ModernityNews.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 11/24/2024 – 16:20

  • Matt Taibbi: America's Loss Of Trust In Media Can't Be Fixed
    Matt Taibbi: America’s Loss Of Trust In Media Can’t Be Fixed

    Submitted by QTR’s Fringe Finance

    This weekend I had the great pleasure of interviewing my friend Matt Taibbi.

    Taibbi is the head of Racket News and his reputation as a fearless investigative journalist precedes him. From his groundbreaking coverage of the 2008 financial crisis to his more recent explorations of censorship with the Twitter Files, politics, systemic inequality and the inner workings of Congress, Taibbi’s body of work reflects a deep commitment to uncovering truths and challenging conventional narratives.

    In our interview this weekend, we discussed:

    • The shift in media landscape toward independent journalism.

    • The results of the 2024 Presidential Election

    • The evolving and extreme rhetoric in political media coverage.

    • Legal and ethical challenges mainstream media faces with libel and reporting accuracy.

    • Trust erosion in mainstream media and its implications.

    • Misrepresentation and consequences of media bias in election reporting.

    • The impact of identity politics on voter demographics and electoral outcomes.

    • Concerns over institutional accountability in censorship and government actions.

    • The missing $1 trillion at the Pentagon every year

    • Escalation in the Russia/Ukraine war before President Biden leaves office

    The Rise of Independent Media

    Taibbi began by reflecting on his fondness for platforms like Substack, which have provided a haven for writers marginalized by corporate media. “We need a space for independent writers,” he said. “This company has been good about protecting free speech, and it’s shown that it can work financially for certain kinds of figures.”

    As the conversation delved deeper, Taibbi underscored the urgency of creating viable alternatives to legacy media. “The media landscape has shifted dramatically,” he observed, pointing to Hugh Hewitt’s recent move to Substack as part of a larger trend. “It’s an accelerating shift towards independent and alternative media,” he noted, emphasizing how disillusionment with mainstream outlets has driven audiences elsewhere.

    Mainstream Media’s Trust Deficit

    A recurring theme was the erosion of trust in mainstream outlets. Taibbi lambasted their sensationalism, particularly during the Trump and Russiagate years. “They got out of the habit of careful reporting,” he remarked. “For years, they were saying things without fear of blowback. But now, it’s coming home to roost.”

    He cited the infamous case of The View issuing a legal disclaimer mid-broadcast as an example of recklessness creeping into established media. “For the first time in years, they realized they actually have to follow libel law on television.”

    Asked about media’s relentless hyperbole, Taibbi quipped, “We went from ‘his policies are bad’ to ‘he’s literally Hitler’ in about 18 months. And they’re still doing it.” He described this phenomenon as part of a broader “moral panic,” comparing it to the media frenzy around COVID-19.

    Censorship and the Battle for Free Speech

    The conversation shifted to censorship, a topic Taibbi has explored extensively through his reporting on the Twitter Files and government overreach. He described witnessing a chilling lack of accountability in bureaucratic institutions. “When Tulsi Gabbard’s story broke about her being on a surveillance list, it gave people a sense of hopelessness,” he said. “That she remained on the list even after the story broke shows there’s no institutional fear of blowback.”

    Taibbi expressed cautious optimism about the recent political shift. “With the FCC chair tweeting about addressing censorship, it feels like we’re getting back to the basics—like the First Amendment,” he noted. However, he also warned, “Time will tell if this is an illusory perception.”

    The New Media Ecosystem

    The rise of independent voices like Joe Rogan, who commands an audience exponentially larger than traditional news outlets, exemplifies the power of intellectual honesty, according to Taibbi. “It’s not about getting everything right,” he said. “It’s about admitting when you’re wrong and being willing to hear all sides of a story.”

    He critiqued the selective coverage of mainstream outlets. “Traditional media only talks to people who fit their standards of suitability,” he said. “Rogan will talk to anyone—from the far left to the far right—and audiences respect that humility.”

    The Future of Journalism

    As the interview concluded, Taibbi pondered whether mainstream media could regain public trust. “Trust is a human thing. It’s not something you can fix with money or algorithms,” he said. “People forgive mistakes, but only if you own them. When you don’t, you lose double.”

    Reflecting on the state of American democracy, he added, “This election was a massive repudiation of the media. The public rejected their narrative—and that’s not something they can ignore forever.”

    In an era defined by skepticism and fragmentation, Taibbi’s insights served as both a critique and a roadmap for the future of journalism. His call to action was clear: a return to integrity, accountability, and, above all, trust.

    Russia Ukraine Escalation

    Taibbi offered sharp observations on the escalating tensions between Russia and Ukraine, emphasizing the media’s role and the complexities of international relations. One notable quote captures his critique of U.S. media: “We’ve seen a constant escalation in the rhetoric, where every misstep or diplomatic hiccup gets amplified into a catastrophic headline.” He suggests that the media environment exacerbates global tensions by prioritizing sensationalism over nuanced understanding.

    Taibbi also underscores the importance of considering historical and cultural contexts when discussing Russia’s actions, stating, “You can’t look at Putin’s moves in isolation; they’re part of a broader strategy tied to historic grievances and a long-standing opposition to NATO expansion.” This reflects his broader critique of Western policies, where he sees a failure to account for the geopolitical ramifications of military alliances and interventions.

    Finally, he criticizes the lack of open dialogue in global politics, stating, “The refusal to engage in direct talks or acknowledge valid security concerns only fuels the fire.” For Taibbi, this highlights a critical gap in how conflicts like this are approached, with too much focus on confrontation and too little on diplomacy.

    Watch The Interview

    The full 1hr 30 min video interview with Matt can be found here. 

    QTR’s Disclaimer: Please read my full legal disclaimer on my About page here. This post represents my opinions only. In addition, please understand I am an idiot and often get things wrong and lose money. I may own or transact in any names mentioned in this piece at any time without warning. Contributor posts and aggregated posts have been hand selected by me, have not been fact checked and are the opinions of their authors. They are either submitted to QTR by their author, reprinted under a Creative Commons license with my best effort to uphold what the license asks, or with the permission of the author.

    This is not a recommendation to buy or sell any stocks or securities, just my opinions. I often lose money on positions I trade/invest in. I may add any name mentioned in this article and sell any name mentioned in this piece at any time, without further warning. None of this is a solicitation to buy or sell securities. I may or may not own names I write about and are watching. Sometimes I’m bullish without owning things, sometimes I’m bearish and do own things. Just assume my positions could be exactly the opposite of what you think they are just in case. If I’m long I could quickly be short and vice versa. I won’t update my positions. All positions can change immediately as soon as I publish this, with or without notice and at any point I can be long, short or neutral on any position. You are on your own. Do not make decisions based on my blog. I exist on the fringe. The publisher does not guarantee the accuracy or completeness of the information provided in this page. These are not the opinions of any of my employers, partners, or associates. I did my best to be honest about my disclosures but can’t guarantee I am right; I write these posts after a couple beers sometimes. I edit after my posts are published because I’m impatient and lazy, so if you see a typo, check back in a half hour. Also, I just straight up get shit wrong a lot. I mention it twice because it’s that important.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 11/24/2024 – 15:10

  • Locations Of US & Russian Warships As World War III Threats Soar
    Locations Of US & Russian Warships As World War III Threats Soar

    Last week’s “major shift” in policy, which allowed the Biden-Harris team to green-light Ukraine’s attacks deep within Russian territory using US-made ATACMS and British-made Storm Shadow missiles, has forced Russia to lower its threshold for using nuclear weapons against Ukraine while also launching new hypersonic weapons.

    On Thursday, President Vladimir Putin issued a stern warning that Ukraine launching long-range missile strikes on Russia’s territory utilizing newly approved US and UK long-range missiles risks transforming the modern battlefield in Ukraine into a global war. 

    “A regional Ukraine conflict instigated by the West has acquired elements of a global one,” Putin spelled out and noted that these missiles cannot be used without the direct operational involvement of Western military specialists.

    No one genuinely anticipated that the outgoing Biden-Harris regime would escalate the war in Ukraine with Putin to the brink of a major broadening conflict. This suggests that the Biden-Harris team and the Military-Industrial Complex seek to broaden conflict before Trump takes office in late January.

    Days ago, Ukraine’s former military Commander-in-Chief Valery Zaluzhny was quoted by Politico as saying: “I believe that in 2024 we can absolutely believe that the Third World War has begun.”

    “Because in 2024, Ukraine is no longer facing Russia. Soldiers from North Korea are standing in front of Ukraine. Let’s be honest. Already in Ukraine, the Iranian ‘Shahedis’ are killing civilians absolutely openly, without any shame,” Zaluzhny continued, adding that North Korean and Chinese weapons are flying on the modern battlefield in Ukraine. 

    With the elevated risk of the war broadening, this new round of tension in Eastern Europe draws attention to the approximate positions of US Navy and Russian Navy assets worldwide.

    As of November 18, the US Naval Institute showed the approximate positions of the US Navy’s deployed carrier strike groups and amphibious ready groups throughout the world…

    Here’s more color on US naval asset positions worldwide:

    Ships Underway

    In Japan

    Amphibious warship USS America (LHA-6) is in port in Sasebo, Japan.

    In the Pacific

    Amphibious warship USS Boxer (LHD-4) departed Pearl Harbor, Hawaii, on Friday, according to ship spotters.

    Boxer has elements of the 15th Marine Expeditionary Unit embarked.

    Aircraft carrier USS George Washington (CVN-73) continues on its way to its new homeport of Yokosuka, Japan, as the Navy’s forward-deployed carrier assigned to US 7th Fleet.

    In Eastern Atlantic

    Aircraft carrier USS Harry S. Truman (CVN-75) is transiting en route to the Mediterranean after completing operations with allies and partners in the Norwegian Sea.

    Carrier Strike Group 8

    USS Harry S. Truman (CVN-75), homeported at Naval Station Norfolk, Va.

    Carrier Air Wing 1

    • The “Red Rippers” of Strike Fighter Squadron (VFA) 11 – F/A-18F – from Naval Air Station Oceana, Va.

    • The “Pukin’ Dogs” of VFA 143 – F/A-18E – from Naval Air Station Oceana.

    • The “Sunliners” of VFA 81 – F/A-18E – from Naval Air Station Oceana.

    • The “Knighthawks” of VFA 136 – F/A-18E – from Naval Air Station Oceana.

    • The “Main Battery” of Electronic Attack Squadron (VAQ) 144 – EA-18G – from Naval Air Station Whidbey Island, Wash.

    • The “Seahawks” of Airborne Command and Control Squadron (VAW) 126 – E-2D – from Naval Station Norfolk, Va.

    • The “Rawhides” of Fleet Logistics Squadron (VRC) 40 Det. – C-2A – from Naval Station Norfolk.

    • The “Proud Warriors” of Helicopter Maritime Strike Squadron (HSM) 72 – MH-60R – from Naval Station Norfolk.

    • The “Dragonslayers” of Helicopter Sea Combat Squadron (HSC) 11 – MH-60S – from Naval Air Station Jacksonville, Fla.

    Cruiser

    USS Gettysburg (CG-64), homeported at Naval Station Norfolk, Va.

    Destroyer Squadron 28

    Destroyer Squadron 28 is based in Naval Station Norfolk, Va., and is embarked on Harry S. Truman.

    • USS Stout (DDG-55), homeported at Naval Station Norfolk.

    The Wasp Amphibious Ready Group with the 24th Marine Expeditionary Unit embarked deployed from the East Coast on June 1. The ARG consists of Wasp, USS New York (LPD-21) and USS Oak Hill (LSD-51).

    The 24th MEU is composed of a command element, Battalion Landing Team 1/8, Marine Medium Tiltrotor Squadron 365 (Reinforced) and Combat Logistics Battalion 24 as the Logistics Combat Element.

    In the Eastern Mediterranean

    The Navy has two independently deployed guided-missile destroyers to the Eastern Mediterranean.

    • USS Bulkeley (DDG-84), homeported at Naval Station Rota, Spain. The destroyer is in port in Souda Bay, Greece

    • USS Arleigh Burke (DDG-51), homeported at Naval Station Rota.

    In the Red Sea

    Navy Quartermaster folds the national ensign aboard the Arleigh Burke-class guided-missile destroyer USS Cole (DDG-67) in the Central Command area of responsibility on November 13, 2024. US Navy Photo

    US ships continue to patrol the Red Sea as part of Operation Prosperity Guardian, the U.S.-led multinational effort to protect merchant vessels moving through the region. Houthi forces in Yemen continue to attack merchant shipping in the Red Sea and the Gulf of Aden, while US naval forces in the region have continued strikes against Houthi weapons that US Central Command says are a threat to naval and merchant ships. Houthi forces say they are targeting ships with connections to the United Kingdom, the US and Israel or visit Israeli ports.

    Guided-missile submarine USS Georgia (SSGN-729) is operating in the Middle East. The Ohio-class submarine carries 154 Tomahawk Land Attack Missiles as well as special operations forces.

    As of Monday, the Navy has two independently deployed guided-missile destroyers in the Red Sea.

    • USS Cole (DDG-67), homeported at Naval Station Norfolk, Va.
    • USS Jason Dunham (DDG-109), homeported at Naval Station Mayport, Fla.

    In the Persian Gulf

    US Coast Guard Sentinel-class Fast Response Cutters are forward-deployed to the region under Patrol Forces Southwest Asia (PATFORSWA). PATFORSWA deploys Coast Guard personnel and ships with US and regional naval forces throughout the Middle East. Initially deployed in 2003 to support Operation Iraqi Freedom, PATFORSWA is now a permanent presence based out of the Kingdom of Bahrain.

    In the Indian Ocean

    The Abraham Lincoln Carrier Strike Group is operating in the Indian Ocean. Defense Secretary Lloyd Austin ordered Abraham Lincoln and its attached destroyers to remain in the region as regional conflict intensified, according to a Pentagon statement.

    Carrier Strike Group 3

    Carrier

    USS Abraham Lincoln (CVN-72), homeported at San Diego, Calif.

    Carrier Air Wing 9

    • The “Tophatters” of Strike Fighter Squadron (VFA) 14 – F/A-18E – from Naval Air Station Lemoore, Calif.

    • The “Black Aces” of VFA 41 – F/A-18F – from Naval Air Station Lemoore.

    • The “Black Knights” of Marine Fighter Attack Squadron (VMFA) 314 – F-35C – from Marine Corps Air Station Miramar, Calif.

    • The “Vigilantes” of VFA 151 – F/A-18E – from Naval Air Station Lemoore.

    • The “Wizards” of Electronic Attack Squadron (VAQ) 133 – EA-18G – from Naval Air Station Whidbey Island, Wash.

    • The “Wallbangers” of Airborne Command and Control Squadron (VAW) 117 – E-2D – from Naval Air Station Point Mugu, Calif.

    • The “Rawhides” of Fleet Logistics Squadron (VRC) 40 Det. – C-2A – from Naval Station Norfolk.

    • The “Raptors” of Helicopter Maritime Strike Squadron (HSM) 71 – MH-60R – from Naval Air Station North Island, Calif.

    • The “Chargers” of Helicopter Sea Combat Squadron (HSC) 14 – MH-60S – from Naval Air Station North Island.

    Cruiser

    The carrier strike group did not deploy with a Ticonderoga-class guided-missile cruiser. Instead, USS Frank E. Petersen, Jr. (DDG-121) assumed the cruiser role in the strike group, USNI News learned. USS Michael Murphy (DDG-112) is currently operating with the strike group but is an independent deployer.

    Destroyer Squadron 21

    Destroyer Squadron 21 is based in San Diego and is embarked on Abraham Lincoln.

    • USS O’Kane (DDG-77), homeported at Naval Station San Diego, Calif.

    • USS Michael Murphy (DDG-112), homeported at Naval Station Pearl Harbor, Hawaii.

    • USS Frank E. Petersen, Jr. (DDG-121), homeported at Naval Station Pearl Harbor.

    • USS Spruance (DDG-111), homeported at Naval Station San Diego.

    • USS Stockdale (DDG-106), homeported at Naval Station San Diego.

    In Eastern Pacific

    On Monday afternoon, USS Carl Vinson (CVN-70), with the Carrier Air Wing 2 embarked, departed for a deployment from California.

    Aircraft carrier USS Nimitz (CVN-68) departed to San Diego, Calif., on Monday, according to ship spotters.

    Amphibious assault ship USS Tripoli (LHA-7) departed San Diego, Calif., on Tuesday, according to ship spot

    Aircraft carrier USS Ronald Reagan (CVN-76) arrived in Bremerton, Wash., on Tuesday, according to ship spotters.

    In the Western Atlantic

    Aircraft carrier USS Gerald R. Ford (CVN-78) is underway conducting routine operations in the Western Atlantic.

    Amphibious warship USS Iwo Jima (LHD-7) returned to Norfolk, Va., on Friday, according to ship spotters.

    Aircraft carrier USS George H.W. Bush (CVN-77) returned to Norfolk, Va., on Saturday, according to ship spotters.

    As for Russian naval assets, OSINT researcher Frederik Van Lokeren shared a map on X on Saturday. It highlights the locations of Russian warships across the Mediterranean (as of November 23). 

    “A period of heightened activity has ended with the vessels all present in the port of Tartus. The exception being Stereguschy class corvette Merkury which was reported in the Skagerrak between Denmark an Norway. The vessel most likely departed the Mediterranean directly following her port visit at Algiers, Algeria, during the previous week. Her passage at the Strait of Gibraltar went unnoticed by OSINT sources,” he wrote on his website “Russian Navy – News and Analysis.”

    President-elect Trump’s victory signals one critical mandate the American people have with Washington elites is no more wars. Yet, the outgoing administration is doing everything possible to derail Trump’s move once in the White House to end the war.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 11/24/2024 – 14:35

  • Gov. Abbott Targets CCP Infiltration In Texas
    Gov. Abbott Targets CCP Infiltration In Texas

    Authored by Frank Fang via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    Texas Gov. Greg Abbott has issued two more executive orders targeting Chinese Communist Party (CCP) influence in his state, after announcing an initial order on Nov. 18 aimed at protecting local dissidents from the Chinese regime’s harassment.

    Texas Gov. Greg Abbott speaks during a National Rifle Association event at the Kay Bailey Hutchison Convention Center in Dallas on May 18, 2024. Madalina Vasiliu/The Epoch Times

    Abbott signed Executive Order No. GA-49 on Nov. 20 to safeguard critical infrastructure from cyberattacks and issued Executive Order No. GA-48 on Nov. 19 to protect Texans from the CCP’s espionage operations.

    Executive Order No. GA-49 directs the Texas Division of Emergency Management and the Public Utility Commission of Texas to prepare for any potential cyberattacks aimed at the state’s critical infrastructure.

    Under Abbott’s order, the two agencies will create a task force to study potential vulnerabilities within government systems and critical infrastructure, run response simulations to cyberattacks, and put together a committee of state agencies to “simulate a restart of Texas’ electric grid in the event of a foreign attack,” according to a Wednesday statement.

    “China has made it clear that they can—and will—target and attack America’s critical infrastructure,” Abbott said in the statement. “Texas will continue to protect our critical infrastructure to ensure the safety of Texans from potential threats by the Chinese Communist Party or any hostile foreign government.”

    The order highlighted Volt Typhoon, one of China’s state-sponsored threat groups, and how it had targeted communications, energy, transportation, water, and wastewater systems in the United States and its territories.

    Volt Typhoon, which was dismantled by a multi-agency operation in January, had maintained “access and footholds within some victim IT environments for at least five years,” the Cybersecurity and Infrastructure Security Agency said in February.

    The order also cited FBI Director Christopher Wray’s warnings at the Vanderbilt Summit in Nashville in April, when he said that China “has made it clear that it considers every sector that makes our society run as fair game in its bid to dominate on the world stage.”

    ‘Hostile Foreign Actors’

    Executive Order No. GA-48 directs all state agencies and public institutions of higher education to “harden” their systems from potential infiltration by hostile nations, including more thorough background checks on state employees and contractors who can access critical infrastructure.

    Additionally, state agencies will be banned from contracting “companies owned or controlled by a foreign adversary government, and bidding companies must prove that “none of its holding companies or subsidiaries is owned by a foreign adversary government,” according to a Tuesday statement.

    Faculty members of higher education institutions are banned from taking part in “any foreign recruitment program by a foreign adversary nation,” such as China’s Thousand Talents Program, according to the statement.

    The Thousand Talents Program is one of many talent recruitment initiatives the Chinese regime has maintained for decades to attract overseas Chinese and foreign experts to work in China’s science and tech sectors. Through these programs, the CCP hopes to quickly turn China into an industrial and innovation powerhouse and ultimately outperform Western countries.

    The FBI warns on its website that Chinese talent programs pose threats to U.S. national security and usually involve “undisclosed and illegal transfers” of U.S. intellectual property to the Chinese side.

    “The Federal Bureau of Investigation reported that the Chinese government has actively targeted local and state officials as part of their strategy to undermine the national security of the United States,” Abbott said in a statement.

    “Hardening our state government is critical to protect Texans from hostile foreign actors who may attempt to undermine the safety and security of Texas and the nation.”

    As an example of the CCP’s infiltration, Abbott’s order pointed to the recent indictment against Linda Sun, former deputy chief of staff to New York Gov. Kathy Hochul. Sun was charged with spying for Beijing.

    Another name mentioned in the order is Christine Fang, a suspected Chinese intelligence agent who Abbott’s office said “developed deep connections” with California’s political figures and national politicians.

    ‘Texas Is Leading the Charge’

    On Monday, when Abbott announced Executive Order No. GA-47, the FBI’s field office in Houston took to the social media platform X to urge victims to come forward.

    “The government of the [People’s] Republic of China (PRC) may be cyberstalking, physically intimidating, and harassing Chinese citizens, naturalized U.S. citizens, and families of dissidents who speak [out] against the Chinese Communist Party in Texas,” the office wrote.

    Under Abbott’s order, the Texas Department of Public Safety will target and arrest any individual found to be engaging in CCP influence operations within the state.

    Washington-based advocacy group Campaign for Uyghurs took to X on Monday to applaud the governor’s decision, saying that CCP continues to carry out its “nefarious practice” of transnational repression in Texas.

    An example of Beijing’s transnational repression came to light in April last year, when two Chinese nationals were charged with allegedly establishing a secret police station in Manhattan in coordination with China’s Ministry of Public Security.

    Rep. Michael McCaul (R-Texas), chairman of the House Foreign Affairs Committee, issued a statement on Wednesday applauding Abbott’s leadership.

    “Texas is leading the charge in combating the CCP with the help of Governor Abbott’s leadership,” McCaul stated. “We cannot sit idly by while China attempts to infiltrate our country and harm U.S. national security.

    “These executive orders send a strong message of deterrence to the CCP: Don’t mess with Texas.”

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 11/24/2024 – 14:00

  • Bombshell Fauci Documentary Nails The Whole COVID Charade
    Bombshell Fauci Documentary Nails The Whole COVID Charade

    With the changing of the guard, it’s time for long-promised accountability over the unprecedented COVID scam. Not only has Sen. Rand Paul (R-KY) promised to hold feet to the fire as the head of the Senate’s government oversight panel, we may actually have a shot at a special counsel investigation and more with Trump’s incoming Attorney General pick, Pam Bondi – a loyalist who’s on record supporting the lab-leak hypothesis.

    As regular readers vividly recall, ZeroHedge paid a hefty price for our early reporting on the pandemic, after we suggested that a Chinese lab playing weaponized God with bat COVID might have “something to do” with the COVID outbreak across town.

    Millions in ad revenue evaporated. Corporate media (brought to you by Pfizer!) penned numerous hit-pieces, and various companies such as PayPal, Amazon and Mailchimp dropped us like a hot rock; other outlets suffered similarly. However brave reporting from journalists like Matt Taibbi, Michael Shellenberger, Paul Thacker and Lee Fang – armed with factual evidence from Elon Musk’s purchase of Twitter (now X) and various FOIA lawsuits, has provided more than just breadcrumbs.

    Now, four years later, the entire charade has been exposed piece by piece.

    A new must-watch documentary by two-time Peabody Award-winning and four-time Emmy nominated director Jenner Furst, a self-described progressive who has broken with the Democratic party, ties it all together.

    Thank You, Dr. Fauci

    In early 2020, Furst was contacted to direct a puff piece on former National Institute of Allergy and Infectious Diseases (NIAID) director Dr. Anthony Fauci. The project was scrapped, however three years later, Furst began investigating what actually happened and created “Thank You, Dr. Fauci” – a project which has received virtually no press coverage, and even Rotten Tomatoes critics won’t touch.

    If you’re thinking ‘you had me at Fauci’ and just want to watch it, a free preview of “Thank You, Dr. Fauci”  is available, and the film can be rented directly on the film’s website, or by using Vimeo On-Demand or Gathr. People can also use Gathr to Book Private Screenings and Partner on TVOD Sales.

    If you’re like Elon Musk and you believe that  ‘Prosecute / Fauci’ should be your pronouns, this is what you need to watch to understand why we should prosecute Fauci.

    Heavily Censored

    While it’s difficult enough to find “Thank You, Dr. Fauci” thanks to search engine shadowbans and downrankings, perhaps the most notable form of censorship is the ongoing media blackout of the film according to Furst – whose previous work has been heavily reviewed, critically acclaimed, and streamed across Netflix, Amazon, Hulu, and Paramount.

    But not this one.

    “The media blackout of the film just proves that the real Covid story is still highly censored,” Furst told ZeroHedge, adding “Journalists still can’t cover Covid truthfully at major outlets, and the problem is way bigger than them or their editors. The most powerful lobbies on the planet, and the weight of the US government is still sitting on the free press like an 800 pound gorilla.”

    Elon to the rescue?

    Given the level of censorship the film has been subject to, Furst firmly believes that a massive free speech platform such X would be ideal to get the word out – if even for a couple of days.

    “I feel like Elon could change this conversation overnight, the country is divided only due to the success of propaganda on the left. No democrat can sit thru this movie and see Fauci or the pandemic the same way again. That’s why MSM doesn’t want to acknowledge this,” Furst told ZeroHedge.

    The documentary features notable figures at the heart of the pandemic response, including Dr. Robert Redfield – the former director of the CDC during the outbreak – who was completely shut out of Anthony Fauci’s inner circle while the NIAID boss and top virologists conspired via secret back channels to shape the narrative around COVID origins. Also featured are former State Department COVID investigator David Asher, and Richard Ebright – a Rutgers molecular biologist who’s spent years pushing back against the Fauci wagon-circling by the scientific community.

    COVID Origins

    As the pandemic gripped headlines around the world, the scientific community positioned Fauci – and eventually the Covid vaccines themselves – against Donald Trump, who was open to both the lab-leak theory and alternative treatments such as ivermectin and hydroxychloroquine.

    ‘Thank You, Dr. Fauci’ details the scramble at the highest levels to come up with a narrative that wouldn’t implicate Fauci – or the US Government, for funding decades of research dedicated to enhancing deadly viruses.

    Fauci’s top advisors – who initially believed the virus looked manmade, crafted and promoted the narrative that COVID-19 most likely jumped from bats to humans through an intermediary species, “probably at a wet market,” Fauci repeatedly insisted.

    The lab-leak theory was condemned as a conspiracy theory by the very scientists conducting gain-of-function research, completely ignoring the fact that the virus emerged across town from an NIH-funded facility in Wuhan, China that was creating chimeric bat COVID, where several workers fell ill with a mysterious respiratory virus weeks before the disease spread like wildfire.

    HIV Insertions and DEFUSE

    ‘Thank You Dr. Fauci’ highlights a preprint study from India which found HIV-like insertions in COVID-19 which appeared manmade (and which got ZeroHedge kicked off of Twitter after Fauci’s damage control ‘conclave’ freaked out).

    While the Indian preprint was retracted amid immense political pressure to push the ‘natural origin’ hypothesis and ‘conspiricize’ the lab-leak theory, a leaked proposal known as “DEFUSE” – to create an aerosolized chimeric bat COVID that could infect humans, could potentially explain what the Indian researchers observed.

    While DEFUSE was ultimately rejected by DARPA, it’s entirely possible that Ecohealth Alliance – the nonprofit which received NIH contracts to conduct GoF research after the Obama admin banned it in 2014 – simply went ahead with it anyway.

    Critical Questions

    ‘Thank You, Dr. Fauci’ raises many critical questions that will come into focus next year under the gavel of Rand Paul:

    • Was the pandemic that killed millions and cost trillions of dollars the consequence of scientific arrogance and spy games?
    • How did the Anthrax hoax of 2001 create unchecked power for Anthony Fauci?
    • Why hasn’t Fauci ever acknowledged that hoax, which resulted in then-Vice President  Dick Cheney giving him billions to fund perhaps the most dangerous research on the planet?
    • What is the real purpose of Gain-of-Function research?
    • Are past outbreaks potentially scientific accidents which were covered up?
    • What is Long Covid, and why are people suffering vaccine injuries with similar symptoms?
    • Will a lab-generated Bird Flu be the next chapter?
    • Are nameless scientists – in the US, China or elsewhere – quietly working on a new global pandemic?

    Meanwhile, the intelligence community continues to cover up the origins of the pandemic, which is why widespread distribution of this work is that much more important.

    Putting it all together, ​once the general public comes to understan that Covid was likely the product of US research offshored to a French-built lab in Wuhan, China, which resulted in millions of deaths and trillions in debt, not to mention runaway inflation which has crushed incumbent political powers around the globe, the charade will finally be over and the era of accountability must begin.

    Again, watch ‘Thank You Dr. Fauci’ here…

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 11/24/2024 – 13:25

  • How Crypto Won The 2024 Election
    How Crypto Won The 2024 Election

    Authored by Austin Alonzo via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    Although President-elect Donald Trump and the Republican Party swept the 2024 general election, the cryptocurrency industry feels it is the real winner.

    Illustration by The Epoch Times, Getty Images, Freepik

    Powered by donations from some of the biggest figures in cryptocurrency and venture capital, three political action committees poured more than $100 million into efforts to influence the 2024 election.

    “This election was a huge win for crypto,” co-founder and CEO of Coinbase Global Inc. Brian Armstrong wrote on Nov. 7 in an article on X.

    Coinbase, a cryptocurrency exchange founded in 2012, donated about $55 million to the super PAC Fairshake, according to Federal Election Commission records. Armstrong personally donated $1 million.

    As Armstrong wrote, the industry had much to celebrate in early November. It saw its preferred candidates take the White House and win key seats in both houses of Congress. He declared that the 119th Congress will be the “most pro-crypto Congress ever.”

    In his message, Coinbase’s leader wrote something that is usually implied but rarely said in the world of political spending, too.

    “[Washington] received a clear message that being anti-crypto is a good way to end your career,” Armstrong said.

    10 Cents to $89,000

    Twenty years ago, few people had heard of cryptocurrency—a term used to refer to decentralized digital currencies as opposed to central bank digital currencies (CBDCs) that are controlled and backed by a government or central bank. One week after the Nov. 5 election, a Bitcoin was trading for more than $89,000. Gold, by comparison, traded for about $2,600 an ounce on the same day.

    Between 2007 and 2009, a person or group known as Satoshi Nakamoto conceived of and launched Bitcoin. It was a new type of digital money secured via encryption technology. Unlike traditional currency, Bitcoin can transfer value online without a bank or a payment processor. It is not backed by any government, central bank fiat currency, or physical asset.

    Bitcoin began as an obscure novelty worth less than 10 cents per token. However, its price has exploded in the last decade, creating significant public interest in the digital asset. According to the crypto website Coinranking, as of Nov. 13, Bitcoin’s market capitalization was about $1.83 trillion.

    Nevertheless, public opinion polling shows that a majority of Americans are not confident in cryptocurrency as an investment. A Pew Research Center study published in October found that just 5 percent of the people it surveyed in February said they were “very” or “extremely” confident in the reliability and safety of cryptocurrency.

    A Bitcoin chart is displayed on a laptop screen in Austin, Texas, on Nov. 12, 2024. Brandon Bell/Getty Images

    The same report found that 17 percent of Americans have ever invested in, traded, or used a cryptocurrency. As an investment, about 38 percent of respondents said cryptocurrency has done “worse than expected.”

    Rick Claypool, the research director in the president’s office of Public Citizen, told The Epoch Times that cryptocurrency, generally, is an extremely volatile investment vehicle without any intrinsic value—one that is now very risky for the average investor.

    Public Citizen, founded in 1971, is a nonprofit consumer advocacy organization. In May, it published a report describing the cryptocurrency industry’s investment in politics as part of a “strategy of combating enforcement crackdowns and designing a regulatory system that meets the industry’s specifications.”

    Regulators Take Aim

    The growing use of cryptocurrency over the last decade, and concern about the consumer risks, has led to a rush to begin regulating the fast-growing industry.

    The swift rise and fall of Sam Bankman-Fried and his cryptocurrency exchange FTX highlighted the potential for fraud in a lightly regulated sector of the economy.

    In March, Bankman-Fried was sentenced to 25 years in prison and ordered to pay $11 billion in forfeiture for what the U.S. Department of Justice called his “orchestration of multiple fraudulent schemes.” Bankman-Fried was accused of stealing more than $8 billion of his customer’s money through FTX and Alameda Research, a cryptocurrency trading firm he founded.

    Bankman-Fried was initially arrested in the Bahamas and extradited to the United States, where he was charged with multiple fraud offenses, in December 2022. FTX collapsed in November 2022.

    A year earlier, Securities and Exchange Commission chairman Gary Gensler asked the Senate’s Banking Housing and Urban Affairs Committee for additional resources to begin addressing regulatory concerns surrounding the cryptocurrency industry. In that testimony, he said the entire crypto asset class was “rife with fraud, scams, and abuse.”

    Under Gensler, who was appointed commissioner by President Joe Biden in April 2021, the SEC views most crypto assets as securities. Since 2022, the SEC has charged multiple firms with violating federal securities law by offering and selling unregistered securities.

    Securities and Exchange Commission chair Gary Gensler listens during a meeting with the Treasury Department’s Financial Stability Oversight Council at the Treasury Department in Washington on Oct. 3, 2022. Anna Moneymaker/Getty Images

    As recently as Oct. 9, when he appeared at a conference at the New York University School of Law, Gensler said he continues to view the crypto industry as a hotbed of “fraudsters,” “grifters,” and “scams.”

    Gensler’s actions made him the crypto industry’s top political enemy, Claypool said.

    Election Targets

    In 2024, the industry began spending on political causes through three linked committees: Fairshake, Defend American Jobs, and Protect Progress. Claypool said while these PACs were founded and funded by crypto, none of the advertisements and political messaging they paid for said anything about cryptocurrency or a candidate’s positions on financial regulations.

    Fairshake was launched in May 2023. According to federal records, within its first six months, it received donations of $1 million or more from Armstrong, Coinbase, and venture capital firm Andreessen Horowitz’s co-founders Marc Andreessen and Ben Horowitz. By the end of 2023, it had raised about $85.7 million.

    Representatives of Coinbase, Andreessen, and Horowitz did not respond to a request for comment from The Epoch Times.

    According to its latest FEC disclosure, covering its activities through Oct. 16, the PAC raised about $118.4 million and spent about $153.3 million in 2024. Its top donors were Coinbase, executives at Andreessen Horowitz, and Ripple Labs Inc.

    Representatives of Ripple did not respond to a request for comment from The Epoch Times.

    Fairshake’s most significant independent expenditures against a single candidate, totaling more than $10 million, went toward opposing Rep. Katie Porter (D-Calif.) in her bid to replace outgoing Sen. Laphonza Butler (D-Calif.). Porter lost in the state’s Democratic Party primary to Senator-elect Adam Schiff (D-Calif.) in March.

    Ahead of Porter’s primary, a new political group called the Stand With Crypto Alliance emerged. In its inaugural release, dated Feb. 7, Stand With Crypto said it planned to launch a “candidate questionnaire and voter education program” in California.

    Read the rest here…

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 11/24/2024 – 12:50

  • Mysterious Drone Swarms Detected Over UK Airbases Hosting US Stealth Jets
    Mysterious Drone Swarms Detected Over UK Airbases Hosting US Stealth Jets

    The growing presence of mysterious drone swarms at or near US military bases has become a significant cause for concern. Reports suggest these unmanned aerial systems have now been spotted over British military installations.

    The Guardian reports that drone swarms have been spotted over three UK airbases: RAF Lakenheath and RAF Mildenhall in Suffolk, and RAF Feltwell in Norfolk between last Wednseday and Friday.  

    The US 48th Fighter Wing is stationed at RAF Lakenheath. This base is home to the only F-15 wing in Europe, which includes two F-15E Strike Eagle squadrons and two F-35A Lightning II squadrons.

    A spokesperson for USAF in Europe said it is unclear if the drones were “considered hostile.” The spokesperson did not say if any counter-drone technologies were used during the incident but said the USAF retains “the right to protect” installations. 

    “We can confirm that small unmanned aerial systems [UASs] were spotted in the vicinity of and over RAF Lakenheath, RAF Mildenhall and RAF Feltwell between 20 and 22 November. The number of UASs fluctuated and they ranged in size [and] configuration.

    “The UASs were actively monitored and installation leaders determined that none of the incursions impacted base residents or critical infrastructure.

    “To protect operational security, we do not discuss our specific force protection measures but retain the right to protect the installation. We continue to monitor our airspace and are working with host-nation authorities and mission partners to ensure the safety of base personnel, facilities and assets,” the spokesperson said.

    The UK incident came just days after a drone swarm on Tuesday in Morris County, New Jersey, caused alarm because it was down the street from the military research and manufacturing facility Picatinny Arsenal.

    There have been other reports of drone swarms across some of America’s most sensitive national security sites, including Langley Air Force Base on Virginia’s shoreline late last year. 

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 11/24/2024 – 12:15

  • Waste Of The Day: Federal Dept. HHS Goes All-In On DEI
    Waste Of The Day: Federal Dept. HHS Goes All-In On DEI

    Authored by Jeremy Portnoy via RealClearInvestigations,

    Topline: Under President Joe Biden, the Department of Health and Human Services has created a “diversity, equity and inclusion” infrastructure of dizzying complexity. 

    The agency’s 2025 budget request contains the word “equity” 829 times, adding onto a dollar total that is already impossible to fully tabulate.

    Key facts: HHS employed at least 294 DEI staffers at a cost of $38.7 million last year, according to a new report from OpenTheBooks.com. There were 247 with salaries above $100,000.

    It can be difficult to grasp just how bureaucratic HHS’ DEI system truly is. The agency-wide “Office of EEO, Diversity & Inclusion” has 92 employees. Within that are seven more DEI offices for specific health agencies like the Food and Drug Administration.

    Some of the smaller offices have several more divisions. The National Institutes of Health’s “Office of Equity, Diversity & Inclusion” has yet another “Diversity & Inclusion Division,” a marketing team, a customer outreach team and more.

    The DEI expenses do not stop there. 

    The agency has $5 million budgeted for its “Office of Climate Change and Health Equity” and the “Office of Environmental Justice.” Another $5 million will go toward “diversifying the doula workforce.”

    The Health Resources and Services Administration received $102 million this year for “training for diversity.” A third of it is to help universities “enhance the academic performance of minorities.”

    The NIH plans to spend $241 million over nine years on its FIRST program, which pays universities to weigh a candidate’s “commitment to diversity” as equal to their academic ability when hiring scientists. 

    Even the NIH’s $1.2 billion “Brain Research Through Advancing Innovative Neurotechnologies” program now has an “emphasis on diversity and inclusion in the research community,” according to its budget request.

    Search all federal, state and local government salaries and vendor spending with the AI search bot, Benjamin, at OpenTheBooks.com. 

    Background: DEI has also transformed HHS’ seven Offices of Minority Health, which have 207 employees earning $29.4 million in total. Add that to the $38.7 million from the general DEI staff at HHS, and pay is $68 million.

    The Offices of Minority Health have existed since 1985, but once Biden took office, he directed them to focus on “addressing historical and contemporary injustices.”

    Quickly, the Center for Disease Control’s Office of Minority Health renamed itself to the Office of Health Equity and “declared racism a serious public health threat.”

    Critical quote: “In medical research, lives depend on putting excellence first. The NIH distorts that value, subordinating it to political ideology and endangering those it’s supposed to serve,” National Association of Scholars fellow John Sailer wrote in the Wall Street Journal.

    Summary: Political agendas from the left or the right have no place in science and medicine. 

    The #WasteOfTheDay is brought to you by the forensic auditors at OpenTheBooks.com

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 11/24/2024 – 11:40

  • Iran Announces Expanded Nuclear Enrichment After IAEA Rebuke
    Iran Announces Expanded Nuclear Enrichment After IAEA Rebuke

    Authored by Jason Ditz via AntiWar.com,

    In a 19-3 vote with 12 abstentions, the IAEA agreed to rebuke Iran for a “lack of cooperation.” The vote was driven by the US, UK, and their allies. Russia and China both voted against the resolution, along with Burkina Faso.

    The timing of the decision was particularly unfortunately, coming just days after IAEA chief Rafael Grossi’s visit to Iran, during which Iran agreed to measures designed to keep their stockpile of high-enriched uranium from growing. Iran also promised to ensure that it’s highest enrichment levels remain 60% or below, which is below the 90% level needed to make weapons.

    All that raised hope among officials actually invested in the safeguard efforts. The US-led effort for censure seems, as always, to underscore that Iran cannot take any steps that would satisfy them. Angered by the IAEA rebuke, Iran is promising a response.

    Centrifuges in an Iranian nuclear plant. Image: Tasnim News Agency

    A joint statement by Iran’s Atomic Energy Organization and Foreign Ministry announced they will take new measures, including bringing newer, more advanced centrifuges online. Such moves would of course be reversible, if the international community became more willing to negotiate and comply with the existing P5+1 nuclear deal.

    That seems unlikely in the near term. Though the P5+1 deal is nominally still in effect, the US withdrew from it in 2018, after repeated condemnations by President Trump. Since

    Trump’s return to office in imminent, it seems unlikely that the administration will be any more willing to make a deal than they were the last time.

    Iran is trying to assure that the new measures are only related to enrichment, which again remains well below the level of weapons-grade uranium. The statement issued also assured that Iran will continue with safeguard and technical cooperation with the IAEA, as it had previously agreed.

    In the end, the IAEA censure is less about anything Iran is doing than about continuing the narrative of the “Iranian nuclear threat.”

    That this is the second time this year that the IAEA has voted on such a measure despite there being no real change in Iran’s policy or action.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The US intelligence community has repeatedly confirmed that Iran has not decided to make a nuclear weapon. Seemingly every Iranian earthquake leads hawks to speculate a secret detonation has taken place, however, and the fear-mongering continues.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 11/24/2024 – 10:30

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Nov 24

Today’s News 24th November 2024

  • Taxpayer Funded Censorship: How Government Is Using Your Tax Dollars To Silence Your Voice
    Taxpayer Funded Censorship: How Government Is Using Your Tax Dollars To Silence Your Voice

    Submitted by Open the Books

    Campaign season brought with it a steady stream of accusations that various parties and platforms were spreading misinformation and disinformation.

    Most recently, the scandals at FEMA over avoiding homes with Trump signs was quickly slapped with a “misinformation” label…until FEMA itself admitted it had happened. MSNBC anchor Jen Psaki suggested “laws have to change” to combat the scourge.

    With the misinformation category being weaponized across the political spectrum, we took a look at how invested government has become in studying and “combatting” it using your tax dollars. That research can provide the intellectual ammunition to censor people online.

    Since 2021, the Biden-Harris administration has spent $267 million on research grants with the term “misinformation” in the proposal.

    Of course, the Covid pandemic was the driving force behind so much of the misinformation debate. Sure enough, the feds have spent at least $127 million in grants specifically targeted to study the spread of “misinformation” — or to help people “overcome” it, so to speak — by persuading them to go along with Covid-related public health recommendations and mandates.

    In one particularly brazen instance, $200,000 was spent slandering President-elect Trump himself. The grant resulted in a paper suggesting populist leaders and movements in various countries kept people from coming together in “solidarity” and public officials need to have the “main say” on health guidance next time.

    In other words, it would be better if your voice were silenced in favor of the “expert” class.

    BACKGROUND

    The COVID-19 pandemic instigated a rush of funding for research and projects addressing misinformation. At the time bureaucrats like Anthony Fauci contended that false information spread online undermined scientific recommendations coming from the government. Many of those government recommendations—vaccines for children, masking and double masking, and six feet for social distancing—have since been found to have dubious scientific basis.

    The federal government used both carrots and sticks, in the form of grants and censorious pressure campaigns, in the name of combating COVID misinformation. At the same time, it was working hand in glove with social media companies to silence critics of repressive COVID-19 policies.

    There is robust documentation by now proving that the Biden-Harris administration worked closely with social media companies to censor content deemed “misinformation,” which often included cases where people simply questioned or disagreed with the Administration’s COVID policies.

    Earlier this year the Supreme Court ruled that such activities did not violate the First Amendment, but Meta CEO Mark Zuckerberg admitted such pressure was “wrong;” Tesla CEO Elon Musk purchased Twitter (now X) in part because of the company’s extreme restrictions on speech during COVID.

    In February the U.S. House Committee on the Judiciary and the Select Subcommittee on the Weaponization of the Federal Government issued a scathing report against the National Science Foundation (NSF) for funding grants supporting tools and processes that censor online speech.

    The report said, “the purpose of these taxpayer-funded projects is to develop artificial intelligence (AI)-powered censorship and propaganda tools that can be used by governments and Big Tech to shape public opinion by restricting certain viewpoints or promoting others.” $13 million was spent on the censorious technologies profiled in the report.

    While the NSF was singled out for particularly egregious ideology-driven behavior, the full universe of misinformation-related spending in the federal government is much larger and goes far beyond colluding with the tech sector to restrict opinions online.

    Federal spending records show at least $127 million tax dollars funding anti-misinformation efforts directly related to COVID-19 for a variety of activities, from on-the-ground advocacy working to dispel vaccine misinformation, to scientific studies on how supposed misinformation is spread online.

    The result of all this was a record loss of trust in science and government and compounding economic and social disasters that may never be able to be fully quantified.

    Learning to think critically and discern truth from lies is an important life skill, but the federal government has proven it is not capable of addressing that need responsibly. It’s the worst possible arbiter of truth, as it were, because it makes the state a gatekeeper of speech.

    BY THE NUMBERS

    Misinformation-related grants actually stretch back to FY2017 during the first Trump presidency. $273 million has been awarded for grant proposals containing the term since then—but there was an explosion of cash during the years-long Covid malaise. The vast majority of that figure ($267 million) was for grants that began in 2021 or later.

    METHODOLOGY NOTE: This likely does not cover all grants given to combat misinformation, because transaction descriptions may not include this keyword, but the trend in spending illustrates a sudden explosion of interest in misinformation starting in 2021.

    An enormous year-over-year jump in new grants occurred between 2020 and 2021—from $2.2 million to $126 million as the federal government poured money out to address COVID-related “misinformation,” among other projects.

    While spending has since slowed down, it is still far higher than it was pre-pandemic in 2020: $18.3 million in new grants began in FY 2024.

    Grants mostly came from the Department of Health and Human Services ($185 million), followed by the National Science Foundation ($65 million), with the Department of State ($12 million) in a distant third. CHART: Click here for a breakdown of misinformation spending by agency.

    An additional $17 million has awarded to misinformation-related contracts since 2020, and again, most of it ($12.5 million) was in FY 2021.

    WHAT IS MISINFORMATION, ANYWAY?

    According to the Department of Health and Human Services website:

    “Misinformation is information that is false, inaccurate, or misleading according to the best available evidence at the time.”

    The website goes on to detail supposed issues with COVID-19 related misinformation:

    “During the pandemic, health misinformation has led people to decline vaccines, reject public health measures, and use unproven treatments. Health misinformation has also led to harassment and violence against health workers, airline staff, and other frontline workers tasked with communicating evolving public health measures.”

    These definitions leave a lot of room for interpretation and abuse—who decides what the “best available evidence” is at any given time? And who decides which experts should be considered authoritative or not?

    Famously, then-National Institute of Allergies and Infectious Disease director Anthony Fauci promoted the notion that people should stand six feet apart from each other to achieve “social distancing” to reduce COVID transmission.

    In January of 2024 Fauci would admit to Congress that this recommendation had no scientific basis and “sort of just appeared.”

    The six feet social distancing rule was used to justify extended school and business closures, wreaking economic havoc and leading to tremendous learning losses for children.

    BACK TO THE START: MISINFO SPENDING UNDER TRUMP

    Before most of the furor, the Trump administration granted about $6.7 million in funding related to misinformation, the bulk of which were awarded in FY 2019 and 2020. Most of these grants—12 of the 16 total—funded technological developments to monitor social media and flag misinformation.

    The earliest one of these was awarded in 2017: $316,000 from National Science Foundation for “training computers and humans to detect misinformation by combining computational and theoretical analysis.”

    No such grants were given out domestically in 2018, but in 2019 over $2 million were awarded for projects with titles like “Online Dynamics of Misinformation” and “Social Media and Mass Communication: Curriculum Development to Combat Misinformation.”

    Spending stayed about the same at $1.7 million in FY 2020 for six projects, including two that directly address COVID:

    • $149,858 from National Science Foundation for “tracking and network analysis of the spread of misinformation regarding COVID-19.”

    • $104,491 from National Science Foundation for “countering COVID-19 misinformation via situation-aware visually informed treatment.”

    While this spending is a drop in the bucket for what was to come, the censorious ideology behind “misinformation” grants which were abused during the Biden-Harris administration first got traction under Trump.

    NEXT STEPS: CASH TO FIGHT COVID MISINFO

    When examining the number of projects on misinformation, most did not specifically relate to the COVID-19 pandemic. Many involved misinformation concerning HIV, the HPV vaccine, or the opioid epidemic, for instance. Multiple projects also addressed more obscure topics, like this $234,401 grant to “combat misinformation that negatively impacts public perception of crabbing and the commercial fishing industry.”

    But dollar for dollar, $127 million was directly related to COVID.

    Projects receiving funding generally comprised two categories:

    • Public-interfacing programs meant to mitigate the supposed impact of misinformation through on-the-ground advocacy

    • Scientific studies or conferences on how misinformation is spread

    ON-THE-GROUND ADVOCACY

    The federal government pumped millions of dollars into on-the-ground campaigns to “dispel” misinformation and convince people to take COVID-19 vaccines or otherwise comply with COVID policies. Some examples include:

    • $80,092,486, Department of Health and Human Services, National Foundation for the Centers for Disease Control & Prevention, to build a network of nonprofits through which to disperse materials about COVID and flu vaccines. Project goals include “the design, development, and management of a searchable repository platform to house a multi-lingual inventory of communication materials and tools to support collaborative efforts to increase adult immunization.”

    • $2,000,000, Department of Health and Human Services, Durham County, NC. Proposed activities include “a mass media campaign, SMS distribution of health messaging, out-of-home advertising within targeted geofencing, coordinating existing networks of community health workers, expanding peer advocacy programs to address vaccine hesitancy, outreach to address health-related misinformation, mini-grants for native content development with accurate health messages, and a digital learning community to advance organizational health literacy.”

    • $1,293,614, Department of Health and Human Services, University of Iowa. To leverage trusted community members to address “disparities in COVID testing and vaccine uptake.”

    Other grants were revised to add an anti-misinformation component. For example, $150,000 was added to a $1.2 million grant from the Corporation for National and Community Service (also known as AmeriCorps) to nonprofit Seeds 4 Success.

    The original grant was to connect “foster grandparents” to children to serve as tutors and mentors. The revision stated the foster grandparent program will instead “dispel misinformation about COVID vaccination and help [the target community] see the benefits, especially vaccinating children when eligible, and help maximize contract tracing resources to ensure safety of the families we serve.”

    MISINFORMATION STUDIES

    Other funding went to researchers seeking to understand how supposed misinformation is shared online and how it can be combatted or mitigated using social or technological tools. Universities were often the recipient of such research spending.

    Although much of this research is academic, it is often intended to lay the groundwork for public interventions.

    Examples include:

    • $2,356,413, Department of Health and Human Services, University of Pennsylvania, for “investigating and identifying the heterogeneity in COVID-19 misinformation exposure on social media among black and rural communities to inform precision public health messaging” because “misinformation contributes to confusion, distrust, and distress around health behaviors such as vaccination, mask wearing, and social distancing.” In other words, they wanted to find the different messages and media various communities were receiving in order to tailor the government’s rebuttal.

    • $2,175,835, Department of Health and Human Services, University of Texas Health Science Center at Houston, for research on the “social processes and cognitive factors underlying misinformation comprehension” in social media. By developing an algorithm to automatically detect “intent and belief attributes underlying COVID-19 misinformation” researchers can develop computational infrastructure to mitigate the spread of that misinformation “easing public health burden and informing policy regulations as needed.”

    • $348,310, Department of Health and Human Services, Michigan State University, “to counteract the negative impact of misinformation on digital platforms that threatens public health.” The overall goal of the project is “to develop a publicly accessible vaccine informatics system to track vaccine debate, and to test the impact of vaccine debate… during the onset of a global pandemic.”

    OTHER GRANT EXAMPLES

    $200,000 to Slander a Political Opponent

    One notable research grant awarded to George Washington University in FY 2022 targeted former president Donald Trump. The study, called “Pandemic Communication in Time of Populism: Building Resilient Media and Ensuring Effective Pandemic Communication in Divided Societies” received a $199,516 grant from the National Science Foundation.

    Researchers on this Biden-era grant examined how so-called “populist” leaders supposedly prevented society from coming together in “solidarity” during the COVID pandemic. Trump’s presidency was a focus of the research, along with the leaders of three other countries.

    One researcher said in a video interview:

    “What went wrong in different ways in all these countries and in a lot of countries around the world that had populist governments…there was just this very high level of polarization and politicization of the pandemic response…and it really interfered with the ability of society to pull together in a consistent way and to get through the pandemic.”

    The research also concluded that “experts” should have the “main say” during the next public health crisis, with another investigator saying:

    “One of the recommendations stemming from our strand is related to who is in charge of disseminating information related to the public health crisis, in our view based on the data that we have, it’s obvious that governments should allow the experts to have the main say in how society should respond to public health crisis.”

    At the end of the video “climate change” is the next crisis these experts suggest requires strong public solidarity that populist leaders are incapable of creating.

    WILL THE NATIONAL ACADEMIES THEMSELVES SPREAD MISINFORMATION?

    In a similar vein, $994,950 was awarded from the National Science Foundation to the National Academies of Science on “Understanding and Addressing Misinformation about Science.” This report was needed because, according to the grant description, “concern about the spread of misinformation and its role in undermining scientific expertise and facts in civic dialogue has grown significantly, especially over the last 5-10 years.”

    The report has yet to be published, but there is reason to suspect it will also lack introspection from its supposed expert panel of researchers.

    The chair of the research committee, Kasisomayajula Viswanath also worked on the report “Communication Strategies for Building October Confidence in COVID-19 Vaccines: Addressing 2021 Variants and Childhood Vaccinations.”

    Viswanath said at the time to “continue to emphasize [to parents] how safe the vaccines are and how they are effective in preventing serious disease. More than 6 billion doses of vaccines have been given globally so far with very few serious adverse effects.”

    But as the New York Times reported in February 2024, many other countries no longer recommend or even offer COVID-19 vaccinations or boosters for children.

    The New York Times article suggested that U.S. Center for Disease Control’s recommendation for childhood vaccination diminishes the agency’s credibility, because, as other countries have concluded, the benefits of childhood COVID vaccines do not outweigh the costs.

    It remains to be seen if this misstep in COVID policy will be a part of the new $1 million report on how misinformation erodes public faith in “scientific expertise.”

    MISINFORMATION CONTRACT SPENDING

    As we’ve illustrated, public grants focused on “dispelling” misinformation with supposedly accurate information in order to coerce people into compliance with health policy directives.

    But beginning in 2020, contracts were often concerned with monitoring or eliminating supposed misinformation at its source.

    Because contract descriptions are frequently vague, it is unclear how many are directly related to COVID-19. Only one explicitly mentioned the pandemic in its contract transaction description.

    Examples of these misinformation contracts include:

    • $300,000, Department of Health and Human Services, Innov8AI, “capturing medical misinformation in social media for targeted interdiction using an advanced AI solution set.” [Interdiction means “to forbid in a usually formal or authoritative manner,” according to Merriam-Webster Dictionary.]
    • $300,000, Department of Health and Human Services, Melax Technologies, “real-time surveillance of vaccine misinformation from social media platforms using ontology and natural language processing technologies.” In other words, Melax would sort posts it deemed “misinformation” into categories to analyze.
    • $299,964, Department of Health and Human Services, Gryphon Scientific, “systematic understanding and elimination of misinformation online.”

    Other contracts raised eyebrows for different reasons:

    • $1,205,826 from Department of Homeland Security went to defense contractor  Guidehouse for “misinformation, disinformation, and malinformation analysis.”

    NOTE: Malinformation is a controversial term for information that is true, but presented without sufficient context in a way that could mislead or harm. The opportunity to use this word to censor political or ideological opponents should be obvious.

    • As first reported in the Daily Caller, Meedan Inc received $749,974 from the National Science Foundation’s Convergence Accelerator in 2022 for “FACT CHAMP: fact-checker, academic, and community collaboration tools combating hate, abuse, and misinformation with minority led partnerships,” later re-branded as Co-Insights.

    The non-profit went on to receive $5 million more from NSF for the same project a year later.

    A press release states the project will “narrow the gap between research into misinformation and responses designed to curb it.”

    CONCLUSION

    In October the House Committee on Energy & Commerce’s Subcommittee on Oversight and Investigations published a report outlining nearly $1 billion in spending on a vaccine promotional campaign. Despite this huge expenditure, the report notes that “the Campaign and the Biden Harris administration’s response to the pandemic resulted in a collapse of the public’s trust in public health messaging.” Report authors blamed flawed messaging about the effectiveness of masks, overstating the risk of COVID to children, and recommending vaccinations for all Americans over the age of 6 months.

    It appears the administration most concerned with “misinformation” itself trafficked in misinformation: on masks, on risks to children, on social distancing, and on the need to vaccinate even infants. At least one grant specifically targeted the sitting president’s main political rival.

    Americans simply cannot trust that continued grant and contract spending and various bureaucratic programmatic activities involved in “misinformation” will not be ideologically motivated to silence critics.

    Case in point: a $249,691 grant from the federal Institute of Museum and Library Services to the University of Washington to build and deploy an “online escape room hosted by librarians” to address misinformation. The grant also included a co-design camp around the far-left Black Lives Matter movement to “demonstrate use of the design kit for creating interest-driven escape rooms.” (Play the escape room here.)

    How much more misinformation spending is purely ideological or promoting contested or even false information?

    No doubt the internet is awash with patently false information that can confuse and needlessly alarm readers. So far it has been proven, however, that the federal government is not capable of addressing this issue objectively. It would be better to stop entirely than further undermine federal credibility with accusations of partisanship and First Amendment rights violations.

    The incoming Trump administration must end the government’s involvement in managing so-called misinformation, and Congress must keep the purse strings closed on this spending.

    Otherwise, taxpayers remain at risk of underwriting their own censorship.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 11/23/2024 – 23:20

  • Young Americans Are Turning Off The TV
    Young Americans Are Turning Off The TV

    As streaming services such as Netflix, Amazon Prime Video and Disney+ have taken over a huge chunk of TV consumption in the United States, traditional TV is finding itself under increased pressure to defend its place as the go-to medium for entertainment, distraction and information.

    And while people still spend a lot of time watching live and timeshifted TV on average, Statista’s Felix Richter notes that’s largely due to heavy TV usage by Americans aged 65 and above, who watch roughly 10 times as much traditional TV as young adults do.

    Infographic: Young Americans Are Turning Off the TV | Statista

    You will find more infographics at Statista

    According to Nielsen, Americans aged 18 to 34 watch less than five hours of live and timeshifted TV per week.

    At the other end of the scale, those aged 65 and older watch more than 40 hours on average.

    Making this worse for the TV industry, there’s a growing share of young adults who don’t watch TV at all, as they get all they need from digital sources.

    According to Statista Consumer Insights, 50 percent of 18 to 24-year-olds in the U.S. say that they don’t watch any traditional TV, compared to just 29 percent of 55 to 64-year-olds.

    That share would likely be even lower for those aged 65 and older, but they have not been surveyed in this case.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 11/23/2024 – 22:45

  • China's New Port In Peru: A Strategic Threat To US Security
    China’s New Port In Peru: A Strategic Threat To US Security

    Authored by Antonio Graceffo via The Epoch Times,

    The new Chinese-controlled port in Peru is part of Chinese leader Xi Jinping’s strategy to outflank the United States by establishing a maritime and land corridor linking China to Latin America.

    As the Biden administration winds to a close, the Chinese Communist Party (CCP) is aggressively expanding its influence in South America. On Nov. 14, Xi Jinping and Peruvian President Dina Boluarte inaugurated a $3.6 billion port in Chancay, Peru, marking another major step in China’s economic foothold in the region.

    Earlier this year, Boluarte traveled to Beijing to strengthen Sino–Peruvian ties, cementing Peru’s position as the second-largest recipient of Chinese foreign direct investment in Latin America. Notably, this includes China Southern Power Grid’s acquisition of Peru’s electricity distribution, placing 100 percent of this critical infrastructure under CCP control.

    In stark contrast, the White House failed to engage Boluarte during her 2023 visit to Washington, missing a key opportunity to counter Beijing’s growing influence. The port inauguration coincided with the Asia-Pacific Economic Cooperation (APEC) summit in Lima, where U.S. President Joe Biden and leaders from 21 member economies convened. The timing underscores a stark reality: while the United States watched from the sidelines, the CCP was actively drawing Latin America deeper into its orbit, delivering a clear and humiliating message to the United States about its waning influence in the region.

    The Chinese shipping giant COSCO owns a 60 percent stake in Peru’s Chancay port, which will serve as a critical node in China’s Belt and Road Initiative and its first logistics hub in the Americas. Strategically positioned, the port grants China access to Peru’s abundant copper reserves—essential for dominating global markets in electric vehicles and data centers. Equipped with cutting-edge technology, including automated cranes and driverless electric trucks, the port’s scale and proximity to the United States have raised serious concerns about potential military use by the Chinese People’s Liberation Navy.

    Gen. Laura J. Richardson, then-commander of U.S. Southern Command, warned Congress that while the port is officially designated for commercial purposes, its size and capabilities could accommodate military assets, including combat vessels. She emphasized that China, as a strategic competitor, undermines international norms and democratic values in Latin America and the Caribbean. Through corruption, disinformation, cybercrime, and human rights abuses, the CCP bolsters authoritarian regimes in countries like Cuba, Nicaragua, and Venezuela to further its geopolitical agenda.

    While China deepens its regional foothold, the United States has pressured Boluarte on human rights abuses and democratic violations, contrasting with Beijing’s hands-off approach. Beijing openly supported Venezuela’s Nicolás Maduro after his contested election victory in July, despite widespread allegations of fraud by international observers. The fraudulent election sparked massive protests across Venezuela, met with a violent crackdown by Maduro’s regime. Security forces used tear gas, rubber bullets, and live ammunition to suppress dissent, resulting in at least 23 deaths and more than 2,200 arrests. The brutal suppression drew international condemnation, further isolating Maduro’s regime, yet China’s backing reinforced its alignment with authoritarian leaders in the region.

    China’s investments in dual-use infrastructure, such as ports, telecommunications, and space facilities, extend well beyond commercial purposes. Deep-water ports like the proposed maritime facilities in Argentina could serve as future naval access points for the People’s Liberation Army. These strategic installations, including projects near the Panama Canal and Antarctica, create chokepoints that enhance Beijing’s global power projection capabilities.

    These ports also enable the CCP to monitor U.S. naval and commercial ships, with the potential to restrict their access to vital waterways. Additionally, Chinese state-owned enterprises like Nuctech and ZPMC, which operate in Chancay and other Latin American and Caribbean ports, could leverage port scanning equipment and cargo cranes to gather sensitive commercial data from allies and adversaries alike. Similar concerns have been raised regarding Chinese-built ports in Africa, the Middle East, and Southeast Asia, underscoring the broader risks of China’s expanding infrastructure network.

    In the Western Hemisphere, Chinese state-owned companies have financed, built, or now operate several key ports along strategic waterways, including the Panama Canal and the Caribbean Sea. In Argentina, China recently attempted to develop a naval base near the Strait of Magellan and Antarctica, but President Javier Milei opted in April to partner with the United States for the project instead.

    These Chinese-controlled ports pose significant challenges for U.S. military operations. In a potential conflict, such as one in the Taiwan Strait or South China Sea, the U.S. Navy may need to quickly move ships between the Atlantic and Pacific through critical chokepoints like the Panama Canal or the Strait of Magellan. Chinese companies managing these infrastructures could delay or obstruct U.S. movements.

    Major Chinese shipping and port management companies, including COSCO, operate under heavy influence from the CCP. With many top executives holding CCP membership and China’s 2017 National Security Law requiring companies to prioritize national security interests, the CCP wields significant control over these operations. This allows Beijing to strategically leverage these assets to support its geopolitical objectives.

    Telecommunications is another key area in which China has established a stronghold in Latin America. Companies like Huawei and ZTE have implemented network infrastructure across nearly every country in the region, raising serious cybersecurity concerns. Meanwhile, China has also expanded its presence in space, building at least 10 facilities in Latin America—the largest concentration outside its mainland. These installations bolster the People’s Liberation Army’s global surveillance and military capabilities, presenting a direct threat to U.S. security.

    Numerous Republicans, including former presidential candidate Vivek Ramaswamy, Florida Gov. Ron DeSantis, and Sen. Jim Risch (R-Idaho), highlighted the urgent need to revive the Monroe Doctrine—a U.S. policy established in 1823 to oppose foreign interference in the Western Hemisphere—in response to mounting threats from the CCP. They warn that the Chinese regime is aggressively expanding its influence in Latin America, backing authoritarian regimes, infiltrating markets, and undermining regional sovereignty, posing a direct challenge to U.S. security.

    Risch called on the White House to recognize the stakes, as failure to act will leave the United States increasingly vulnerable. In his view, reviving the Monroe Doctrine isn’t just historical—it’s essential for modern security.

    Views expressed in this article are opinions of the author and do not necessarily reflect the views of The Epoch Times or ZeroHedge.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 11/23/2024 – 22:10

  • Making America Great Again Means Fixing Its Dystopian Cities
    Making America Great Again Means Fixing Its Dystopian Cities

    Authored by Stephen Soukup via American Greatness,

    Of all the celebrities promising to leave the country if Donald Trump won this month’s election, at least one has already kept that promise and decamped to supposedly greener pastures. The actress and filmmaker Eva Longoria recently told Marie Claire that she, her husband, and her son now split their time between Spain and Mexico.

    “It just feels like this chapter in my life” – the chapter in which she is an American, apparently – “is done now.”

    On the one hand, it’s a bit surprising that one of the big-talking Hollywood leftists actually kept her promise and allowed politics to rule her life. On the other hand, if any of the Glitteratti were going to run from Donald Trump’s America, Longoria would be the one. She doesn’t just support Democratic politicians, after all. She has dedicated much of her adult life to their cause:

    In 2016, Longoria took to her bed after Trump prevailed. “I’ve never been depressed in my life,” she recalls…. Longoria spent the better part of this past summer campaigning for Kamala Harris. She rallied volunteers with Tim Walz. Countless celebrities endorsed the Democratic ticket, but Longoria is more than a famous surrogate. The Washington Post has called her a genuine “political power broker” for the “fierce and productive” work she has done to organize women and Latinos. The Texas Tribune profiled her efforts to recruit and support Hispanic Democratic candidates up and down the ballot.

    Needless to say, Longoria is all in on Democratic politics—which makes her reasons for leaving the United States all the more interesting. Although she tells Marie Claire that Trump was an issue for her, he wasn’t the only issue. Indeed, she and her family had moved out of the country before Trump even won the election on November 4. She gave up on this country for far different reasons. It’s “dystopian,” she says, and it’s been getting worse for some time: “I had my whole adult life here…But even before [the pandemic], it was changing. The vibe was different. And then COVID happened, and it pushed it over the edge. Whether it’s the homelessness or the taxes, not that I want to sh*t on California….”

    I’m not one to kick a gal when she’s down, but Longoria’s complaints about the United States—dystopian, homelessness, excessive taxes, etc.—have a familiar ring to them. Indeed, they sound a lot like the complaints registered by that other leftist icon…<>…Tucker Carlson?

    As you may recall, not quite nine months ago, Carlson won the enmity of both liberals and conservatives for saying that Moscow is “so much nicer than any city in my country.” Like Longoria, Carlson lamented the dystopian nature of much American life, complaining that “If you can’t use your subway, for example, as many people are afraid to in New York City because it’s too dangerous, you have to sort of wonder like, isn’t that the ultimate measure of leadership?” Unlike Longoria, however, Carlson didn’t give up on his country and exercised his “privilege” (her word, not mine) to abandon it. What he did was say that visiting other large cities in the world was “radicalizing” for an American because those cities, “no matter how we’re told they’re run and on what principles they’re run, are wonderful places to live….”

    As I say, Carlson was roundly criticized for his comments. Some of that criticism was entirely justified, although much of it was not. And in any case, Longoria will not be criticized at all for her statements, in part because she’s a leftist and, thus, above criticism, and in part because she, like Carlson, has a point. Public spaces in American cities are, in most cases, grotesque. That’s almost inarguable. Among other things, Tucker was bashed because he made what seemed to be a partisan argument. He was clearly and undeniably criticizing urban Democratic politics and policies. The irony here is that Longoria was too, although neither she nor any of her supporters and fans understand that.

    As Democrats continue their soul-searching, and as media and other analysts try to dissect the causes of the enormous Republican victory not quite two weeks ago, one lesson will likely go unlearned. The American people really do want their country to be great again. To them, that doesn’t mean that the United States should be an omnipotent global colossus, striding the globe, enforcing its will on everyone and everything. And it doesn’t mean that Americans should win every gold medal at every Olympics or every Nobel Prize or anything like that. Americans just want their country to work again. They just want their cities to function. They want to be able to build homes or power plants or new factories without having to spend countless months and endless resources complying with arcane and ridiculous regulations. They want their country to look and feel and operate like a normal place again.

    For at least the last 60 years, American cities have been governed not for the benefit of their residents but for the benefit of political power consolidation. Cities are managed specifically to ensure the application of ideological principles and the maintenance of the partisan status quo. In other words, New York, Chicago, and San Francisco (and practically every city in between) are experiments in liberal-left policies and Democratic machine politics. They are run of, by, and for the machines and their ideological solons, not for the people who live there.

    Sometimes, on very rare occasions, cities can break out of this politicized rut, electing new leaders with new ideas—Rudy Giuliani, for example—who change the entire spirit of the metropolis. In time, however, even these breakout efforts fall victim to ideological sniping and partisan grift, leaving the city polarized, politicized, and further degraded.

    Eva Longoria doesn’t know this, but she’s not leaving the United States because of Donald Trump. She’s leaving because of Gavin Newsom, Karen Bass, London Breed, and all the rest of the party-machine politicians, who see this nation’s cities and states not as places where people live and desire to live well but as opportunities to ply their ideological biases and fulfill their personal ambitions.

    Donald Trump is not the dictator his detractors want us all to believe he is. But even if he were, there is nothing he could do to the people of San Francisco that is worse than what London Breed, Edwin Lee, and Gavin Newsom have done to them. There is nothing he could do to the people of Chicago that is worse than what Brandon Johnson and Lori Lightfoot have done to them. There is nothing he could do to the people of New York that is worse than what Eric Adams and Bill DeBlasio have done to them.

    So go, Ms. Longoria. Go use your privilege to start the next “chapter” in your life. Go use your privilege to escape the dystopian nightmare of American cities. But as you go, understand that the problems with America and its cities are less about Donald Trump and his indiscretions than about people, like you, who abhor the outcomes of certain ideologies and policies and yet vote for them—and even campaign aggressively for them—time and time again.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 11/23/2024 – 21:35

  • Terror To The South: Hezbollah In Latin America
    Terror To The South: Hezbollah In Latin America

    Authored by Matias Ahrensdorf & Santiago Vidal Calvo via RealClearDefense,

    The reelection of Donald Trump has sent ripples across terror-supporting and anti-Israel regimes. In the Middle East, Qatar claimed it would rescind its longtime asylum for Hamas leadership, and Iran is reportedly recalibrating its retaliation for Israel’s recent airstrikes. But the new Trump Administration should also be focusing on Latin America, where complicit nations have enabled Hezbollah to thrive. The U.S. must curtail Hezbollah’s active regional fundraising which not only supports attacks against Israel but transnational criminal activity, including bringing drugs and potential terrorists across America’s southern border. 

    Both Luis Arce, socialist president of Bolivia, and Nicolas Maduro, the authoritarian president of Venezuela, have not only made horrifically antisemitic comments, but completely severed diplomatic ties with Israel. Maduro mourned the death of terrorist and Hezbollah founding member, Hassan Nasrallah, expressing support for the terror group while condemning Israel.    

    In the early 90’s, Hezbollah bombed the Israeli embassy in Buenos Aires and two years later the Asociación Mutual Israelita Argentina (AMIA) Jewish cultural center. In November of 2023, police in Brazil foiled plans for a major terrorist attack on multiple Jewish targets in the country—home of Latin America’s second largest Jewish population second only to Argentina.     

    Hezbollah’s patron, the Islamic Republic of Iran, facilitates Hezbollah’s presence in Latin America by building advantageous relationships with authoritarian-leaning countries in the region.    

    In July of 2023, the BBC reported that Iran and Bolivia signed a bilateral agreement to expand “cooperation in the fields of security and defense.” The Iranian defense minister, Mohamed Reza Ashtiani, acknowledged that the deal involved “the sale of equipment and the training of personnel,” including the purchase of Iranian drones by Bolivia. Iran and Venezuela signed a 20-year cooperation agreement in 2022 to increase ties in the oil, petrochemical, economic, and military sectors.     

    Bolivia and Venezuela are rich in uranium and other resources. In 2009, Iran helped Venezuelan engineers with “geophysical aerial probes and geochemical analyses (to find) uranium deposits” as reported by EcoAmericas. By contrast, while the presence of uranium deposits is known in Bolivia, the government has labeled information on the topic as ”reserved”, meaning the location, size, and potential for mining are not publicly disclosed. Around the same time Venezuela and Bolivia had discovered uranium deposits in their regions, a secret Israeli government report obtained by AP news found that: “Venezuela and Bolivia are supplying Iran with uranium for its nuclear program.” In fact, in late October 2024, Bolivia produced its first nuclear fuel for a research reactor.

    Furthermore, both countries are linked with narcotrafficking markets, in which Hezbollah and other terrorist groups are involved. Historically, Bolivia is one of the largest producers of the coca leaf. Due to its abundance, Bolivia naturally played a large role in the Latin America drug trade and supplied an estimated 15% of the cocaine market in the United States during the 1980’s. According to a 2022 White House press release, Bolivia’s steadily growing cocaine production poses a public health threat to the U.S. due to increasing cocaine related overdoses. As of 2009, Bolivia’s president at the time Evo Morales, expelled the U.S. Drug Enforcement Agency (DEA) from the country after nearly three decades of maintaining a presence.

    Venezuela is also involved in the cocaine market. Through collaboration with the Revolutionary Armed Forces of Colombia (FARC), a known Hezbollah ally, Venezuela serves as a main export hub for cocaine into the United States and Europe. Early in the Biden Administration, the U.S. Department of Justice announced several narcoterrorism indictments against the Maduro regime, including Nicolás Maduro himself, for conspiring with FARC to facilitate and profit from the cocaine trade.     

    In March of 2020, former Venezuelan-Syrian politician, Adel El Zabayar, was indicted by the Justice Department for conspiring with Nicolas Maduro and other regime leaders in a narcoterrorism plot involving Colombian FARC dissidents, Mexican drug cartels, and operatives from Iran, Syria, Hamas, and Hezbollah to carry out planned attacks on the United States. Last month, Mijal Gur Aryeh, Israel’s Ambassador to Costa Rica, condemned Venezuela and Bolivia for hosting Hezbollah and Iranian terrorists. Earlier this year, Patricia Bullrich, the Security Minister of Argentina, also made the claim that “Bolivia hosts hundreds of members of the Quds Force,” a branch of Iran’s Islamic Revolutionary Guard Corps (IRGC).

    People on terrorist watchlists have been apprehended at the southern border of the United States, and at least one Hezbollah operative attempting to enter the country illegally. Since the October 7th attack on Israel, Hezbollah has launched over 8,000 rockets at the Jewish state, causing “over 70,000” Israeli’s to evacuate their homes.    

    Hezbollah’s presence in Latin America should alarm Western defense officials. While the terrorist organization continues to volley missiles at Israel daily, it is also increasing its involvement in transnational criminal activity, as its financiers the Islamic Republic of Iran increases its influence in the region. The incoming Trump Administration, with newly appointed Secretary of State Marco Rubio—an unyielding opponent of repressive regimes—should work closely with its Latin American allies and Israel to destroy Hezbollah’s fundraising in the region  which not only enables terrorist activity in the Middle East, but also threatens the southern border with illicit drugs and potential terrorism.  

    Matias Ahrensdorf – Data Analyst for Policy and Research in New York City.

    Santiago Vidal Calvo– Tech and Public Policy Scholar and master’s student at Georgetown University.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 11/23/2024 – 21:00

  • 'Terminator' Robot Dog Now Equipped With Amphibious Capabilities 
    ‘Terminator’ Robot Dog Now Equipped With Amphibious Capabilities 

    The use of robotic dogs on modern battlefields in Eastern Europe and the Middle East has expanded rapidly. Over the past decade, we have thoroughly documented their growing presence and proliferation.

    The latest quadruped robot designed for modern warfare is the Ghost Robotics V60. However, this is far from a typical robotic dog. A separate defense firm, Onyx Industries, has equipped the V60 with an autonomous maritime mobility system, enabling it to navigate rough terrain and traverse bodies of water—all while carrying a machine gun.

    Last month, Onyx shared a short video on YouTube showcasing the V60’s maritime mobility system in action.

    “We’re incredibly excited to share the next evolution of our systems—NAUT amphibious capabilities with SENTRY kinetic and ISR payloads. This integration on the Ghost Robotics V60 is just one example of the many options available,” Onyx stated in the video’s description.

    On a separate note, we recently highlighted the terrifying capabilities of Deep Robotics’ quadruped robot, which is equipped with wheels. Its mobility is nothing short of alarming.

    The ever-increasing capabilities of these robotic dogs are becoming deeply concerning.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 11/23/2024 – 20:25

  • Maddow Hit With $5 Million Pay-Cut As Musk, Trump Jr Joke About Buying MSNBC
    Maddow Hit With $5 Million Pay-Cut As Musk, Trump Jr Joke About Buying MSNBC

    The left-wing cable news channel MSNBC has reportedly cut the salary of one of its top hosts, Rachel Maddow, by a staggering $5 million as the network suffers from ongoing financial problems and a steep decline in ratings.

    As reported by the New York Post, Maddow saw her salary fall from $30 million to $25 million during her contract renegotiations this month. Her show, “The Rachel Maddow Show,” airs weekly on Mondays. Her show has been highlighted as one of the few on the network that is still doing well with viewership in the weeks since the 2024 election.

    “This is a difficult time and they needed to keep her,” said one anonymous executive. “No one else can do what she does. You can’t build a brand like it overnight.”

    As Eric Lendrum writes at American Greatness, the report comes after the news that MSNBC’s parent company Comcast has decided to spin off all of its cable news channels by the end of 2025, as the cable news sector struggles to earn money in comparison to Comcast’s other properties. As such, MSNBC will be split off from NBC News, a move that could force MSNBC to change its name, logo, and headquarters, as well as lay off many employees.

    As part of Maddow’s new deal, she will be allowed to continue producing podcasts and documentaries in addition to her weekly show every Monday. She will also be utilized for breaking news segments during other shows, due to her popularity with MSNBC’s shrinking audience.

    In the period of just over two weeks since the 2024 election on November 5th, MSNBC’s ratings have plunged by 54%. Their Nielsen ratings are down 40% year-over-year.

    “We were so Harris propaganda that when she lost, viewers were shocked,” said one anonymous MSNBC commentator.

    “It turned into one giant echo chamber. If MSNBC wants to be of service to its viewers, they can’t keep them in fantasy land.”

    But the story has a risible ending, as Donald Trump Jr. and Tesla owner Elon Musk joked around on social media about potentially purchasing MSNBC.

    “Hey @elonmusk I have the funniest idea ever!!!” Trump Jr. tweeted in response to the news of Comcast spinning off its news units (including MSNBC). 

    “How much does it cost?” Musk said in response.

    Later Musk said that the outcome would be very “entertaining” if he actually purchased the outlet. 

    Popular podcaster Joe Rogan later chimed into the banter, saying he would like to replace news host Rachel Maddow. 

    “If you buy MSNBC I would like Rachael [sic] Maddow’s job. I will wear the same outfit and glasses, and I will tell the same lies,” Rogan said.

    “Deal,” Musk responded.

    Elsewhere on MSNBC, “Morning Joe” co-hosts Joe Scarborough and Mika Brzezinski have faced backlash from the far-left for their recent decision to meet with President-elect Donald Trump at his Mar-a-Lago estate in Florida.

    They expressed an interest in restoring communications with the 45th and soon-to-be 47th President, even despite their ideological disagreements.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 11/23/2024 – 19:15

  • What Lessons Will Shapiro Take From The 2024 Election?
    What Lessons Will Shapiro Take From The 2024 Election?

    Authored by Guy Ciarrocchi via RealClearPennsylvania,

    Gov. Josh Shapiro was almost selected as Kamala Harris’s running mate, and he wants to be president more than Phillies fans want to win the World Series. As he reflects on the 2024 election, what does he see? How will the lessons he draws affect his governorship, his budget, and how he leads the state?

    Donald Trump carried Pennsylvania, all of the “blue wall” states, and a majority of the popular vote. Incumbent Vice President Kamala Harris – with over $1 billion in campaign cash and the open support of most of legacy media and Hollywood – got less votes than her boss did in 2020.

    Pennsylvania Republican Dave McCormick defeated 18-year incumbent U.S. Sen. Bob Casey. Every other statewide Republican won election, too. The GOP now holds more statewide offices than the Democrats for the first time in a generation.

    Two Pennsylvania Republican challengers defeated Democratic incumbent members of Congress, while the top Republican incumbent targeted by Democrats – Scott Perry – survived.

    The 50-seat Pennsylvania State Senate remains in the GOP’s possession at 28-22, with a new, 29-year-old member from Philadelphia, of all places. The Pennsylvania House stands at 102-101, Democrats. They owe this narrow advantage to spending nearly $5 million to hold on to a statehouse seat in rural Cambria County, a campaign in which they alleged that the 16-year incumbent Democratic member loved Donald Trump more than the Republican challenger.

    We’re getting a sense of what Shapiro thinks he needs to do to become president. The normally gregarious, loquacious governor has lately been quieter than Calvin Coolidge. Thirteen days after the election, after the Democrat-controlled Pennsylvania Supreme Court unanimously ruled that Casey’s legal arguments – and the actions of Democratic county commissioners – were in violation of state law, Shapiro issued a written statement. He advised county officials to follow the law but did not ask Casey to concede.

    Most national Democrat leaders and elected officials – and the ladies on The View – argue that Harris lost because most Americans are misinformed or are bigots or misogynists. (That would be news to the millions of blacks, Hispanics and Jewish voters who voted Republican, and the white voters who don’t see themselves as morally bankrupt, either.) Governor, is it the voters’ fault that Harris lost?

    Pennsylvania Sen. John Fetterman and Vermont Sen. Bernie Sanders have suggested that national Democrats forgot working-class people. Any thoughts, governor?

    National activists and television commentators have suggested that the Democrats need to recommit to progressive policy positions. Maybe Democrats did a poor job of explaining why these polices are desirable. What do you think, governor?

    Most Pennsylvanians don’t care much about post-election analysis at this point. We’re more interested in what Shapiro will do next as governor. Several upcoming decisions will show where he stands. Will he appease the far-left activists in his party, or build bridges to the GOP? Will he refocus on working-class families?

    His 2024 budget grew faster than inflation. Will he try to spend his way to reelection – and perhaps to the White House – or will he be more fiscally conservative in 2025?

    Will 2025 be the year that Shapiro includes scholarships/family-tax-credits in his budget, or will he leave them out – again? In 2024, he cut cyber charter school funding. In the battle of students versus the teachers’ union, who will he support?

    Pennsylvania’s business taxes are among the nation’s highest. Shapiro has pledged to cut them. Will he follow through?

    Small businesses need regulatory reform and tax relief. Will Shapiro move beyond press conferences and embrace true regulatory relief – like “deemed approved” swift green-lighting of applications for licenses and permits? Will he go further to help start new businesses by eliminating licensing for entrepreneurs? Or will he try to buy off would-be entrepreneurs as Harris did, by offering “free” taxpayer money?

    Pennsylvania is home to more natural gas reserves than Saudi Arabia has in oil. Harris talked about banning fracking, then retracted that pledge, then seemed to backtrack again. What does Shapiro think? Will he enforce policies to get our low-cost, clean-burning natural gas out of the ground and into Pennsylvania homes and businesses? Will he support President-elect Trump’s plan to let Pennsylvanians sell liquified natural gas to our European allies, creating jobs and generating tax revenue, while keeping Russian gas out of Poland, Germany, and France?

    Will he give up on his unnecessary, wasteful “green energy” dreams (“PRESS” and “PACER”) – using taxpayer money to subsidize unreliable energy sources, forcing Pennsylvanians to import Chinese materials and green energy products, and thus increasing the cost to heat our homes and operate our factories? Or will he choose common sense, realizing that his green initiative is too costly and creates a disincentive to use the almost-limitless supply of natural gas that lies beneath our feet?

    Will he govern and run for reelection – and eventually for president – as the governor who rescued children from failing schools, helped small businesses grow, and unleashed Pennsylvania’s energy assets? Or, does he see himself as the savior – the superior messenger – of the same left-wing policies that led his party to defeat?

    What message did Shapiro hear from the 2024 election results? Pennsylvanians want to know.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 11/23/2024 – 18:40

  • US Adoptions From Abroad Are Declining
    US Adoptions From Abroad Are Declining

    The number of children adopted from abroad is declining in the United States, according to data from the U.S. Department of State. As Statista’s Anna Fleck details below, where more than 12,700 children were adopted internationally in 2009, that figure has dropped to under 1,300 in 2023.

    Infographic: U.S. Adoptions From Abroad Are Declining | Statista

    You will find more infographics at Statista

    This is due to several reasons.

    For example, although the U.S. signed the Hague Convention on the Protection of Children and Co-operation in Respect of Intercountry Adoption in 1994, it wasn’t until 2008 that it came fully into effect there. Designed to ensure more ethical intercountry adoptions and to prevent the abduction, sale of, or trafficking in children, the Convention requires proof that each given child has been deemed eligible for adoption by the child’s country of origin and that due consideration has been given to finding an adoption placement for the child in its country of origin. Each adoption agency must also be accredited or approved on a Federal level. According to Adoption.com, while the Hague Convention is beneficial it has also led to increased waiting times and fees, with many poorer countries unable to meet standards.

    Looking more closely at country specific examples, Guatemala is frequently held up as an example of what can go wrong when adoptions are commercialized and ethics disregarded, with stories of corruption and of children being kidnapped to then be adopted. These findings led Guatemala to placing a moratorium on new intercountry adoptions in 2008 until a Hague-compliant adoption process could be created and implemented. Until that point, Guatemala had been the only country worldwide to allow fully privatized adoptions, and in 2008 accounted for the second largest group of international adoptees after China.

    In the last two and a half decades, more children from China have been coming to the U.S. as adoptees. Between 1999 and 2023, they numbered almost 83,000 compared with 46,000 from Russia, 30,000 from Guatemala, 21,500 adoptees from South Korea, 16,000 from Ethiopia and 12,000 from Ukraine. China stopped international adoptions during the pandemic, resuming the practice again in 2023, when 16 children were adopted in the U.S. However, this figure is set to fall to zero once more, following an announcement from Beijing that the country will no longer be facilitating intercountry adoptions unless to blood relatives. The move takes place in a country experiencing a shrinking and aging population with a falling birth rate.

    International politics also play a role in the global flows of adoption. This is the case with Russia, which banned adoptions by U.S. parents in 2012 in retaliation to the U.S.’ Magnitsky Act, which had sanctioned Russian officials and nationals for human rights abuses.

    As the chart above shows, where 1,588 Russian children were adopted in 2009, this fell to 0 in 2015, with no children having been adopted from the country since.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 11/23/2024 – 18:05

  • Trump Names Billionaire Scott Bessent As Treasury Secretary
    Trump Names Billionaire Scott Bessent As Treasury Secretary

    After Trump appointed Howard Lutnick as Commerce Secretary and Kevin Warsh was clearly being groomed as Powell’s replacement at the Fed, it was just a matter of time before the most important appointment in the Trump admin was made. That happened late on Friday when president-elect Donald Trump nominated Scott Bessent to lead the Department of the Treasury, ending days of speculation after other names emerged as competitors to the reported favorite.

    Scott Bessent speaks at the National Conservative Conference in Washington

    “Scott is widely respected as one of the world’s foremost international investors and geopolitical and economic strategists. Scott’s story is that of the American Dream,” Trump said in a statement on the nomination.

    Bessent, 62, is a Wall Street veteran who once worked for George Soros, and founder of international macro investment company Key Square Group. He served as a key economic adviser to Trump’s 2024 campaign.

    Others contenders for the role included Howard Lutnick, the chairman and CEO of Cantor Fitzgerald and BGC Partners. He co-chairs the Trump–Vance transition team, which is in charge of selecting administration candidates, vetting personnel, and crafting policy. Lutnick was ultimately chosen on Nov. 19 to lead the Department of Commerce.

    Kevin Warsh, 54, a former Morgan Stanley banker and former Federal Reserve Board governor, likewise entered the conversation. He became the leading candidate for treasury secretary on the betting website Polymarket after reports emerged that the president-elect was expanding his search to fill the position.

    In his statement on Bessent’s nomination, Trump said that economic policy under his administration would maintain the U.S. dollar’s reserve currency status, fortify the United States’s position as the world’s strongest economy, and invigorate the private sector.

    “As a lifelong champion of Main Street America and American industry, Scott will support my policies that will drive U.S. competitiveness, and stop unfair trade imbalances, work to create an economy that places growth at the forefront, especially through our coming world energy dominance,” Trump said.

    The president-elect also noted Bessent’s deep family roots in South Carolina, saying that he belongs to a historic French Huguenot Church, which members of his family founded in the 1680s, in the port city of Charleston.

    Like his predecessors, Bessent will now oversee a vast portfolio to employ the president’s economic agenda.

    As the Epoch Times notes, the two immediate issues Bessent will grapple with will be averting a default as the national debt ceiling limit will expire on Jan. 1, 2025, and extending the Trump-era Tax Cuts and Jobs Act due to expire at the end of next year.

    More importantly, Bessent will also be tasked with the delicate, if not conflicting, job of championing Trump’s trade proposals, including across-the-board tariffs, on one hand, while keeping the debt and deficit in check and preventing bond yields and the dollar from rising too high, too fast, as an even more rapid tightening in financial conditions will surely tip the US economy into recession.

    Bessent previously told CNBC he preferred trade levies to be imposed gradually to ensure higher prices appear over time and allow disinflationary policies to offset tariffs. Additionally, the hedge fund manager has professed support for broad-based tariffs that he believes are “more effective than microeconomic interventions like industrial policy that generally rely on the government to pick winners and losers,” as he wrote in an opinion published by The Economist in October.

    Cryptocurrency could be another area that Bessent – and Trump who has transformed from a rabid crypto skeptic into one of the most ardent fans of bitcoin – will home in on.

    “I have been excited about the president’s embrace of crypto and I think it fits very well with the Republican Party, crypto is about freedom and the crypto economy is here to stay,” he stated in an interview with Fox News earlier this year.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    If confirmed by the Senate in January, Bessent will succeed Janet Yellen. Steven Mnuchin served as Trump’s Treasury secretary during his first term.

    Following Trump’s victory earlier this month, Bessent wrote in The Wall Street Journal that the financial markets were celebrating “the Trump 2.0 economic vision.”

    “Markets are signaling expectations of higher growth, lower volatility and inflation, and a revitalized economy for all Americans,” Bessent wrote.

    Bessent has received support from several prominent Wall Street individuals, including Kyle Bass, the founder of the Dallas-based Hayman Capital Management. “He has a masterful knowledge of the architecture of the global financial system and its players,” Bass told The Epoch Times.

    The hedge fund investor, Bass said, has invested across the globe, formed relationships with global finance ministers and central bankers, and understands financial markets. “Scott is by far the best candidate for the job as Secretary,” Bass said.

    Billionaire Stanley Druckenmiller recently told Axios that Bessent is “not only a market participant but very fluent and comfortable in academic circles.”

    The announcement of the Treasury secretary role was one of the most eagerly awaited decisions among Trump’s cabinet picks, sparking a wide range of reactions on social media platform X.

    Eric Wallerstein, chief markets strategist at Yardeni, praised Scott Bessent, stating, “Bessent is the only candidate who specifically addresses Treasury’s faulty debt management strategy. the best candidate for the job.”

    Even warhawk neocon Lindsey Graham (R-S.C.) expressed support on X, saying, Trump’s economic agenda is “in good hands with Scott Bessent.”

    “He is a great combination of being academically gifted and real world tested,” Graham wrote.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 11/23/2024 – 17:30

  • With Or Without Tariffs, The US Dollar Is A Ponzi
    With Or Without Tariffs, The US Dollar Is A Ponzi

    Via SchiffGold.com,

    With soaring deficits, soaring debt, and interest payments that can only be made by issuing a debt-based currency on which even more interest will be due, the USD can only possibly be described as an elaborate nation-state level bankster Ponzi scheme. 

    Dollars are backed by debt, which requires infinite economic growth to service. 

    Without constant inflation to erode the debt’s value, transferring wealth from savers to the government and bankers, it all falls apart. 

    Without new borrowers to sustain current spending, it all falls apart.

    Without a petrodollar system where the USD is no longer the world reserve currency, and other countries no longer are forced at gunpoint to use dollars, it all falls apart.

    Just as a Ponzi scheme collapses when enough investors lose confidence in it, because there’s no underlying value and not enough new suckers to pay back previous waves of investors, the USD collapses under the same scenario.

    And while I see the surface-level, superficial appeal of president-elect Donald Trump’s plan to replace the income tax with tariffs, there’s (at least) one very big problem. We’re in a country that, for decades, hasn’t had a manufacturing base, making the economic viability of the plan incredibly questionable. Even if it somehow worked, it wouldn’t solve the problem of the world’s largest economies being based on glorified, state-sanctioned Ponzi schemes.

    Until we revert back to dollars that are pegged to something of real value, like gold, the scam will continue. And it’s gone on for so long that tremendous economic pain is now a prerequisite for weaning ourselves off of it. Just as a Ponzi scheme collapsing harms everyone unlucky enough to be involved, the unwinding of the petrodollar USD Ponzi will hurt every American and, indeed, people all around the world as it reels under the chaos of the realization that the dollar was hollow all along, and the line of new suckers to buy US debt has officially dried up.

    Total Public Debt, U.S.

    With 10-year Treasury yields rising and major pressure on interest rates to go higher, the Fed and Trump are desperate to keep them low. But at $35 trillion, our debt bomb isn’t going away, and the deficit isn’t going anywhere. A heavier interest payment burden and QE are going to blow the USD Ponzi balloon bigger and bigger, so the only question will be when it pops.

    Painful as the explosion will be, it’s unavoidable and necessary, and will only be more severe the longer the Ponzi goes on. Just as more investors get hurt, and more spectacularly so, when a Ponzi is able to grow larger, the US dollar collapse will be more painful the longer the can is kicked down the road. This reset will be an opportunity to go back to sound money, but as in the 2008 crisis, the same elites that caused it will try to exploit it as an opportunity to implement an increasingly centralized system that gives them even more control.

    Unfortunately, we’re past the event horizon for the Ponzi. Past the point of no return. No amount of economic tinkering, even of the right sort and on a big-enough scale, from Trump or anyone else, can reverse or solve the problem without a major implosion causing terrible pain across the economy. Gold is one way to protect yourself from the fallout, but when it comes crashing down, no one will be immune to the effects of such a spectacular burst.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 11/23/2024 – 17:30

  • Winter Storm Threat Looms Over Thanksgiving Travel Week In Mid-Atlantic & Northeast
    Winter Storm Threat Looms Over Thanksgiving Travel Week In Mid-Atlantic & Northeast

    While folks across the Mid-Atlantic and Northeast are still recovering from the snow and rain storm that swept through the region late last week, another storm might impact the Interstate 95 highway network between Washington, DC, and New York City just ahead of the Thanksgiving travel holiday. 

    Private weather forecaster BAMWX wrote on X that over 100 blended weather model ensembles show a potential winter storm traversing the Mid-Alantic area into parts of the Northeast around Thanksgiving.

    “Right now a multi model probability % forecast for #thanksgiving is starting to indicate a risk for 4″ + snow Wednesday into Thursday,” BAMWX said. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    In a separate note, FOX Weather meteorologist Cody Braud told NYPost, “There is 100% going to be a system knocking on our door, we just don’t quite know the timing yet.” 

    “I would plan for a really bad travel day Friday, because that low is likely going to be just offshore, bringing strong winds, rain, probably snow,” Braud noted.

    Trans-Siberian Express?? 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Great news for NatGas prices.

    The threat of winter weather across the Mid-Atlantic and Northeast coincides with AAA’s forecast that 79.9 million people will travel at least 50 miles from their homes during the Thanksgiving holiday travel period.

    “Thanksgiving is the busiest holiday for travel, and this year we’re expecting to set new records across the board, from driving to flying and cruising,” Stacey Barber, Vice President of AAA Travel, wrote in a note last week.

    Keep an eye on the weather models as we approach the travel holiday week.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 11/23/2024 – 16:55

  • Trump Plans To Use Impoundment To Cut Spending – What Is It?
    Trump Plans To Use Impoundment To Cut Spending – What Is It?

    Authored by Lawrence Wilson via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    President-elect Donald Trump has said he intends to cut government spending by reasserting the presidential power of impoundment, a move certain to spark a court battle and one that could redefine presidential power for decades to come.

    Illustration by The Epoch Times, Shutterstock, Madalina Vasiliu/The Epoch Times

    Impoundment occurs when the president chooses not to disburse funds authorized by Congress; instead leaving them unspent in the U.S. Treasury.

    This power is not mentioned in the Constitution but has been employed by presidents since Thomas Jefferson. Congress enacted limits on the practice 50 years ago.

    Now, Trump intends to challenge the Impoundment Control Act of 1974 (ICA), which he believes is unconstitutional.

    “I will use the president’s long-recognized Impoundment Power to squeeze the bloated federal bureaucracy for massive savings,” Trump said when announcing his plan in June 2023.

    Others say the ICA was needed to prevent the misuse of impoundment to alter congressional spending priorities, not merely eliminate waste.

    Expanded use of impoundment power seems certain to be challenged in court.

    Resolution is likely to hinge on two constitutional questions that define the balance of power between the executive and legislative branches of the federal government.

    Jefferson appears to have been the first to use impoundment.

    In 1803 he delayed purchasing gunboats to patrol the Mississippi River because they were no longer needed after the United States acquired the Louisiana Territory from France.

    Since then, most presidents appear to have used the practice from time to time, and usually because the spending was no longer in the public interest.

    President Ulysses S. Grant used impoundment to prevent federal funds from being used on river or harbor projects that would benefit private parties rather than the public.

    President Franklin Roosevelt used it to limit spending on civilian construction projects to concentrate on wartime spending.

    President Lyndon Johnson impounded some money to reduce inflation.

    President Richard Nixon used the practice more frequently than previous executives, and his use of impoundment represented “a difference in kind, not simply in degree” from his predecessors, according to Joshua Chafetz a professor of law and politics at Georgetown University.

    Nixon’s opponents argued that he was assuming the power to do away with certain government programs by simply starving them of funds, which violated the will of Congress.

    President Richard Nixon delivers his State of the Union speech on Jan. 22, 1970. Pictorial Parade/Archive Photos/Getty Images

    His team argued that presidents have a duty to consider other factors, including inflation, when deciding if or when to release government funds.

    Congress then passed the ICA, which, in addition to reforming the congressional budgeting process, strictly limited the executive’s ability to cut or delay spending the money appropriated by Congress.

    Nixon signed the bill into law.

    The ICA stipulates that presidents must ask congressional permission to impound funds. The president can ask Congress to permit either a recision or a deferral of spending.

    A recision is a spending cut.

    When the president asks Congress to cut certain spending, he may defer that spending for up to 45 days while Congress considers the matter.

    If Congress does not grant the request, the president must release the funds.

    A deferral is a delay in spending certain funds to a later point within the current fiscal year.

    If Congress doesn’t respond to the deferral request, the president may defer the spending.

    Robert Kravchuk, professor emeritus of public policy at Indiana University told The Epoch Times: “In one case, he’d have to hear positively from Congress not to spend money, and that’s the recision.

    “In the second case, he hears nothing, then he could go through with his deferral, but he can’t defer it to the next year or the year after that.”

    The U.S. Capitol in Washington on Nov. 19, 2024. The president can ask Congress to permit either a recision or a deferral of spending. Madalina Vasiliu/The Epoch Times

    Trump’s Challenge

    Article II of the U.S. Constitution states that the president must “take Care that the Laws be faithfully executed.”

    Trump has said the ICA violates that clause because it strips the president of discretion in how best to achieve the government’s purposes.

    “The [ICA] dramatically limited impoundment, the power of the president to choose not to unnecessarily spend taxpayer dollars, forcing the executive branch to spend every penny of congressionally appropriated funds,” Trump wrote in his statement.

    A second argument in favor of impoundment is that congressional appropriations specify a maximum amount that may be spent, not a minimum.

    “Congress has the ‘power of the purse,’ so its appropriations necessarily set a ceiling on federal spending for a particular purpose, but it should not set the floor,” Trump said.

    That argument was made as early as 1876 when Secretary of War James Cameron wrote that “spending the full amount” of an appropriation “was in no way mandatory.”

    Read the rest here…

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 11/23/2024 – 16:20

  • Viktor Orban Invites Netanyahu To Visit Hungary, Flouting ICC Arrest Warrant
    Viktor Orban Invites Netanyahu To Visit Hungary, Flouting ICC Arrest Warrant

    Hungarian Prime Minister Viktor Orban has issued formal invitation for his Israeli counterpart Benjamin Netanyahu to visit his country, Orban’s office has confirmed. This follows immediately on the heels of The Hague-based International Criminal Court (ICC) issuing final arrest warrants for Netanyahu and ex-Defense Minister Yoav Gallant for overseeing alleged war crimes in Gaza.

    “Today I will invite Israel’s prime minister, Mr. Netanyahu, for a visit to Hungary and in that invite I will guarantee him that if he comes, the ICC ruling will have no effect in Hungary, and we will not follow its contents,” Orban said Friday.

    In 2017, via GPO/Flash90

    Hungary currently holds the European Union’s rotating six-month presidency, and this sets Orban up once again to clash with EU consensus, given EU foreign policy chief Josep Borrell has demanded that all member states execute the arrest warrant if Netanyahu or Gallant travel to their territories.

    Orban on Friday told state radio that the ICC move is “wrong” and asserted that the Israeli prime minister would be able to engage in talks in Hungary “in adequate safety”.

    The NY Times further cited Orban as saying the following:

    Inviting Mr. Netanyahu to visit, he said that Hungary “will ensure your safety and freedom.”

    Mr. Orban’s vow to protect Mr. Netanyahu from arrest made Hungary the first European Union country to openly flout the I.C.C. ruling.

    Thursday’s ICC warrant issuance also got a swift response from the White House, which said it “fundamentally rejects” the move and won’t recognize it (though the US has never been a member state of the ICC).

    “Let me be clear once again: whatever the ICC might imply, there is no equivalence — none — between Israel and Hamas. We will always stand with Israel against threats to its security” President Joe Biden said in reaction, agreeing with Israel that it is “outrageous.”

    The reaction in Europe has been mixed. While all 27 member states of the EU are part of the ICC, and the majority have said they plan to enforce the ruling. However, Germany has said it is “examining” how to respond while signaling it’s unlikely to enforce it if PM Netanyahu visits the country.

    But none have been so bold as Orban in quickly issuing an open invitation for Netanyahu to visit, in direct defiance of the ICC, despite Hungary being a signatory to the Rome Statutes.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 11/23/2024 – 15:45

  • F-35's Cooling Crisis: Design Flaws Fuel $2 Trillion Dilemma For Pentagon
    F-35’s Cooling Crisis: Design Flaws Fuel $2 Trillion Dilemma For Pentagon

    Authored by Mike Fredenburg via The Epoch Times,

    The Pentagon is facing a difficult decision regarding the F-35’s chronic, crippling problems with overheating brought on by its insufficient cooling capacity.

    Should the U.S. taxpayers pay for a costly upgrade to the stealth fighter’s cooling that will handle its immediate needs, or should U.S. taxpayers pay for a far more expensive upgrade that theoretically could handle increased future cooling needs?

    Before we briefly address the two options facing the Pentagon, let’s look at why cooling capacity is so important for the F-35 and why the most expensive weapons system program in world history produced a plane that was destined to have inadequate cooling from the very beginning.

    Having adequate cooling is vital because a fighter’s avionics, radar, and other electronics-based systems generate heat. While air cooling is always part of the cooling solution, modern fighters cram so much heat-producing electronics into a relatively small space that air cooling alone is insufficient.

    Various types of liquid cooling are necessary, especially for power-hungry radars. This is particularly true of the F-35, which is advertised as a flying supercomputer crammed full of heat-producing computers, communications, and avionics equipment. When it comes to heat production, its powerful AN/APG-81 AESA radar leads the way.

    The bottom line is that it takes a whole bunch of electronics to produce a whole bunch of heat to give the F-35 its much-touted capabilities and make it the world’s preeminent fighter.

    Regardless of the validity of the claims to preeminence, there is zero doubt that the F-35’s designers designed a fighter that, from the outset, had insufficient cooling. This nearly intractable problem has been exacerbated as new capabilities are added, requiring more computing power and generating more heat. In particular, the group of new Block IV capabilities that we are told are necessary for the F-35 to fulfill its long overdue promise of being a dominant fifth-generation fighter will require a whole bunch more cooling.

    The underlying issue powering the cooling crisis is that the F-35 design team only designed the F-35 with 14 kilowatts (kW) of cooling power. Yet the F-35 was not declared fully operational until Block 3F capabilities were incorporated—capabilities that required roughly 32 kW of cooling and have only recently been rolled out, some 30 years after development began on the F-35 Joint Strike Fighter. The Block 3F upgrade necessitated modifying the F-35’s cooling system. It negatively impacted the longevity and reliability of the F-35’s F135 engine, which was already struggling with reliability issues.

    So why was the F-35’s cooling capacity initially so under-specced?

    The answer to this question is also the answer to most of the problems that have plagued a plane that came out of a design-by-committee process—a process that took what was supposed to be a low-cost, relatively lightweight replacement for the F-16 and the F/A-18 A and C Hornet that would complement bigger, more expensive fighters like the F-22 and the Navy’s F/A-18E/F Super Hornet.

    Ultimately, what was supposed to be a relatively low-cost, lighter complement to large twin-engined fighters like the F-22 and F/A-18E/F became a single-engine fighter heavier than many twin-engined fighters.

    The massive weight of the F-35 meant that Pratt & Whitney had to design an engine with a far higher power-to-weight ratio than the F-22’s still cutting-edge F119 engine. It also meant that the F-35 had to undergo a draconic weight reduction program where every ounce mattered. Pratt & Whitney succeeded in getting the power by ramping up the operating temperature far beyond what had ever been done for a production fighter engine.

    Still, as time has proven, the massive increase in turbine inlet temperature to an insane 3,600 degrees Fahrenheit—900 to 1,100 degrees more than most other jet fighter engines—ensured that the engine would suffer from reliability and longevity issues. The fact that engine power is required for cooling only exacerbated the problem as power requirements for each F-35 capability upgrade added the need for more cooling, which meant the F-35 engine was subjected to more stress.

    That this would be the case had to be understood by the F-35 design team, but they also understood that without the massive increase in engine power only possible by pushing the F-35 engine operating temperature far into bleeding edge territory, the F-35 program was dead in the water and that adding any weight for anything would also seriously jeopardize the program.

    Consequently, the decision to under-spec the F-35 cooling capacity happened because incorporating enough cooling capacity into the F-35’s design to allow for reasonable growth would have added weight that would have reduced the range and payload of all the F-35 variants, but in particular, the Marine’s VTOL capable F-35 where any additional weight threatened to lower its range and payload combination below minimum acceptable performance parameters.

    If truth be told, the capabilities crammed into the F-35 would have made sense for a two-engine design. However, changing the F-35 to a twin-engine design was a no-go because it would have immediately dispelled the illusion that the F-35 was going to be a low-cost replacement for the F-16. Just as importantly, there was no twin-engine vertical and take-off landing (VTOL) F-35 design for the Marine Corps.

    So, in the end, the F-35 was released with an engine destined to be unreliable with a cooling capacity that no experienced aerospace engineer could have credibly claimed would meet future cooling needs.

    This brings us back to the question of whether it makes sense to go with an expensive short-term solution or a costly longer-term cooling solution. From a sales perspective, this is a choice of two positives that the Pentagon would like us to focus on. But before committing to the options being presented, let’s consider that the current F-35 engines are wearing out faster than promised. The engine control units that will supposedly make them reliable are not due to have their design completed until 2029.

    Also, consider that the program cost, including sustainment, is now projected to be over $2 trillion, 400 percent more in inflation-adjusted dollars than its 2007 GAO estimate. Further, as has happened so many times before, the cost estimate could grow once again.

    Finally, there is no guarantee that the desperately needed engine core upgrade from Pratt & Whitney, which is supposed to be delivered in 2029, will be delivered on time or that it will actually make the F-35 engine reliable.

    Consequently, given that the level of risk and costs for the F-35 program only seems to be growing, maybe we should think of a creative way to get our existing  F-35s flying with some reasonable level of reliability. Before building new F-35s, a carefully chosen set of hardware and software capabilities that do not require increases in power and cooling should be considered.

    Doing this would be a significant achievement!

    Views expressed in this article are opinions of the author and do not necessarily reflect the views of The Epoch Times or ZeroHedge.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 11/23/2024 – 15:10

  • IMF Calls For Economy-Crushing Carbon Restrictions That Dwarf COVID Lockdowns
    IMF Calls For Economy-Crushing Carbon Restrictions That Dwarf COVID Lockdowns

    At the height of the covid lockdowns and mandates a massive portion of the global economy was shut down, leading to supply chain instability, huge job losses and a stagflationary crisis.  However, climate change propagandists argued that the event was actually a positive for the planet when it was revealed that emissions fell by 5.4%.  They asserted that the covid lockdowns were a practice run for what they called “climate lockdowns” – Presenting a plan for scheduled disruptions to global economic activity as a means to slow the effects of climate change.  

    Globalists also presented climate lockdowns as a kind of collective social punishment in the event that populations refused to cut carbon output on their own.  As World Economic Forum “Agenda Contributor” Mariana Mazzucato argued in 2020:

    “Under a “climate lockdown,” governments would limit private-vehicle use, ban consumption of red meat, and impose extreme energy-saving measures, while fossil-fuel companies would have to stop drilling. To avoid such a scenario, we must overhaul our economic structures and do capitalism differently.

    Many think of the climate crisis as distinct from the health and economic crises caused by the pandemic. But the three crises – and their solutions – are interconnected…”

    After a public uproar over the notion of extending pandemic lockdowns into climate lockdowns, the establishment media would go on to “Fact Check” the issue and assert that it was a “conspiracy theory.”  They lied.

    The pandemic lockdowns would eventually be exposed as pointless; a disastrous drain on the global economy that did nothing to prevent the spread of the covid virus.  But as we witnessed with most of the restrictions instituted during covid, the goal was never to protect the health of the populace.  Rather, the goal was to acclimate the populace to an exponentially increasing list of violations of their basic freedoms.

    One organization that has a distinct interest in diminishing economic activity for the sake of preventing global warming is the International Monetary Fund (IMF).  In a recent ‘call for global climate action’ the IMF states that restrictions on economic activity and general emissions activity would have to far surpass those enforced during the pandemic in order to get to their stated temperature target of less than 1.5°C. 

    Open lockdowns of developed nations might not ultimately be the tool that globalists use to reach net zero, but carbon taxation on an oppressive scale could end up having the same effect.  Carbon taxes could act like steep interest rate increases commonly used by central banks to slow economic activity during inflation.  An indirect economic shut down of this magnitude would be absolutely devastating for western nations in particular, resulting in crippling energy shortages, food shortages, job losses, and eventually total collapse and a population plunge. 

    Net zero is not possible otherwise.

    The IMF and other globalist organizations suggest that all nations must achieve a net zero carbon goal by 2030 in order to avoid the “climate cliff” – The theory that once the Earth hits warming of more than 1.5°C, there will be a domino effect which will lead to environmental catastrophe and even more carbon emissions and warming.

    To be clear, there is no evidence whatsoever to support the idea of the climate cliff, primarily because there is no evidence of a causation relationship between carbon emissions and global warming.  In fact, there is no evidence that that human industry has a warming effect on the climate whatsoever.

    Temperature records for hundreds of millions of years prove that warming periods are a mainstay of the Earth’s climate history.  In comparison, our current era is one of the coldest, not the warmest.  Climate scientists ignore this data and use temperature records going back to the 1880s.  Meaning, their data is based on a mere 140 years of the Earth’s history.

    The current warming rate is not significant to other periods, nor is there any evidence that human activity is causing it.  Data on carbon levels of the past show that temperatures do not necessarily rise in tandem with carbon activity.  Carbon emissions are also far lower today than they have been in the past. The claim that carbon concentration due to human activity has a drastic influence on global temperatures (or weather) is absolutely unfounded.

    The real reason for climate controls and carbon taxes seems to have far more to do with wealth redistribution from developed nations over to developing nations.  The agenda is about centralizing the control of national wealth as well as individual liberties and private property.  And the IMF, of course, would like to be one of the institutions at the helm of that wealth management empire.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 11/23/2024 – 14:35

  • Market Forecasts Are Very Bullish
    Market Forecasts Are Very Bullish

    Authored by Lance Roberts via RealInvestmentAdvice.com,

    A Holiday Rally Is Likely

    Last week, we discussed the impact of the Trump Presidency on the financial markets based on expectations of tax cuts, tariffs, and deregulation. Since then, the “Trump Trade” went into full swing, pushing the markets higher; however, as we noted, that the trading had gotten a bit ahead of itself, and we saw some consolidation and profit-taking that reverted the market to the 20-DMA. Such is unsurprising given the overbought conditions with a more extreme deviation from the 50-DMA. However, the market recovered somewhat this past week, with buyers entering and reversing early morning market declines.

    Notably, after holding support at the 20-DMA for several days, the market gained some traction late in the week. That buying pressure will likely reverse the short-term MACD sell signal, allowing the market to rally further next week.

    That action aligns with Friday’s Daily Market Commentary, wherein we noted the market seemed to be setting itself up for a pre and post-holiday trading bump into the end of the month. To wit:

    “The good news is that we just past the normal “weak” period for the market in November. While not always the case, on average, the market trends to trade better the week before and after the Thanksgiving holiday. If that turns out to be the case again this year, a retest of recent highs at 6000 seems likely.”

    While the trade into month-end tends to be positive, we expect to see another patch of weakness in early December as mutual funds complete their annual distributions. However, post that weakness, the bullish bias remains into year-end as professionals window dress their portfolios for year-end reporting.

    If you are underweight equities, consider minor pullbacks and consolidations to add exposure as needed to bring portfolios to target weights. Pullbacks will likely be shallow, but being ready to deploy capital will be beneficial. Once we pass the inauguration, we can assess what policies will likely be enacted and adjust portfolios accordingly.

    While there is no reason to be bearish, this does not mean you should abandon risk management. As we will discuss this week, the market forecasts for 2025 are exceedingly optimistic.

    Market Forecasts Are Very Bullish

    It’s that time of year when Wall Street analysts begin trotting out their predictions for where the S&P 500 index will be by the end of the coming year. As is always the case, these market forecasts are ALWAYS higher, and this year is no expectation.

    Goldman Sachs and BMO have already forecasted that the market will rise to 6500 and 6700, respectively, by the end of 2025. However, one of the more interesting market forecasts came from long-time bear Michael Wilson of Morgan Stanley. This past week, he matched Goldman’s forecast of 6500 as a base case with a bullish case of 7400. That is interesting because Michael Wilson has been a long-time market bear.

    His basis for that call was quite interesting:

    “A potential rise in corporate animal spirits post the election (as we saw following the 2016 election) could catalyze a more balanced earnings profile across the market in 2025.” 

    If you don’t understand the importance of “animal spirits,” we discussed this in detail concerning Yardeni’s recent prediction of S&P 10000 by the end of the decade:

    “The term Animal Spirits” comes from the Latin term “spiritus animals,” meaning “the breath that awakens the human mind. Its modern usage came about in John Maynard Keynes’ 1936 publication, “The General Theory of Employment, Interest, and Money.” He used the term to describe the human emotions driving consumer confidence. Ultimately, the financial markets adopted the “animal spirits” to describe the psychological factors that drive investors to take action. This is why human psychology is essential in understanding the close linkage to short-term valuation measures.

    Note that this has nothing to do with underlying fundamentals; it is purely “sentiment” or “hope” that things will improve. However, as investors, we must focus on the ultimate driver of market prices over time: earnings. Three very obvious facts about earning growth currently should concern investors heading into next year.

    First, as noted in last week’s Bull Bear Report, valuations on both a forward and trailing basis are significantly elevated. While this does NOT mean the market is about to crash, it does suggest that earnings have not kept up with investor’s expectations. The problem with elevated valuations is the risk an event occurs that causes investors to realign expectations with actual reality.

    Secondly, earnings expectations, which support Wall Street’s market forecasts, are very optimistic.

    Lastly, the equity risk premium currently suggests that investors are not getting “paid” for the risk they are taking. We last saw equity risk premiums at these levels heading into the “Dot.com” bubble.

    Let me reiterate that none of this data suggests a market crash is imminent. However, investors should be aware that given the current market conditions, the risk of disappointment in the future is much greater today than it was just two years ago.

    The Historical Problem Of Analyst Market Forecasts

    Here is the critical question for investors: “If the market is priced based on future earnings expectations, then how reliable are those estimates?” The chart below is from Yardeni Research and shows the evolution of earnings forecasts over time. You will notice that analysts’ initial forecasts were wrong in almost every case.

    In other words, if you bought stocks at the beginning of virtually every analyst’s annual forecast, based on the assumption that earnings would grow, you overpaid for investments virtually every given year. However, in most cases, you make money anyway, so why worry about it?

    The reason to worry is that over-estimation eventually leads to reverting events.

    The biggest single problem with Wall Street today and in the past is the consistent disregard for the possibilities of unexpected, random events. In a 2010 study by the McKinsey Group, they found that analysts have been persistently overly optimistic for 25 years. During the 25-year time frame, Wall Street analysts pegged earnings growth at 10-12% a year when, in reality, earnings grew at 6%, which, as we have discussed in the past, is the economy’s growth rate.

    This is why using forward earnings estimates as a valuation metric is so incredibly flawed—the estimates are always overly optimistic.

    As the McKenzie study noted, on average, “analysts’ forecasts have been almost 100% too high,” which leads investors to make much more aggressive bets in the financial markets. 

    With valuations elevated, why are analysts once again pushing more optimistic forecasts?

    Why Are Analysts Always So Optimistic?

    It’s a great question.

    Wall Street is a group of highly conflicted marketing and PR firms. Companies hire Wall Street to “market” for them so that their stock prices will rise, and with executive pay tied to stock-based compensation, you can understand their desire. The chart below is from the survey conducted by WSJ researchers, showing the main factors that play into analysts’ compensation. What analysts are “paid” to do is quite different from what retail investors “think” they do.

    If analysts are bearish on the companies they cover, their access to information about them is cut off. This reduces fees from the company to the Wall Street firm, hurting their revenue. Furthermore, Wall Street has to have a customer to sell their products to—you.

    Talk about conflicted. Just ask yourself why Wall Street spends billions of dollars each year in marketing and advertising just to keep you invested at all times.

    Since optimism is what sells products, it is not surprising, as we head into 2025, to see Wall Street’s average expectation ratcheted up another 7.5% this year. Of course, comparing your portfolio to the market is often a mistake anyway. Unsurprisingly, earnings have grown at 7.5% over the last 70 years because the companies that make up the stock market reflect real economic growth. Stocks cannot outgrow the economy in the long term. 

    “Since 1947, earnings per share have grown at 7.7% annually, while the economy expanded by 6.40% annually. That close relationship in growth rates should be logical, particularly given the significant role that consumer spending has in the GDP equation.”

    This correlation is more apparent when looking at corporate profits as a percentage of GDP versus stock prices.

    With future earnings already being revised lower for 2025, as seen below, and corporate profitability at risk due to less government stimulus and fiscal support, the risk of current market forecasts being overly optimistic is likely elevated.

    The Headwinds In 2025

    The problem with current forward estimates is that several factors must exist to sustain historically high earnings growth and record corporate profitability.

    1. Economic growth must remain more robust than the average 20-year growth rate.

    2. Wage and labor growth must reverse (weaken) to sustain historically elevated profit margins.

    3. Both interest rates and inflation need to decline to support consumer spending.

    4. Trump’s planned tariffs will increase costs on some products and may not be fully offset by replacement and substitution.

    5. Reductions in Government spending, debt issuance, and the deficit subtract from corporate profitability (Kalecki Profit Equation).

    6. Slower economic growth in China, Europe, and Japan reduces demand for U.S. exports, slowing economic growth.

    7. The Federal Reserve maintaining higher interest rates and continuing to reduce its balance sheet will reduce market liquidity.

    You get the idea. While analysts are currently very optimistic about economic and earnings growth going into 2025, there are risks to those forecasts. For example, on December 7th, 2021, we wrote an article about the predictions for 2022.

    “There is one thing about Goldman Sachs that is always consistent; they are ‘bullish.’ Of course, given that the market is positive more often than negative, it ‘pays’ to be bullish when your company sells products to hungry investors. It is important to remember that Goldman Sachs was wrong when it was most important, particularly in 2000 and 2008.

    However, in keeping with its traditional bullishness, Goldman’s chief equity strategist David Kostin forecasted the S&P 500 will climb by 9% to 5100 at year-end 2022. As he notes, such will “reflect a prospective total return of 10% including dividends.”

    The problem, of course, is that the S&P 500 did NOT end the year at 5100.

    While analysts are currently rushing to “out-predict” the other guys, it is worth noting:

    In other words, after 15 straight years of a bull market advance, The “risk” of something derailing continued optimistic expectations has risen significantly.

    While the odds of a positive year in 2025 are more or less balanced, one should not dismiss the potential for a decline. With the current market already well advanced, pushing more extreme overvaluations, and significant deviations from long-term means, the risk of a decline is not minuscule.

    How We Are Trading It

    With this in mind, we suggest focusing on what is important to you: your specific goals, risk tolerance, and time frames, and conservatively growing your savings to outpace inflation.

    This is why we always focus on risk management. Greater returns are generated from managing “risks” rather than attempting to create returns. Although it may seem contradictory, embracing uncertainty reduces risk while denial increases it.

    Another benefit of acknowledging uncertainty is it keeps you honest.

    “A healthy respect for uncertainty and focus on probability drives you never to be satisfied with your conclusions.  It keeps you moving forward to seek out more information, to question conventional thinking and to continually refine your judgments and understanding that difference between certainty and likelihood can make all the difference.”  – Robert Rubin

    We can’t control outcomes; the most we can do is influence the probability of specific outcomes. Thus, managing risks daily and investing based on probabilities rather than possibilities is vital to capital preservation and investment success over time.

    I read most mainstream analysts’ predictions to gauge the “consensus.” This year, more so than most, the outlook for 2025 is universally, and to some degree exuberantly, bullish.

    What comes to mind is Bob Farrell’s Rule #9, which states:

    “When everyone agrees…something else is bound to happen.”

    The real economy is not supportive of asset prices at current levels. The more extended prices become the greater the potential for a future market dislocation. For investors close to or in retirement, some consideration should be given to capital preservation over chasing potential market returns.

    Will 2025 turn in another positive performance? Maybe. But, honestly, I don’t know.

    As noted last week, the stock market reflects both challenges and opportunities. Therefore, we can take action to participate if the market continues its bullish trend but hedge against the risk of something going wrong.

    1. Build a diversified portfolio and adjust based on evidence, not fear.
    2. Keep perspective,
    3. Focus on your financial goals and;
    4. Communicate with your financial advisor to remain steady amid uncertainty.

    While there is no reason to be bearish, this does not mean you should abandon risk management.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 11/23/2024 – 14:00

  • Chinese Defense Minister Rebuffs Austin's Request For Military Talks Over Taiwan Support
    Chinese Defense Minister Rebuffs Austin’s Request For Military Talks Over Taiwan Support

    China’s military has once again blamed Washington for the breakdown of talks, with the Chinese Defense Ministry blasting US support to Taiwan as the reason for Chinese defense chief Dong Jun rebuffing a direct request for dialogue from US Secretary of Defense Lloyd Austin this week.

    Both leaders were in Laos for meetings with Southeast Asian officials on Thursday. “The responsibility lies fully with the American side,” said Chinese Defense Ministry spokesman Wu Qian.

    AFP via Getty Images

    “The US side cannot undermine China’s core interests on the Taiwan issue, yet at the same time try to conduct exchanges with the [mainland] Chinese military as if nothing had happened,” the statement said.

    Wu explained that the US must “immediately correct its mistake, earnestly respect China’s core interests, and strive to create favorable conditions for high-level exchanges between the two militaries.”

    Austin’s reaction was as follows: “It’s unfortunate. It affects the region because the region really wants to see us, you know, two significant players in the region, two significant powers, talk to each other,” he told reporters.

    Just weeks ago, late last month, the Biden administration unveiled $2 billion more in approved arms sales to Taiwan, including an advanced surface-to-air missile defense system, which drew Beijing’s swift rebuke and anger.

    CNN reported earlier that the package “includes three National Advanced Surface-to-Air Missile Systems (NASAMS) and related equipment valued at up to $1.16 billion, according to the US State Department’s Bureau of Political-Military Affairs.” Radar systems were also listed, at over $800 million.

    While high level military-to-military contacts between the US and China resumed earlier this year, having been off since then House Speaker Nancy Pelosi’s ultra provocative visit to Taiwan, the official dialogue appears on ice again.

    Taiwanese President Lai Ching-te is meanwhile planning to visit the self-governing island’s allies in the South Pacific in the opening week of December, including the Marshall Islands, Tuvalu and Palau.

    He might pause in the US while on the tour, which China will watch closely. “Taiwan’s government has yet to confirm whether Lai will make a stop in Hawaii, although such visits are routine and unconfirmed Taiwanese media reports say he will stay for more than one day,” The Associated Press writes.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 11/23/2024 – 13:25

  • The Home-Based Battery Storage Fantasy
    The Home-Based Battery Storage Fantasy

    Authored by Jonathan Lesser via RealClearEnergy,

    According to a recent article published in The Conversation, installing millions of storage batteries distributed through the grid — in homes, businesses, and local communities – coupled with wind and solar generation, can avoid investments in new transmission infrastructure. But unless installing those batteries is accompanied by physically disconnecting from the grid, or consumers are willing to forgo reliable electricity, this claim is yet another example of electricity “magical thinking.”

    Electricity customers, both residential and industrial, need to be aware of this home-based battery storage fantasy.

    First, batteries store electricity; they don’t generate it. But the move towards electrifying the U.S. motor vehicle fleet, along with electrifying space and water heating, will double electricity consumption. Although some of the additional electricity needed may come from distributed sources such as rooftop solar, green energy advocates claim that most of the needed electricity will be generated at large-scale wind and solar facilities located far from cities and towns.

    The article also claims, “[w]e could get by with fewer transmission lines if we store more solar and wind power for later.” But delivering the additional electricity needed will require building new transmission lines, regardless of how much battery storage is installed in homes and in local communities. Moreover, local distribution systems—the poles and wires running down streets—will also have to be upgraded to handle the additional loads.

    Second, the costs of building sufficient battery capacity (to say nothing of the costs of additional wind and solar generation) to ensure homes and local communities do not suffer from extended blackouts will be prohibitive.

    The numbers tell the story.

    In the U.S., a typical residential household consumes around 10,800 kWh annually, or about 30 kWh per day. Of course, the amount varies depending on the size of home, the region of the country, and the season of the year. With electrified space and water heat, some regions of the country where electricity demand now peaks in summer will see demand peak in winter, while existing winter-peaking regions will see winter demand spike even further.

    According to a U.S. Department of Energy model, a heat pump in a typical home will consume about 5,500 kWh annually. That alone represents a 50% increase in electricity use. Charging a typical EV adds another 4,300 kWh annually. In total, those will add almost 10,000 kWh of consumption annually, roughly doubling current consumption to about 60 kWh per day, although the increase will be greatest in winter when heating loads peak.

    Supplying the additional electricity while ensuring the same level of service reliability (i.e., no extended outages or limiting consumers’ access to electricity because of insufficient supplies) will require enough battery storage to provide electricity at night and over multi-day periods when there is little wind and sun available to recharge those batteries. Although the article recommends using consumers’ EVs to supply electricity, few consumers will likely wish to wake up to an uncharged EV and an inability to travel, especially if there is no stored electricity available to recharge their EVs.

    Using the U.S. consumption averages, if existing local distribution systems can serve today’s average load of 30 kWh/day, then enough battery storage must be built to supply the remaining 30 kWh. and, more importantly, the peak power demand of electric heat pumps and EV chargers. A typical Level 2 home EV charger, for example, can draw 20 kilowatts (kW). A heat pump can draw 7 kW.

    The largest Tesla Powerwall, which is designed for home use, provides a maximum of 11.5 kW of power and 13.5 kWh of storage under ideal conditions. (When temperatures fall, so does battery capacity and efficiency.) Hence, at least three Powerwall units would be required to provide a typical home with sufficient electricity to supplement existing grid capacity. For one million homes, that means three million Powerwall units providing a maximum of 40.5 million kWh (40,500 megawatt-hours) of battery storage.

    At a cost of around $12,000 installed, that translates into a cost of $36,000 per home. The U.S. has over 80 million single-family homes and over 130 million dwelling units. Hence, 240 million Powerwall units would be required just for single-family homes, costing almost $3 trillion. By comparison, Tesla’s current manufacturing capacity is 700,000 units per year. Thus, outfitting all single-family homes with them would require almost 350 years of Powerwall production. The minerals requirements would also be staggering and would require mining billions of tons of ore for the necessary lithium, copper, cobalt, and other metals.

    In theory, an electric system could be designed to provide reliable service using wind, solar, and battery storage. However, in reality, huge investments would still be required in new transmission and distribution lines, regardless of how many storage batteries are installed. It would also be ruinously expensive.

    Ignoring physical and economic realities may be fashionable, but reality always wins in the long run. The electric grid and its components form a complex system which most of us take for granted, which enable misleading claims regarding the simplicity of electrifying everything and powering it all almost exclusively with wind, solar, and batteries. Electric utilities and planners can provide a public service by explaining why this scenario, given today’s technology, isn’t possible.

    Jonathan Lesser is a senior fellow with the National Center for Energy Analytics, a senior fellow with the Discovery Institute, and the president of Continental Economics.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 11/23/2024 – 12:50

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Nov 23

Today’s News 23rd November 2024

  • Make Army Futures Command Great Again
    Make Army Futures Command Great Again

    Authored by Michael McInerney via RealClearWire,

    When President Trump takes office in January, his Army Secretary will need to refocus and re-energize the Army while eliminating bureaucratic waste. Among the many complex tasks ahead, one move is simple and clear: return Army Futures Command (AFC) to the purpose it was created for during the first Trump administration. Restore its authority, restore its power, and let AFC do what it does best—modernize the U.S. Army for the battlefields of tomorrow.

    Established in 2018, AFC was envisioned as the spearhead of Army modernization. Backed with budget authority, AFC wielded real influence over investment decisions. Then-Secretary of the Army Ryan McCarthy and Chief of Staff Gen. Mark Milley created AFC to break free from two decades of failed modernization efforts. Years of over-budget, underperforming development projects prompted McCarthy and Milley to create a streamlined, fast-moving command able to dodge bureaucratic bottlenecks, cut through “analysis paralysis” and deliver next-generation capabilities. An empowered AFC began immediately to eliminate unnecessary programs and deliver the Army that we need—one equipped with state-of-the-art technology and ready to deter future adversaries.

    But in late-2021, AFC’s momentum ground to a halt. The Biden administration issued two memos that stripped the command of its budget authority and effectively neutered its mission. The argument? That this move would restore “civilian control” over military spending. In reality, it threw AFC back into the tangled arms of the Pentagon’s infamous “acquisition blob”—a web of civilian bureaucrats, entrenched contractors, and out of touch acquisition officers. AFC’s loss of budget authority meant it no longer had the power to influence Army modernization decisions. Its voice—one that had cut through the red tape to make real progress—was practically silenced.

    Without budgetary control, AFC became a figurehead, forced to provide unwanted advice from the sidelines while Army modernization returned to the same slow, bloated, and ineffective Pentagon bureaucracy it was meant to disrupt.

    Returning AFC’s authorities is not about rolling back civilian control. Before 2022, AFC’s 4-star Commander shared acquisition budget authority with the Assistant Secretary of the Army for Acquisitions, Logistics, and Technology, a civilian leader. Additionally, the civilian Secretary of the Army maintained final say over the Army’s annual budget request. This was a balanced system that empowered uniformed operationally focused military leaders while keeping civilian oversight intact.

    Revoking budget authority left AFC’s role in the acquisition process up in the air, leaving it unable to execute its original vision. This was not what visionary leaders during Trump’s first administration had in mind. The bottom line? Restoring AFC’s authority means restoring the voice of uniformed leaders in Army modernization.

    The stakes couldn’t be higher. As threats around the world multiply, from an aggressive Russia to a rising China, the U.S. Army must be ready. AFC was designed to deliver the weapons, technology, and capabilities needed for future conflicts. But without real authority, AFC remains little more than an advisory body—a high-level think tank when what we need is a lean, capable, and empowered modernization engine.

    The incoming Trump administration has an opportunity to revive its original vision. Reinstating AFC’s budget authority would re-arm it in the battle against bureaucratic inertia and give it the tools needed to shape the Army of the future. Let’s make AFC great again, and in doing so, make our Army a force to be reckoned with for decades to come. The future of U.S. military superiority depends on it.

    Views expressed in this article are opinions of the author and do not necessarily reflect the views of The Epoch Times or ZeroHedge.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 11/22/2024 – 23:25

  • Who Is Stockpiling Anti-Personnel Mines?
    Who Is Stockpiling Anti-Personnel Mines?

    After authorizing Ukraine to use ATACMS long-range missiles on Russian territory Sunday, the outgoing Biden Administration has announced that it will be sending anti-personnel landmines to the country.

    As Statista’s Katharina Buchholz reports, the U.S. and Russia are non-signatories of the International Mine Ban Treaty and are among the world’s largest stockpilers of anti-personnel mines, while Ukraine is a signatory.

    Infographic: Who Is Stockpiling Anti-Personnel Mines? | Statista

    You will find more infographics at Statista

    Russia specifically has more than 26 million landmines in its stockpile, the newly released Landmine Monitor by the International Campaign to Ban Landmines shows, and has used them on its front line with Ukraine “liberally.” Ukraine has so far only used improvised anti-personnel mines.

    The U.S. stocks 3 million anti-personnel mines, according to the publication. The Biden Administration has intensified its push to aid Ukraine before President-elect Donald Trump takes office in January.

    Anti-tank mines had been sent to Ukraine previously.

    While anti-personnel mines have been condemned internationally due to their destructive effects on civilians, the U.S. will be sending non-persistent mines which have batteries and stop functioning after a short time span.

    The country’s decision was still called into question by international organizations, as was the decision not to join the aforementioned 1999 treaty. The White House said that the mines were necessary for Ukraine to stop Russian advancements in smaller, less heavily armoured ground units.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 11/22/2024 – 23:00

  • Flood Of Chinese Goods Into North America Earns Mexico "Backdoor" Label
    Flood Of Chinese Goods Into North America Earns Mexico “Backdoor” Label

    By Riley Donovan of The Epoch Times

    Amid the threatening specter of tariffs and trade tensions after Donald Trump’s re-election, Ontario Premier Doug Ford says all premiers are aligned in calling for Mexico to be kicked out of the Canada-U.S. free trade deal because it functions as a “backdoor” for Chinese goods.

    “If Mexico won’t fight transshipment by, at the very least, matching Canadian and American tariffs on Chinese imports, they shouldn’t have a seat at the table or enjoy access to the largest economy in the world,” Ford said in a statement on Nov. 12.

    He added on Nov. 20, “All the premiers, we know Mexico is bringing in cheap Chinese parts, slapping made-in-Mexico stickers on, shipping it up through the U.S. and Canada, causing American jobs to be lost, and Canadian jobs.”

    According to a report by the Descartes Systems Group, Mexico increased its exports to the United States by 54 percent from 2016 to 2022. During this same six-year period, Mexico’s imports from China skyrocketed by a whopping 138 percent.

    In 2022, Chinese goods accounted for a significant portion of Mexico’s exports to the United States: an estimated 15.7 percent of furniture and related products, 28 percent of electronics, 35.7 percent of plastic products, and 32.6 percent of rubber products.

    While those figures are striking, the ramping up of trade between the two countries was only just getting started in 2022. From January 2023 to January 2024, Chinese container exports to Mexico rose nearly 60 percent. Mexico-China trade is increasing at a dramatic rate, with annual growth rate reaching 34.8 percent in 2023—up from just 3.5 percent the year before.

    The concern among critics is that Mexico can be used by China as a loophole to avoid high American tariffs. This trade practice is known as transshipment: producing goods, sending them to an intermediate destination, and then presenting the products as having come from that second country.

    “They’re slapping a Made in Mexico sticker on and shipping it up,” Ford said.

    China has faced allegations of transshipment in many cases before. This includes, for example, China cheaply producing honey cut with cheap sugar like corn syrup or rice syrup in the eastern province of Zhejiang and exporting it to neighbouring countries before sending it onward.

    Transshipment of goods allowed China to avoid the tariffs slapped on thousands of products by the first Trump administration, which were largely left in place by the Biden administration.

    As long as Chinese goods undergo “substantial transformation” after they are brought into Mexico, they qualify for the preferential tariff rates of the United States-Mexico-Canada Agreement (USMCA, or CUSMA in Canada). This barrier is not as high as it sounds. Qualifying as substantially transformed can be as simple as bringing in component parts and then assembling them. It’s not as easy as slapping on a new sticker, but it’s not all that much more difficult than that.

    The “backdoor” described by Ford includes a major source of worry for the auto manufacturing industry in both the United States and Canada: a surge in Chinese car assembly plants in Mexico.

    The USMCA waives tariffs on cars in the North American market provided that at least 75 percent of the parts are made in North America. This is up from 62.5 percent in the previous North American Free Trade Agreement (NAFTA). The concern is if China is making use of this provision by ramping up auto manufacturing in Mexico. From 2019 to 2023 alone, 12 new Chinese auto part companies set up shop in Mexico.

    A report from the Alliance For American Manufacturing published in February of this year warned that China’s routing of cars through Mexico constitutes an “existential threat to America’s auto industry.”

    The report argues that the import of large numbers of remarkably cheap Chinese cars—some selling for as low as US$14,000—“threaten the jobs of millions of American manufacturing workers” and bring about “an extinction-level event for the U.S. auto sector.”

    The threat of China routing goods through Mexico has been written about by analysts for several years, but Trump’s re-election on Nov. 5 provided the impetus for premiers to start ringing the alarm bells. In Canada, worries are starting to swirl over the prospect of the new Trump administration enacting an assertive economic policy that may even feature a 10 percent across-the-board tariff on all products, including American imports from Canada.

    Canada joined the United States earlier this year in imposing 100 percent tariffs on Chinese electric vehicles, and 25 percent tariffs on Chinese steel and aluminum. Mexico has so far not followed suit.

    Deputy Prime Minister and Minister of Finance Chrystia Freeland said last week that she shares Washington’s concerns about whether Mexico is “aligned” with the other two North American partners when it comes to the issue of China’s unfair trade practices.

    “I’ve heard … some real concerns about whether Mexico is fully aligned when it comes to its policies vis-a-vis China,” Freeland said on Nov. 13. “I think those are legitimate concerns for our American partners and neighbours to have. Those are concerns that I share.”

    ‘We’ve Got to Stand Up’

    Ontario Economic Development Minister Vic Fedeli affirmed in an interview with CBC News that Trump’s re-election was the reason why Ford chose this moment to call for Mexico to be cut out of the USMCA.

    “We know that the president-elect talks about China and the transshipments, and so we’ve got to stand up,” he said.

    By taking a firm stance against Mexico’s rerouting of Chinese goods, the premiers of Ontario and Alberta are aligning themselves with the new Trump administration’s economic worldview, thereby seeking to ensure that Canada is seen as a friend of the Americans with mutually beneficial economic interests.

    The potential goodwill from this alignment of interests will be particularly relevant when the USCMA comes up for review—and potentially for renegotiation—in 2026. At that time, Ontario, which has a major auto manufacturing industry, will benefit immensely if Canada is shielded from tariffs on cars. Alberta’s government, for its part, will be lobbying against tariffs that may hurt its extensive energy industry.

    Besides setting up Canada as an economic ally of the United States, Ontario’s government in particular has a direct interest in stemming the flow of Chinese goods through Mexico. Fedeli expressed particular concern over the backdoor import of Chinese cars.

    “This tariff-jumping that they’re doing is really going to hurt Ontario, and it’s going to hurt Canada, but it’s primarily going to hurt Ontario because we are the only automaker,” he said in the CBC interview.

    Ontario’s automotive industry employed an estimated 160,800 workers in 2019. Ford’s government is aiming to maintain the support of these workers, their families, and the communities in southern Ontario that depend on the industry—especially if rumours of an early provincial election are true.

    Given Alberta Premier Danielle Smith’s views on China, it’s not surprising that she was the first premier to echo Ford’s concern that Mexico has become a backdoor for Chinese goods.

    Smith has expressed strong suspicion of the Chinese Community Party (CCP), including in an interview with The Epoch Times where she warned against putting too much trust in China as a geopolitical partner.

    “I think we now have to make sure that we understand what an adversary China is, and make sure that we’re not playing into our own demise,” she said.

    She went on to warn against becoming too economically reliant on China.

    “Chinese cheap production has hollowed out our manufacturing sector, not just in the United States but also in Canada,” she said.

    Continue reading on Epoch Times

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 11/22/2024 – 22:35

  • Trump Names Billionaire Scott Bessent As Treasury Secretary
    Trump Names Billionaire Scott Bessent As Treasury Secretary

    After Trump appointed Howard Lutnick as Commerce Secretary and Kevin Warsh was clearly being groomed as Powell’s replacement at the Fed, it was just a matter of time before the most important appointment in the Trump admin was made. That happened late on Friday when president-elect Donald Trump nominated Scott Bessent to lead the Department of the Treasury, ending days of speculation after other names emerged as competitors to the reported favorite.

    Scott Bessent speaks at the National Conservative Conference in Washington

    “Scott is widely respected as one of the world’s foremost international investors and geopolitical and economic strategists. Scott’s story is that of the American Dream,” Trump said in a statement on the nomination.

    Bessent, 62, is a Wall Street veteran who once worked for George Soros, and founder of international macro investment company Key Square Group. He served as a key economic adviser to Trump’s 2024 campaign.

    Others contenders for the role included Howard Lutnick, the chairman and CEO of Cantor Fitzgerald and BGC Partners. He co-chairs the Trump–Vance transition team, which is in charge of selecting administration candidates, vetting personnel, and crafting policy. Lutnick was ultimately chosen on Nov. 19 to lead the Department of Commerce.

    Kevin Warsh, 54, a former Morgan Stanley banker and former Federal Reserve Board governor, likewise entered the conversation. He became the leading candidate for treasury secretary on the betting website Polymarket after reports emerged that the president-elect was expanding his search to fill the position.

    In his statement on Bessent’s nomination, Trump said that economic policy under his administration would maintain the U.S. dollar’s reserve currency status, fortify the United States’s position as the world’s strongest economy, and invigorate the private sector.

    “As a lifelong champion of Main Street America and American industry, Scott will support my policies that will drive U.S. competitiveness, and stop unfair trade imbalances, work to create an economy that places growth at the forefront, especially through our coming world energy dominance,” Trump said.

    The president-elect also noted Bessent’s deep family roots in South Carolina, saying that he belongs to a historic French Huguenot Church, which members of his family founded in the 1680s, in the port city of Charleston.

    Like his predecessors, Bessent will now oversee a vast portfolio to employ the president’s economic agenda.

    As the Epoch Times notes, the two immediate issues Bessent will grapple with will be averting a default as the national debt ceiling limit will expire on Jan. 1, 2025, and extending the Trump-era Tax Cuts and Jobs Act due to expire at the end of next year.

    More importantly, Bessent will also be tasked with the delicate, if not conflicting, job of championing Trump’s trade proposals, including across-the-board tariffs, on one hand, while keeping the debt and deficit in check and preventing bond yields and the dollar from rising too high, too fast, as an even more rapid tightening in financial conditions will surely tip the US economy into recession.

    Bessent previously told CNBC he preferred trade levies to be imposed gradually to ensure higher prices appear over time and allow disinflationary policies to offset tariffs. Additionally, the hedge fund manager has professed support for broad-based tariffs that he believes are “more effective than microeconomic interventions like industrial policy that generally rely on the government to pick winners and losers,” as he wrote in an opinion published by The Economist in October.

    Cryptocurrency could be another area that Bessent – and Trump who has transformed from a rabid crypto skeptic into one of the most ardent fans of bitcoin – will home in on.

    “I have been excited about the president’s embrace of crypto and I think it fits very well with the Republican Party, crypto is about freedom and the crypto economy is here to stay,” he stated in an interview with Fox News earlier this year.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    If confirmed by the Senate in January, Bessent will succeed Janet Yellen. Steven Mnuchin served as Trump’s Treasury secretary during his first term.

    Following Trump’s victory earlier this month, Bessent wrote in The Wall Street Journal that the financial markets were celebrating “the Trump 2.0 economic vision.”

    “Markets are signaling expectations of higher growth, lower volatility and inflation, and a revitalized economy for all Americans,” Bessent wrote.

    Bessent has received support from several prominent Wall Street individuals, including Kyle Bass, the founder of the Dallas-based Hayman Capital Management. “He has a masterful knowledge of the architecture of the global financial system and its players,” Bass told The Epoch Times.

    The hedge fund investor, Bass said, has invested across the globe, formed relationships with global finance ministers and central bankers, and understands financial markets. “Scott is by far the best candidate for the job as Secretary,” Bass said.

    Billionaire Stanley Druckenmiller recently told Axios that Bessent is “not only a market participant but very fluent and comfortable in academic circles.”

    The announcement of the Treasury secretary role was one of the most eagerly awaited decisions among Trump’s cabinet picks, sparking a wide range of reactions on social media platform X.

    Eric Wallerstein, chief markets strategist at Yardeni, praised Scott Bessent, stating, “Bessent is the only candidate who specifically addresses Treasury’s faulty debt management strategy. the best candidate for the job.”

    Even warhawk neocon Lindsey Graham (R-S.C.) expressed support on X, saying, Trump’s economic agenda is “in good hands with Scott Bessent.”

    “He is a great combination of being academically gifted and real world tested,” Graham wrote.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 11/22/2024 – 22:30

  • Seattle EV Drivers Panic For Charging Stations After Bomb Cyclone 
    Seattle EV Drivers Panic For Charging Stations After Bomb Cyclone 

    A “bombogenesis,” commonly known as a “bomb cyclone,” pounded the Pacific Northwest earlier this week with destructive winds and torrential rain. At higher altitudes, heavy snow and strong winds unleashed blizzards. This once-in-a-decade storm caused widespread power outages across the Seattle metropolitan area, leaving electric vehicle owners in a panic.

    At the peak of widespread outages, more than 600,000 customers across Washington State lost power due to the powerful storm; most outages were in King County and Snohomish County. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    GeekWire reports that in the last several days, EV drivers who lost power at their homes flooded public EV charging networks across the metro area.

    “We’ve seen some chargers that are almost never used that are fully being used,” FlexCharging CEO Brian Grunkemeyer told the tech media outlet. The startup provides charging software services for EV charging operators, including Electrify America. 

    Grunkemeyer provided a screenshot showing that Electrify America stations on Wednesday were all full, and long lines continued into Thursday. 

    A video shared on X showed the panic… 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.jshttps://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The lesson for EV drivers in an apocalyptic situation is very clear: have a full-house natural gas or diesel-powered generator system or a lightweight 8kW portable generator with 220V capability.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 11/22/2024 – 22:10

  • Heat Is Radiating From A Huge Mass Under The Moon
    Heat Is Radiating From A Huge Mass Under The Moon

    Via The Mind Unleashed,

    The Moon, often seen as a cold and lifeless neighbor, holds secrets that continue to intrigue scientists and stargazers alike. Its surface, marked by craters and barren plains, gives little hint of the mysteries beneath. But recent discoveries have revealed something extraordinary: a massive heat-emitting feature buried deep within the lunar crust.

    This enigmatic finding, hidden beneath the Moon’s far side, defies expectations. It involves a rare material, typically associated with Earth, and raises fascinating questions about the Moon’s past. What could cause such heat on a body long thought to be geologically dormant? And what does this mean for our understanding of the Moon—and perhaps even other planets?

    The Discovery: Uncovering Lunar Heat

    In a groundbreaking revelation, scientists have identified a substantial heat-emitting granite mass beneath the Moon’s surface, specifically near the Compton and Belkovich craters on its far side. This discovery was made possible through data collected by both Chinese and American lunar orbiters, which utilized microwave frequency observations to detect subsurface temperatures. Dr. Matt Siegler of the Planetary Science Institute explained, “We used an instrument that observes microwave wavelengths, longer than infrared, sent to the Moon on both the Chinese Chang’E 1 and 2 orbiters. We found that one of these suspected volcanoes, known as Compton-Belkovich, was absolutely glowing at microwave wavelengths.”

    The data revealed a silicon-rich surface feature approximately 20 kilometers wide, believed to be the caldera of an ancient volcano. This area exhibited temperatures about 10°C warmer than its surroundings. Notably, this heat is not due to current volcanic activity, as the last eruption occurred around 3.5 billion years ago. Instead, the heat emanates from radioactive elements trapped within the granite mass. Dr. Siegler noted, “We interpret this heat flux as resulting from a radiogenic-rich granite body below the caldera.”

    This finding is significant because granite formation typically requires water and plate tectonics—conditions absent on the Moon. The presence of such a large granite deposit suggests that the Moon’s geological history may be more complex than previously understood. Dr. Siegler remarked, “If you don’t have water, it takes extreme situations to make granite. So, here’s this system with no water, and no plate tectonics—but you have granite.”

    The discovery was detailed in a study published in the journal Nature on July 5, 2023. The research team utilized microwave frequency data to measure heat below the surface of the Compton-Belkovich volcanic complex, leading to the identification of the granite mass.

    This revelation not only enhances our understanding of the Moon’s volcanic past but also opens new avenues for exploring similar geological features on other celestial bodies. The presence of granite on the Moon challenges existing theories about its formation and suggests that other areas of the Moon, and possibly other parts of the solar system, may harbor similar features.

    What Makes Granite Unique?

    Granite is a coarse-grained igneous rock predominantly composed of quartz, feldspar, and mica. On Earth, its formation is closely linked to the presence of water and the dynamic processes of plate tectonics. These conditions facilitate the melting of the Earth’s crust, leading to the creation of large magma bodies that cool slowly beneath the surface, crystallizing into granite.

    The discovery of a substantial granite mass beneath the Moon’s surface is particularly intriguing because the Moon lacks both water and active plate tectonics—key elements in granite formation on Earth. This raises compelling questions about the geological processes that could have led to the formation of granite in such an environment. As Dr. Matt Siegler of the Planetary Science Institute noted, “If you don’t have water, it takes extreme situations to make granite. So, here’s this system with no water, and no plate tectonics—but you have granite.”

    The presence of granite on the Moon suggests that alternative mechanisms may be at play. One possibility is that the Moon’s interior experienced localized heating events, potentially from radioactive decay, leading to partial melting and the formation of granite. This hypothesis is supported by the detection of heat emanating from the granite mass, attributed to radioactive elements trapped within the rock. Dr. Siegler explained, “We interpret this heat flux as resulting from a radiogenic-rich granite body below the caldera.”

    Radioactive Heat: The Cause of the Glow

    The unexpected heat emanating from the granite mass beneath the Moon’s surface is primarily due to radioactive decay within the rock. Granite is known to contain higher concentrations of radioactive elements such as uranium and thorium compared to other rocks. As these elements decay, they release heat—a process known as radiogenic heating. This phenomenon is well-documented on Earth, where the decay of radioactive isotopes contributes to the planet’s internal heat budget.

    In the context of the Moon, the detection of a heat anomaly beneath the Compton-Belkovich volcanic complex suggests the presence of a radiogenic-rich granite body. Dr. Matt Siegler of the Planetary Science Institute explained, “We interpret this heat flux as resulting from a radiogenic-rich granite body below the caldera.”

    The presence of such a heat source indicates that the Moon’s interior once contained sufficient radioactive material to sustain prolonged volcanic activity. This challenges previous assumptions about the Moon’s thermal evolution and suggests that its interior was more geologically active than previously thought.

    Understanding the role of radiogenic heating on the Moon not only provides insights into its volcanic history but also offers a comparative framework for studying other celestial bodies. For instance, the internal heating of terrestrial planets, including Earth, is significantly influenced by the decay of radioactive isotopes.

    Implications for Lunar Geology

    The discovery of a substantial granite mass beneath the Moon’s surface, particularly in the Compton-Belkovich region, has profound implications for our understanding of lunar geology. Granite formation typically requires specific conditions, such as the presence of water and plate tectonics—factors absent on the Moon. This finding challenges existing theories about the Moon’s geological processes and suggests that its interior may have been more complex and dynamic than previously thought.

    Dr. Matt Siegler of the Planetary Science Institute highlighted the significance of this discovery, stating, “This is more Earth-like than we had imagined can be produced on the Moon, which lacks the water and plate tectonics that help granites form on Earth.”

    The presence of granite indicates that the Moon’s crust may have undergone processes leading to the differentiation and evolution of its interior, resulting in the formation of silica-rich rocks. This challenges the traditional view of the Moon as a geologically inactive body and opens new avenues for research into its thermal and magmatic history.

    What It Means for Future Exploration

    The discovery of a substantial granite mass beneath the Moon’s surface, particularly in the Compton-Belkovich region, has profound implications for future lunar exploration. This finding challenges existing theories about the Moon’s geological processes and suggests that its interior may have been more complex and dynamic than previously thought.

    Granite formation typically requires specific conditions, such as the presence of water and plate tectonics—factors absent on the Moon. The presence of granite indicates that the Moon’s crust may have undergone processes leading to the differentiation and evolution of its interior, resulting in the formation of silica-rich rocks. This challenges the traditional view of the Moon as a geologically inactive body and opens new avenues for research into its thermal and magmatic history.

    Understanding the Moon’s geological history is crucial for future exploration missions. Identifying areas with unique geological features, such as the granite mass beneath Compton-Belkovich, can help prioritize landing sites for robotic and human missions. These sites may offer valuable insights into the Moon’s evolution and provide access to resources that could support sustained lunar exploration.

    Moreover, the detection of heat emanating from the granite mass, attributed to radioactive decay, suggests that the Moon’s interior contained sufficient radioactive elements to sustain prolonged volcanic activity. This finding aligns with the hypothesis that the Moon experienced a complex volcanic history, with localized heating events leading to the formation of diverse rock types.

    A New Chapter in Lunar Exploration

    This discovery of a heat-emitting granite mass beneath the Moon’s surface is not just a scientific curiosity—it’s a paradigm shift in our understanding of the Moon’s geological history. It challenges previous assumptions about the Moon’s evolution, revealing a dynamic and complex interior far removed from the barren and inert image we once had.

    Beyond its scientific intrigue, this finding holds significant implications for the future of lunar exploration. It highlights the Moon as a repository of untapped mysteries and resources, offering opportunities for new missions to probe deeper into its geological secrets. By understanding these processes, we can better prioritize landing sites, refine exploration strategies, and expand our search for similar features across other rocky bodies in the solar system.

    As we look to the future, this discovery is a reminder that even familiar celestial neighbors can surprise us with their hidden depths. Each revelation on the Moon brings us closer to unraveling the broader mysteries of planetary formation and evolution, reinforcing why space exploration remains as vital as ever. The Moon, it seems, has much more to teach us.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 11/22/2024 – 21:45

  • "Volvo, The Anti Jaguar"
    “Volvo, The Anti Jaguar”

    While pronoun-wielding Jaguar Managing Director Rawdon Glover went on damage control on Friday, appearing in an interview with corporate media after the iconic British sports car manufacturer obliterated its 90-year legacy with a cringeworthy 30-second ad posted on X, Guillaume Huin, McDonald’s senior marketing director, took to X to praise a “fucking fantastic” Volvo ad produced by Hoyte van Hoytema, the cinematographer behind Interstellar and Oppenheimer.

    “Volvo posted a 3 min and 46-second ad on Instagram, shot by Hoyte Van Hoytema, the cinematographer of Interstellar and Oppenheimer. It goes against every single rule you can think about as a social lead. Length. Format. Over-produced. Every comment under the ad said it immediately put Volvo in their consideration set. It’s fucking fantastic,” Huin wrote on X. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Volvo’s pro-parenting ad was featured on Instagram and YouTube. The video’s subtext reads, “100 years of work, one split-second moment. The culmination of countless hours of development, research, engineering, testing, and data collection, the new fully electric EX90 is designed to be the safest Volvo car ever made.” 

    Huin’s X post with the Volvo ad embedded within received nearly 12 million views in a day and comes in the wake of Jaguar blowing up a century of its brand in a 30-second woke ad. 

    “I hope Jaguar take notes… For real though, this is excellent,” one X user wrote. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The ad brought many to tears:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    An awakening has already begun in the US, and perhaps across the West, focusing on the future, family, children, optimism, health, and wellness. The era of toxic wokeism is coming to an end.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 11/22/2024 – 21:20

  • Building Frenzy In The South China Sea – Who Is Fortifying Islands?
    Building Frenzy In The South China Sea – Who Is Fortifying Islands?

    Countries surrounding the South China Sea have built more than 90 military outposts in around 70 locations in the highly disputed area, at times turning semi-submerged reefs or plain rocks into inhabitable islands in an attempt to establish control over the territory. This is according satellite images analyzed by the Asia Maritime Transparency Initiative at the Center for Strategic & International Studies.

    Infographic: Building Frenzy in the South China Sea - Who Is Fortifying Islands? | Statista

    You will find more infographics at Statista

    As Statista’s Katharina Buchholz reports, oil reserves and fishing grounds make the waters of the South China Sea desirable and claims over islands (but not rocks and reefs) have been hoped to create rights to exploit these resources. Additionally, important shipping lanes crisscross the area and China equals control of them with regional and even global power. While returning President-elect Donald Trump has been known for its tough stance on the Asian superpower, he has also rejected military deployments abroad, making the issue of a potential escalation in the South China Sea more contentious for U.S. allies Taiwan and the Philippines.

    The conflict around the South China Sea is centuries old but has recently been receiving lots of attention in connection with China-Taiwan relations. However, the idea that China could start a potential invasion of Taiwan by attacking its two outposts in the area is just a small part of a much bigger, multilateral conflict. China is usually more at loggerheads with other countries in the South China Sea, including ones that are usually considered its allies, like Vietnam. At the same time, Taiwan actually mirrors many of China’s claims in the area as it historically sees itself as the rightful ruler over all of Chinese territory, thereby appearing as a defender as well as an aggressor in the region by laying claim to islands quite far removed from its territory, just as China does.

    Despite its very murky origins on British naval maps, Chinese claims in the South China Sea are sweeping and extend to localities within other countries’ Exclusive Economic Zones. For the Philippines, this includes Second Thomas Shoal, which it controls but China nevertheless claims, and Scarborough Shoal, which has been de-facto controlled by China by a continuous coast guard presence despite no structures having been built. China also lays claims to areas in the Western Spratlys that Vietnam considers its exclusive grounds and has disrupted the country’s oil exploration and fisheries there. It has done the same in the Paracel Islands, which it controls since a military victory in the 1970s and where a 2014 standoff over China’s attempt to install an oil drilling platform made international headlines. Both countries’ shores are within 200 miles of that second island group. China has built installations on 20 features in the Paracels.

    Vietnam has built on 21 features in the Spratly Islands—the largest number by far—and is feuding with China, who occupies seven built-up reefs there, over who has controlled the island group in the past. According to the BBC, it is Vietnam who is more likely to prove the above. In its feud with China over a portion of the Spratlys, the Philippines won a landmark victory in 2016 in international court, but the success hasn’t had much real-life consequences. Malaysia, finally, is occupying five built locations in the Spratlys close to its territory, while Brunei also lays claim to some, but hasn’t built up any.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 11/22/2024 – 20:30

  • Finding Shelter From Monetary Racketeers
    Finding Shelter From Monetary Racketeers

    Authored by George Ford Smith via The Mises Institute,

    Henry Hazlitt said that to cure inflation, stop inflating, but surprisingly, most economists and politicians don’t want a cure. They believe a little inflation is not only good, but necessary. According to this view the real boogeyman is deflation—“a general decline in prices,” per Ben Bernanke—and government’s monopoly money-manager is dedicated to doing everything possible to keep prices forever rising.

    Not everyone cherishes having their money driven into the abyss of worthlessness by the deliberate actions of others, but given its overwhelming fear of deflation, along with the profit for a connected few in counterfeiting, the Fed goes ahead and ruins our money anyway.

    Admittedly, when your job is to print paper mandated as legal tender at almost no cost, in such a manner that the general public is made unaware of the pain yet to come, who likely have no idea even what your job is other than making muddled public pronouncements, things can occasionally get out of hand. In the extreme, this can lead to inflationary disasters such as those that occurred in Germany, Hungary, China, Greece, Israel, Zimbabwe (twice), Yugoslavia, Peru, Argentina, Venezuela, and most recently Lebanon. By 2018, for instance, the annual inflation rate in once-prosperous Venezuela hit one million percent. Zimbabwe, having achieved an estimated annual inflation rate of 89.7 sextillion percent in November 2008, cooled down then re-ignited again to 737 percent by July 2020.

    Hidden behind these percentages was pain most Americans can’t imagine. A former Lebanese entrepreneur, who lost everything during his country’s monetary meltdown, reflected on his experience:

    Watching ordinary people resort to crime and violence just to feed their children and care for sick relatives is the inevitable conclusion of a currency collapse. People are never prepared for it and the desperation leads to severe consequences.

    In the US, Fed chairman Paul Volcker, appointed by President Carter in 1979 to put a brake on inflation that would peak at 11.6 percent the following year, took a cold-blooded approach and simply stopped printing money rather than directly raising interest rates. In response to questions during his Senate confirmation hearing, Volcker told them,

    . . .the [money] supply had been “rising at a pretty good clip,” and there was no evidence the nation was “suffering grievously from a shortage of money.”

    What happens when someone on a bender stops cold turkey? By late 1980, the pain had arrived, as the federal funds rate hit 20 percent and the mortgage rate 18.45 percent but only for people with good credit.

    As the Proverb says, “As a dog returns to its vomit, so fools repeat their folly,” and so the printing presses have been rolling since the Volcker episode. According to the Federal Reserve Bank of St. Louis, in response to pandemic shutdowns in 2020, the Fed switched to industrial grade inflation, boosting M1 from $1.5 trillion in January 2020 to $7.3 trillion by January 2022.

    Conflicting Monetary Histories

    Alan Greenspan, who followed Volcker as Fed chair in 1987, reflected on the Fed’s performance as a guardian of monetary stability over the decades, telling the Economic Club of New York in 2002 that,

    . . .in the two decades following the abandonment of the gold standard in 1933, the consumer price index in the United States nearly doubled. And, in the four decades after that, prices quintupled. Monetary policy, unleashed from the constraint of domestic gold convertibility, had allowed a persistent overissuance of money.

    More revealing still was what he said before the passage above:

    Although the gold standard could hardly be portrayed as having produced a period of price tranquility, it was the case that the price level in 1929 was not much different, on net, from what it had been in 1800. (emphasis mine)

    You might want to read that last part over. Consider what the period 1800-1929 included: devastating wars, slavery and its termination, the explosive growth of industrialization, railroads, inventions, and population, especially from immigration, and a decrease in agricultural employment due mostly to technology. Thomas Edison alone received a record 1,093 patents. Tesla-Westinghouse AC electrification projects transformed factories and cities and spurred the invention of household appliances such as washing machines, vacuum cleaners, and refrigerators. Cars, radios, and to some extent, airplanes—the science fictions of their day—became accessible to the middle class. Prosperity during this period, especially during the latter part of the 19th century, skyrocketed.

    Even under a government-controlled gold standard, prices in 1929 were only 1.36 times higher than they were on average in 1800. Sounds like more of a period of deflation rather than inflation. And we find that prices in 2024 are 18.44 times as high as average prices in 1929. Greenspan was correct—by unleashing the constraint of “domestic gold convertibility,” Fed inflationists have devastated the value of the dollar and redistributed the wealth of dollar users.

    Yet Bernanke—scoring a near-perfect SAT score during his high school days in Dillon, South Carolina, earning a PhD in economics from MIT, awarded Time Magazine’s Person of the Year in 2009, and winning the Nobel Memorial Prize in Economic Sciences in 2022 for his work on the Great Depression—mustered this comment about inflation:

    Since World War II, inflation—the apparently inexorable rise in the prices of goods and services—has been the bane of central bankers. Economists of various stripes have argued that inflation is the inevitable result of (pick your favorite) the abandonment of metallic monetary standards, a lack of fiscal discipline, shocks to the price of oil and other commodities, struggles over the distribution of income, excessive money creation, self-confirming inflation expectations, an “inflation bias” in the policies of central banks, and still others. (emphasis mine)

    He suggests that the cause of inflation is subjective, a matter of opinion (“pick your favorite”), but whatever it is, it’s “apparently inexorable.” How did the economy somehow avoid a significant rise in prices during the period Greenspan mentioned—1800-1929? Nothing inexorable there, other than long-term price stability. Then again, unlike today, most of that period was constrained by “gold convertibility.”

    If a gold miner introduces his product into the economy it thereby increases the money supply (assuming gold is accepted as money) but is it fair to call that inflation? Gold’s limited quantity is one reason it’s been accepted as money. Nor has the miner violated anyone’s property rights by extracting and exchanging it for goods or services. He’s actually engaged in barter when he trades it for something else. That it happens to be universally-accepted in trade and is called money sometimes obscures this fact.

    Paper money that rolls off the presses without a commodity behind it has never been accepted without government fiat. It derives its power from the guns behind it in the form of legal tender laws. Central banks like the Fed are the state’s private counterfeiters.

    Since the state still prevents us from using gold, many people—including the Lebanese entrepreneur previously mentioned—are finding monetary security in Bitcoin. Though I personally have reservations about money that only exists in cyberspace, without physical manifestation, it nevertheless has properties that make it suitable for a medium of exchange and preferable to fiat money.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 11/22/2024 – 20:05

  • These Are The World's 10 Most Powerful Supercomputers
    These Are The World’s 10 Most Powerful Supercomputers

    According to the latest supercomputer ranking from TOP500, El Capitan is the world’s most powerful system, capable of achieving 1,742 petaflops.

    In this graphic, Visual Capitalist’s Marcus Lu visualizes the performance and power consumption of the world’s top 10 supercomputers.

    Data and Key Takeaways

    The data we used to create this graphic is listed in the table below. Figures come from TOP500’s November 2024 ranking.

    This ranking highlights America’s position as a global leader in computing power. For instance, the top three supercomputers are located in the U.S., and all of them are classified as exascale systems.

    This is a significant change from the 2021 ranking, in which Japan’s Supercomputer Fugaku held the top spot.

    The winner of this year’s ranking is El Capitan, which became operational in 2024 and is the third exascale system deployed by the United States.

    Sponsored by the U.S. Department of Energy, El Capitan was manufactured by HP Enterprise Cray and features an unknown number of AMD Instict MI300A accelerated processing units (APUs).

    What’s An Exascale Computer?

    An exascale computer is capable of performing at least 1 exaflop (1 quintillion operations per second).

    Note that in this ranking, performance is measured in petaflops (1 quadrillion). 1,000 petaflops is equal to 1 exaflop.

    In realistic terms, exascale computers can handle massive datasets and solve problems at unprecedented speed. Use cases include:

    • Simulating molecular interactions
    • Predicting climate change
    • Advancing nuclear research

    China’s Exascale Systems Remain a Mystery

    Since 2021, reports have suggested that China does indeed have its own exascale systems, but is simply withholding information about them from global rankings such as the TOP500.

    It’s a well known situation that China has these computers, and they have been operating for a while. They have not run the benchmarks, but [the community has] a general idea of their architectures and capabilities.

    – Jack Dongarra, co-founder of TOP500

    China’s silence is likely related to its geopolitical strategy. Publicly announcing it has built its own exascale systems could result in further U.S. trade restrictions.

    Want to learn more? Check out the Technology category on Voronoi to see more data visualizations like this.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 11/22/2024 – 19:40

  • Pennsylvania County Official Apologizes For Controversial Comments On Ballot-Counting
    Pennsylvania County Official Apologizes For Controversial Comments On Ballot-Counting

    Authored by Jack Phillips via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    The commissioner of a Pennsylvania county at the center of a weeks-long ballot-counting controversy issued an apology on Wednesday after the state’s Supreme Court ruled to block the counting efforts.

    Bucks County Commissioner Dianne Ellis-Marseglia speaks during a board meeting in Bucks County, Pennsylvania, on Nov. 20, 2024. Bucks County government

    At a Wednesday Bucks County Board of Elections meeting, Commissioner Diane Ellis-Marseglia—one of two county commissioners who had voted to count undated and misdated ballots for the Nov. 5 election—issued a public apology on a comment she had made last week. Their decision had gone against a recent Pennsylvania Supreme Court ruling.

    Last week, Ellis-Marseglia said that “people violate laws any time they want,” drawing controversy and criticism from local Republican officials.

    “I think we all know that precedent by a court doesn’t matter anymore in this country and people violate laws anytime they want,” she said in last week’s hearing. “So for me, if I violate this law, it’s because I want the court to pay attention to it.”

    A week later, on Wednesday, the commissioner said that her comment was taken out of context. However, she also apologized, saying, “The passion in my heart got the best of me, and I apologize again for that.”

    “That was a hearing, and we were talking about provisional ballots. We were specifically talking about the fact that there were certain provisional ballots where a judge of elections did not sign and did not make sure that a voter signed on the outside envelope,” Ellis-Marseglia, a Democrat, said according to a video feed of the Bucks County commissioners’ meeting.

    Elaborating, the official said that, to her, it is “frustrating and unconscionable that we would have to take away somebody’s vote” after an employee “didn’t know what to do or forgot or made a mistake.”

    “That issue that I spoke on has now gone viral from my comments. It was genuinely not the best words. I would do it all again. I feel terrible about it. I should have been more clear, please, I will be more clear in the future,” she said.

    Her county was one of several across Pennsylvania that voted earlier this month to count the ballots. On Monday, the Pennsylvania Supreme Court reiterated its ruling and blocked Bucks County, a Democrat-controlled suburb of Philadelphia, from counting those votes.

    “This order shall be deemed authoritative and controlling in all such matters and as to all county election board members,” the court wrote.

    The order stemmed from a lawsuit filed by the Republican National Committee and the Pennsylvania Republican Party on Nov. 14 that sought to block officials from counting those ballots.

    The order has significant implications for the U.S. Senate race. The Associated Press and Decision Desk have called the race in favor of Republican candidate Dave McCormick over incumbent Sen. Bob Casey (D-Pa.), whose votes differed by only a few thousand ballots.

    The state Supreme Court responded on Nov. 1 with an order that halted the appeals court decision while clarifying that its decision didn’t apply to the general election on Nov. 5.

    Multiple Republican groups were critical of Ellis-Marseglia’s comments, with some calling for her resignation or impeachment.

    The Pennridge Area GOP called for locals to sign a petition to impeach both Ellis-Marseglia and Commissioner Robert Harvie, who also voted to count the ballots, accusing them of civil rights violations, contempt of court, and negligence.

    Earlier this week, Democratic Pennsylvania Gov. Josh Shapiro issued a statement siding with the state Supreme Court in its decision to halt ballot counting, emphasizing upholding the rule of law.

    “The court has now ruled on the counting of these ballots specific to the Nov. 5, 2024, election, and I expect all county election officials to adhere to this ruling and all the applicable laws governing our elections,” he said.

    As of Thursday morning, Casey has yet to concede to McCormick in the Senate race.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 11/22/2024 – 19:15

  • US Declares Opposition Leader Who Lives In Spain As Venezuela's President-Elect
    US Declares Opposition Leader Who Lives In Spain As Venezuela’s President-Elect

    Authored by Kyle Anzalone via The Libertarian Institute,

    Secretary of State Antony Blinken declared on X that Edmundo González won the Venezuela presidential election several months ago. It is unclear if Washington’s position will make a difference as González lives outside Venezuela. 

    On Tuesday, Blinken posted, “The Venezuelan people spoke resoundingly on July 28 and made [González] the president-elect. Democracy demands respect for the will of the voters.” González is currently living in Spain. 

    Getty Images/AFP

    In August, about a week after the election, Blinken made a similar statement, saying that González won the election by an “insurmountable margin.”

    The Secretary based that conclusion on a report by the Carter Center. Blinken claimed the institution is “independent.” That claim is false as the Carter Center is funded by multiple US government agencies, including the State Department.

    At that time, it was not clear if Blinken’s statement represented administration policy as NSC Spokesman John Kirby said the White House would withhold judgment until “the electoral authorities publish the full, detailed tabulation of votes.” Additionally, a State Department spokesman said Washington was not ready to declare a winner of the Venezuelan election. 

    The US has attempted to overthrow Venezuelan President Nicolas Maduro, and his predecessor Hugo Chávez, several times. However, Caracas foiled Washington’s coup attempts. 

    During the first Donald Trump administration, Special Representative for Venezuela Elliott Abrams led a similar effort to overthrow Maduro by recognizing Juan Guaido as president. That scheme also failed.

    The second Trump administration may make a similar attempt at regime change in Caracas as Marco Rubio, the nominee to be Secretary of State, is a long-time supporter of overthrowing Marduo.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Following the July election, Rubio called for the military to overthrow the sitting president. “The military must stand up and defend the people against the regime,” he posted on X. 

    CNN reports, “Gonzalez, who fled to Spain in September fearing for his safety, has previously said he intends to return to Venezuela in the coming weeks for the presidential inauguration set for January 10.”

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 11/22/2024 – 18:50

  • Terrifying Infographic Shows Reach Of Russia's New Hypersonic Missile: 'London In 20 Minutes'
    Terrifying Infographic Shows Reach Of Russia’s New Hypersonic Missile: ‘London In 20 Minutes’

    Update(1830ET): Soon after warning that Russia’s newly deployed ‘Oreshnik’ nuclear capable hypersonic missile is able to reach any European capital, at a top speed of Mach 10+ —which is significantly faster than a bullet—Russian state media issued the below ominous infographic.

    It touts that Eastern European capitals could be hit in a matter of a few minutes, and that Berlin is reachable in only 15. It lists capitals as far away from the Kapustin Yar rocket launch complex like London and Paris as reachable by the Oreshnik in just 20 minutes. This means if proverbial all hell broke loose and WW3 came to Europe, these populations would have very little time to reach shelter.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    On Thursday Moscow had shocked the world after six independent war heads of a new intermediate range ballistic missile were launched on the Yuzhmash missile plant in Dnipro Ukraine. Thus Putin has demonstrated that the West has crossed his ‘red lines’ after its long-range attack authorization granted to Kiev.

    According to more via a war monitoring site:

    Ukraine’s Main Intelligence Directorate (HUR) provided further details, stating that “Oreshnik” refers to a research project, while the operational missile system is named “Kedr.” Its known specifications include:

    • Six warheads, each carrying six submunitions.

    • A terminal phase speed exceeding Mach 11.

    If this is indeed a medium-range ballistic missile, as Putin suggests, its range could extend up to 5,500 kilometers. This would violate the 1987 Intermediate-Range Nuclear Forces (INF) Treaty, signed by the US and the Soviet Union to eliminate such missiles. Developing Kedr would thus signify Russia’s breach of this agreement.

    Vladimir Putin warned back in July, “Today, the development of such systems in Russia is nearing completion. We will take mirror measures to deploy them, taking into account the actions of the United States, its satellites in Europe and in other regions of the world.”

    * * *

    A day after Russia’s attack on Ukraine with what were clearly big, very fast and new intermediate-range missiles, which many outlets initially reported to be an ICBM, the Kremlin is touting that it launched a cutting-edge hypersonic missile for which there is no defensive intercept capability.

    Russia says that Washington has now understood and been able to grasp Putin’s warnings and red lines more clearly following the missile strike a Ukrainian defense industry facility in Dnepropetrovsk Thursday morning. The new hypersonic weapon, dubbed ‘Oreshnik’ is capable of delivering a nuclear warhead.

    “We have no doubt that the current administration in Washington has had the opportunity to familiarize itself with this announcement and understand it,” Kremlin spokesman Dmitry Peskov told reporters. Putin had said the West’s escalation, seen this week in authorizing Ukraine’s long-range strikes on Russia with US/UK-made weapons, makes Ukraine a “global” conflict.

    Illustrative file image via Unsplash

    He strongly hinted that this global aspect to the war means attacks on Western targets can’t be ruled out. The same day, the foreign ministry said a US missile base in Poland is a prime target.

    Peskov further called Putin’s message following the hypersonic attack “comprehensive, clear and logical.” The Russian leader has authorized the new missile to enter mass production.

    “The key message is that the reckless decisions and actions of Western countries — which produce missiles, supply them to Ukraine and subsequently take part in carrying out strikes on Russian territory — cannot go unanswered,” Peskov continued.

    On Friday Russian state media sources have begun publishing specs for the Oreshnik missile, claiming it flies at Mach 10, and can reach 5,500km in distance, or 3,400+ miles (as a medium-range weapon).

    Russia’s missile command has also informed Putin that the projectile is capable of reaching any European target…

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    “The unique feature of the Oreshnik missile system is that, firstly, it is a medium-range missile – it flies to a distance of 1,000 km to 5,500 km – and secondly, it is hypersonic, flying at a speed of Mach 10,” a retired Russian Army colonel and military analyst, identified as Viktor Litovkin, told Sputnik.

    “The West does not have missiles that fly at such a speed or hypersonic missiles at all,” he continued. “Although the US has repeatedly boasted that it has such missiles, it has never demonstrated a missile flight. They appeared to show missiles that flew at a supersonic speed of 5.5 times the speed of sound or Mach 5.5. However, hypersonic speed begins at Mach 6-7.”

    Independent geopolitical site Moon of Alabama agrees, and calls it a huge game-changer [emphasis ZH]:

    Launched from Russia the missile can reach any target in Europe in less than 20 minutes. On reentry into the atmosphere the warheads of the missile reach hypersonic speeds of 3-4 kilometer per second. There is no air defense system in the world that could stop them.

    The surprising and successful demonstration of such an enormous capability is a wake-up call for European strategists.

    Lulled in by neoconservative talk of western supremacy and presumed Russian inabilities the Europeans were eager to connect their fate to a proxy war against Russia. Having been defeated in the fight for the commodities of the Donbas region they have pushed for extending the reach of their weapons into Russia.

    The results are now in. Europe is defenseless against new Russian weapons which can reach every political and industrial center of Europe with devastating power and with just minutes of notice.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 11/22/2024 – 18:30

  • Things That Are Over…
    Things That Are Over…

    via Financial Preparedness substack,

    The re-election of Donald Trump was the largest political revolution of my lifetime. As I’ve listened to him and his nominees talk about their priorities and plans since the election, I have realized that his administration will bring about dramatic and fundamental changes that will have profound effects in many domains, both globally and through time. I now understand why the Left and Deep State were so obsessed with stopping him “using any means necessary” since 2016.

    If he can get the Senate to confirm his nominees, I predict that the following will soon be over:

    Perpetual War and the Military-Industrial-Complex: In 1961, outgoing president Eisenhower (no peacenik himself) warned about the MIC: “…we have been compelled to create a permanent armaments industry of vast proportions….This conjunction of an immense military establishment and a large arms industry is new in the American experience….Yet we must not fail to comprehend its grave implications….In the councils of government, we must guard against the acquisition of unwarranted influence, whether sought or unsought, by the military-industrial complex. The potential for the disastrous rise of misplaced power exists and will persist.”

    Trump will quickly bring the Russia-Ukraine war to an end and prompt Iran and its proxies to go dormant. China, Russia and North Korea will behave themselves and the U.S. won’t enable NATO’s recent reckless military adventurism. Many American troops will come home and the U.S. will only get involved if its vital national interests are at risk.

    Illegal Immigration: ICE will deport many millions of illegal aliens (queue lots of sob stories by what’s left of the Legacy Media), starting with known criminals. The Trump administration will immediately stop the secret flights of aliens into the U.S., defund the many NGOs that facilitated the Soft Invasion, enforce existing immigration laws, and probably complete the border wall. But I think undocumented people who have lived in the U.S. for many years and are contributing to society will be left alone.

    The Deep State: Since 2016, hundreds of high level government officials have abused their power in many ways to prevent the American people from having the president they voted for (also known as democracy). Most of these people are guilty of crimes. At a minimum, they will be fired and stripped of any security clearances and will have to find an honest way to make a living. Some will write books about Orange Man Bad.

    The Intelligence-Industrial-Complex: This is who have really run the country to an increasing degree since 1963. This is probably the greatest current threat to our (dying) republic. Since 9/11, with the collusion of Big Tech and the governments of allied countries, it has vacuumed up every possible bit of communication and information about American citizens (a flagrant violation of the Fourth Amendment) and stored it for perpetuity (for who knows what purposes in the future) at the Utah Data Center. It also sponsors coups against democratically elected foreign governments, conducts disinformation and false flag operations to sway public opinion, runs secret prisons in foreign countries where people are tortured, etc. Wresting power away from this beast will be one of Trump’s greatest challenges.

    The Administrative State: The vast majority of federal bureaucrats serve no useful purpose, yet enjoy compensation packages and job security that far exceed what’s available in the private sector. Entire departments (such as Education), bureaus, offices and commissions will be eliminated. Thousands of regulations will be repealed, rendering millions of bureaucrats suddenly redundant. Those whose jobs aren’t eliminated will have to come in to the office every day after a four-year “work at home” vacation.

    The Democratic Party (in its current form): The party is in disarray, with no current leaders (after their failed coup, the Obamas are finished) or good potential future leaders and virtually no policy proposals that appeal to the average voter. Their platform consisted of two planks: Get Trump and Abortion on Demand. Ironically, their presidential candidate wasn’t even elected in a Democratic process, and their presidential primaries have been rigged for years.

    As they’ve lost touch with Americans in Flyover Country, the party has largely become one of university-educated bicoastal elites and the lowest of Low Information Voters. After years of demanding censorship, de-monetization, de-platforming, doxing and canceling of people they disagree with, it’s no surprise they show a remarkable lack of self-awareness, introspection, empathy and curiosity about the “garbage.” They will wander in the political wilderness until this changes. Congressman Seth Moulton (D, MA) bravely pointed out some of his party’s insanity after the election but was quickly condemned. Ironically, he represents Salem.

    The Legacy Media: The sudden post-election implosion of the Legacy Media is the most stunning and far-reaching since the collapse of the Soviet Union in 1991. Since 2016, the media has become increasingly apoplectic about the “racist,” “fascist,” “existential threat to our democracy” Trump, making the case for the Thomas Matthew Crooks and Ryan Wesley Rouths of the world to save humanity from the “literal Hitler” before the world suffered the same fate. Yet their ratings tanked even as their warnings about a dictatorial Trump became more shrill and frantic. Why? Because after promoting hoaxes (such as Hunter Biden’s laptop, Trump’s collusion with Russia, the COVID “pandemic,” an armed insurrection on January 6, etc.) for years, they have no credibility left. Americans trust the media less than any other political or civic institution.

    This rotted out tree began to fall even before the election. Editors and employees at The Washington Post and The Los Angeles Times freaked out when their editorial page was not allowed to endorse Kamala. Because otherwise, how would readers know that these papers supported her, right? The most stunning development was how after years of trashing Trump perhaps more than anyone else, the hosts of “Morning Joe” went to Mar-a-Lago to make up with him (he was gracious enough to meet with them). They did so for economic survival, to remain relevant, because their show is at risk of being canceled. Comcast is about to spin off MSNBC and CNBC. CNN is also on the ropes, and “The View” is planning to add another conservative commentator. Elen DeGeneres has fled the country, vowing never to return.

    Censorship: The publication of the Twitter Files (for which some Democrats threatened the reporter with prison) helped expose how Big Tech and the Legacy Media have colluded with the federal government in recent years to censor facts “misinformation” from the American people. Ironically, at this time in human history when it should be easier and faster than ever before to discover the truth, we have to deal with this bullshit. Tyrants have no need to censor falsehoods, which can easily be disproved. It’s the truth they fear. And the way to get to the truth is for everyone to be allowed to say what they want, even though some of it will be uninformed or false. The truth will always out itself eventually. This is the essence and beauty of the Scientific Method. No one person, government, website or group of “fact checkers” could possibly know what the Truth is. So let’s have an open, ongoing debate where everyone is allowed to make their case, which will allow us to avoid error and prevent tyranny. The Free Speech party won the election, and the Season of Reveal is about to ramp up. Expect the release of files related to JFK’s assassination, the CIA, UFOs, Jeffrey Epstein and Diddy’s parties.

    Lawfare: As far as I know, all of the lawfare cases against Trump are dead, though Manhattan DA Alvin Bragg and Judge Juan Merchan are threatening to delay his sentencing until 2029, leaving a Sword of Damocles hanging over his head. Using the justice system to target a political opponent simultaneously (and obviously) with a number of absurd charges in politically hostile jurisdictions is profoundly un-American. It’s something that a desperate tyrant in a Third World country would do. This strategy backfired on Democrats, as it made many voters even more likely to vote for Trump. Lady Justice is blindfolded for a reason.

    Identity Politics and DEI: (Marxist) Critical Race Theory is out and meritocracy and a colorblind society are back. Tens of millions of people (including blacks, Hispanics and women) voted for Trump not because of his race or gender but because they thought he was the best candidate. Ethnicity-based tribalism is toxic to society and inevitably leads to an outcome like what happened in Rwanda between the Hutus and the Tutsis. Now corporations and even the Pentagon are scrambling to shutter their DEI programs. Americans generally want the best; they will figure out who should do the job.

    Big Pharma, Big Food and Medical Tyranny: As the secretary of Health & Human Services, RFK Jr. will (hopefully) dramatically change the direction of the FDA, CDC, NIH, etc. away from processed food and pharmaceutical products towards natural (and often low-cost) food and health remedies. A ban on advertising by Pharma will hasten the demise of the Legacy Media and end their symbiotic relationship. Watch for a number of long-overdue investigative reports about the Pharma industry. Due to the obvious ineffectiveness of and many injuries and deaths due to the unproven COVID vaccines, I would imagine Americans’ faith in vaccines has never been lower. They now realize that the government doesn’t have all of the answers and one must remain an independent, critical thinker.

    ESG: I would expect that in the Trump administration, the SEC will require investment managers (including Blackrock, State Street and Vangaurd) to explain how forcing the management of publicly traded companies to pursue ESG policies fulfills their legal fiduciary duty to maximize the return of their customers. I look forward to hearing that explanation. There will be much more of a focus on profits, free cash flow and dividends, which will help boost returns and reduce risk.

    The Great Reset: If a major country such as the U.S. refuses to participate in Klaus Schwab’s tyrannical fantasies, it more or less pulls the rug out from the whole program, because the countries that do participate won’t be able to compete, and their citizens will be able to see that life is better in a freer and more decentralized country. Trumpism is a global movement, because people are sick and wary of people like Schwab, Bill Gates, George Soros and the rest of the .01% ruling elite.

    Closet Trump Supporters: One reason Trump’s victory in 2016 was such a surprise to nearly all pollsters is because many voters were embarrassed or fearful to admit that they supported Trump. Not any more. Trump has never been more popular. MAGA hats now top Amazon’s best seller list. I’ve seen athletes in several sports celebrate by doing a Trump dance. Part of Trump’s genius (I’m sure his decades of experience in hospitality and entertainment helped with this) is that he made politics fun and funny. Americans want to laugh and be of good cheer after years of having to sit through mandatory DEI training and being told that they’re inherently and irreversibly racist because of the color of their skin. The Silent Majority have spoken, and instead of being identified by their race, gender, etc. now just want to get back to being Americans.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 11/22/2024 – 18:25

  • What Ceasefire? 'Heavy Clashes' In South Lebanon As Beirut Buildings Leveled
    What Ceasefire? ‘Heavy Clashes’ In South Lebanon As Beirut Buildings Leveled

    Despite all the recent talk of a potential ceasefire between Hezbollah and Israel in the works, regional reports say that some of the fiercest ground fighting is currently taking place in southern Lebanon on Friday.

    Heavy Israeli aerial bombardments of the southern suburbs of Beirut have also continued with intensity. On Friday an Israeli missile completely leveled a residential multi-story in the neighborhood of Chiyah. Israel’s military reportedly issued a civilian evacuation alert shortly before, and terrifying video from the scene suggests locals knew it was about to be struck.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    In the south of Lebanon, near the border, UN peacekeeping forces say they are monitoring “heavy clashes” on Friday, saying most of the fighting is centered in the coastal town of Naqoura as well as the village of Chamaa.

    There are also emerging reports which say four Italian soldiers were injured after two rockets hit a UNIFIL base in Chamaa. Italy’s deputy prime minister has said Hezbollah was likely behind the rocket firing: “There were believed to be two missiles, from what it appears, they are believed to have been launched by Hezbollah.”

    Prime Minister Giorgia Meloni issued a statement of “deep indignation and concern” over “new attacks suffered by the Italian headquarters of UNIFIL in southern Lebanon.”

    “These attacks are unacceptable,” she stated, adding that “the parties on the ground to guarantee, at all times, the safety of UNIFIL soldiers and to collaborate to quickly identify those responsible.”

    “We are aware of heavy shelling in the vicinity of our bases,” UNIFIL spokesman Andrea Tenenti has said, saying that since the incident all UN troops appear to be safe “for the moment”.

    Up until now, the UNIFIL has claimed its command posts came under attack by Israeli forces, including IDF tanks, several times. This appears to be the first time that Hezbollah fired on UN locations.

    IDF forces earlier this week reached their deepest point into Lebanon since the ground invasion began, in the countryside vicinity of the port city of Tyre, which has been pummeled by airstrikes.

    UNIFIL base (in the background) in Chamaa, Lebanon. Wiki Commons

    Israel has repeatedly demanded that the UNIFIL troops withdraw – requests which have been refused. This puts the UNIFIL outposts in the direct line of fire as the war encircles their positions.

    “UNIFIL strongly urges combating parties to avoid fighting next to its positions. Inviolability of UN premises and personnel must be respected at all times,” a Friday statement said.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 11/22/2024 – 18:00

  • Colorado To Pay $1.5 Million To Christian Web Designer After Losing Supreme Court Case
    Colorado To Pay $1.5 Million To Christian Web Designer After Losing Supreme Court Case

    Authored by Matthew Vadum via The Epoch Times,

    Colorado has agreed to pay $1.5 million in lawyers’ fees to a Christian website designer after she won her case over a state anti-discrimination law at the U.S. Supreme Court.

    The payment agreement dated Nov. 19 comes after the U.S. Supreme Court ruled 6-3 in June 2023 in favor of Lorie Smith, who said Colorado’s law requiring her to create websites to celebrate same-sex weddings infringed on her constitutional rights.

    Justice Neil Gorsuch wrote for the majority that Colorado tried to compel “an individual to speak in ways that align with its views but defy her conscience about a matter of major significance.”

    “The First Amendment’s protections … belong to all, including to speakers whose motives others may find misinformed or offensive,” he wrote.

    Smith complained she was being singled out by the Colorado Civil Rights Commission because her religious faith does not support nontraditional marriage. Smith said she won’t promote messages that condone violence or encourage sexual immorality, abortion, or same-sex marriage.

    Smith took legal action when she discovered she was forbidden under the Colorado Anti-Discrimination Act to post a statement online explaining what content she was, and was not, willing to create.

    After the Supreme Court reversed the ruling of the U.S. Court of Appeals for the 10th Circuit, the case found its way back to the federal district court in Colorado.

    On Nov. 19, Smith and the state filed a notice of settlement in 303 Creative LLC v. Elenis with the district court.

    The notice did not specify how much the state agreed to pay Smith, but the Alliance Defending Freedom (ADF), which represents Smith, said the amount was more than $1.5 million to cover attorneys’ fees.

    “The government can’t force Americans to say things they don’t believe, and Colorado officials have paid and will continue to pay a high price when they violate this foundational freedom,” ADF CEO and President Kristen Waggoner said in a statement.

    “For the past 12 years, Colorado has targeted people of faith and forced them to express messages that violate their conscience and that advance the government’s preferred ideology,” she said.

    The Supreme Court’s ruling in the case has been cited almost 1,000 times in court opinions, legal briefs, and in legal publications, according to the law firm.

    Colorado lost a related case before the Supreme Court six years ago.

    In Masterpiece Cakeshop v. Colorado Civil Rights Commission (2018), the justices sided with Jack Phillips, a Christian baker whom a gay couple had asked to create a custom cake to celebrate their union, finding the state commission had violated his First Amendment right to free exercise of religion.

    Smith said she was pleased with the monetary settlement.

    “This is a win not just for me but for all Americans—for those who share my beliefs and for those who hold different views,” she said in a statement.

    “For me, it’s always about what message is requested, never the person making the request. I hope that everyone will celebrate the court’s decision upholding this right for each of us to speak freely,” she said.

    The Epoch Times reached out for comment to Colorado Attorney General Philip Weiser but had not received a reply as of publication time.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 11/22/2024 – 17:40

  • Matt Gaetz Says He's Not Returning To Congress Next Year
    Matt Gaetz Says He’s Not Returning To Congress Next Year

    Authored by Jack Phillips via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    Former Florida Congressman Matt Gaetz on Friday responded to speculation that he could return to the U.S. House after he withdrew his name from consideration as President-elect Donald Trump’s choice for attorney general.

    Then-Rep. Matt Gaetz (R-Fla.) speaks during the Turning Point Action conference in West Palm Beach, Fla., on July 15, 2023. Joe Raedle/Getty Images

    Gaetz on Thursday said in a social media post that he would be withdrawing his name because he does not want to become “a distraction” for the Trump transition team’s work, although he had “excellent meetings” with senators, he said.

    A day later, he told podcaster and conservative activist Charlie Kirk that he would not be going back to the House of Representatives. While Gaetz resigned from his current term in office, he won his reelection bid on Nov. 5, prompting speculation that he could still serve out his forthcoming term.

    “I’m still going to be in the fight, but it’s going to be from a new perch,“ Gaetz said on Friday. ”I do not intend to join the 119th Congress; there are a number of fantastic Floridians who’ve stepped up to run for my seat, people who have inspired with their heroism, with their public service.”

    “And I’m actually excited to see Northwest Florida go to new heights and have great representation,” he said, referring to Florida’s First Congressional District, which he had represented.

    Based on historical data and trends, it appears unlikely that the First District will be flipped by a Democratic candidate. Gaetz won his reelection bid by more than 30 points, and a Democrat hasn’t represented the area since 1995.

    “I’m going to be fighting for President Trump. I’m going to be doing whatever he asks of me, as I always have,“ he told Kirk, echoing a comment he wrote in his Thursday announcement. ”But I think that eight years is probably enough time in the United States Congress.”

    Other than Gaetz, Trump has tapped several other Florida politicians to serve in his Cabinet in some capacity, including Sen. Marco Rubio (R-Fla.) as his secretary of state and Rep. Mike Waltz (R-Fla.) as his national security adviser.

    Hours after Gaetz withdrew his name from consideration, Trump named Republican former Florida Attorney General Pam Bondi, also his former personal attorney, to become the U.S. attorney general. In response, Gaetz wrote on X that Bondi is a “stellar selection” who will “bring the needed reforms” to the Department of Justice (DOJ).

    Florida Gov. Ron DeSantis last week announced a special election to fill the congressional seats that will soon be vacant, later saying he would be making a decision in early January on who will serve out Rubio’s term in the Senate.

    There has been media-driven speculation that DeSantis, a Republican, could tap Gaetz to take Rubio’s seat, although the governor, Gaetz, and Rubio have not made any public remarks on whether that could be a possibility.

    “We have already received strong interest from several possible candidates, and we continue to gather names of additional candidates and conduct preliminary vetting,” DeSantis said in his statement about Rubio’s seat. “More extensive vetting and candidate interviews will be conducted over the next few weeks, with a selection likely made by the beginning of January.”

    Before withdrawing his name, Gaetz faced intense media and congressional scrutiny over various allegations of misconduct while he was a congressman. The House Ethics Committee announced in 2021 that he was under investigation for alleged sexual misconduct, illicit drug use, and other matters.

    Gaetz has categorically denied the allegations, saying that the DOJ had informed him that a related investigation was closed and resulted in no criminal charges against him.

    Gaetz again refuted the allegations while speaking to Kirk. He decried the allegations within the House Ethics panel report as part of a “smear campaign” against him, describing the claims as “false” and “clickbaity.”

    “Those allegations were coming from sources that Merrick Garland’s DOJ had already deemed not credible,” he said, referring to the current attorney general. “Like if the things that the House Ethics report were true, I would be under indictment and probably in a prison cell.”

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 11/22/2024 – 17:20

  • RFK Jr.'s Plans For Reshaping HHS Draw Strong Reactions
    RFK Jr.’s Plans For Reshaping HHS Draw Strong Reactions

    Authored by Jeff Louderbeck via The Epoch Times,

    Robert F. Kennedy Jr. has vowed to “make America healthy again” through his platform as secretary of the Department of Health and Human Services (HHS).

    The possibility of that happening has drawn praise from many Republican lawmakers and vaccine and food safety advocates. Multiple Democratic legislators and public health officials have criticized President-Elect Donald Trump’s nomination, calling Kennedy a “danger” to public health.

    Fighting chronic disease, improving children’s health, and addressing corporate influence on government agencies were vital parts of Kennedy’s campaign platform when he ran for president as a Democrat and then an independent.

    Kennedy suspended his presidential campaign and backed Trump in August. He previously told The Epoch Times that it was a “heart-wrenching decision” and a necessary step toward achieving his mission of saving Americans from the chronic disease epidemic.

    Under the “Make America Healthy Again” campaign, Kennedy aims to curtail what he calls the chronic disease epidemic by addressing the so-called “corporate capture” of federal health agencies and removing toxic chemicals from the nation’s food supply, among other objectives.

    Trump’s naming Kennedy as his HHS secretary has drawn strong reactions.

    Donna Shalala, who was HHS secretary under former President Bill Clinton from 1993 to 2001, said Kennedy is not qualified for the position.

    “The nomination of RFK Jr. for HHS by President-elect Trump is shocking. … He is dangerous to the health and well being of every American,” Shalala wrote on X.

    Sen. Rand Paul (R-Ky.) said on X that Kennedy would be the person to “detox the place after the Fauci era,” in reference to former NIH director Dr. Anthony Fauci. Kennedy and Paul have both been outspoken critics of Fauci’s policies related to vaccines and the public health response to COVID-19.

    Sen. Bill Cassidy (R-La.), a medical doctor, recently told reporters that Kennedy has “championed issues like healthy foods and the need for greater transparency in our public health infrastructure.”

    “I look forward to learning more about his other policy positions and how they will support a conservative, pro-American agenda,” Cassidy said.

    Cassidy, the ranking member of the Senate Health Education, Labor and Pensions (HELP) Committee, is expected to chair the committee in the next Congress.

    Awaiting Senate Scrutiny

    Kennedy must receive majority support from the Senate to gain confirmation and officially take the lead of HHS, which manages 13 separate agencies, including the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC), the Food and Drug Administration (FDA), and the National Institutes of Health (NIH).

    Kennedy will face confirmation hearings with the Senate Finance Committee, which is scheduled to be led by Sen. Mike Crapo (R-Idaho).

    The full Senate will vote on his nomination if he is approved by that panel.

    When the Senate convenes in January, Republicans will hold at least 52 seats compared to 48 by the Democrats. The number could increase to 53 if David McCormick defeats incumbent Bob Casey in Pennsylvania. That race is currently in the midst of a recount.

    Robert F. Kennedy Jr. speaks behind a bulletproof glass during the Rescue the Republic rally in Washington on Sept. 29, 2024.Madalina Vasiliu/The Epoch Times

    Kennedy has said that he will urge Trump on day one to declare a national emergency for chronic disease.

    Kennedy said he believes little will change until the influence of giant or private corporations on the FDA, the CDC, and the Department of Agriculture is addressed.

    At a roundtable organized by Sen. Ron Johnson (R-Wis.) in September, Kennedy said these agencies “advance the mercantile and commercial interests of the pharmaceutical industry that has transformed them and the food industry into sock puppets for the industry they’re supposed to regulate.”

    Kennedy has vowed to dismiss the officials who lead those agencies and appoint replacements.

    “FDA’s war on public health is about to end,” he wrote on X on Oct. 25, adding his support for raw milk, ivermectin, hydroxychloroquine, foods with healing properties, and natural remedies such as sunshine.

    In September, Kennedy told The Epoch Times that he would revamp the NIH to focus on the causes of autism, autoimmune diseases, and neurodevelopment diseases instead of developing drugs and serving as an incubator for pharmaceutical products.

    He has also vowed to lead efforts to address the issue of chemicals in ultra-processed foods.

    He told Fox News he would “get processed food out of school lunch immediately” and said federal food assistance such as food stamps should not go toward junk food.

    “These agencies, the FDA, the USDA, the CDC, all of them are controlled by giant for-profit corporations,” Kennedy said.

    “With President Trump’s backing, I am going to change that. We are going to staff these agencies with honest scientists and doctors free from industry funding. We will make sure that the decisions of consumers, doctors, and patients are informed by unbiased science,” he said.

    Robert F. Kennedy Jr. speaks to reporters at the Pennsylvania Convention Center in Philadelphia on Sept. 10, 2024. Madalina Vasiliu/The Epoch Times

    Earlier this week, Trump announced that Dr. Mehmet Oz was selected to run the Centers for Medicare and Medicaid Services, which is managed by HHS.

    Kennedy is an outspoken opponent of Medicare or Medicaid covering weight-loss drugs like Ozempic or Zepbound. There has been some bipartisan support for that to happen.

    In September, Kennedy told a congressional roundtable that it could cost the U.S. government trillions of dollars if it supported Medicare or Medicaid paying for weight-loss drugs.

    “For half the price of Ozempic, we could purchase regeneratively raised, organic food for every American, three meals a day and a gym membership, for every obese American,” Kennedy said.

    Kennedy has also called for a review of advertising rules for pharmaceutical companies and has also urged Trump to ban pharmaceutical advertising on TV. He also believes in eliminating liability protections for drug companies.

    As for vaccines, he has advocated for safety and informed consent.

    “I’ve never been anti-vaccine. People should have choice, and that choice should be informed by the best information possible,“ he said. ”I’m going to ensure that there are science-based safety studies available and people can make their own assessments about whether a vaccine is good for them.”

    Is Kennedy Anti-Vaccine?

    Some critics opposed the nomination of Kennedy because they considered him to be anti-vaccine or anti-science.

    Rep. Robert Garcia (D-Calif.) called Kennedy a conspiracy theorist and suggested that “he will destroy our public health infrastructure and our vaccine distribution systems.”

    “This is going to cost lives,” Garcia wrote.

    Rep. Robert Garcia (D-Calif.) speaks to press members in the spin room after President Joe Biden and former President Donald J. Trump’s presidential debate in Atlanta, Ga., on June 27, 2024. Madalina Vasiliu/The Epoch Times

    Peter G. Lurie, president of the Center for Science in the Public Interest, said in a statement that the center “opposes this nomination and any other nominees who are a direct threat to science and evidence-based solutions.”

    “Nominating an anti-vaxxer like Kennedy to HHS is like putting a Flat Earther at the head of NASA,” he wrote.

    Robert Weissman, co-president of Public Citizen, said in a statement that Kennedy “is a clear and present danger to the nation’s health” and should not be “placed in charge of the nation’s public health agency.”

    Others think Kennedy has been misunderstood or misrepresented.

    Robert Redfield, director of the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) under the first Trump administration, told NewsNation on Nov. 17 that “Kennedy is not antivaccine.”

    “I’m probably one of the biggest advocates for vaccines,” Redfield said, adding that vaccines are “the greatest gift of science to modern medicine.”

    “Kennedy is about transparency about vaccines, honest discussion about vaccines, asking for the data to show that these vaccines are safe and they’re efficacious,” Redfield said.

    Anna Matson served as a volunteer for Kennedy’s presidential campaign and runs a website called Kennedy Debunked. She believes that the public perception of Kennedy is “not remotely accurate” and is formed by “widespread lies and misrepresentations from mainstream media and Democratic Party organizations.”

    “Kennedy is not loyal to big pharma, and as an attorney who has successfully sued government agencies and big corporations like Monsanto, he knows how to address the issues he talks about. He’s a man of actions, and we need that in whoever leads the HHS,” Matson told The Epoch Times.

    Matson has spent the last year debunking the “myths” about Kennedy.

    “Anyone who calls him a conspiracy theorist and an anti-vaxxer has never taken the time to listen to him uninterrupted for more than a 30-second clip on mainstream media,” Matson said. “When people take the time to listen to him, more often than not they realize what the mainstream media and the DNC (Democratic National Committee) say about him is just not true.”

    Lauren Lee is a strategist for American Values 2024, a PAC aligned with Kennedy. She praised Trump’s decision to task Kennedy with heading the HHS.

    “It’s a huge sigh of relief for all the independents who took a chance on Trump when Kennedy backed him. Many of us were nervous. We didn’t know if Trump was going to keep his promise and stay true to his word. We now feel like our vote didn’t go to waste,” Lee told The Epoch Times, referring to Kennedy supporters who voted for Trump in the November election.

    Lee said if Kennedy is confirmed by the Senate, there will be “a massive change in the way that Americans eat, and the way that Americans are educated about nutrition and health.”

    “Hopefully, we will see a ripple down effect to the poor communities and the less fortunate who are suffering because they’re not able to get access to organic foods, or they live in a food desert,” Lee said. “And hopefully, this spurs corporations to take accountability and remove that poison out of their foods, and government incentives for companies to poison their food is removed.”

    Dr. James Lyons-Weiler is an advisor to Kennedy who is assisting in finding candidates to “take part in helping shape policies” for the MAHA movement.

    “I think that any topic in medicine that you might care to pick, manufacturers of medical products are represented [in health agencies], but consumers and the physicians are underrepresented,” Lyons-Weiler told The Epoch Times. “A shift I think we will see is a fair representation of the interests of society’s true stakeholders, the safety and efficacy of medicines, and an emphasis on informed consent.”

    Lyons-Weiler told The Epoch Times that so many people believe Kennedy is a risk to public health because of “mischaracterization” from the press.

    “He’s not anti-pharma. He’s anti-fraud. He’s not anti-vaccine. He’s anti-vaccine injury,” Lyons-Weiler said. “I believe we’re going to see the most substantial positive increase in overall health among Americans that we’ve ever seen, and we will see the end of narrative-based science.

    “Science will be done for the sake of knowing, so scientists will be free to be scientists. Medicine will be done for the sake of healing, so doctors will be allowed to become healers,” he said.

    Then Republican presidential nominee, former U.S. President Donald Trump, welcomes Robert F. Kennedy Jr. to the stage at a Turning Point Action campaign rally at the Gas South Arena in Duluth, Ga., on Oct. 23, 2024. Anna Moneymaker/Getty Images

    Scott Shoemaker, the president of Health Freedom Ohio, told The Epoch Times that he is “ecstatic” that Kennedy brought the subjects of medical freedom, vaccine safety, and informed consent to a national audience in a presidential election.

    “I never thought I would see these become political issues that a candidate would carry and truly care about,” Shoemaker said.

    A father of vaccine-injured children, Shoemaker said many parents like him “have been gaslighted and made to feel like the reason for their children’s conditions are not because of vaccines.”

    “[Kennedy] believes in presenting fact-based science and in-depth study of vaccines and results. It’s shocking that anyone would stand up against that,” Shoemaker said.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 11/22/2024 – 17:00

  • Money-Market Fund Assets Tumble Most In 5 Months After Trump Win; Loan Volumes Surge
    Money-Market Fund Assets Tumble Most In 5 Months After Trump Win; Loan Volumes Surge

    Money market funds saw the largest net outflow since June last week (-$22.2BN) as stocks soared after Trump’s election win…

    Source: Bloomberg

    On the bank deposit side of the cash conundrum, total deposits fell for the second week in a row (though a very small $3.5BN SA)…

    Source: Bloomberg

    However, on a non-seasonally-adjusted basis, total deposits surged almost $60BN…

    Source: Bloomberg

    The banks continue to unwind their Fed Bank Bailout positions, with that facility down to just $21BN now…

    Source: Bloomberg

    Excluding foreign deposits, the picture for US banks was just as mixed with deposits up $46.8BN NSA and down $5.7BN SA…

    Source: Bloomberg

    On the other side of the ledger, loan volumes shot up last week (after a big decline the prior week). The post-Trump elation prompted loans to rise at the fastest pace since March 2023…

    Source: Bloomberg

    Finally, bank reserves at The Fed are on the rise again…

    Source: Bloomberg

    But to fill that gap with stocks will take a tsunami…

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 11/22/2024 – 16:40

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Nov 22

Today’s News 22nd November 2024

  • Chinese Agent Who Tried To Bribe IRS Against Shen Yun Sentenced To 20 Months in Prison
    Chinese Agent Who Tried To Bribe IRS Against Shen Yun Sentenced To 20 Months in Prison

    Authored by Eva Fu and Cara Ding via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    A Chinese agent who tried to bribe the IRS and manipulate the agency into advancing Beijing’s transnational repression of a U.S. nonprofit has received a 20-month prison sentence.

    U.S. District Court for the Southern District of New York in White Plains on Jov. 19, 2024. Cara Ding/The Epoch Times

    U.S. citizen John Chen, 72, was a principal actor in a $50,000 bribery scheme under the direction of a Chinese intelligence official to revoke the nonprofit status of New York-based Shen Yun Performing Arts.

    Shen Yun has long been on the Chinese regime’s target list. Founded in 2006, the company tours around the world to display the ancient Chinese culture that prevailed before the communist takeover of China, while highlighting the human rights abuses under the regime’s rule. It has often drawn attention to the ongoing persecution of the meditation group Falun Gong.

    Chen pleaded guilty in July after reaching a plea deal with prosecutors. He has spent the 16 months since his arrest in May 2023 in detention, and he will spend another four months in federal custody.

    He will also forfeit $50,000 and face three years of supervised release after serving the full prison term.

    For several months in 2023, Chen had been trying to move a fraudulent whistleblower complaint to help the Chinese Communist Party “topple” Falun Gong, according to court documents. Prosecutors said the whistleblower complaint was “facially deficient” and invoked propaganda rhetoric typical of Chinese authorities.

    During those conversations, Chen emphasized that Chinese leadership was “very generous” in financial support for the plan, according to the court filing.

    “After this-this-this thing is done,” the court document quoted Chen as saying, “reward for work will surely be given at that time.”

    Chen and another co-conspirator, Lin Feng, who served 16 months of detention, paid $5,000 cash bribes to an undercover agent posing as an IRS agent. They promised an additional $50,000 for opening an investigation along with 60 percent of any awards from the complaint if it went through.

    It was “a significant bribe,” Assistant U.S. Attorney Michael Lockard said at the sentencing hearing. He noted that the undercover officer didn’t specify an amount.

    John Chen (L) poses for a photo at an event celebrating the 70th anniversary of Chinese communist rule in Beijing in 2019. Department of Justice

    “The defendant chose the amount,” he said.

    Both Chen and Lin had traveled to Orange County in upstate New York, where Shen Yun is based, to surveil Falun Gong practitioners there, according to a court filing.

    Damian Williams, the U.S. attorney for the Southern District of New York, said the sentencing was a reminder that “the U.S. justice system will hold accountable those who attempt to engage in malicious transnational repression on American soil.”

    “John Chen aligned himself with the PRC government and its goals to harass and intimidate the Falun Gong, a long-standing target of PRC repression. In doing so, Chen boldly attempted to bribe an individual he believed to be an IRS agent to corrupt the administration of the U.S. tax code and pervert the IRS whistleblower program,” he said in a statement on Nov. 19. “This Office will not tolerate efforts like this to repress free speech by targeting critics of the PRC in the United States.”

    U.S. Attorney for the Southern District of New York Damian Williams addresses the media in New York City on Nov. 2, 2023. David Dee Delgado/Getty Images

    Both Chen’s son and his lawyer declined to comment after walking out of the courtroom.

    While Chen’s son, three China-based siblings, two ex-wives, and fiancée have all written letters asking for leniency and describing him as a man who loves the United States, the prosecutors disagreed.

    In a Nov. 5 memo, they argued that a 30-month prison sentence—the longest under the sentencing guideline—would be appropriate because of the seriousness of the case and the need to deter criminal conduct, “particularly in cases of a foreign power’s repression of a disfavored group within the borders of the United States.”

    “The defendant has no mitigating motives or external factors justifying his offense,” the prosecutors wrote, noting that Chen was “not motivated by poverty” and that there was no evidence of Chinese officials’ pressure.

    The curtain call for Shen Yun Performing Arts at the David H. Koch Theater at Lincoln Center in New York City on Jan 11, 2015. Larry Dai/Epoch Times

    Prosecutors noted that Chen had repeatedly referred to Chinese officials as his “friends” and that during the bribery scheme, he “called them ‘blood brothers,’ and described how ‘we’—Chen and his PRC Government friends—‘started this fight’ against the founder of the Falun Gong ‘twenty, thirty years ago.’”

    The memo displayed photos obtained from Chen’s electronic devices and online accounts showing him at a major military parade in Beijing celebrating the 70th anniversary of Chinese communist rule in 2019. Another photo showed Chen shaking hands with communist leader Xi Jinping.

    “Chen was extraordinarily proud of his history with the PRC Government and, in particular, his meeting with Xi,” the memo states, citing a recorded call in which he bragged that he had “climbed, climbed, climbed to this position,” and that “Uncle Xi” met him “three times in 10 years.”

    Chen had also featured those three meetings, along with a photo, in a 2020 digital résumé, according to the memo.

    Chen was aligned with the Chinese authorities in suppressing Falun Gong and “acted as a full-fledged and enthusiastic participant in the crimes,” the prosecutors said.

    “It was his fight,” Lockard said at the sentencing hearing, adding that Chen had tried to use the freedoms he enjoyed in the United States to undermine the country.

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 11/21/2024 – 23:25

  • These Are America's Safest Cities
    These Are America’s Safest Cities

    Threats to safety in the U.S. range from health crises and natural disasters to financial challenges like unaffordable mortgages, lack of health insurance, and inflation.

    While no place is risk-free, the level of danger we face often depends on where we live.

    This map, via Visual Capitalist’s Kayla Zhu, visualizes the 50 safest cities in America according to WalletHub, which analyzed 182 cities across 41 key metrics to assess overall safety.

    The three main categories of metrics analyzed are:

    • Home and community safety: Law enforcement per capita, prevalence of terrorist attacks, mass shootings, murders,

    • Natural disaster risk: Earthquake risk, flood risk, hurricane storm surge risk, wildfire risk

    • Financial safety: Unemployment rate, uninsured population, foreclosure rate

    The data is updated as of August 27, 2024 and was collected from the U.S. Census Bureau, Bureau of Labor Statistics, Federal Bureau of Investigation, TransUnion, and other sources.

    Which Cities are the Safest in America?

    Below, we show the 50 safest cities in America based on WalletHub’s analysis.

    Overall Rank City Overall safety score
    1 South Burlington, VT 74.2
    2 Casper, WY 71.5
    3 Warwick, RI 70.3
    4 Burlington, VT 69.6
    5 Boise, ID 69.2
    6 Yonkers, NY 68.8
    7 Cedar Rapids, IA 68.4
    8 Columbia, MD 68.1
    9 Portland, ME 67.8
    10 Virginia Beach, VA 67.6
    11 Irvine, CA 67.4
    12 Fargo, ND 67.2
    13 Chesapeake, VA 67.1
    14 Missoula, MT 67.0
    15 Nashua, NH 67.0
    16 Juneau, AK 67.0
    17 Vancouver, WA 66.9
    18 Honolulu, HI 66.9
    19 Madison, WI 66.8
    20 Huntsville, AL 66.8
    21 Laredo, TX 66.7
    22 Sioux Falls, SD 66.7
    23 Chula Vista, CA 66.3
    24 Fremont, CA 66.2
    25 Glendale, CA 66.2
    26 Salem, OR 66.1
    27 Santa Rosa, CA 65.9
    28 Nampa, ID 65.9
    29 Santa Clarita, CA 65.8
    30 Brownsville, TX 65.5
    31 Gilbert, AZ 65.3
    32 Port St. Lucie, FL 65.2
    33 Boston, MA 65.2
    34 St. Paul, MN 65.0
    35 Garden Grove, CA 64.8
    36 Huntington Beach, CA 64.8
    37 Oceanside, CA 64.8
    38 Bismarck, ND 64.7
    39 Scottsdale, AZ 64.3
    40 Pearl City, HI 64.1
    41 Aurora, IL 64.1
    42 Fort Wayne, IN 64.0
    43 San Diego, CA 64.0
    44 Modesto, CA 63.7
    45 Worcester, MA 63.5
    46 Chandler, AZ 63.3
    47 Lincoln, NE 63.3
    48 Rancho Cucamonga, CA 63.1
    49 Oxnard, CA 63.1
    50 Lexington-Fayette, KY 62.7

    Many of the top safest cities are concentrated in the Northeastern United States, including South Burlington, Burlington, Portland (Maine), Nashua, Warwick, and Yonkers.

    This region generally has lower natural disaster risks compared to other areas, contributing to higher safety scores.

    South Burlington, the second largest city in Vermont, ranked first overall as the safest city in America. It has one of the lowest pedestrian fatality rates in the nation and one of the highest number of EMTs and paramedics per capita, according to WalletHub.

    The city also ranks highly for financial stability, boasting the lowest unemployment rate in the U.S. at 1.9%, the second-lowest share of seriously underwater mortgages, and the third-lowest rate of non-business bankruptcy filings per capita over the past year.

    These indicators suggest that residents are financially secure, with a lower risk of facing unpaid bills, property loss, or homelessness.

    To learn more about the environment of different U.S. cities, check out this graphic that visualizes the dirtiest cities in the U.S.

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 11/21/2024 – 23:00

  • Nonprofits Influence Climate Litigation Against Major Energy Companies
    Nonprofits Influence Climate Litigation Against Major Energy Companies

    Authored by Jonathan Draeger via RealClearPolitics,

    Over 30 lawsuits, modeled after the tobacco cases of the 1990s, have been filed by state, county, and city attorneys against energy companies seeking damages for the alleged effects of greenhouse gas emissions. An important factor in these lawsuits is the role of third-party funding and nonprofit activists working behind the scenes to shape the litigation and influence the courts.

    One such organization that has taken center stage is the Environmental Law Institute’s Climate Judiciary Project, which claims to educate judges on climate science and related legal issues. According to the ELI website, the project’s goal is to “provide neutral, objective information to the judiciary about the science of climate change as understood by experts.” Since 1990, the CJP says it has trained more than 3,000 judges across 28 countries.

    But judges are supposed to be disinterested arbiters of the facts and the law – and critics point out that on climate issues, the CJP is anything but neutral. In a 12-page report, the American Energy Institute accuses the CJP of “teaching judges about debatable climate science” and compares it to “working over the referees before the game even starts.” AEI contends that the so-called “objective” materials used by the CJP are crafted by activists who either advise the plaintiffs in these cases or support their claims through legal briefs.

    AEI also claims that the CJP has ties to many of the plaintiffs suing energy companies. The CJP denies these allegations, telling RealClearPolitics that it “does not participate in litigation, provide support for or coordinate with any parties in litigation, or advise judges on how they should rule in any case.”

    Kathleen Sgamma, president of the Energy Alliance, also criticized the CJP’s efforts to influence judges before they rule on climate-related cases. She told RealClearPolitics that the connection between nonprofit groups, judges, and attorneys involved in these cases forms a “tangled web” of “foundation activist groups, law professors, and judges attempting to use lawsuits to enact climate change policy.”

    “The Environmental Law Institute, through its Climate Judiciary Project, is trying to control the entire process – from who’s suing, what they’re suing for, to what judges think about it,” she continued.

    In some cases, there are close connections between CJP and the judges handling these lawsuits. One of the judges presiding over the City & County of Honolulu v. Sunoco LP case, Hawaii State Supreme Court Chief Justice Mark Recktenwald, disclosed that he presented at a CJP course in April 2023. Shortly afterward, Recktenwald authored an opinion that ruled against the oil and gas companies’ motion to dismiss the case in Hawaii. Before he authored the opinion, Sgamma said that Recktenwald “clearly has a conflict of interest and needs to recuse himself from the case.”

    Several philanthropists funding the CJP have also poured money into Sher Edling LLP, the law firm representing Honolulu and many other cities and states in lawsuits against energy companies. Sher Edling openly states that its mission is to hold fossil fuel companies accountable for “decades-long deception” about climate change. The law firm’s cases, like the one in Honolulu, argue that these companies misled the public and contributed to climate-related damage.

    Both Sher Edling and the CJP receive funding from major philanthropic organizations such as the MacArthur Foundation, which supports efforts to address climate change. Other shared backers include the Collective Action Fund and the William and Flora Hewlett Foundation.

    Another player in this arena is the Climate Accountability Institute, which has played a major coordinating role in climate litigation efforts. In 2012, it hosted a workshop in La Jolla, California, titled “Establishing Accountability for Climate Change Damages: Lessons from Tobacco Control,” which was instrumental in planning climate-related lawsuits.

    Strategies promoted at the CAI La Jolla workshop were later applied in lawsuits against energy companies. Chris Horner, a former senior fellow at the Competitive Enterprise Institute, told RCP that a key approach outlined in the La Jolla Workshop summary involved liberal private attorneys and nonprofits encouraging state attorneys general to probe for internal documents. These documents, they claimed, could potentially show that energy companies were aware of the risks of COâ?? emissions but either misrepresented or concealed this information.

    Horner noted that this bore fruit in 2015 when parties representing the Rockefeller Family Fund successfully urged the New York Attorney General to leverage the Martin Act, which grants broad powers to investigate possible “misrepresentation of information” to investors, to “subpoena documents from ExxonMobil.” 

    Later, the House Oversight Committee also subpoenaed energy company records, which, although never publicly released, appeared in an amicus brief filed by a Rockefeller Family Fund-funded group called the Center for Climate Integrity in one of these state lawsuits alleging that energy companies knew of the risks of fossil fuels but chose not to disclose them publicly.

    Since then, the CAI has focused on researching the potential damages of climate change and the accountability of energy companies. One of its largest projects is the Carbon Majors Database, which tracks the 100 largest fossil fuel producers since the beginning of the Industrial Revolution. CAI claims that these top 100 organizations are responsible for 52% of all greenhouse gas emissions.

    This work was not merely an intellectual exercise; CAI argues that staggeringly high “reparations” are warranted. In 2022 and 2023, they spent $55,000 on a paper, later published in the academic journal One Earth, titled “Time to pay the piper: Fossil fuel companies’ reparations for climate damages.” The paper argues that “companies engaged in the exploration, production, refining, and distribution of oil, gas, and coal” bear the primary responsibility for the costs associated with addressing climate harm.

    The estimated “damages” are substantial. CAI’s analysis indicates that cumulative reparations from the top 20 climate-producing companies would total $5.4 trillion for the period of 1988–2022, payable over 25 years from 2025 to 2050. However, CAI states that even if this $5.4 trillion were paid, it would not cover all damages being sought in “climate-related litigation filed in numerous jurisdictions based on varying legal theories against major oil, gas, and coal companies.”

    Not covered in the paper? Where the money to pay such judgments would ultimately come from.

    “In gas and oil, if they have to pay an enormous settlement, that gets passed on to the customers,” Peggy Little, senior litigation counsel at the New Civil Liberties Alliance, told RCP. “The settlements are so enormous that they have to have a bearing on the cost of gasoline and fossil fuels, which will hurt the oil and gas companies’ bottom lines, but also the price of filling up a tank of gas and everyday goods.”

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 11/21/2024 – 22:35

  • 'A Significant Health Risk': How Everyday Items Fill Our Bodies With Microplastics
    ‘A Significant Health Risk’: How Everyday Items Fill Our Bodies With Microplastics

    Authored by Rachel Ann T. Melegrito via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    The shirt on your back, the carpet beneath your feet, and the takeout container from last night’s dinner share a troubling secret: They’re slowly breaking down into invisible particles that are turning up everywhere from Mount Everest’s peak to your bloodstream.

    Kwangmoozaa/Shutterstock

    These microscopic plastic fragments, ranging in size from invisible to no larger than the width of a pencil eraser, have silently invaded human bodies in ways scientists are only beginning to understand—and the implications are unsettling, according to a September scientific review.

    “Microplastics pose a significant health risk, as they can persist in the environment and carry harmful chemicals,” Dr. Paul Savage, a toxin expert and founder and CEO of MDLifespan, told The Epoch Times.

    “A person might consume the equivalent of a credit card in plastic each week through food alone,” he said. “Once ingested, these particles can degrade into nanoplastics small enough to interfere with cellular DNA, potentially leading to genetic damage and chronic health issues.”

    Each year, between 10 and 40 million tonnes of microplastics are released into the environment. If current trends persist, this amount is projected to double by 2040.

    Even if all new emissions are stopped today, existing microplastic levels would continue to rise as older plastic debris breaks down into smaller particles.

    A review published in Science summarizes the current understanding of microplastic pollution two decades after the term “microplastic” was first introduced.

    How Microplastics Enter Our Bodies

    Microplastics are solid plastic particles measuring less than 5 millimeters (smaller than a pencil-top eraser). They permeate ecosystems, seeping into our food and water, and have found their way into our bodies.

    Microplastics mainly come from larger plastics breaking down but can also be released by plastic recycling, textiles, tires, paint, clothing, and soft furnishing.

    Many people do not realize that clothes are made of plastics, Aidan Charron, associate director of Global Earth Day, an organization dedicated to diversifying, educating, and activating the environmental movement worldwide, told The Epoch Times.

    “Fast fashion is all made with polyester, nylon, spandex, etc.,” Charron said. “Fast fashion” is the mass production and sale of low-cost clothing. “Another ’secret’ product often made of plastic textiles are carpets, curtains, and bedding,” he added, noting that these materials shed microplastics and toxic chemicals into the air we inhale.

    “They tend to be some of the most harmful because of the shedding of fibers they do into our air and waterways once washed,” he said. One study found that over 90 percent of microplastics indoors consist of polyester and manmade fiber, both derived from plastic.

    Microplastics can enter our bodies through various means:

    • Inhalation: Microplastics are in the air we breathe.
    • Skin Absorption: We can absorb them through contact.
    • Oral Ingestion: Consuming food or beverages contaminated with microplastics, such as milk, soft drinks, canned goods, sugar, and salt, or via organisms like shrimp and fish, is another way they enter our bodies. Infants are also exposed through breast and formula milk.

    Microplastics in the Human Body

    Research indicates that microplastics have infiltrated various parts of the human body, including:

    • Blood Vessels: Microplastics have been detected in carotid artery plaques and leg vein tissue samples.
    • Brain: Studies show that microplastics may reach the brain through the nasal passage, bypassing the blood-brain barrier. A 2024 study also found that the brain has a higher concentration of microplastics than kidney and liver samples.
    • Blood: One study identified four types of plastics in a plastic-particle concentration of 6 micrograms per milliliter in 22 healthy volunteers, with polyethylene being the most abundant. Polyethylene is a widely used plastic due to its versatility and is used in apparel, furniture, and consumer goods. There is still no established threshold or reference level for microplastics in human blood. However, for context, lead, commonly from sources like old paint and contaminated water, is considered concerning in children’s blood at levels above 3.5 micrograms per deciliter (1 deciliter is 100 milliliters).
    • Saliva: One study found 21 types of microplastics in saliva samples from patients with respiratory diseases.
    • Lungs: Microplastics were present in all regions of the lungs in 11 out of 13 study participants, with polypropylene and polyethylene terephthalate fibers being the most abundant. Higher concentrations of microplastics were found among smokers.
    • Feces: In one study, 10 common types of plastics were found in stool samples. Children appear to be at greater risk, with findings showing that infants have 10 times more plastic in their feces than adults. This difference may stem from infants’ higher exposure to plastics through activities like crawling, chewing on textiles, and mouthing objects. Studies also found microplastics in meconium—the first stool passed by newborns.
    • Placenta: Microplastics were detected in the part of the placenta, suggesting they can cross the placental barrier and potentially affect fetal development.
    • Liver: Microplastics were seen in liver tissues of people with cirrhosis, with concentrations notably higher than in samples from those without liver disease.
    • Colon: Microplastics were also detected in colon sections removed during surgeries, indicating they may remain in the digestive tract.

    While evidence that microplastics accumulate in the body exists, research on their health effects is still limited.

    Health Implications of Microplastics

    Because microplastics are foreign bodies, they trigger an immune system response. However, unlike viruses and bacteria, the body cannot effectively eliminate them. This chronic presence may lead to oxidative stress and inflammation, potentially resulting in a range of health issues, including DNA damage, allergic reactions, cell death, and cancer.

    Microplastics also contain chemicals that can disrupt normal hormone functions and metabolic processes. These harmful substances may leach from the microplastics and enter the body through skin absorption or ingestion.

    “Microplastics act as vectors that also carry viruses and bacteria, which then travel into our bodies if we inhale or ingest the microplastics,” Charron said.

    Research has linked microplastic exposure to an increased risk of diseases. For instance, according to the study on saliva samples, exposure may put people at higher risk of pulmonary diseases characterized by coughing, shortness of breath, wheezing, and a more severe inflammatory bowel disease. Additionally, the presence of plastic in arteriosclerotic plaques, fatty deposits that build up in the arteries, increases the likelihood of heart attack, stroke, or death.

    Despite growing evidence of health risks, there is still no way to assess microplastic risks or measure human exposure.

    “One major barrier is the lack of standardized testing for microplastic release in drinking water and other consumables,” Savage said. Creating such testing requires more comprehensive studies and standardized protocols to evaluate exposure levels and health impacts, he added. The challenge of measuring these particles in biological samples is due to their wide variation in size and composition.

    “Improved detection methods will help researchers better understand the extent and impact of microplastics on human health, allowing for more comprehensive studies and effective intervention strategies,” he added.

    Read the rest here…

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 11/21/2024 – 22:10

  • Make Education Great Again!
    Make Education Great Again!

    Authored by Adam Ellwanger via RealClearEducation,

    Imagine these words as the first speech delivered by the incoming Secretary of Education.

    Today, I am here to deliver bitter medicine: American education has failed. Teachers and parents, administrators and government—and even students—all bear some responsibility.

    The most common explanations for our educational crisis are inadequate funding, overuse of standardized testing, and systemic prejudice. They are false.

    • Our schools do not lack funding—no country spends more on public education.
    • The poor results of standardized tests indicate our failures; they are not the cause.
    • Our schools are not prejudiced—the most aggressive education reforms since 1955 directly aimed to eliminate systemic discrimination.

    For decades, we ignored signs of trouble, but the COVID-19 pandemic revealed the depth of our challenges. The problems are so pervasive and complex that there is no quick fix. We cannot merely repair; we must rebuild.

    Since 2020, American families have struggled mightily. The declining quality of education prompted affluent families to opt out of public schools, leaving middle- and working-class families with diminished resources and influence to push for reform. States’ refusal to enact school choice reforms widened the wealth gap and limited generational mobility.

    But lower- and middle-class families bear some responsibility, too. The rise of single-parent households, less common among affluent families, has been catastrophic. When the only adult in the home works up to 60 hours a week to make ends meet, there is little time for homework help, PTA meetings, or engaging with school officials. Even in households with two working parents, time and energy are often in short supply.

    Teachers, for their part, have good reason to despair. Despite the monumental importance of their work, many are underpaid. They face administrators who value standardized test scores above all else. Meanwhile, declining standards for decorum and discipline, often justified in the name of “social justice,” have made schools unsafe for both teachers and students. Violence and insubordination create an environment unfit for serious learning. Some parents treat schools as daycare centers or demand good grades for minimal effort. Worse, parents of disruptive students often refuse to ensure their children do not rob others of the opportunity to learn.

    Yet teachers, too, have failed. They inflate grades to keep their jobs but do no favors for students unprepared for future challenges. This, in turn, lowers the quality of education for students ready for more advanced work, driving gifted students out of public schools.

    Another harsh truth is that many teachers are unprepared for the job. The education system has failed for so long that many teachers have never mastered the material they are supposed to teach. Colleges steer future educators toward “education” majors, where coursework focuses more on leftist “social justice” ideology than on subject mastery. Some graduates believe their mission is to “dismantle” an “unjust” society by creating anti-American activists.

    When these activist-teachers enter classrooms, they often abandon their duty to transmit America’s culture, knowledge, and values. Instead, they teach students to disdain their nation, its people, its past, and its way of life. This undermines social cohesion and deprives disadvantaged students of the tools they need to succeed.

    Outdated curricula exacerbate these issues. Most schools still use models from the late 20th century, failing to address how computing, the internet, and artificial intelligence have transformed how we read, write, and learn. Even in innovative schools, teachers often struggle to balance the needs of non-native English speakers with those of native speakers, diluting the educational experience for the latter.

    Our colleges and universities are also broken. Admitting underprepared students has lowered academic standards nationwide. General education curricula often assume a need for remediation, leaving motivated students without the challenge or preparation they deserve.

    Government-run financial aid has inflated tuition costs while diminishing the value of college degrees. Proposals to cancel student debt signal to universities that they can continue raising prices without consequence, encouraging predatory admission policies that saddle students with unmanageable debt.

    How do we revitalize American education?

    Nothing short of an academic Sputnik will suffice. Just as Sputnik spurred the urgency that sent Americans to the moon, we need a bold initiative to revolutionize education:

    • We will create K-12 curricula prioritizing history, civics, and an understanding of our government.
    • We will eliminate curricula that divide Americans by race, class, religion, sex, or sexual identity.
    • We will implement school choice nationwide.
    • We will end federal student loan programs, allowing private lenders to evaluate borrowers’ ability to repay. Conditional lending will force colleges to lower tuition and revise admissions and program offerings.
    • We will expand vocational training and enhance opportunities for gifted students.
    • We will raise teacher credentialing standards to ensure advanced subject knowledge.
    • We will enforce decorum and discipline in schools. Uniforms will unify student bodies, and measures like suspension and expulsion will ensure classrooms are conducive to learning.
    • We will revise college accreditation standards to reflect post-graduation success and employment metrics.
    • We will penalize public colleges and universities that engage in discriminatory admissions practices.

    And that is just the beginning.

    The destiny of our nation depends on education. The effort to revitalize our schools must be as bold as our aspirations. Together, we will bring American education into the 21st century. Together, we will make American education great again.

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 11/21/2024 – 21:45

  • Not Everyone's Excited About AI Tools
    Not Everyone’s Excited About AI Tools

    The release of ChatGPT in the fall of 2022 and the many AI-powered tools that followed in its tracks have sparked an excitement around artificial intelligence that sometimes feels like a 21st century gold rush.

    “AI is transforming every industry, company and country,” Jensen Huang, founder and CEO of Nvidia said this week.

    But, as Statista’s Felix Richter reports, while big tech companies invest billions of dollars to build the infrastructure necessary to run large language models, not everybody is convinced that AI will be as transformational as many people currently believe – especially from a consumer perspective.

    Infographic: Not Everyone's Excited About AI Tools | Statista

    You will find more infographics at Statista

    According to Statista Consumer Insights, there’s still a sizeable share of people who aren’t all that excited about AI.

    In fact, almost 3 in 10 U.S. adults surveyed by Statista said they didn’t care about AI tools at all.

    At the other end of the excitement scale, 24 percent of respondents said they liked to try out new and innovative AI tools and 22 percent said that they get excited about them.

    20 percent said that AI tools are already a part of their day-to-day life, which seems like a lot considering that the “era of AI”, as Huang recently called it, only just begun.

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 11/21/2024 – 21:20

  • Former Green Beret: Trump Can "Turn Loose Delta Force" On The Cartels
    Former Green Beret: Trump Can “Turn Loose Delta Force” On The Cartels

    Authored by Steve Watson via Modernity.news,

    During a discussion with Joe Rogan, former Green Beret Evan Hafer, noted that if president-elect Trump decides to go to war with the cartels he could opt to use US Special Forces to destroy them.

    Hafer noted “if we declare war on the cartel, these dudes are not going to understand what the fuck is going on,”

    “They are in for a world of ultra violence they’ve never actually felt before because you know, obviously this is a very capable violent organization,” Hafer added.

    He continued, “They have fucking no clue if we organize these tier one units against them this is gonna be — what I would be doing if I was down there… I’d be getting ready to retire right now,” 

    “That’s what I would be doing. Because if Delta Force is hunting me bro, I would be so terrified,” Hafer further urged.

    “I thought about this for a long time where I’m like if they turn loose Delta Force and SEAL Team 6 on cartels and pedophiles, we could just kind of like erase the problem in about two years. It’d be gone,” Hafer, the founder of Black Rifle Coffee Company, emphasised.

    Trump has repeatedly said that this option is on the table.

    His incoming border czar Tom Homan also recently stated that Trump intends to “use the full might of the United States Special Operations to take ’em out,” and “ take ’em off the face of Earth.”

    *  *  *

    Your support is crucial in helping us defeat mass censorship. Please consider donating via Locals or check out our unique merch. Follow us on X @ModernityNews.

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 11/21/2024 – 20:55

  • Apple Releases Urgent iPhone Security Updates, Warns Hackers May Be Exploiting Vulnerabilities
    Apple Releases Urgent iPhone Security Updates, Warns Hackers May Be Exploiting Vulnerabilities

    Authored by Tom Ozimek via The Epoch Times,

    Apple has released urgent security updates for its iOS and other operating systems to patch against vulnerabilities that both the tech giant and U.S. cybersecurity officials warned could be actively exploited by hackers.

    Apple’s security updates patch gaps in operating systems for the iPhone, iPad, and Mac products, as well as its Safari web browser, according to a series of security-related announcements on Nov. 19.

    Specifically, the software updates target iOS 17.7.2 and iPadOS 17.7.2, iOS 18.1.1 and iPadOS 18.1.1, visionOS 2.1.1, macOS Sequoia 15.1.1, Safari 18.1, and Safari 18.1.1.

    Apple noted that in all the above-listed cases, the patches fix two significant vulnerabilities in WebKit and JavaScriptCore. These vulnerabilities, which could lead to arbitrary code-execution attacks through malicious web content, may have been exploited by hackers.

    “Apple is aware of a report that this issue may have been actively exploited on Intel-based Macs,” the company wrote in several of the security alerts.

    No information was available as to the possible identity of any cyber-threat actors who may have exploited these vulnerabilities. In general, if hackers are able to execute arbitrary code through maliciously crafted web content, this could put sensitive user data at risk, potentially leading to unauthorized access, stolen credentials, or even device control.

    In addition, the security patches to Apple’s Safari 18.1 address multiple vulnerabilities that could be exploited for malicious purposes, including allowing hackers to misuse a trust relationship to download malicious content, to leak private browsing history, and to allow the processing of maliciously crafted web content that could prevent security protocols from being enforced or that could cause unexpected process crashes.

    The U.S. Cybersecurity and Infrastructure Security Agency (CISA) also took note of the security gaps in the listed Apple products.

    “A cyber-threat actor could exploit one of these vulnerabilities to take control of an affected system,” the CISA said in a Nov. 20 alert, noting that the security updates released by Apple address these vulnerabilities.

    According to Apple’s security alerts, the scope of affected devices is extensive. The updates for iOS 18.1.1 and iPadOS 18.1.1 address vulnerabilities for devices such as the iPhone XS and later, iPad Pro models (from the 3rd generation onward), and iPad Air and mini models released since the 3rd and 5th generations, respectively.

    Similarly, iOS 17.7.2 and iPadOS 17.7.2 extend coverage to slightly older devices like the iPad Pro 10.5-inch and the iPad 6th generation.

    Mac users running macOS Sequoia 15.1.1 or Safari on macOS Ventura and macOS Sonoma are also affected, as are early adopters of visionOS 2.1.1 on the Apple Vision Pro.

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 11/21/2024 – 20:30

  • Trump's Opportunity To Reset US-Iran Relations
    Trump’s Opportunity To Reset US-Iran Relations

    Submitted by James Durso,

    Donald Trump is back and so is the “maximum pressure” campaign against Iran to “drastically throttle” Iran’s oil sales to kill Tehran’s nuclear program and its ability to fund regional proxies.

    But Trump aide Brian Hook who ran the anti-Iran campaign in Trump’s first term claimed Trump has “no interest in regime change.”

    That may be true but Iran, and everyone else, probably doesn’t believe it.

    The Trump 47 officials may soon learn that 2025 is not 2018 and, while Iran was on the ropes as Trump’s first term ended, things are different now.

    To start, open-handed American support for Israel’s campaigns against the Palestinian and Lebanese people has eroded support for U.S. moves by Middle East governments that might normally favor limits on Iran’s behavior.

    Saudi Arab’s crown prince, Mohammed bin Salman (MbS), declared Israel was committing “genocide” in Gaza. By using the G-word, MbS has made it hard for his government to walk back his remarks or reverse course absent a cease fire and implementation of something like the Arab Peace Initiative (which has been gathering dust since 2002 and may need a reboot).

    MbS also warned Israel against attacking Iran.

    Arab-Sunni Saudi Arabia and Persian-Shia Iran have been drawing closer since 2023 they agreed to resume ties after seven years of tensions. That the deal was brokered by China is a sign the regional powers had little confidence in a U.S. role, possibly suspecting it is in Washington’s (and Jerusalem’s) interest to keep the countries of the region divided.

    The countries’ military chiefs recently held defense talks, and planned a joint military exercise in the Red Sea (that probably won’t be interrupted by Yemen’s Houthi rebels.) In the civil realm, the countries are moving toward increased economic ties.

    The presidents of the United Arab Emirates and Iran held their first face-to-face talks in October, and UAE – Iran trade is on the upswing, and the Saudi crown prince (and de facto ruler) recently spoke to Iran’s new president.

    Qatar (which shares a natural gas field with Iran) and Iran are trying to broaden their economic ties that are largely based on hydrocarbons, and Iran supported Qatar during the Saudi-led 2017-2021 attempt to isolate Doha for allegedly supporting terrorism, though criticism of Riyadh by Doha-based Al Jazeera and friendship with Iran are the likely reasons.

    After a recent exchange of fire by Israel and Iran, Iran warned its neighbors not to attack Iran or to help the Israelis, and the Gulf Cooperation Council promptly declared, “Our focus has been on de-escalation.” The Gulf states are dubious about “maximum pressure” and are concerned it will upend warming relations with Iran and increase regional tensions.

    Middle Eastern governments are sensitive to public anger over American support for Israel’s killing of civilians in Gaza and Lebanon, so will avoid any display of support for a U.S. campaign that may target Arab or Muslim peoples. The countries that signed up for the Abraham Accords may soon look pretty foolish, so when MbS accused Israel of “genocide” in Gaza he was demonstrating Saudi Arabia’s distaste for the U.S. line, unlike the UAE which has increased daily airline flights to Israel.

    Also wary of a renewed U.S.-Israeli campaign against Iran and the Central Asian republics. The republics are growing their trade ties to Iran, a market of 90 million people, and the host of seaports at Bandar Abbas and Chabahar, essential for Central Asia trade with Asia and Africa. Iran also hosts the International North-South Transport Corridor (INSTC), a 7,200-kilometer multi-modal transport corridor that connects India to Europe, and is Plan B if a transport route through Afghanistan and Pakistan is not reliable.

    Iran has been actively working to strengthen its relations with Central Asian countries as part of its Look East strategy which has seen increased relations with China, Russia, and to offset the effect of Western sanctions. Iran’s Foreign Minister has engaged in discussions with his counterparts in Turkmenistan, Uzbekistan, and the other republics and the newly-elected president of Iran, Masoud Pezeshkian, has met the presidents of Turkmenistan and Kazakhstan.  

    In Central Asia. Uzbekistan, Kazakhstan, Turkmenistan, and Tajikistan have all increased trade links with Iran, in Tajikistan’s case to include a defense pact. The republics don’t want to sacrifice the opportunity in Iran, a country with a consumer market projected to grow 11% by 2030.

    Iran’s focus on Central Asia includes improving trade ties, developing infrastructure projects, and increasing connectivity through transportation networks. For example, Iran has proposed linking the China-Kyrgyzstan-Uzbekistan railway project to its own network, which would provide Central Asian countries with access to the Persian Gulf and beyond.

    And the oil market has changed since 2018.

    According to Argus Media, Iran’s oil exports, which were below 500,000 b/d through the second half of 2019 and 2020 due to Trump-era sanctions, began increasing in 2021 and have increased every year since: “Exports averaged around 1.6mn b/d in January-October [in 2024].”

    If the U.S. again sanctions Iran, it may find it hard going as the remaining buyers may be “those who do not necessarily fear sanctions.” Iran has built out its network to bypass sanctions, and has expanded its tanker fleet, though the clandestine effort is not without substantial costs, such as Chinese customers demanding a substantial discount, and the cost of rebranding the oil to disguise its origin. 

    Iran has an oil export terminal on the Gulf of Oman, which was inaugurated in July 2021, and can export 1 million barrels per day of oil. The facility cannot replace Iran’s main export terminal at Kharg, which can handle 8 million barrels per day, but it allows Iran to bypass the Strait of Hormuz, a strategic chokepoint and will require the Americans to try to cover two terminals instead of just the main facility at Kharg if Washington decides to attack Iran

    The U.S. may try to interdict Iran’s oil exports to China, but what will China’s response be if it considers the interdiction an act of piracy? Beijing may decide to provide a naval escort for the oil shipments or may reflag the vessels as Chinese, upping the ante for the Americans.

    If the Peoples’ Liberation Army Navy, the world’s largest navy with newer vessels than the U.S. Navy, deploys to escort the tankers it will refine its “blue water” operating skills. The increased operating tempo will also stress the U.S. fleet which for the second time in a year has no aircraft carrier in the Middle East.

    A recent U.S. Navy report noted on the material readiness of Navy ships: “several functional areas and subsystems remained degraded or showed declining trends” since 2017, and the U.S. Government Accountability Office noted in 2021 the Navy needed to improve its limited capacity for battle damage repair, in the event the U.S. and any foe come to blows.

    And if the U.S. seizes a China-bound cargo, then what? The ship will have to be anchored somewhere, the cargo will possibly be offloaded and stored, the crew will need to be housed and fed, consular support will need to be provided, and someone will have to guard the vessel. China is the biggest trading partner for every country between the Persian Gulf and the South China Sea, so the U.S. may be unable to find volunteers for these low-return chores.

    The U.S. ignored the warning of former national security advisor Zbigniew Brzezinski who said the U.S. should avoid actions that would create “a grand coalition of China, Russia, and perhaps Iran, an ‘antihegemonic’ coalition.” The U.S. has masterfully created that coalition by expanding NATO, ignoring the One China Policy, and sponsoring the 1953 coup in Iran that has freighted the Iranian people with more and more authoritarian rulers.

    But the ascension of new presidents in Tehran and Washington may be an opportunity to start rebuilding relations.

    After his election in July 2024, President Masoud Pezeshkian announced his program in “My Message to the New World” and declared his intent to strengthen relations with Iran’s neighbors, specifically mentioning Iraq, Türkiye, and the six members of the Gulf Cooperation Council. He emphasized the need for a “strong region,” said he hoped for “constructive dialogue” with Europe, criticized the U.S. for exiting the Joint Comprehensive Plan of Action (JCPOA), and urged Washington “come to terms with reality.”

    In October, President-elect Trump declared,  “I would like to see Iran be very successful. The only thing is, they can’t have a nuclear weapon.” In 2023, then-Senator JD Vance said that Republican senators who wanted at attack Iran were “living in the past.” In 2024, Republican Vice-President candidate JD Vance said, “And our interest very much is in not going to war with Iran. It would be a huge distraction of resources. It would be massively expensive to our country,”

    Those are hopeful signs of a desire to reach a negotiated solution,  but can the U.S. abide by any deal once the ink is dry?

    Neither Russia, China, nor Iran believe the U.S. will abide by the spirit and letter of any agreement as it has a record of bailing out of any commitments when it is convenient, to wit,

    • Anti-Ballistic Missile Treaty
    • NATO expansion (“not one inch eastward”)
    • Intermediate-Range Nuclear Forces Treaty
    • Paris Agreement (Paris Climate Accord)
    • Joint Comprehensive Plan of Action
    • Minsk agreements
    • Open Skies Treaty
    • Algiers Accord
    • One China Policy

    U.S. intervention in Iran started with the 1953 coup. The U.S. then supported Iraq during 1980-1988 war after the U.S. and Iran agreed on the Algiers Accords (January 1981) where the U.S. pledged, “it is and from now on will be the policy of the United States not to intervene, directly or indirectly, politically or militarily, in Iran’s internal affairs,” but this did not stop the U.S. from backing Iraq when the war starting to go in Iran’s favor in 1982.

    The U.S. killed General Qasem Soleimani in Iraq when he was carrying a message to Saudi Arabia in an effort to defuse tensions between Tehran and Riyadh. Many Iranians and Saudis probably think Soleimani was killed because he was working to reduce tensions in the region, which they think only benefits the U.S. and Israel. Then there is the killing of civilian Iranian scientists involved in nuclear power research. No one has taken the credit, but the Iranians no doubt believe it was the Americans or the Israelis with American connivance.

    Last is the STUXNET virus, a joint U.S.-Israel effort to attack break Iranian nuclear centrifuge equipment which “leaked” and infected computers worldwide.

    The Chair of the NATO Military Committee recently admitted the only reason NATO troops are not is Ukraine fighting Russian troops is because Russia has nuclear weapons, which no doubt confirmed the views of Iranians who think the country should have nuclear weapons. Then there is the cautionary tale of Libya’s surrender of its nuclear program, and the mystery of why North Korea, one of the poorest and most isolated countries in the world, has not been attacked by the U.S.

    Iran’s relations with Russia and China have strengthened which adds to the country’s resilience.  

    China and Iran signed a 25-year Comprehensive Strategic Partnership agreement in March 2021. This agreement aims to enhance bilateral relations and includes significant investments from China in Iran’s economy.

    China plans to invest $400 billion in Iran’s oil, gas, petrochemicals, transportation, and manufacturing sectors. In return, China will receive a steady and heavily-discounted supply of Iranian oil. The agreement allows China to deploy security personnel to protect its projects in Iran.

    The investments will also go towards upgrading Iran’s infrastructure, and the agreement supports China’s One Belt One Road Initiative, by enhancing connectivity and trade routes.

    Russia has supplied Iran with Su-35 fighter jets, Mi-28 attack helicopters, Yak-130 pilot training aircraft; Iran has sent Russia drones, and ballistic missiles.

    Non-military trade is also increasing. The Moscow Times reports, “Russian exports to Iran rose 27% last year, and Russian imports from Iran increased 10%. Both sides have agreed to scale up trade in currencies other than the U.S. dollar, while Russia has pledged to invest an unprecedented $40 billion in Iran’s oil and gas sector.”

    The Times also notes, “Perhaps the most important changes, however, have been in transport networks. As a result of the fighting in Ukraine, and in a bid to bypass Western sanctions, Russia has begun shifting trade routes southward. This is why Iran and Russia have ramped up work to develop the much-touted and ambitious International North-South Transport Corridor (INSTC), which will stretch from the Persian Gulf to the Baltic Sea.”

    Despite its economic problems, Iran has increased its military budget, no doubt anticipating attacks by America or Israel. At the same time Iran has signaled it is willing to negotiate with the International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA), but not “under pressure.” Iran’s foreign minister Abbas Araqchi clarified that when he told state television, “”There is still an opportunity for diplomacy, although this opportunity is not much. It is a limited opportunity.”

    A recent IAEA report notes Iran has begun implementing measures “aimed at stopping the increase of its stockpile [of near bomb-grade uranium]” though the IAEA also noted that Iran increased its inventory of 60% enriched uranium by 60% since the last report in August 2024.

    Iran’s President Pezeshkian has indicated he is open to U.S. engagement: “”Whether we like it or not, we will face the United States in regional and international arenas, and it’s better that we manage this arena ourselves.” And opinion leaders in Iran are saying their government should engage with Trump, with Shargh, the reformist daily newspaper editorializing that President Pezeshkian, must “avoid past mistakes and assume a pragmatic and multidimensional policy,” though others are skeptical anything will change under Trump.

    Even the Quds Force commander, General Qassem Soleimani, once mused: “maybe it’s time to rethink our relationship with the Americans,” though in the end it didn’t do him much good.

    All that said, “maximum pressure” is a slogan, not a strategy. If Iran says “Yes,” will Washington finally produce a coherent, executable strategy for its future dealings with Iran?  Up to now its only strategy has been “more sanctions,” hoping some liberals will miraculously appear and (democratically) seize power when in fact the Revolutionary Guard may take over and finally dispense with Vilayat-e Faqih.

    Whatever strategy Washington produces will be overshadowed by the disastrous retreat from Afghanistan in 2021, so the U.S. should favor a policy that increases regional connectivity and economic growth rather than carrying water for Israel or satisfying its desire to avenge the humiliation of 1979.

    Iran won’t surrender its hard-won nuclear expertise and has increased cooperation with the IAEA, but will it ever dash to the bomb? Israel claims it destroyed key Iranian nuclear fabrication facilities but the head of the IAEA said of the attack, “as far as the IAEA is concerned, we do not see this as a nuclear facility.”  Trump will not want to start a war with Iran over its nuclear program  as he will be sensitive to  the impact on the U.S. economy,  so sanctions (and the occasional Israeli attack) will be all he has left. If that is the case, and Iran’s economy and oil export scheme is resilient enough, and Russia and China remain constant, we may be looking at years of low-level “endless wars” to the joy of the Iran hawks in Washington.

    And there is a deadline of sorts for negotiations with Iran: 18 October 2025 sees the end of the JCPOA snapback mechanism, the last opportunity for world powers to initiate the snapback mechanism, returning all the sanctions that were lifted in the JCPOA agreement…”

    If the U.S. rejoins any sort of nuclear deal, it will have to be a new deal as Iran blew past the JCPOA 1.0 conditions after the U.S. abandoned the agreement. If the Americans want to expand a 2.0 deal to include ballistic missiles or Iran’s foreign policy, Iran may suggest similar limits on other countries in the region, and then demand that 2.0 be a treaty to bound future U.S. action, and to exploit differences in the U.S. on what is a “good deal” that will be all too evident once the Senate takes up the treaty for ratification.

    So far, each side has demonstrated a lack of empathy for the other, the result of years of successful propagandizing, leaving each feeling more sinned against than sinning.  And the hard-liners in each capital believe in the other’s perfidy, see conflict as key to their continued influence, and reap economic rewards from the status quo.

    On the U.S. side, Washington has never explained to American citizens its role in the 1953 coup that stifled Iran’s economic and political development, though Secretary of State Madeleine Albright admitted the U.S. role in overthrowing Prime Minister Mohammad Mossadegh in 1953 and called the coup “a setback for Iran’s political development.” To many Americans, the 1979 revolution and the hostage crisis appeared out of thin air.

    The U.S. needs to think long-term. Iran’s mullahs won’t rule forever and Americas association with economic hardship and violence won’t benefit it in the future. The U.S. should adopt a parallel effort to President Pezeshkian’s “strong region” plan to emphasize trade and connectivity which will help the region make up the gains sacrificed in the “lost decades” of the U.S. occupation of Afghanistan.

    Despite all the talk about what Trump might do, Biden is still the U.S. president until 11:59 on 20 January 2025.

    If both sides stick to what is feasible, keep their emotions and hard-liners in check, and Iran offers Trump a deal that he feels only he could have made, we may see stability and more economic opportunity for the region’s youth and the start of the banishment of the legacies of 1953 and 1979

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 11/21/2024 – 20:05

  • Generational Differences In US Sexual Orientation
    Generational Differences In US Sexual Orientation

    A total of 9 percent of U.S. adults aged 18-64 identify as homosexual or bisexual, while another 1 percent prefer pansexual as their self-identification.

    This is according to data from Statista Consumer Insights and, as Statista’s Katharina Bucholz shows in the chart below, the proportion of people who do not identify as heterosexual is significantly lower among the older generations.

    Infographic: Generational Differences in U.S. Sexual Orientation | Statista

    You will find more infographics at Statista

    In the Baby Boomer group of participants, 96 percent see themselves as heterosexual.

    In Generation X, the figure is 94 percent.

    The first major generational shift can be observed among Millennials.

    For those born between 1980 and 1994, the figure is 88 percent.

    Another jump is then made when looking at the Generation Z results – here just 79 percent identify as heterosexual.

    The most common non-heterosexual response among Generation Z participants was bisexual, at 11 percent.

    The differences between the generations for those identifying as homosexual was minimal – three percent for all except Generation Z, with four percent.

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 11/21/2024 – 19:40

  • Trump Promises To Use Recess Appointments If Needed, But What Are They?
    Trump Promises To Use Recess Appointments If Needed, But What Are They?

    Authored by Samantha Flom via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    President-elect Donald Trump has wasted no time in appointing his Cabinet members since his victory in the Nov. 5 presidential election.

    In keeping with his promise to shake up Washington, some of his selections have raised eyebrows and questions about their chances to survive a potential confirmation battle in the Senate. But should his nominees stall, Trump has already identified a tool for sidestepping any delays: recess appointments.

    Illustration by The Epoch Times, Shutterstock

    Before the election of Sen. John Thune (R-S.D.) as the next majority leader, Trump said on social media that the next leader “must agree to Recess Appointments.”

    He noted that confirmation votes can take “two years, or more,” because of the polarization in Congress.

    “This is what they did four years ago, and we cannot let it happen again,” he said in the Nov. 10 post. “We need positions filled IMMEDIATELY!”

    Upon Trump’s inauguration, some 4,000 administration positions will need filling, including more than 1,200 that require Senate confirmation, according to the Partnership for Public Service, a nonprofit that assists with presidential transitions.

    Thune told Fox News on Nov. 14 that “all options are on the table” for ensuring Trump’s Cabinet appointments are confirmed.

    The president’s Cabinet consists of the top advisers and agency and department heads who are appointed to help lead the executive branch.

    Many of those roles require Senate confirmation, although others, such as the vice president or White House chief of staff, do not.

    Here’s a rundown of the Cabinet confirmation process, how it has historically evolved, and the obstacles that Trump could face in getting his team confirmed.

    The president’s Cabinet consists of the top advisers and agency and department heads who are appointed to help lead the executive branch. White House

    What Is the Senate’s Role?

    As outlined under Article II of the U.S. Constitution, the Senate’s “advice and consent” power gives it the authority to confirm or reject presidential appointments for Cabinet positions, ambassadorships, Supreme Court judges, and other officers of the United States.

    That process starts when the Senate’s executive clerk refers a nominee to relevant committees for consideration. Those committees will delve into the appointee’s background and hold hearings to assess his or her qualifications. Members will then vote on how to report the nomination to the full chamber: favorably, unfavorably, no action, or without recommendation.

    The full Senate will hold additional confirmation hearings and then vote on the nominee’s fitness for office, with a simple majority required for approval.

    How Often Are Nominees Rejected?

    Historically, only nine Cabinet nominations have been rejected by the Senate.

    President John Tyler holds the record for most rejected nominations, at four. But the most recent occurrence was in 1989, when President George H.W. Bush’s appointment of John Tower, a senator from Texas, as his defense secretary was derailed by allegations of excessive drinking and sexual misconduct.

    A handful of other nominations or near nominations were withdrawn either by the president or the appointees themselves as it became clear that they faced an uphill battle for confirmation.

    That happened several times under Trump’s previous administration. In February 2017, his secretary of labor nominee, Andrew Puzder, withdrew his own name from consideration amid allegations of wage theft and sexual harassment leveled against restaurants franchised by his company.

    Another notable example was Trump’s nomination of Dr. Ronny Jackson, the White House physician, for secretary of veterans affairs in 2018. Jackson denied allegations of workplace misconduct but eventually withdrew his name.

    Newly elected incoming Majority Leader Sen. John Thune (R-S.D.) speaks to reporters in Washington on Nov. 13, 2024. Thune has promised a rigorous confirmation schedule. Madalina Vasiliu/The Epoch Times

    While rejections and withdrawals are rare, it is not uncommon for senators to use various legislative tactics to slow the confirmation process. In fact, in recent years, it has become an expected part of the process amid the increasing polarization of Congress.

    One recent example was Sen. Tommy Tuberville’s (R-Ala.) use of legislative “holds” to block the chamber’s expeditious consideration of President Joe Biden’s Defense Department nominees.

    For months, Tuberville blocked hundreds of military promotions in protest of the department’s decision to cover the travel expenses of service members seeking abortions. He ultimately dropped most of his holds when Majority Leader Chuck Schumer (D-N.Y.) indicated that he was preparing to bypass them and confirm hundreds of appointments at once.

    What Are Recess Appointments?

    Article II of the Constitution also empowers the president to fill vacancies while the chamber is in recess.

    The drawback, however, is that recess appointees can serve only until the end of the Senate’s next session. That means that a recess appointee could serve for, at most, close to two years.

    Monthslong recesses were not uncommon in Congress’s early years. Recess appointments allowed the president to ensure that important roles were filled if any vacancies arose during those extended absences.

    In recent years, however, increasing gridlock in Washington has prompted presidents to use recess appointments—typically mid-term—to bypass delays in the Senate confirmation process.

    Lawmakers, in turn, have limited opportunities for such appointments through creative scheduling and by holding “pro forma” sessions where no legislative work is conducted.

    The Supreme Court unanimously upheld that practice in 2014. The court also ruled that the Senate must be in recess for at least 10 days before the president can make unilateral appointments.

    As neither chamber can recess for more than three days without the other’s consent, the House also has some power over when recess appointments can be made.

    Recent Uses

    President Barack Obama was the last president to use the tool of recess appointments. He filled 32 positions in that fashion before he was sued over three appointments to the National Labor Relations Board.

    The appointments in question were made during one of the Senate’s pro forma sessions and were invalidated by the Supreme Court’s 2014 ruling on recess appointments.

    President Bill Clinton made 139 recess appointments and President George W. Bush made 171, according to the Congressional Research Service.

    Read the rest here…

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 11/21/2024 – 19:15

  • Trump Nominates Pam Bondi For Attorney General After Gaetz Withdraws From Consideration
    Trump Nominates Pam Bondi For Attorney General After Gaetz Withdraws From Consideration

    Update: Donald Trump said he is nominating former Florida Attorney General Pam Bondi and his personal trial lawyer, to run the US Department of Justice, after his first pick, former Representative Matt Gaetz, withdrew his name from consideration.

    “Pam will refocus the DOJ to its intended purpose of fighting Crime, and Making America Safe Again. I have known Pam for many years — She is smart and tough, and is an AMERICA FIRST Fighter, who will do a terrific job as Attorney General!,” Trump said in a statement on his Truth Social platform on Thursday evening.

    Bondi, age 59, is an American attorney, lobbyist, and politician. A Republican, she served as the 37th Florida attorney general from 2011 to 2019. She is the first woman elected to the office. In 2020, Bondi was one of longtime ally President Donald Trump’s defense lawyers during his first impeachment trial. By 2024 she led the legal arm of the Trump-aligned America First Policy Institute.

    Trump initially picked Gaetz, as his AG but the former US representative from Florida said he would no longer seek the post after intense scrutiny over a House Ethics Committee investigation into allegations that he engaged in sexual misconduct, including having sex with a minor.

    “It is clear that my confirmation was unfairly becoming a distraction to the critical work of the Trump/Vance Transition,” Gaetz said Thursday.

    Trump has vowed to overhaul the Justice Department, an agency he has criticized over two federal indictments secured by Special Counsel Jack Smith over the president-elect allegedly trying to overturn the 2020 election and illegally retaining classified documents.

    If confirmed, Bondi would be heading a department at the center of many of Trump’s key policy initiatives, including plans to ramp up immigration enforcement and border security.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Earlier:

    Former Rep. Matt Gaetz (R-FL) has withdrawn his name for consideration for attorney general amid growing controversy over sexual misconduct allegations.

    “While the momentum was strong, it is clear that my confirmation was unfairly becoming a distraction to the critical work of the Trump/Vance Transition,” Gaetz wrote on X.

    “There is no time to waste on a needlessly protracted Washington scuffle, thus I’ll be withdrawing my name from consideration to serve as Attorney General.  Trump’s DOJ must be in place and ready on Day 1.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    President-Elect Trump acknowledged Gaetz’ efforts in a statement on Truth Social:

    I greatly appreciate the recent efforts of Matt Gaetz in seeking approval to be Attorney General.

    He was doing very well but, at the same time, did not want to be a distraction for the Administration, for which he has much respect.

    Matt has a wonderful future, and I look forward to watching all of the great things he will do!

    It’s unclear what’s next for Gaetz, as he resigned from Congress after Trump picked him for consideration. Rubio’s Senate seat?

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 11/21/2024 – 18:50

  • "Kids All Grown Up": Gen Z Will Secure 10% Of All Managerial Jobs In 2025
    “Kids All Grown Up”: Gen Z Will Secure 10% Of All Managerial Jobs In 2025

    Born after 1997, the oldest Gen Zers turned 27 this year and have been in the workforce for about a decade. Despite negative headlines about this generation struggling with disastrous “Bidenomics” and some developing “TikTok brain,” a new report shows this generation will secure about 10% of all managerial jobs by 2025. 

    Glassdoor lead economist Daniel Zhao released the report Tuesday on future work trends titled “Glassdoor Worklife Trends 2025,” in which he stated:

    The kids are all grown up. In 2025, the oldest members of Gen Z will be 28 with almost a decade in the workforce. Gen Z already makes up just under 20% of the workforce, but as Gen Z ages, they’re also quickly entering the ranks of management. Based on current trends, one in ten managers in 2025 will be a member of Gen Z.

    Gen Z is on track to follow their older peers into the ranks of management. When comparing against previous generations when they were at the same age, Gen Z behaves very similarly to past generations. For example, 14% of Gen Z workers age 27 are managers, essentially the same percentage as Millennial (13%), Gen X (14%) and Baby Boomer (12%) workers when they were age 27.

    Zhao pointed out several changes in leadership styles over the last half-decade, especially since the emergence of Gen Zers securing managerial jobs…

    This is a useful reminder that generational differences are often overstated. The youngest members of the workforce often behave differently because of their age not because of their generation (for example, younger workers are likely to switch jobs as they are not settled into their careers, not because of changes in generational attitudes toward loyalty).

    That being said, there are some ways that management and leadership styles have shifted over the last five years, and the entry of Gen Z into the management ranks is likely to accompany this different leadership style.

    For example, when we look at Glassdoor reviews that discuss leadership or management, a few themes emerge. Terms like wellbeing and empathy are increasingly mentioned, with 222% and 76% increases in mentions, respectively, from 2019 to 2024, as employees look for leaders that are able to empathize with their needs. Similarly, mentions of boundaries (+99%) and burnout (+126%) have surged as workers feel overwhelmed. In turbulent times, employees also expect their leaders to help provide clarity (+52%) and address uncertainty (+45%). Lastly, equity (+41%) and inclusion (+76%) are increasingly important topics, especially for younger workers.

    While Gen Zers are coming to age, a separate report earlier this year found that 68% of small business owners say this generation was the “least reliable,” while 71% say they’re most likely to have a mental health issue in the workplace. 

    Actual Gen Z bosses.

    Sigh.  

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 11/21/2024 – 18:50

  • A Free-Market Guide To Trump's Immigration Crackdown
    A Free-Market Guide To Trump’s Immigration Crackdown

    Authored by Ryan McMaken via The Mises Institute,

    President-elect Donald Trump based much of his campaign on promises to crack down on immigration and carry out mass deportations.

    Politically, this was likely a winning issue for Trump after social media exposed millions of Americans to countless reports and videos of foreign nationals getting free cash, free housing, food allowances, and overall special treatment at taxpayer expense. Meanwhile, actual taxpaying Americans endured inflation-fueled price hikes and a worsening economy while being harangued by the smug upper classes about the need to be “welcoming.” Many voters chose to support the candidate who wasn’t in favor of importing a new taxpayer-subsidized underclass.

    Because of this, Trump is likely to prioritize delivering at least some of his promised immigration crackdown.

    However, one does not need to be an advocate of open borders to have concerns when one hears about a federal law enforcement agency engaging in a “crackdown.”

    Federal officials don’t exactly have a stellar record when it comes to respecting the property rights of peaceful, law-abiding Americans, even when the purported target is foreigners.

    The countless violations of the rights of Americans under the Patriot Act and the “war on terror” are examples of this.

    On the other hand, many aspects of the proposed Trump crackdown are, one might say, “no-brainers” and have no apparent downside at all. These include cutting off all funding of any kind to migrants, and deporting all foreign nationals with a known criminal record.

    Nonetheless, some aspects of Trump’s immigration policy have the potential for fueling further expansion of a federal police state. These include any deportation plan that involves a “drag net” and places peaceful residents under suspicion for no offense other than “looking like” a migrant.

    The No-Brainer Solutions

    Immigration has long been subsidized in the United States in the sense that there are low barriers to new migrants benefiting from a bevy of social benefit programs. Immigrants who achieve status as refugees or asylees can access welfare programs almost immediately. Even run-of-the-mill legal migrants need only wait five years to begin living off taxpayer-funded benefits.

    These subsidization schemes have only grown more aggressive in recent years. It is now well known that many American cities and states—not to mention the federal government—offer “free” cash, housing, food, and more.

    This has done much to attract the flood of migrants that has arrived in the US in recent years. Earlier this year, for example, The New York Post reported that the mayor of New York is giving away pre-paid cash cards—each carrying “up to $10,000“— to foreign nationals in New York. Most of these migrants have arrived in New York with no invitation, no employment prospects, and no plan for housing. But most of them plan on staying. And why shouldn’t they? Upon arrival, thousands of them immediately went on the public dole in some way or another, relying on taxpayer-funded shelters, housing programs, and a variety of sources for “free” food. The federal government also provides free transportation to various American communities for many migrants, including 400,000 free riders in 2023 alone.

    Reversing this should be seen as “low-hanging fruit” by the Trump administration. Obviously, any and all access to federal dollars should be cut off immediately. This is true for both legal and illegal immigrants. Immigration needs to be a fully private-market process, not a taxpayer-subsidized activity.

    Any state or local government that attempts to entice more migrants with social benefits programs should lose all access to federal grants. All federal dollars should be cut off from any government schools that cater to illegal immigrants. Any NGO that attempts to funnel taxpayer dollars to immigrants should be blacklisted from any and all federal grants. These NGOs are still free to offer services to anyone they want—just not with taxpayer dollars.

    Many of these programs for putting immigrants on welfare are nowadays facilitated by smart-phone apps. These include the CBP One app which is designed to streamline migrants’ requests for asylum. This, of course, is an attempt to circumvent the normal immigration process and get migrants on social benefits even faster. Obviously, all of these apps should be immediately disabled.

    Note that none of this requires any law-enforcement contact with migrants at all. These solutions simply cut off migrants’ access to the hard-earned dollars of taxpayers. The phone apps will no longer work. The free money will no longer materialize to provide free food and housing for migrants. Those migrants who actually have jobs and contribute to the community can continue to do so. Those who relied on stealing from taxpayers will self-deport when the free ride disappears.

    The option of immigration—including legal immigration— to the United States must be fully privatized so it is only an option for those with the ability to support themselves economically.

    Note that none of this violates anyone’s property rights. No one’s right to travel is limited by cutting off free money for migrants. No one is being prevented from contracting with another private party for employment or housing. People simply are being forced to do all this with their own private property.

    Other Laissez-Faire Solutions: No Fast Path to Citizenship

    Another key in the equation is limiting access to citizenship. Citizenship is not a property right of any kind, and there is no such thing as a natural right to citizenship in any particular place. Excluding the tiny number of migrants who are genuinely stateless, all foreign nationals arriving in the United States already enjoy the benefits of citizenship somewhere.

    Moreover, gaining citizenship in the United States brings with it a variety of economic benefits. It provides permanent access to the welfare state. The granting of citizenship also provides foreign nationals—few of whom renounce their citizenship in their home countries—greater access to US government institutions.

    The benefits of citizenship ought to be greatly limited for new immigrants, with a waiting period of at least a decade, or perhaps even twenty years. Again, this does not limit a migrant’s ability to fully exercise his or her property rights.

    Birthright citizenship, a “right” invented by a federal judge, should also be abolished.

    The Problem with Mass Deportations

    Ultimately, when we consider options for limiting migration, while also respecting property rights, self-deportation needs to be the focus. The alternative is to empower the federal government to track down and round up countless US residents, demand “papers, please!” and then deport those without the proper government forms.

    Many supporters of mass deportation plans seem to think that federal agents can, through some magical power, identify illegal immigrants on sight. The reality is that immigration status must be determined by an investigation into whether or not a resident has the proper paperwork.

    Now, it is true that many illegal immigrants will essentially volunteer for deportation. Such people include criminals who are convicted of real crimes. Clearly, it does not require any sort of drag net to simply deport convicts who have already attracted the attention of authorities. Similarly, in a system that denies taxpayer funded benefits to foreign nationals, immigrants who attempt to collect social benefits would be guilty of fraud, and thus volunteer themselves for deportation. The same would be true of any non-citizen who attempts to vote.

    But what about immigrants who remain peaceful, self-supporting, and keep to themselves? The way federal agents have generally identified these people is by harassing residents through internal checkpoints and harassment of people who “look like” immigrants.

    For example, one of the great overreaches of federal power—one that is blatantly unconstitutional—is the 100-mile border zone. In 1946, Congress passed the Immigration and Nationality Act of 1946. The law granted immigration agents the authority “to interrogate any alien or person believed to be an alien as to his right to be or to remain in the United States.” This power was limited to a “reasonable distance” from the US border. Originally, this “reasonable distance” was 25 miles. But it was unilaterally extended by the Department of Justice to 100 miles without any change to the statute. Given that “the border” includes both land and water borders, two-thirds of Americans live within this border zone. Entire states are included within the zone, including Florida, Michigan, and Maine.

    Many peaceful Americans get caught up in this bureaucratic nightmare. Thanks to the hundred-mile zone American citizens who don’t carry their passports on them at all times can be harassed and arrested by Border Patrol agents, even well inside the US border. As the New York Post describes it, “Immigration and Customs Enforcement agents are arresting US citizens by mistake and holding them at detention centers for months—sometimes even years.”

    There is nothing shocking here. This is how government agencies work.

    Yet, many Trump supporters are cheering the idea that an army of government agents be let loose on American cities and towns, as if this will not affect ordinary, law-abiding citizens in any way. This is the same attitude that gave us the Patriot Act, NSA spying programs, and everything else justified by the despotic slogan of “if you have nothing to hide, you have nothing to worry about.”

    Indeed, there are countless ways that the federal government can harass ordinary citizens and violate their property rights. Consider, for example, how anti-immigration advocates promote despotism with programs like “eVerify.” The activists want federal bureaucrats to determine if you have a right to work. And then there are the calls for new laws designed to prosecute private citizens who are guilty of the “crime” of using their own private property to rent apartments to immigrants or pay immigrants for services rendered.

    It’s one thing to build a wall, to deport convicted criminals, or end taxpayer-funded subsidies for migrants. It’s quite another thing when federal agents start asking us for our papers and telling us what we can do with our own property. 

    A related video: 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 11/21/2024 – 18:25

  • Visualizing 80 Years Of The Gold-to-Oil Ratio
    Visualizing 80 Years Of The Gold-to-Oil Ratio

    Gold and oil – two of the most influential commodities on the planet – have a fascinating relationship that has evolved over decades, captured in the gold-to-oil ratio.

    The gold-to-oil ratio represents the number of barrels of crude oil equivalent in price to one troy ounce of gold.

    It is viewed as an indicator of the health of the global economy, indicating when gold or oil prices are significantly out of balance with each other.

    This graphic, via Visual Capitalist’s Niccolo Conte, shows the gold-to-oil ratio since 1946, using data compiled by Macrotrends.

    What is the Gold-to-Oil Ratio?

    The gold-to-oil ratio expresses the price relationship between gold and West Texas Intermediate (WTI) crude oil. WTI is a grade of crude oil and one of the three primary benchmarks for oil pricing, along with Brent and Dubai Crude.

    A high ratio indicates that gold is relatively expensive compared to WTI crude oil, and vice versa. This can indicate periods of outsized demand for energy in the form of crude oil, or periods of monetary uncertainty when there is higher demand for gold.

    Below is the gold-to-oil ratio every decade between 1946 and 2024.

    During the 1950s and 1960s, fixed gold prices and stable oil prices kept the ratio between 11 and 13 for 20 years.

    Since the 1980s, the ratio has typically traded within the range of 6 to 40 with a notable exception: in 2020 when the ratio reached a high of 91.1. The peak in 2020 was driven by COVID-19, which boosted gold prices as a safe haven while oil demand and prices plummeted due to global lockdowns.

    In contrast, between 2000 and 2008, oil prices were relatively high compared to gold. During this period, the ratio dropped to nearly 6 but never rose above 16.

    When comparing the two commodities, it’s worth remembering that the crude oil market is around 10 times larger than that of gold, making it the largest commodity market in the world.

    If you enjoyed this graphic, make sure to check out this graphic that shows the top countries by natural resource value.

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 11/21/2024 – 18:00

  • Tucker: "This Is The Most Evil Thing I've Seen In My Lifetime"
    Tucker: “This Is The Most Evil Thing I’ve Seen In My Lifetime”

    Authored by Steve Watson via Modernity.news,

    During a discussion with president-elect Trump’s former Office of Management and Budget Director, Russ Vought, Tucker Carlson posited that the outgoing administration is attempting to saddle Trump with a global conflict.

    “If you doubt how serious the opposition is to the public, not just to Trump, but to the majority of the country that voted for him, They’re trying to leave him with World War III on the way out,” Carlson urged.

    Russia is furious about the Biden administration lifting restrictions on use of US developed long range missiles, and Putin has repeatedly stated that such a move would mean NATO countries are at war with Russia.

    Carlson continued, “I can’t imagine a more desperate or evil thing for Tony Blinken, who I think is desperate and evil, in my view, to do. Leave him with a war?”

    “A lame-duck president trying to start a war with the world’s largest nuclear power, Russia. What do you make of that?” Carlson asked Vought.

    Vought responded, “It’s incredibly insidious, and then add to the fact that he can’t put two sentences together and he is largely not in control of his own government,” referring to Joe Biden.

    “You have almost an unelected president with individuals behind the scenes doing this,” he continued, further asserting “It doesn’t surprise me, though. I mean, these are the same people that have weaponized the Department of Justice and the lawfare.”

    “I have a colleague, Jeff Clark, who they’re trying to disbar because of the care he showed on behalf of the president in dealing with voter integrity and election fraud after 2020,” Vought further noted.

    “The system has thrown everything at the warriors who are on the field. You’re seeing that with Tulsi, you’re seeing that with Matt Gaetz,” he pointed out, adding “Why is all of this stuff being thrown at him slanderously?”

    The full exchange is below:

    Carlson also discussed the spiralling escalation in Ukraine with journalist Glenn Greenwald, noting that the decision to escalate the conflict with ATACMS missiles is “the most evil thing I’ve seen in my lifetime.”

    Greenwald also pointed out that Ukraine doesn’t have the expertise to use the guidance system for the weapons and therefore NATO countries and the US would be actively involved in launching them at targets inside Russia.

    As we highlighted yesterday, NATO member state Sweden is sending out pamphlets advising citizens how they should prepare for nuclear war in the wake of the escalation.

    *  *  *

    Your support is crucial in helping us defeat mass censorship. Please consider donating via Locals or check out our unique merch. Follow us on X @ModernityNews.

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 11/21/2024 – 17:40

  • Federal Police Accuse Jair Bolsonaro Of Plotting "Violent Overthrow" Of President Lula
    Federal Police Accuse Jair Bolsonaro Of Plotting “Violent Overthrow” Of President Lula

    In a shocking development, but perhaps coming as no surprise to some (who have long warned “Brazil’s Donald Trump” would be target of an avalanche of further political persecution from the left once out of office) Brazil’s federal police on Thursday announced a formal call for the the indictment of ex-president Jair Bolsonaro over a 2022 “coup” plot.

    Supposedly this involved an organized criminal network which Bolsonaro directed to prevent current president Luiz Inacio Lula da Silva from taking office. The police allege Bolsonaro and 36 other officials and individuals plotted the “violent overthrow of the democratic state.”

    AFP: Former Brazilian president Jair Bolsonaro was in office from 2019 to 2022.

    “Federal police concluded on Thursday the investigation into the existence of a criminal organization that acted in a coordinated way in 2022 in an attempt to maintain the then-president in power,” the statement said.

    “The final report has been sent to the Supreme Court with the request that 37 individuals [including the ex-president] be indicted for the crimes of the violent overthrow of the democratic state, coup d’etat and criminal organization.”

    An initial social media statement from Bolsonaro responded simply, “The fight begins at the Attorney General’s office.” It’s as yet unclear whether the attorney general will take up the case, which could bring at least 12 years in prison if the ex-president is convicted.

    Bolsonaro has also said he’s the victim of a state-backed “persecution” and that he’s innocent of all allegations. Police allege the criminal conspiracy occurred in the last several months of Bolsonaro’s 2019-2022 presidency.

    Current reports have left open whether the plotting had anything to do with the later “insurrection” which rocked central government buildings Brasilia on January 8, 2023 – involving angry pro-Bolsonaro demonstrators breaking into the Congress building, the Supreme Court, and also storming the presidential palace. American and some international commentators had at the time characterized it as Bolsonaro’s own “J6 riot”.

    Bolsonaro is already facing other more minor investigations and charges, including allegedly falsifying his Covid-19 vaccination record. This new allegation by the federal police is the most serious one yet.

    The NY Times details that “The charges are the culmination of a sweeping two-year investigation in which police raided homes and offices, arrested senior aides to Mr. Bolsonaro and secured confessions and plea deals with people involved in the plot.”

    “The announcement comes two days after four members of an elite military unit, including a former top aide to Mr. Bolsonaro, were arrested and accused of planning to assassinate Mr. Lula shortly before he took office in January 2023,” the report indicates further.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    So ultimately, the police are claiming a direct assassination plot targeting Lula. Already Bolsonaro has been barred from running for office for eight years, after in June 2023 Brazil’s highest electoral court says that he cannot run for or hold any public office until 2030. This means he’ll have to sit out the 2026 election regardless of if these coup allegations stick.

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 11/21/2024 – 17:20

  • Will Democrats Finally Learn A Lesson?
    Will Democrats Finally Learn A Lesson?

    Authored by Daniel Lipinski via RealClearPolitics,

    Here we go again. Voters have elected Donald Trump president while giving Republicans majorities in the House and Senate. And once again, Democrats are asking themselves, “What do we do now?” When this occurred eight years ago, I was a Democrat serving in the House of Representatives. At that time, some of my colleagues who had seen many traditional Democrats in their district vote for Trump spoke out. They said that working-class voters were tired of feeling looked down upon by Democrats because of policies they supported, what they believed, or even who they were. So when Hillary Clinton was caught claiming that half of Trump’s supporters were a “basket of deplorables: racist, sexist, homophobic, xenophobic, Islamophobic,” she was seen to be confirming this, helping to doom her campaign.

    But instead of changing course, Democrats doubled down by embracing a more ardent progressivism and demanding that everyone follow. Primary challenges by progressives rose dramatically. My experience was emblematic. Working-class voters were my base because I focused on bread-and-butter issues critical to struggling families, and I was not supportive of progressive social issues. After surviving in 2018, I lost in 2020 to a progressive challenger bankrolled by millions from national groups. At the same time, candidates for the Democratic nomination for president in 2020 were stumbling over each other, trying to get further to the left on a variety of issues. Decriminalizing illegal border crossings, funding sex-change operations for prisoners and detained illegal immigrants, and defunding the police became party dogma, further alienating the working class.

    Thanks to bumbling by President Trump and congressional Republicans, however, Democrats won the House in 2018 and captured the White House and both chambers of Congress in 2020.  Progressives felt vindicated and were emboldened to continue their agenda with a self-righteous swagger. President Biden, whose victory was made possible by a reputation he had built over five decades as a moderate deal-maker, foolishly embraced progressives to prepare to run for reelection in 2024. Democratic Sen. Joe Manchin, who won in a state that gave Clinton and Biden less than 30% of the vote, was hounded out of the party by progressives who should have been thankful for every vote he gave them.

    In 2024, Republicans handed a massive in-kind gift to their opponents when they nominated the man most responsible for the Democratic Party’s election victories the past six years. Democrats were also given a unique opportunity to install a nominee who did not have to pander to progressives to win primaries. Perhaps the party had no other choice but Vice President Kamala Harris, who had taken some very progressive positions when running for the nomination in 2019. But with five long years having passed, she could have tried to make a clean and hard break from these. Instead, she chose to walk away from some of these positions softly, never seizing the opportunity to claim that a new working-class friendly perspective led her to change. Harris sealed her fate when she delivered a too-clever-by-half professorial response – “I’ll follow the law” – when asked whether she still supported taxpayer-funded sex-change operations for prisoners and detained illegal aliens. Donald Trump went on to become just the second Republican in 36 years to win the popular vote, thanks in part to significant support from non-white working-class voters, particularly Hispanics. 

    As Democrats try to figure out what to do next, it is folly to believe that all the party needs is “clarity of message,” as former Speaker Nancy Pelosi (CA) recently claimed. And while it is good to propose new policies directed at helping those left behind economically, as Rep. Ro Khanna (CA) did, it won’t solve the political problem. But buried in that post-election piece by Khanna was one sentence that gets much closer to what Democrats must do: “For our economic message to be heard, we must show common sense on issues of crime and the safety of families and not shame or cancel those who may have honest disagreements with us on a particular social issue.” Rep. Seth Moulton (MA) expressed a similar sentiment when he said, “We lost, in part, because we shame and belittle too many opinions held by too many voters, and that needs to stop.” 

    While these are hopeful signs, Democrats must do more than pay lip service to change. After all, a few years ago, Khanna – who is now positioning for a presidential run – was publicly urging our Democratic House colleagues to cancel me from Congress because of honest issue disagreements. And last week, when Moulton dared to give a specific example of not wanting his daughters “getting run over on a playing field by a male or formerly male athlete,” he was lambasted by multiple Democratic officials, including his state’s governor and one of his congressional colleagues. Nowhere did I see any Democrat have the courage to support Moulton’s commonsense concern or even defend him for being willing to raise an issue with significant public resonance.

    Voters are not fools, especially working-class voters who continue to feel that the country is going in the wrong direction and that they always get the short end of the stick. They may not watch day-to-day politics closely, but they understand who and what the Democratic Party now seems to really value. Only time will tell if the party has finally learned a lesson.

    Daniel Lipinski is a distinguished visiting fellow at the Hoover Institution, Stanford University. He represented the Third District of Illinois in the U.S. House of Representatives from 2005 to 2021.

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 11/21/2024 – 17:00

  • The List: Policy Actions To Save America From Globalism Before Time Runs Out
    The List: Policy Actions To Save America From Globalism Before Time Runs Out

    Authored by Brandon Smith via Alt-Market.us,

    It’s been a wild ride. After years of near total leftist control of every significant social and governmental institution in the US and abroad the American people have said enough is enough. The progressives have once again been slapped with the ultimate lesson of our era – Get Woke, Go Broke. This time they’re not just broke; they’re broken.

    I don’t think I’ve seen such an electoral bloodbath in my lifetime (maybe the Reagan landslide in 1984, but I was only a child). The conservatives control the Oval Office, the Senate, the House and the Supreme Court. Regardless of what you might think of Trump, what’s important is that he ran his campaign on anti-woke and anti-globalism and the US population voted for that agenda en masse.

    The American people want an end to the madness of the leftist/globalist regime. They want an end to establishment corruption. They want an end to US involvement in foreign conflicts. They want the woke indoctrination of their children to stop. They want an end to open borders. They want an end to perpetual debt spending and inflation. And, they want reassurance that events like the attempted covid coup against our constitutional liberties will never happen again.

    Over the past several months I have been predicting a Trump election win based on the clear sociopolitical shift in popular sentiment. However, my concern has always been that Trump will not make good on his campaign promises, either because he is being thwarted by Neo-Cons within his own team or because he did not intend to follow through in the first place. We all saw what happened after 2016 – The status quo was mostly maintained.

    To be fair, in 2016 Trump’s team was mostly chosen for him and that team was comprised of many snakes in the grass. This time around I have a bit more optimism. Trump’s coalition is significantly better than his first term and many of the people involved seem to be dedicated to their particular cause. If this is the case and Trump really means to change things for the better, I have a few ideas on how he can ensure that America never again deviates into the path of globalism.

    Some of these actions have already been promoted by the Trump Administration in recent days, some of them have not. Obviously none of these changes are easy but they can be done with the proper enthusiasm and pressure from the American people applied to their representatives in the Senate and Congress. Here’s what we can do as a country to keep our society free and prosperous well into the future.

    1) Recess Appointments For Cabinet

    The first time Trump tried to appoint his cabinet the amount of Senate interference that took place caused delays of almost 4 months, and that was with appointees that represented no threat to the status quo. This time around it is clear that Neo-Cons within the Senate will work with Democrats to outright reject choices like RFK Jr and Matt Gaetz. They WILL try to sabotage any nominee that presents a legitimate threat to the establishment order.

    With this is mind, and per the Constitution, Trump has the option to call a recess of the Senate and make his appointments while they are away and without their approval. There is also a little known rule that allows him to force Congress to adjourn. Candidates for the Senate majority leader position all agreed to support recess appointments before they were voted on, which means there should not be any interference to a call of recess from Trump. Multiple presidents have used this emergency option to fill their cabinets.

    2) Federal Voter ID Law

    It’s seems like a no-brainer. Every state (except one) that the Democrats won in the 2024 election was a state with no voter ID laws. That’s not a coincidence. Correlation is not always causation, but it’s highly suspicious none-the-less. Many developed nations around the world have strict ID laws when it comes to elections. Why do we not have them in the US?

    With the advent of electronic ballots and large scale mail in ballots, a voter ID requirement is more important than ever to prevent election fraud. One of Trump’s top concerns after entering office in 2025 is to pass a federal voter ID requirement for all future elections. This cannot be left to flounder for years, it must be done by 2026.

    3) Total Border Control And Mass Deportation – The Details

    One of the key agendas of globalism is the forced establishment of open borders in the western world, along with mass migrations of third-world aliens cor cultural saturation and replacement. The goal is to destroy the west from within and then replace it with am economically Marxist and morally ambiguous civilization. Stopping this scheme will require aggressively enforced border laws and deportation laws. This requires multiple steps…

    Immediately Establish Texas-Style Border Controls

    Despite constant interference from the Biden Administration, the state of Texas and governor Greg Abbott have been incredibly effective in stopping illegal border crossings using expanded patrols and razor wire barriers. Encounters with illegals on the Texas border have dropped by 86% through Operation Lone Star in the span of a year. That’s impressive. Texas methods should be used across the entire border.

    Increased Fines Against Companies Hiring Illegal Immigrants

    This is a strategy being used by some European nations and it makes sense; a lot of illegals jump the border because they know there’s under the table jobs waiting for them. Trump must make it financially untenable for companies to hire migrants without proper work visas, and greatly increasing fines is the best way to do this.

    100% Tariffs On Mexico Until They Secure Their Own Borders

    The Mexican government is absolutely corrupt and often uses the US border as a pressure valve to get rid of their poor and their criminals. Instead of fixing the problems within their own country they export those problems to America. This needs to stop.

    End All Asylum Requests From Third World Countries

    Until the immigration problem is solved the asylum loophole needs to be closed. Save for a few citizens from countries where very real asylum protections are needed (like oppressed dissidents from China or North Korea), there’s no need to take in most of these people and their asylum claims are fraudulent.

    Increase Efficiency Of Immigrant Worker Visa Program

    Democrats often argue that America cannot survive without migrant workers. I say this is a lie designed to prevent legitimate immigration reform, but if there really is work that needs to be done in our country and migrants are somehow the only people that can do it, then we can have both.

    If Trump streamlines the work visa program to speed up the process while vetting applicants, then we can have controlled borders AND migrant workers. To pay for increased efficiency of the program, double the application fee and reduce their legal work period in the US to 1 year or less.

    Mass Deportations Of Illegals

    This was a key plank of the Trump campaign and it looks like he plans to make it happen. Starting with ALL the migrants that entered the US illegally in the past four years and all those relocated through Biden’s shady visa program. This can be achieved by cutting off existing subsidies to migrants, fines for companies that hire illegals, citizenship verification for home buying or home rentals, ending federal subsidies to Democrat sanctuary cities, etc. Ultimately, most illegals will leave the country on their own.

    4) Shut Down Globalist NGOs

    Globalist NGOs are the primary source of corruption within the US government and our society at large. NGO’s have all the rights of individual citizens with none of the limitations. They can generate billions of dollars for influence campaigns. They can lobby politicians (bribe them) to get legislation put in place. They can use their incredible financial resources to fund activist movements and create civil unrest from thin air. And, they can even fund programs to control education and encourage mass illegal immigration.

    NGOs should be banned from lobbying. And, any NGO’s caught engaging in the funding of woke propaganda in schools, violent activist groups or illegal immigration efforts should be immediately shut down. Some NGOs feed on government funding (like George Soros’ Open Society Foundation) while others are privately funded (like the Ford Foundation). If they are receiving subsidies, that money should be cut off. Stopping the operations of globalist NGOs is imperative to saving western civilization.

    5) Immediate Peace Negotiations On Ukraine

    Here’s the bottom line – Ukraine is losing the war against Russia. Their eastern front is collapsing due to attrition and in another year or less Russia WILL take the entire country. The war is also being managed by proxy by NATO. We are swiftly plunging into open conflict between the east and the west. This must stop. Even if the situation doesn’t go nuclear, a world war at this time would cause a catastrophic economic collapse, for the US, for Europe and most of the East. Only the globalists want this to happen.

    Ukraine is an irrelevant territory not worth fighting over. Americans don’t want to fight over it. Europeans don’t want to fight over it and I doubt the average Russian wants to fight over it. Vladimir Zelensky must be forced to accept the loss of the Donbas to Russia. A DMZ must be established and the fighting must end for the sake of the world.

    6) Investigate Covid Corruption

    There should be an in-depth investigation into the Biden Administration’s handling of the Covid mandates, including the attempted censorship of information contrary to the government narrative. There should be a real investigation into the viral laboratories in Wuhan, China and Anthony Fauci’s involvement with those labs to develop coronaviruses using gain of function research. Americans want answers.

    7) National Ban On CBDCs And The Cashless Economy

    In tandem with open borders, globalists at the IMF and BIS have been quietly building a massive global central bank digital currency framework (CBDCs). The erasure of nationally controlled economies and currencies would be required in order to create a globally centralized economy with a single world currency. And, in order to force populations to accept such a system, the globalists need CBDCs.

    With a cashless economy in place, elites within governments and central banks would have ultimate power to socially engineer public behavior. If they can take away your money any time they please, it’s much harder to rebel against them. If they can program caveats into CBDCs to prevent spending on certain goods (like meat or gas, for example) then they can pressure the populace into accepting carbon controls and other draconian measures. CBDCs are the end of freedom as we know it.

    8) Economic Stop-Gap Plan

    I have outlined options for preventing a total economic collapse in previous articles, so I won’t go in-depth here. I will quickly list some of the most important measures that could be taken to revitalize the struggling system. Many of them are designed to bypass the Federal Reserve.

    • End The Income Tax For 99% Of The Population – Tax The 1%

    • End Property Taxes On Single Family Homes – Only Tax Owners With Multiple Properties

    • Remove All Illegal Immigrants From The US – This Will Trigger A Drop In Property Prices And Rent

    • Create Subsidy Incentives For Married Couples With Children – Home Loans, Education

    • Bring Back Technical Apprenticeship Programs – Increase Technical Workers Without College

    • Use Tariffs, But Also Backstop Tariffs With Domestic Production – Focus On High Quality Goods

    • Domestically Manufacture High Quality Goods With Long Life To Help Fight Inflation

    • Issue A Gold/Silver Backed Treasury Bond – Offer Metals Backed Savings Accounts

    • Institute A Moratorium On Debt Ceiling Increases Until Government Deficit Spending And Debt Are Under Control

    There’s a lot of work that needs to be done to save the economy in the long run but the options above could help to boost the American worker and consumer and stall a breakdown. Currently, the US faces the highest national debt, the highest interest payments and the highest consumer debt in the nation’s history. We are also still in the middle of a stagflationary crisis. Something dramatic must be done soon, before it’s too late.

    Bonus Policy: Institute A Mandatory IQ Test And Mental Acuity Test For All Political Candidates And Leaders

    It’s hard to test a person for moral compass but you can at least test intelligence. A candidate should not be prevented from running for office because of low IQ, but I believe the public has a right to know who they’re voting for. If they decide they don’t want a low IQ leader, then that should be up to them.

    By extension, independent mental acuity testing should be a regular occurrence. As we saw with Joe Biden, the establishment will happily hide the mental decline of a politician if it serves their interests. The people have a right to know.

    No doubt hundreds of other policy ideas could be added to the list above, but these actions are a solid start.  If Trump instituted even half of these solutions the US could be saved from perhaps the worst existential crisis in the nation’s history and globalism would be on the ropes.

    *  *  *

    If you would like to support the work that Alt-Market does while also receiving content on advanced tactics for defeating the globalist agenda, subscribe to our exclusive newsletter The Wild Bunch Dispatch.  Learn more about it HERE.

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 11/21/2024 – 16:20

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Nov 21

Today’s News 21st November 2024

  • There Are No "Easy Wars" Left To Fight, But Do Not Mistake The Longing For One
    There Are No “Easy Wars” Left To Fight, But Do Not Mistake The Longing For One

    Submitted by Alastair Crooke 

    There Are No “Easy Wars” Left To Fight, But Do Not Mistake The Longing For One

    Israelis, as a whole, are exhibiting a rosy assurance that they can harness Trump, if not to the full annexation of the Occupied Territories (Trump in his first term did not support such annexation), but rather, to ensnare him into a war on Iran. Many (even most) Israelis are raring for war on Iran and an aggrandisement of their territory (devoid of Arabs). They are believing the puffery that Iran ‘lies naked’, staggeringly vulnerable, before a US and Israeli military strike.  

    Trump’s Team nominations, so far, reveal a foreign policy squad of fierce supporters of Israel and of passionate hostility to Iran. The Israeli media term it a ‘dream team’ for Netanyahu. It certainly looks that way.

    The Israel Lobby could not have asked for more. They have got it. And with the new CIA chief, they get a known ultra China hawk as a bonus.

    But in the domestic sphere the tone is precisely the converse: The key nomination for ‘cleaning the stables’ is Matt Gaetz as Attorney General; he is a real “bomb thrower”. And for the Intelligence clean-up, Tulsi Gabbard is appointed as Director of National Intelligence. All intelligence agencies will report to her, and she will be responsible for the President’s Daily briefing. The intel assessments may thus begin to reflect something closer to reality. 

    The deep Inter-Agency structure has reason to be very afraid; they are panicking — especially over Gaetz.

    Elon Musk and Vivek Ramaswamy have the near impossible task of cutting out-of-control federal spending and currency printing. The System is deeply dependent on the bloat of government spending to keep the cogs and levers of the mammoth ‘security’ boondoggle whirring. It is not going to be yielded up without a bitter fight.

    So, on the one hand, the Lobby gets a dream team (Israel), but on the other side (the domestic sphere), it gets a renegade team.  

    This must be deliberate. Trump knows that Biden’s legacy of bloating GDP with government jobs and excessive public spending is the real ‘time bomb’ awaiting him. Again the withdrawal symptoms, as the drug of easy money is withdrawn, may prove incendiary. Moving to a structure of tariffs and low taxes will be disruptive.

    Whether deliberate or not, Trump is keeping his cards close to his chest. We have only glimpses of intent — and the water is being seriously muddied by the infamous ‘Inter-Agency’ grandees. For example, in respect to the Pentagon sanctioning private-sector contractors to work in Ukraine, this was done in coordination with “inter-agency stakeholders”. 

    The old nemesis that paralyzed his first term again faces Trump. Then, during the Ukraine impeachment process, one witness (Vindman), when asked why he would not defer to the President’s explicit instructions, replied that whilst Trump has his view on Ukraine policy, that stance did NOT align with that of the ‘Inter-Agency’ agreed position. In plain language, Vindman denied that a US president has agency in foreign policy formulation.

    In short, the ‘Inter-Agency structure’ was signalling to Trump that military support for Ukraine must continue.

    When the Washington Post published their detailed story of a Trump-Putin phone call — that the Kremlin emphatically states never happened — the deep structures of policy were simply telling Trump that it would be they who determine what the shape of the US ‘solution’ for Ukraine would be.

    Similarly, when Netanyahu boasts to have spoken to Trump and that Trump “shares” his views regarding Iran, Trump was being indirectly instructed what his policy towards Iran needs to be. All the (false) rumours about appointments to his Team too, were but the interagency signalling their choices for his key posts. No wonder confusion reigns.

    So, what can be deduced at this early stage?  If there is a common thread, it has been a constant refrain that Trump is against war. And that he demands from his picks personal loyalty and no ties of obligation to the Lobby or the Swamp.  

    So, is the packing of his Administration with ‘Israel Firsters’ an indication that Trump is edging toward a ‘Realist’s Faustian pact’ to destroy Iran in order to cripple China’s energy supply source (90% from Iran), and thus weaken China? — Two birds with one stone, so to speak? 

    The collapse of Iran would also weaken Russia and hobble the BRICS’ transport-corridor projects. Central Asia needs both Iranian energy and its key transport corridors linking China, Iran, and Russia as primary nodes of Eurasian commerce. 

    When the RAND Organisation, the Pentagon think-tank, recently published a landmark appraisal of the 2022 National Defence Strategy (NDS), its findings were stark: An unrelentingly bleak analysis of every aspect of the US war machine. In brief, the US is “not prepared”, the appraisal argued, in any meaningful way for serious ‘competition’ with its major adversaries — and is vulnerable or even significantly outmatched in every sphere of warfare.

    The US, the RAND appraisal continues, could in short order be drawn into a war across multiple theatres with peer and near-peer adversaries — and it could lose. It warns that the US public has not internalized the costs of the US losing its position as the world superpower. The US must therefore engage globally with a presence—military, diplomatic, and economic—to preserve influence worldwide.

    Indeed, as one respected commentator has noted, the ‘Empire at all Costs’ cult (i.e. the RAND Organisation zeitgeist) is now “more desperate than ever to find a war it can fight to restore its fortunes and prestige”.  

    And China would be altogether a different proposition for a demonstrative act of destruction in order “to preserve US influence worldwide” — for the US is “not prepared” for serious conflict with its peer adversaries: Russia or China, RAND says. 

    The straitened situation of the US after decades of fiscal excess and offshoring (the backdrop to its current weakened military industrial base) now makes kinetic war with China or Russia or “across multiple theatres” a prospect to be shunned.

    The point that the commentator above makes is that there are no ‘easy wars’ left to fight. And that the reality (brutally outlined by RAND) is that the US can choose one — and only one war to fight.  Trump may not want any war, but the Lobby grandees — all supporters of Israel, if not active Zionists supporting the displacement of Palestinians — want war. And they believe they can get one. 

    Put starkly and plainly: Has Trump thought this through? Have the others in the Trump Team reminded him that in today’s world, with US military strength slipping away, there no longer are any ‘easy wars’ to fight, although Zionists believe that with a decapitation strike on Iran’s religious and IRGC leadership (on the lines of the Israel’s strikes on Hizbullah leaders in Beirut), the Iranian people would rise up against their leaders, and side with Israel for a ‘New Middle East’.  

    Netanyahu has just made his second broadcast to the Iranian people promising them early salvation. He and his government are not waiting to ask Trump to nod his consent to the annexation of all Occupied Palestinian Territories. That project is being implemented on the ground. It is unfolding now. Netanyahu and his cabinet have the ethnic cleansing ‘bit between their teeth’. Will Trump be able to roll it back? How so? Or will he succumb to becoming ‘genocide Don’?  

    This putative ‘Iran War’ is following the same narrative cycle as with Russia: ‘Russia is weak; its military is poorly trained; its equipment mostly recycled from the Soviet era; its missiles and artillery in short supply’. Zbig Brzezinski earlier had taken the logic to its conclusion in The Grand Chessboard (1997): Russia would have no choice but to submit to the expansion of NATO and to the geopolitical dictates of the US. That was ‘then’ (a little more than a year ago). Russia took the western challenge — and today is in the driving seat in Ukraine, whilst the West looks on helplessly.

    This last month, it was US retired General Jack Keane, the strategic analyst for Fox News, who argued that Israel’s air strike on Iran had left it “essentially naked”, with most air defences “taken down” and its missile production factories destroyed by Israel’s 26 October strikes. Iran’s vulnerability, Keane said, is “simply staggering”.

    Kean channels the early Brzezinski: His message is clear — Iran will be an ‘easy war’. That forecast however, is likely to be revealed as dead wrong. And, if pursued, will lead to a complete military and economic disaster for Israel. But do not rule out the distinct possibility that Netanyahu — besieged on all fronts and teetering on the brink of internal crisis and even jail — is desperate enough to do it. His is, after all, a Biblical mandate that he pursues for Israel!

    Iran likely will launch a painful response to Israel before the 20 January Presidential Inauguration. Its riposte will demonstrate Iran’s unexpected and unforeseen military innovation. What the US and Israel will then do may well open the door to wider regional war. Sentiment across the region seethes at the slaughter in the Occupied Territories and in Lebanon. 

    Trump may not appreciate just how isolated the US and Israel are among Israel’s Arab and Sunni neighbors. The US is stretched so thin, and its forces across the region are so vulnerable to the hostility that the daily slaughter incubates, that a regional war might be enough to bring the entire house of cards tumbling down. The crisis would pitch Trump into a financial crisis that could sink his domestic economic aspirations too.

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 11/20/2024 – 23:25

  • Trump Takes His Time With Secret Service Director Choice
    Trump Takes His Time With Secret Service Director Choice

    Authored by Susan Crabtree via ReaalClearPolitics,

    It just might be the most personal hiring decision President-elect Trump will ever make, but if he’s already chosen, he’s keeping the contenders in suspense.

    After surviving two assassination attempts in roughly two months, Donald Trump is in the awkward position of owing his life to the Secret Service agents and officers who intervened to protect him, even as he remains deeply critical of the failures that allowed the near-misses to occur.

    And the threats against Trump, Vice President-elect J.D. Vance, and the leaders of the incoming administration aren’t going away. In late September, then-Rep. Matt Gaetz, Trump’s controversial choice for attorney general, said he was briefed by senior members of the Department of Homeland Security that there were five known assassination teams threatening Trump’s life, three of which he said were foreign. Just three days after the election, the Justice Department charged three people in connection to an alleged Iranian plot to assassinate Trump.

    Still, just days after the second attempt on this life, Trump heaped praise on the agent for quick action after spotting suspect Ryan Routh’s rifle sticking out of the bushes along the perimeter of his Florida golf course and then opening fire. Trump contrasted that swift intervention with the first attempt July 13 when a bullet grazed his ear.

    “And, in this particular case, you had a very sharp agent, as good as you could find, and did a fantastic job,” Trump said in an interview on Fox News’s “Hannity.” 

    “But somebody could have missed the barrel of that rifle,” he added. “Somebody of lesser talents or somebody that was distracted could have missed or could have been shot, I mean, frankly, could have also been shot.” 

    Trump acknowledged the incident at his golf club in West Palm Beach ”worked out very well” but said the July 13 incident in Butler, Pennsylvania, when shooter Thomas Crooks killed rally goer Corey Comperatore and wounded two others before being shot by a Secret Service counter sniper, “was a very different story.”

    “Somebody should have been on that building. And that’s a different story. But they also showed great … they were very brave, because, when those bullets were flying, they were … they were … trying to protect me.” 

    The dual sentiments no doubt factor into Trump’s decision-making regarding his choice to lead the beleaguered Secret Service. Even before the two assassination attempts, the agency was facing criticism over its DEI hiring priorities, lack of thorough applicant vetting, and the lowering of its training and physical fitness standards. At the same time, Secret Service morale hovered among the lowest of all federal agencies.

    The congressional reports and a review panel’s findings also cite the inexperience of two agents in charge of security for the Butler rally, as well as the failure of supervisors to re-check their work and make the necessary changes. They also chronicled a litany of mistakes, including failing to check whether a local law enforcement agent was posted on the building where the Crooks perched, not including that building in the official event perimeter, and maintaining siloed communications between the Secret Service and local law enforcement partners.

    Even though Trump was thankful for the eagle-eyed agent who spotted Routh hiding in the bushes at his West Palm Beach golf course, critics faulted his Secret Service detail for failing to sweep the perimeter. The 58-year-old had been camping out on the perimeter of the course 12 hours ahead of time but went unnoticed until Trump was within several hundred feet of his loaded rifle. Acting Secret Service Director Ronald Rowe explained the decision not to search the perimeter of the golf course because the golf game was considered off-the-record, or “OTR” in agency parlance, meaning it was not on Trump’s official schedule even though he regularly played the course on the weekends.

    After the attempts on Trump’s life, the agency faced an avalanche of criticism from congressional committees, internal agency whistleblowers, and a scathing report from a bipartisan Independent Review Panel recommending a thorough overhaul of the Secret Service leadership.  

    The two assassination attempts within two months were the lowest point for the Secret Service since President Ronald Reagan was shot in early 1981. But Trump’s big win has boosted confidence within the agency that major reforms will begin once he names and installs a new director.

    Now that Trump has won, and Secret Service employees expect the incoming president to choose new leaders, agents and officers are deeply divided on who is the best candidate to thoroughly overhaul the agency. The top reform many seek is to allow the Secret Service leaders to jettison DEI priorities and return to making hiring decisions instead of delegating recruiting and vetting to administrative personnel unfamiliar with the rigors of the protective assignments.

    The top two names circulating among current and retired Secret Service agents and officers are Sean Curran, the leader of Trump’s personal detail, and Dan Bongino, a conservative commentator and host of a popular podcast who previously served for 12 years in the Secret Service.

    Both were with Trump Saturday night for the Ultimate Fighting Championship match between Jon Jones and Stipe Mocic at Madison Square Garden. Curran was a part of Trump’s security team that night, and Bongino was part of Trump’s entourage of Cabinet picks, politicians, and celebrities, including Elon Musk, Tulsi Gabbard, RFK Jr., Dana White, Joe Rogan, Speaker Mike Johnson, Kid Rock, and Jelly Roll.

    During the event, according to a Secret Service source, Bongino told other special agents protecting Trump that “Help is on the way.”

    During Bongino’s Monday podcast, however, he was far more coy about Trump’s, and his, intentions.

    “So, I know a lot of you are interested in a lot of the behind the scenes about who’s what … I’m just here again to repeat, none of this stuff is my decision, okay – about anything,” he told his listeners.

    “You guys know what I’m talking about. And there’s a lot to think about if that decision were to happen, and you guys will be the first to know,” he added. “Because I love you, and you guys matter. And so just hang with me, you know?”

    Curran was caught that night at the Madison Square Garden fight in an elevator pic with Trump and Musk. Curran usually tries to operate behind the scenes, though his image is immortalized in the iconic photo of Trump in the immediate aftermath of the first assassination attempt. Curran appears to Trump’s left as the then-GOP nominee pumps his fist in the air, blood trickling down his cheek and an American flag fluttering in the background.

    The choice between Curran and Bongino is highly competitive, and each have constituencies pulling for them. Trump is very close to Curran, who served as the assistant special agent in charge of Trump’s security detail while he was president and then moved to lead the detail in 2021, when Biden won and Trump was out of office. That top leadership role continued while Trump was running for reelection. Curran’s supporters for the director job credit him for pushing back against the outmoded protocol that because Trump is technically a former president, he shouldn’t therefore be allotted more security assets.

    Instead, Curran continually tried to persuade Secret Service top brass to allocate higher security resources because Trump obviously faced far more threats as one of the most well-known and controversial political figures in the world and could not be treated like other former presidents. Until the assassination attempts, however, Secret Service leaders rejected those requests, and sources say Curran has the receipts – a long-running written record of those leadership denials.

    Curran was successful in obtaining more security resources for Mar-a-Lago even before the assassination attempts, although the agency was so slow in installing them that a juvenile managed to enter the property and jump into a pool late last year.

    Secret Service sources say that just a few days after Trump’s decisive election win, Curran told fellow agents that he believed Trump would tap him for the top role. Many veteran agents have reached out to RCP to back Curran’s candidacy, arguing that he’s an even-keeled leader and exceptional agent regarding his training, drilling, and performance levels.

    But others have faulted him for allowing an inexperienced female agent to serve as one of two agents in charge of security plans for the Butler rally, without supervisors modifying the plan after required walk-throughs and extra scrutiny. Others, including Erik Prince, a former Navy SEAL who runs the security firm Blackwater, have criticized the Secret Service leadership for a “lack of seriousness” in securing Trump throughout this campaign. He also said the perimeter should have been extended to 1,000 meters from the stage because that’s how far an expert sniper can accurately shoot.

    Trump has repeatedly praised the agents who put themselves in the line of fire to protect him in the moments after he was shot in Butler, but Prince wasn’t as impressed.

    “The Secret Service detail did an awful job getting Trump off the X and let him stand up again,” Prince told a panel of Republican House members at the Heritage Foundation in August.

    “[It showed] great instincts of the president to come back defiant, having just been shot in the head to come back and say, ‘Fight, fight, fight,’” Prince acknowledged. “But he never should have had the opportunity to do that because his detail should have put him horizontal and moved him off there immediately.”

    If Trump taps Curran to lead the Secret Service, he will reject the recommendations of two bipartisan blue-ribbon commissions who recommended in 2015 and again this year that the next president choose someone outside the agency to fill the director role.

    Dan Bongino for many years has been highly critical of the Secret Service, and he was especially so after the July 13 attempt on Trump’s life. Bongino also sat on the Heritage panel to Prince’s left and took a broader view. The conservative commentator argued that the problems in the Secret Service were systemic and directly related to DEI initiatives and the lowering of meritocracy and training standards.

    Rep. Cori Mills, a Florida Republican who had served as a member of the Army’s 82nd Airborne Division before becoming a security specialist in the private defense sector, appeared on the same panel.  

    Responding to Bongino’s testimony, Mills said, “I think you’re saying DEI plays a major role, not meritocracy, with regards to the current culture that has been fostered [at the Secret Service.]

    Bongino provided a terse response: “Not a [role] – but the major role,” he stressed.

    The former Fox News host has a solid following on social media and among active and retired Secret Service agents and officers who argue that he would go to the mat to overhaul the agency and end DEI and other non-meritocracy hiring priorities. But some fear Bongino has been away from the Secret Service too long to know how to sort out the bad apples in leadership. Others argue that it depends on who Bongino would tap as his deputy to run the day-to-day agency operations while he’s dealing with the bigger picture and broad reforms.

    Because Trump will continue to face threats from Iran throughout his time in the Oval Office, the Secret Service director will no doubt have an elevated role in the Trump administration and will likely be constantly interacting with the intelligence community to assess the threat levels. If confirmed, that elite group of national security Cabinet members would likely include Tulsi Gabbard as the director of national intelligence, or DNI, and John Ratcliffe, who previously served as DNI and whom Trump nominated to become his CIA director, as well as whomever Trump names as FBI director.

    Kash Patel, a former National Security Council official in the last Trump administration, and former Rep. Mike Rogers, who had served as an FBI agent for several years, are contenders for the FBI director job. Bongino’s brash style may be better equipped to square off with those outsized egos and cut through the agency’s bureaucracy and woke policies. Some in the Secret Service community are hoping Trump appoints a leader who is listening to the rank-and-file to distinguish the bad actors from the hard-working agents and push out the ineffective and manipulative leaders.

    Besides Bongino and Curran, there are several other top contenders to lead the Secret Service and the necessary reforms, including Tom Armas, a U.S. Marine general who also previously served several years as a Secret Service agent but spent the majority of his career in the military. Armas worked with Bongino in the Secret Service’s New York Field Office and has received high praise for his 9/11 bravery. Armas ran into the collapsing World Trade Center buildings and carried many people to safety amidst the chaos, dust, and debris.

    If selected, Armas would follow in the footsteps of Randolph “Tex” Alles, a formerU.S. Marine Corps general and the first Secret Service director selected from outside the agency in its 159-year history. Trump chose Alles to lead the agency from 2017 to 2019. During that time, Alles built a good rapport among rank-and-file agents, but many believed several agency leaders successfully sabotaged him. Alles was swept out of the agency when Department of Homeland Security Secretary Kirstjen Nielson left her post in April 2019.

    Secret Service sources are also touting Michael D’Ambrosio, a respected senior career agent and former platoon commander in the U.S. Marines, for a leadership post. D’Ambrosio aggressively helped rush Trump off stage during a Nevada campaign rally eight years ago when a protester rushed the stage.

    Other names in the mix include Jim Lewis, a former Secret Service agent who now serves as a senior Department of Homeland Security official, and Billy Davis, a high-performing agent who retired in 2015 after 29 years with the Secret Service (Davis is also known as a former Clemson University football player).

    Susan Crabtree is RealClearPolitics’ national political correspondent.

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 11/20/2024 – 23:00

  • Unity, But Not Compromise, Is The Path Forward
    Unity, But Not Compromise, Is The Path Forward

    Authored by Frank Miele via RealClearPolitics,

    It really happened. Donald Trump won convincingly, just as I predicted. So I don’t need to publish a retraction or correction today like we are due from so many liberals for their substitution of wishful thinking for reasoned analysis in the leadup to the election.

    But, on the other hand, I don’t want to waste your time and mine rehashing all the reasons why Trump won, or more significantly, why Kamala Harris lost. In retrospect, the possibility of a Harris victory seems as remote as Trump winning the Hispanic male vote. Oh wait!

    So instead, let’s look forward. In particular, the example of Rodney King seems appropriate. King was famously the victim of a televised police beating in Los Angeles in 1991. When four officers were found not guilty the following year, the city erupted in violence, leading King to make his appeal for calm: “People, I just want to say, you know, can we all get along?”

    King was a victim who became a leader, a man who put aside his own pain and embraced the possibility of a better world – a world where we can all get along.

    That world seems as distant as ever today, but maybe that’s because we haven’t fully understood what it means to get along. For Rodney King, it meant simply, can we stop killing each other? Can we stop spiraling out of control, looking for revenge and expecting perfection from others while we ourselves are less than perfect?

    Those were big questions. But for us American citizens, in the wake of the 2024 election, it also means confronting just how far apart we are – in philosophy, in goals, in tactics – and then deciding if we want to stay together or get a divorce. The possibility of a shooting civil war is remote at best, but if we continue to move in opposite directions, it will be hard to achieve the unity that many of our leaders espouse.

    And if this is a national crisis, it is also a personal one. I doubt I’m the only one who has been confronted with friends and family members who are so disheartened by the nation’s rejection of the Democratic presidential candidate – and particularly the elevation of Donald Trump – that they hold me personally responsible. This, despite the fact that I rarely talk politics except in my own home, or in my columns.

    I believe those personal relationships can be healed by time because politics is only a small part of how we get along on an individual level. But when it comes to bringing together two political parties that are diametrically opposed on border policy, taxes, military readiness, spending, crime, abortion, lawfare and government expansionism, it is much harder to put aside our daggers.

    So the question becomes, how do we restore normalcy to our civic discourse? How do we avoid recriminations and self-congratulation? And most importantly, how can President-elect Trump, with his MAGA mandate, govern in order to bring about the unity that he says he wants?

    What exactly would that unity even look like? Is it possible to unify abortion-rights advocates with anti-abortion stalwarts? Proponents of globalism with America-first nationalism? Those who protect illegal immigrants with those who mourn the needless murders and rapes that an open border has caused?

    The common idea of unity is bipartisanship or compromise. The winning side will generously surrender a portion of its power in order to let the losing side claim some victories as well. The idea is that the losers will repay the favor by giving the winners respect and honor. This is the fantasy version of unity. No party in power will surrender its ability to promote its agenda if it has true principles rather than duplicitous pragmatism. Nor should it.

    A more realistic view of unity is the Civil War model. Two sides are diametrically opposed. One side will prevail. You fight like hell to make sure it is yours. President Lincoln’s goal wasn’t to crush the South, but that result was necessary in order to ensure that his vision of “one nation indivisible” would quash the secessionist movement and stop the spread of slavery. Unity was his goal, but compromise was not – at least until the war was decisively won and Reconstruction would begin.

    So it must be for Donald Trump in the wake of his historic victory. The public has given him his marching orders, and he intends to follow them relentlessly – bringing real change to the way government works. His first term provided mostly ephemeral results, with the exception of three Supreme Court justices. The wall was built – and then unbuilt. American energy was unleashed – and then leashed again. Peace was on its way to the Middle East with the Abraham Accords – and then dashed into a million pieces by Hamas.

    This time around, Trump knows he only has four years to fulfill his plans. So he’s moving with lightning speed to do exactly what Abraham Lincoln accomplished in his four years in the White House: unite the country by demonstrating strength, wisdom and patriotism.

    This ambitious goal perhaps explains Trump’s seemingly antagonistic selection of Cabinet secretaries. Matt Gaetz for attorney general? Robert Kennedy Jr. for Health and Human Services? Pete Hegseth for Defense? Tulsi Gabbard to oversee the intelligence agencies, including the CIA? There were other qualified candidates for all those positions, but would they have fought as fiercely as these picks to revolutionize the agencies they would helm?

    Turning back to our Civil War model, after first selecting traditional generals who were consensus choices, Lincoln decided to go with his gut and promoted Ulysses S. “Unconditional Surrender” Grant and “scorched earth” William Sherman to bring the enemy to their heels. Trump seems to be after the same kind of unsparing determination. Go big or go home.

    To his enemies, that translates as Trump’s “authoritarian tendencies,” but leveraging one’s political capital to push the nation inexorably in one direction is not necessarily the act of a dictator. That kind of insistent progress is the very definition of unity as exemplified by Franklin D. Roosevelt, who used the force of his personality and his political vision to reshape politics for three decades and beyond.

    Trump has certainly dominated the political conversation for the last decade. By not compromising with his enemies, I think it is safe to say he believes he can eventually persuade them to accept his unifying MAGA vision for America just as FDR convinced the nation to celebrate his transformative New Deal.

    And any Republican senator who stands in Trump’s way had better be prepared to reap the whirlwind.

    Frank Miele, the retired editor of the Daily Inter Lake in Kalispell, Mont., is a columnist for RealClearPolitics. His book “The Media Matrix: What If Everything You Know Is Fake” is available from his Amazon author page. Visit him at HeartlandDiaryUSA.com or follow him on Facebook @HeartlandDiaryUSA and on X/Gettr @HeartlandDiary.

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 11/20/2024 – 22:35

  • Hezbollah Chief Vows More Attacks On Tel Aviv While Awaiting Israel's Response To Ceasefire Plan
    Hezbollah Chief Vows More Attacks On Tel Aviv While Awaiting Israel’s Response To Ceasefire Plan

    In his third major address since becoming Hezbollah’s Secretary General in the wake of Hassan Nasrallah’s death, Naim Qassem threatened to target Tel Aviv in response to recent Beirut strikes.

    “We will not leave the capital under Israeli enemy attacks. When Beirut is under attack by the enemy, the response must be in Tel Aviv,” he said. The Hezbollah chief added that “The enemy must understand that things will not remain as such when Beirut is attacked.”

    He laid out that Israel must pay a “heavy price” for the assassination of Hezbollah media relations chief Mohammed Afif this week, which happened in Beirut.

    Drones and rockets fired from Lebanon into Tel Aviv have already begun ramping up in the past days, even though such targeting that deep into Israel remains rare.

    Monday saw a Hezbollah missile strike Tel Aviv, near a shopping mall and busy area, which wounded five people and caused extensive damage.

    Tehran Times reports, “An Israeli media outlet reported among the missiles that landed in Tel Aviv was a Fateh 110 missile, which is a surface-to-surface missile recognized for its significant destructive power. It is engineered to strike critical targets with pinpoint accuracy within a margin of up to ten meters.”

    Currently, Biden’s Middle East envoy Amos Hochstein is going between warring capitals, seeking to finalize a US-proposed peace plan.

    Hezbollah and the Lebanese government are said to be backing the ceasefire, and are awaiting Israel’s response. However, the prospect that a ceasefire will be reached soon doesn’t look promising. Below is what Secretary-General Qassem said in his speech regarding the plan:

    “We got the negotiation document, we examined the document and we transferred our notes about it,” he said. This comes as Hochstein delayed his arrival in Israel as he attempts to smooth over more details of the deal.

    In Qassem’s opinion, “Israel expects to get through the agreement what it did not get on the ground,” referring to the Israeli ground operations in southern Lebanon. Several attempts to reach an end to hostilities have failed, including those proposed by US President Joe Biden and French President Emmanuel Macron.

    “In the past, we agreed to the Biden-Macron proposal on the basis of ending the war, but they killed Nasrallah,” Qassem said. “We went through a real crisis after his assassination, but after 10 days we managed to recover and heal our wounds.”

    Hezbollah has been revealing an ever-more sophisticated drone arsenal…

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Many details of the plan remain secret. At this moment, the skies over Lebanon are as dangerous as ever, with Israeli warplanes pounding Beirut, the Bekaa Valley, Tyre and the south, and especially the capital suburb of Dahieh.

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 11/20/2024 – 22:10

  • This Is How It Begins: The Deep State Wants To Terminate The Constitution
    This Is How It Begins: The Deep State Wants To Terminate The Constitution

    Authored by John & Nisha Whitehead via The Rutherford Institute,

    “That was when they suspended the Constitution. They said it would be temporary.”

    – Margaret Atwood, The Handmaid’s Tale

    This is how it begins.

    This is how it always begins, justified in the name of national security.

    Mass roundups. Raids. Indefinite detentions in concentration camps. Martial law. The erosion of habeas corpus protections. The suspension of the Constitution, at least for select segments of the population. A hierarchy of rights, contingent on whether you belong to a favored political class.

    This is what you can expect in the not-so-distant future.

    Once you allow the government to overreach the restraints imposed  by the Constitution, no matter what that threat might be, it will be that much harder to restrain it again, no matter which party is at the helm.

    We’ve seen this played out time and again.

    Some years ago, for instance, at the height of the COVID-19 pandemic, the Salt Lake Tribune Editorial Board suggested that government officials should mandate mass vaccinations and deploy the National Guard “to ensure that people without proof of vaccination would not be allowed, well, anywhere.”

    In other words, they wanted the government to use the military to round up and lock up the unvaccinated in concentration camps.

    That didn’t happen, but it so easily could have.

    Now the script has been flipped, and it’s the soon-to-be Trump Administration promising to use the military to round up and lock up undesirables in concentration camps.

    At this moment in time, those so-called “undesirables” are illegal immigrants, but given what we know about the government and its expansive definition of what constitutes a threat to its power, any one of us could be next up in the police state’s crosshairs.

    Once you give the government a taste of that kind of power—to disregard the Constitution, even for a day; to use the military for domestic policing; to rely on mass deportations and concentration camps in order to sidestep due process procedures—it won’t be so easy to rein it in when it runs amok.   

    And it will run amok.

    You don’t have to be an illegal immigrant or a conspiracy theorist or even anti-government to be worried about what lies ahead. You just have to recognize the truth in the warning: power corrupts, and absolute power corrupts absolutely.

    This is why significant numbers of people are worried: because this is the slippery slope that starts with supposedly well-meaning intentions for the greater good and ends with tyrannical abuses no one should tolerate.

    We’ve already allowed the government to significantly undermine our constitutional republic.

    We’ve allowed ourselves to be seduced by the false siren song of politicians promising safety in exchange for relinquished freedom. We placed our trust in political saviors and failed to ask questions to hold our representatives accountable to abiding by the Constitution. We looked the other way and made excuses while the government amassed an amazing amount of power over us, and backed up that power-grab with a terrifying amount of military might and weaponry, and got the courts to sanction their actions every step of the way. We chose to let partisan politics divide us and turn us into easy targets for the government’s oppression.

    Consider for yourself.

    We are in the grip of martial law. We have what the founders feared most: a “standing” or permanent army on American soil. This de facto standing army is made up of weaponized, militarized domestic police forces which look like, dress like, and act like the military; are armed with guns, ammunition and military-style equipment; are authorized to make arrests; and are trained in military tactics.

    We are in the government’s crosshairs. The U.S. government continues to act as judge, jury and executioner over a populace that have been pre-judged and found guilty, stripped of their rights, and left to suffer at the hands of government agents trained to respond with the utmost degree of violence. Consequently, we are at the mercy of law enforcement officers who have almost absolute discretion to decide who is a threat, what constitutes resistance, and how harshly they can deal with the citizens they were appointed to “serve and protect.” With alarming regularity, unarmed men, women, children and even pets are being gunned down by the government’s standing army of militarized police who shoot first and ask questions later.

    We are no longer safe in our homes. This present menace comes from the government’s army of bureaucratized, corporatized, militarized SWAT teams who are waging war on the last stronghold left to us as a free people: the sanctity of our homes.

    We have no real freedom of speech. We are moving fast down a slippery slope to an authoritarian society in which the only opinions, ideas and speech expressed are the ones permitted by the government and its corporate cohorts. In more and more cases, the government is declaring war on what should be protected political speech whenever it challenges the government’s power, reveals the government’s corruption, exposes the government’s lies, and encourages the citizenry to push back against the government’s many injustices. The ramifications are so far-reaching as to render almost every American who criticizes the government an extremist in word, deed, thought or by association.

    We have no real privacy. We’re being spied on by a domestic army of government snitches, spies and techno-warriors. This government of Peeping Toms is watching everything we do, reading everything we write, listening to everything we say, and monitoring everything we spend. Beware of what you say, what you read, what you write, where you go, and with whom you communicate, because it is all being recorded, stored, and catalogued, and will be used against you eventually, at a time and place of the government’s choosing.

    We are losing our right to bodily privacy and integrity. The debate over bodily integrity covers broad territory, ranging from forced vaccinations, forced cavity searches, forced colonoscopies, forced blood draws and forced breath-alcohol tests to forced DNA extractions, forced eye scans, and forced inclusion in biometric databases: these are just a few ways in which Americans continue to be reminded that we have no real privacy, no real presumption of innocence, and no real control over what happens to our bodies during an encounter with government officials. The groundwork being laid is a prologue to what will become the police state’s conquest of a new, relatively uncharted, frontier: inner space, specifically, the inner workings (genetic, biological, biometric, mental, emotional) of the human race.

    We no longer have a right to private property. If government agents can invade your home, break down your doors, kill your dog, damage your furnishings and terrorize your family, your property is no longer private and secure—it belongs to the government. Hard-working Americans are having their bank accounts, homes, cars electronics and cash seized by police under the assumption that they have allegedly been associated with some criminal scheme.

    We have no due process. The groundwork has been laid for a new kind of government where it won’t matter if you’re innocent or guilty, whether you’re a threat to the nation, or even if you’re a citizen. What will matter is what the government—or whoever happens to be calling the shots at the time—thinks. And if the powers-that-be think you’re a threat to the nation and should be locked up, then you’ll be locked up with no access to the protections our Constitution provides.

    We are no longer presumed innocent. The burden of proof has been reversed. Now we’re presumed guilty unless we can prove our innocence beyond a reasonable doubt in a court of law. Rarely, are we even given the opportunity to do so. The government has embarked on a diabolical campaign to create a nation of suspects predicated on a massive national DNA database. Having already used surveillance technology to render the entire American populace potential suspects, DNA technology in the hands of government coupled with artificial intelligence will complete our transition to a suspect society in which we are all merely waiting to be matched up with a crime.

    We have lost the right to be anonymous and move about freely.  At every turn, we’re hemmed in by laws, fines and penalties that regulate and restrict our autonomy, and surveillance cameras that monitor our movements. Likewise, digital currency provides the government and its corporate partners with a mode of commerce that can easily be monitored, tracked, tabulated, mined for data, hacked, hijacked and confiscated when convenient.

    We no longer have a government of the people, by the people and for the people. In fact, a study conducted by Princeton and Northwestern University concluded that the U.S. government does not represent the majority of American citizens. Instead, the study found that the government is ruled by the rich and powerful, or the so-called “economic elite.” Moreover, the researchers concluded that policies enacted by this governmental elite nearly always favor special interests and lobbying groups. In other words, we are being ruled by an oligarchy disguised as a democracy, and arguably on our way towards fascism—a form of government where private corporate interests rule, money calls the shots, and the people are seen as mere subjects to be controlled.

    We have no guardians of justice. The courts were established to intervene and protect the people against the government and its agents when they overstep their bounds. Yet through their deference to police power, preference for security over freedom, and evisceration of our most basic rights for the sake of order and expediency, the courts have become the guardians of the American police state in which we now live. As a result, sound judgment and justice have largely taken a back seat to legalism, statism and elitism, while preserving the rights of the people has been deprioritized and made to play second fiddle to both governmental and corporate interests.

    We have been saddled with a dictator for life. Secret, unchecked presidential powers—acquired through the use of executive orders, decrees, memorandums, proclamations, national security directives and legislative signing statements and which can be activated by any sitting president—now enable past, president and future presidents to operate above the law and beyond the reach of the Constitution.

    We are one crisis or state of emergency away from having the Constitution terminated.

    Mind you, the powers-that-be want the Constitution terminated.

    They want us to be censored, silenced, muzzled, gagged, zoned out, caged in and shut down.

    They want our speech and activities monitored for any sign of “extremist” activity.

    They want us to be estranged from each other and kept at a distance from those who are supposed to represent us. They want taxation without representation. They want a government without the consent of the governed.

    Connect the dots.

    This was never about politics, populist movements, or making America great again.

    This is what happens when good, generally decent people—distracted by manufactured crises, polarizing politics, and fighting that divides the populace into warring “us vs. them” camps—fail to take note of the looming danger that threatens to wipe freedom from the map and place us all in chains.

    It’s what happens when any government is empowered to adopt a comply-or-suffer-the-consequences mindset that is enforced through mandates, lockdowns, penalties, detention centers, martial law, and a disregard for the rights of the individual.

    As I make clear in my book Battlefield America: The War on the American People and in its fictional counterpart The Erik Blair Diaries, the slippery slope begins in just this way, with propaganda campaigns about the public good being more important than individual liberty, and it ends with lockdowns and concentration camps.

    The danger signs are everywhere.

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 11/20/2024 – 21:45

  • American Dream? Depends… Home Price-to-Income Ratio By State
    American Dream? Depends… Home Price-to-Income Ratio By State

    With steadily increasing home prices and stagnating wages among lower-wage workers, home ownership for many Americans has become increasingly unaffordable.

    The home price-to-income ratio measures the relationship between the median home price and the median household income. This metric is often used to gauge housing affordability, accounting for variations in the cost of living.

    This map, via Visual Capitalist’s Kayla Zhu, shows home price-to-income ratio of each U.S. state, using data from a Construction Coverage analysis of Zillow and U.S. Census Bureau data as of June 2024.

    Hawaii and West Coast Have the Most Unaffordable Homes

    The table below shows the home price-to-income ratio for each U.S. state, where Hawaii (9.1) and California (8.4) at the top—both well over the national average of 4.7.

    Rank State Ratio
    1 Hawaii 9.1
    2 California 8.4
    3 Montana 6.6
    4 Oregon 6.4
    5 Massachusetts 6.3
    6 Washington 6.3
    7 Idaho 6.1
    8 Washington 6
    9 Colorado 6
    10 Nevada 5.9
    11 Utah 5.7
    12 New York 5.7
    13 Arizona 5.7
    14 Florida 5.7
    15 Maine 5.5
    16 Rhode Island 5.4
    17 New Jersey 5.2
    18 New Hampshire 5.1
    19 Vermont 5
    20 New Mexico 4.9
    21 Wyoming 4.8
    22 North Carolina 4.8
    23 Tennessee 4.8
    24 Delaware 4.6
    25 South Carolina 4.5
    26 Virginia 4.4
    27 Georgia 4.4
    28 Maryland 4.3
    29 Connecticut 4.3
    30 South Dakota 4.2
    31 Texas 4.1
    32 Alaska 4
    33 Wisconsin 4
    34 Minnesota 3.9
    35 Missouri 3.7
    36 Alabama 3.7
    37 Pennsylvania 3.6
    38 Nebraska 3.6
    39 Arkansas 3.6
    40 Michigan 3.5
    41 Indiana 3.5
    42 Louisiana 3.5
    43 North Dakota 3.4
    44 Illinois 3.3
    45 Ohio 3.3
    46 Oklahoma 3.3
    47 Kentucky 3.3
    48 Mississippi 3.3
    49 Kansas 3.2
    50 Iowa 3
    51 West Virginia 2.9

    Despite Hawaii and California ranking in the top five for median income (adjusted for cost of living), both states also consistently rank first and second respectively when it comes to median home prices.

    Hawaii and California also rank second and third, respectively, when ranking states by the highest salary needed to live comfortably for a single working adult.

    According to ATTOM, Hawaii has the highest median house prices in the U.S., at around $852,000.

    The Aloha State’s limited land availability, strict housing regulations, and high demand for housing in a desirable climate, are some contributing factors to its high home prices.

    Californian cities Los Angeles, San Jose, Long Beach, and San Diego are the top four large U.S. cities with the highest home price-to-income ratios.

    Home prices in California have reached unprecedented highs due to a persistent imbalance between high demand and limited supply, which is exacerbated by strict zoning laws, geographic constraints, and a robust economy attracting high-income residents.

    To learn more about housing affordability, check out this graphic that shows the top 10 global markets by median price-to-income ratio.

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 11/20/2024 – 21:20

  • Food Lobbyists Plot To Have It Their Way With RFK Jr.
    Food Lobbyists Plot To Have It Their Way With RFK Jr.

    Authored by Lee Fang via RealClearInvestigations,

    America’s most famous fast-food fan may be an unlikely candidate to make America healthy again, but Donald Trump seems willing to tackle the eating habits that have led to skyrocketing rates of obesity. The junk food industry is not lovin’ it.

    RealClearInvestigations has learned that representatives of companies that make snack foods, sugary beverages, and cooking oils are already meeting to discuss how to thwart the reform agenda of Robert F. Kennedy Jr., the former consumer rights attorney Trump has said he will nominate to lead the Department of Health and Human Services. Their response provides an early example of what experts predict will be a massive effort by D.C. lobbyists to position their clients in response to Trump’s pledge to change how Washington does business.

    Although much of the early criticism of Kennedy’s nomination has focused on his skepticism regarding some vaccines, the nominee is a longtime critic of the food industry, which he says is a leading contributor to America’s obesity epidemic. In recent months, he has called for a crackdown on food additives, limits on certain crop protection chemicals, stronger guidelines regarding what he says are conflicts of interest among regulators and business, and a review of any substance causing, what he argues, Americans to be “mass poisoned by big pharma and big food.”

    Kennedy’s nomination sets up what may turn out to be the biggest reversal between the first Trump administration and the second. The last time around, Trump’s appointees, acting in deference to traditional business interests, moved to reverse regulations on neurotoxic insecticides and added delays to updates for school lunch nutritional standards. 

    In videos that have gone viral this year, Kennedy has singled out ultra-processed food as a priority for what Kennedy has called his “Make America Healthy Again” (MAHA) agenda. In one video devoted to the potential dangers of Yellow 5 food dye, Kennedy stands before a table with Doritos chips and Cap’n Crunch cereal and claims the ingredients used in such products are one reason more than 40% of American adults are classified as obese by the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. The dye, also known as tartrazine, has been linked to behavioral problems in children and other health risks. The European Union requires child warning labels for products with tartrazine. 

    Kennedy has made similar arguments about the widespread use of seed oils – including those from corn, soybeans, sunflowers, and peanuts – especially in highly processed foods. Research suggests that high levels of seed oils, rich in polyunsaturated fat, can cause inflammation. America’s overreliance on seed oils in fast food and snack products, Kennedy claims, is a major overlooked factor in the health crisis. 

    Food industry leaders began sounding the alarm even before the election. In October,  Invariant, a powerful government relations firm that advises many food companies on how to shape policies in Washington, D.C., warned clients of Kennedy’s growing sway over Trump and the Republican Party.

    “Increasing number of voices on the right target the food industry,” an October memo stated, which went out to clients that include McDonald’s and America’s largest candy makers. The lobbyists warned that Kennedy’s MAHA movement “had gained increasing momentum among conservative figures who have taken a more vocal interest in the way food is produced and regulated.”

    Those initial alarm bells have become a siren among snack food makers and agribusiness representatives, according to records obtained by RCI. Last Friday, lobbyists for major processed food producers huddled over Zoom to discuss the rise of MAHA and how best to handle Kennedy’s recently announced nomination.

    Danielle Beck, a participant on the call who represents PepsiCo, makers of Doritos and Cap’n Crunch, and the Corn Refiners Association, a trade group for the largest producers of corn-based seed oils, noted that Congress could limit Kennedy’s abilities. 

    The “traditional agriculture and food stakeholders,” Beck noted, “might look to leverage, you know, the appropriations process” to curb what Kennedy is allowed to “initiate or implement.”

    Congressional appropriators often use the annual funding process to limit federal authorities. In 2010, under sway from industry sources, the House Appropriations Committee inserted a provision into federal funding that forced tomato paste on frozen pizzas to be counted as a vegetable under dietary regulations. 

    The lobbyists noted that Kennedy’s lengthy set of demands could also be exploited to stymie his overall agenda. “If RFK Jr. is focused on twenty different things, chances of success are likely limited,” observed Ken Barbic, another Invariant lobbyist representing processed foods firms and farming interests. 

    Invariant, though founded by Heather Podesta, a prominent Democratic fundraiser, boasts bipartisan influence. Barbic, for instance, served during the first Trump administration in the Department of Agriculture and the firm employs a number of former GOP aides. 

    The Senate confirmation process, the lobbyists added, could be another process through which industry may shape the MAHA list of priorities. As Kennedy meets with individual senators, Beck noted, “serious conversations and commitments can be made to secure those votes that might end up resulting in some shifts in RFK’s overall agenda.”

    In other words, in order to line up more than 50 votes in the Senate, the lobbyists suggest Kennedy may be convinced to trade away some of his MAHA demands. 

    Similar strategy sessions have percolated across Washington Beltway lobbying shops representing food, beverage, and drug industries. The American Farm Bureau, which represents pesticide companies and farming interests, recently said it was working to “combat misinformation that has been spread by several sources including Robert F. Kennedy Jr. regarding critical crop protection tools and agricultural practices.” 

    The Consumer Brands Association, which represents Kellogg, Coca-Cola, PepsiCo, General Mills, and other processed foods firms, has also met with lawmakers, preparing for a fight over MAHA agenda items, according to a report from Politico.

    Other Kennedy proposals could spark a ferocious backlash from corporate America, particularly his suggestion that the U.S. fall in line with most of the industrialized world and ban direct-to-consumer pharmaceutical advertising. Drug firms spend more than $1 billion per year on television spots. Shutting off the gusher of ad dollars would likely mobilize stark opposition from media conglomerates and the drug lobby. 

    But it is RFK’s ideas around wellness and nutrition that have percolated most with the new Trump coalition. The farm and processed food lobby must contend with a sea change within the Republican Party, which now relies on populist vigor increasingly receptive to the idea of reforming the way American food is produced and sold.

    In September, Sen. Ron Johnson, a Wisconsin Republican, led a roundtable discussion with popular food industry critics. During the hearing, the stars of this nascent movement, including Dr. Casey Means and her brother Calley Means, food blogger Vani Hari, and author Max Lugavere, took turns at the microphone to pin the blame for America’s poor health mainly on the influence of processed food companies. 

    Texas Sen. Ted Cruz, a Kennedy ally, was scheduled to host a similar roundtable but had to cancel at the last minute due to Hurricane Helene flooding in North Carolina.

    Such rhetoric suggests a political realignment on food and wellness issues. Bernie Sanders, perhaps the Senate’s most liberal lawmaker, has held a series of hearings on chronic disease, focusing on the influence of corporate actors, and departing Biden administration officials have called for an overhaul of the dietary guidelines. The Food and Drug Administration is expected to provide a new definition of the “healthy ” food label with stronger limits on saturated fats, sodium, and added sugars, a proposal that might find continuity under a Kennedy-controlled agency.

    Kennedy himself is a former Democrat-turned-independent who was briefly floated as the Environmental Protection Agency chief for President Barack Obama in 2008. He has worked on several successful litigation efforts that have challenged the safety of widely used chemicals. Kennedy was part of the team that challenged glyphosate, sold as Roundup, over its links to cancer, a case that led to a $290 million verdict for the plaintiffs.  

    While such regulatory interventions were once the province of the left, the MAHA movement capitalizes on a shift in media consumption by those in the Trump orbit. 

    Joe Rogan, the most popular podcaster in the country, has emphasized the dangers posed by high fructose corn syrup, seed oils, and sugary, processed foods. He has hosted many of the most vocal activists aligned with the MAHA movement, including the Means siblings. 

    “I love this idea of you teaming up with Robert Kennedy, and I love this ‘Make America Healthy Again’ idea,” said Rogan during his sit-down with Trump during the campaign, which garnered over 50 million views on YouTube. 

    “There are chemicals and ingredients in our food that are illegal in other countries because they’ve been shown to be toxic,” Rogan added during the interview. 

    Trump, in response, pledged to give Kennedy wide latitude over health policy, though he said he disagreed with his views on energy and the environment. In the past, Kennedy has opposed expanded oil and natural gas fracking and previously supported a moratorium on new nuclear energy – priorities of the new administration.

    Yet Kennedy’s focus on health taps into a rich vein of new populist energy that defies easy ideological definition. The outreach to podcasters and wellness influencers has been credited with helping Trump secure the young male vote, which swung away from Democrats by nearly 30 percentage points.

    It is a dynamic agribusiness interests have noticed. The Invariant team credited the rise of RFK’s influence to the growing prominence of podcasts and independent media. 

    “Trump appeared on more than 35 different podcasts,” noted Jenny Werwa, a strategic communications consultant with Invariant.

    When seeking influence with policymakers, the food and beverage industry typically focuses advertising dollars on insider Beltway media, such as Politico and Punchbowl News, added Werwa during the call with clients last Friday. Instead, she suggested, the industry should “think about how you might be able to partner with non-traditional media for content,” adding that Rogan and certain independent Substack publishers should be considered moving forward. 

    Consumer brands generally seek to avoid public engagement in politics, typically working through third parties and industry groups. 

    Invariant is one of many lobbying firms in the middle of the conflict. The firm not only represents highly processed snack producers, corn refiners, and fast food establishments like McDonald’s, but also Campbell Soup, McCain Foods, and the American Beverage Association, the lobby group for sugary sodas.

    The lobbyists at the firm shared a memo outlining additional steps. Clients in the “food and agriculture space need to continue both defensive efforts – including legislative and regulatory efforts – while also considering offensive approaches that engage positively in the broader health focused debate.” The offensive approaches, however, are yet to be seen. 

    In the meantime, food industry giants might also hang some hope on the influence and taste of Kennedy’s boss. In a viral post-election photo, Trump is shown having dinner on his private plane with his son Don Jr., Kennedy, and Elon Musk. The menu: Big Macs and fries.

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 11/20/2024 – 20:55

  • Nvidia Drops After Revenue Forecast Disappoints Exuberant Expectations
    Nvidia Drops After Revenue Forecast Disappoints Exuberant Expectations

    Earlier today we wrote an extensive preview of what to expect from Nvidia’s Q3 earnings (here), but for those who missed it here is the summary: sky high expectations, which only go higher in 2025 and beyond when the full rollout of Blackwell is expected to hit the P&L, with everyone already long (Goldman desk positioning is 9 out of 10) and anything less than perfection would be punished by the market. The bull/bear case summarized by Goldman was as follows:

    • Bulls playing for a ‘break-out’ trade on an expected beat/raise (with downside arguably cushioned by the upcoming Blackwell launch)
    • Bears playing for a reset in the stock driven by a growing list of moving parts (Blackwell noise, scaling laws, custom ASICs/silicon, ROICs, etc) vs valuation back at ~15-mo highs.

    In terms of expectations, Q3 revenue was projected to come in at $33.25BN, while the median analyst estimate for Q4 revenue is $37.1BN but buyside bogeys were $38BN+ and some were as high as $41BN. Keep in mind that that number has moved around a lot in the past few days as analysts have made last-minute tweaks to their models. While the current high sales estimate for the third quarter is $41.2 billion, some investors have have said that the whisper number may be even higher than that!

    Beyond the headlines, JPM says that the key near-term bogeys are the following:

    1. The margin guide (with a few saying JPM’s 73.8% buyside bar is too high),
    2. The possibility of hiccups in the Blackwell ramp which – given the steep ramp – could push revenues to the April quarter;
    3. Any guidance on F26 and beyond.

    Other things to look out for when the company starts speaking will include how much supply it’s getting from its manufacturing partners. Like most chipmakers, Nvidia outsources production. Taiwan Semiconductor is the best in the business, and Nvidia’s pace of growth heavily depends on how well TSMC is able to provide Nvidia with the capacity it needs.

    Amusingly, Nvidia shares actually closed down today, though far from session lows, ahead of the earnings report. Still, shares are up nearly 200% so far this year, and one of the best performers on the S&P 500 Index. Nvidia’s market cap north of $3.6 trillion makes it the biggest weighting in the S&P 500, meaning that any move in the stock could swing the entire market.

    With that in mind, here is what NVDA reported moments ago:

    • Revenue $35.08 billion, up +94% y/y, beating the median estimate of $33.25 billion (but in line with Goldman’s expectations of $35BN).
      • Data center revenue $30.8 billion vs. $14.51 billion y/y, beating estimates of $29.14 billion
      • Gaming revenue $3.3 billion, +15% y/y, beating estimates of $3.06 billion
      • Professional Visualization revenue $486 million, +17% y/y, beating estimates of $477.7 million
      • Automotive revenue $449 million, +72% y/y, beating estimates of $364.5 million
         
    • Adjusted gross margin 75% vs. 75% y/y, and in line with estimates of 75%
      • Adjusted operating expenses $3.05 billion, +50% y/y, beating estimates of $2.99 billion
      • Adjusted operating income $23.28 billion vs. $11.56 billion y/y, beating estimates of $21.9 billion
         
    • Adjusted EPS 81c, beating estimates 74c

    The revenue trend, as expected, is impressive especially at the Data Center level where all the growth is.

    Here is a full breakdown of recent results:

    But while the Q3 results were stellar, the company’s guidance came in on the weak side of the buyside expectations we discussed in our premium preview.

    • Revenue is expected to be $37.5 billion, plus or minus 2%: The “plus or minus 2%” means Nvidia expects 4Q revenue between $36.75 billion and $38.25 billion. The low end is ugly, and even the high end is below the median buyside bogey.

    Oops: while this was above the median consensus of $37.1BN, it was far below the buyside expectations of $38.8BN; It was also well below Goldman’s Q4 revenue expectations of $39BN and close to where the bank saw the stock dropping -10%.  In fact, some estimates for Q4 revenue were as high as $41 billion!

    The rest of the guidance was in line but far less important:

    • Gross margins are expected to be 73.0% and 73.5%, respectively, plus or minus 50 basis points.
    • Operating expenses are expected to be approximately $4.8 billion and $3.4 billion, respectively.
    • Other income and expense are expected to be an income of approximately $400 million, excluding gains and losses from non-affiliated investments and publicly-held equity securities.
    • Tax rates are expected to be 16.5%, plus or minus 1%, excluding any discrete items.

    Nvidia has only missed analysts’ estimates on quarterly revenue once in the past five years. And it has exceeded expectations by as much as 20% in recent periods, creating a very high bar for its performance.

    The muted outlook suggests that AI excitement may be getting ahead of reality according to Bloomberg. Nvidia investors had bid up the shares nearly 200% in 2024, turning it into the world’s most valuable company at $3.6 trillion in market cap. But the chipmaker has had trouble keeping up with demand for its products and struggled with production snags this year.

    To be fair, even with the disappointing outlook, Nvidia’s growth over the past two years has been staggering, simply because not one chipmaker has been able to take its market share (Intel unprecedented collapse in recent years can be largely to blame for that). Its sales are poised to double for a second year in a row, and it now notches more money in profit than it used to generate in total revenue (thanks to that 75% profit margin).

    Nvidia’s data center division alone now has more revenue than its two nearest rivals, Intel and AMD combined. Net income this year is on course to exceed revenue at Intel, a company that was the chip industry’s titan for decades.

    The company’s biggest moneymaker is its accelerator chip, which helps develop AI models by bombarding them with data. Since OpenAI’s ChatGPT chatbot debuted in 2022, a frenzy of artificial intelligence services has created insatiable demand for the product.

    Other recent earnings reports have given strong signals for AI. Major Nvidia customers, including Microsoft, Amazon’s AWS and Meta have reaffirmed their commitment to spend on AI infrastructure, even if few have actually done the spend, as we noted during the recent Meta earnings call.

    Nvidia hopes to stay ahead of rivals by accelerating its pace of innovation. That includes a commitment to updating its lineup annually; the company is currently introducing a design called Blackwell, which is faster and has an improved ability to link up with other chips, and which is expected to hit the company’s P&L early next year, as a bevy of manufacturing challenges have slowed the Blackwell rollout. For now, Nvidia can’t fill all the orders it’s receiving, the company has said. After production improves, supplies will be plentiful, according to CEO Jensen Huang. For his sake, hopefully by then no competitors will have been able to come out with a faster, cheaper chip.

    The Santa Clara, CA-based company has rapidly expanded its product lineup to include networking, software and services, as well as fully built-out computer systems. Huang is traveling the world lobbying for a broader adoption of his technology and trying to spread its use by corporations and government agencies.

    Shares of Nvidia fell as much as 5% in after hours trading following the announcement, before settling about 2% lower, far below the 8.8% straddle. They previously closed at $145.89 in New York.

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 11/20/2024 – 20:39

  • Wealthy Private Schools In Upscale Miami Are Starting To Price Out Their Teachers
    Wealthy Private Schools In Upscale Miami Are Starting To Price Out Their Teachers

    The rich neighborhoods in Miami are getting so rich, they’re starting to price out the teachers.

    For example, Ransom Everglades, a top private school in Miami’s upscale Coconut Grove, serves the city’s wealthy families, including new Wall Street South transplants.

    It boasts amenities like an Olympic pool, sailing, and a waterfront football field, it offers 24 varsity sports, 62 arts courses, and a cutting-edge science center. And with a 10-to-1 student-teacher ratio, admission is highly competitive—only one in seven sixth-grade applicants were accepted this year, according to parents.

    But the school is struggling to retain teachers due to the increasing cost of living in the area. So much so that it has been building an endowment to help give teachers stipends to offset their living expenses, according to Bloomberg.

    Ransom Everglades’ board, led by chair Miguel Dueñas, is creating a $30 million endowment to help its 132 teachers with living costs in Miami’s pricey market. They’ve raised $15 million so far from parents and alumni, aiming to provide each teacher at least $11,000 annually for housing expenses through the fund’s returns.

    Dueñas commented: “The biggest issue that schools are facing right now in South Florida is the cost of living for teachers. So trying to solve that, or help it, is something that is strategic in nature for all schools.”

    Bloomberg writes that Ransom Everglades faces a challenge in balancing competitive teacher pay with affordability for families, all despite charging $52,000 in annual tuition—less than elite New York schools like Dalton, which cost $65,000.

    While offering perks like tuition discounts for teachers’ children and free meals, salaries are constrained by housing costs in Miami, where prices have surged 75% over five years.

    Head of school Rachel Rodriguez emphasized that housing affordability is the biggest obstacle in recruiting top talent, as Miami ranks poorly for both affordability and income inequality.

    Private school teachers nationwide earn about 25% less than their public-school counterparts, and Florida ranks second-to-last for public-school teacher pay.

    Compounding this, Miami’s private-school teacher salaries trail cities like New York by 17%. Gulliver Prep, another Miami-area private school, is exploring higher tuition for wealthy families and donor-funded stipends to close the pay gap.

    Without these adjustments, teachers like Jonathan Scholl, who left Ransom for a more affordable life in Denver despite lower pay, may continue to seek opportunities elsewhere, exacerbating a crisis for South Florida’s elite schools.

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 11/20/2024 – 20:30

  • "Some Of Them Are With Pedophiles": Trump's Border Czar To Prioritize Locating 300,000 Unaccounted-For Children
    “Some Of Them Are With Pedophiles”: Trump’s Border Czar To Prioritize Locating 300,000 Unaccounted-For Children

    Authored by Jack Phillips via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    President-elect Donald Trump’s incoming border czar said he would prioritize locating or rescuing 300,000 unaccounted-for children who entered the United States as illegal immigrants and are at risk of exploitation.

    Then-acting ICE Director Tom Homan speaks at an event hosted by the Center for Immigration Studies, on June 5, 2018. Charlotte Cuthbertson/The Epoch Times

    “The third rail is we got over 300,000 missing children,” Tom Homan told Fox News on Monday, likely referring to a government report issued earlier this year. “Over half a million children have been trafficked into the United States. This administration released them to unvetted sponsors, and they can’t find 300,000. And based on three-and-a-half decades, some of these children are in forced labor.”

    Earlier this year, the Department of Homeland Security’s (DHS’s) inspector general released a report finding that 323,000 illegal immigrant children are unaccounted for inside the United States. As of May 2024, more than 32,000 children who were served notices to appear in court did not appear, while the safety of an additional 291,000 could not be verified because they were not placed into removal proceedings, making monitoring their status challenging, according to the report.

    Those figures came from Immigration and Customs Enforcement (ICE) and covered the period from October 2018 to September 2023

    “We already found some in forced labor, some of them are in for sex trafficking, some of them are with pedophiles,” Homan said. “We need to save these children. That’s going to be the third rail.”

    The DHS report noted that ICE, which Homan had overseen under the first Trump administration, should “take immediate action” to ensure those unaccounted-for children are safe.

    Two other priorities, or “rails,” Homan said, are to secure the U.S.–Mexico border as well as deport illegal aliens who are criminals and “national security threats” still residing in the United States.

    Both Homan and Trump have said they will initiate a wide-ranging mass deportation plan after the president-elect takes office on Jan. 20, 2025. Trump said on Monday he would be prepared to declare a national emergency to move things forward.

    Some pro-immigration groups and the American Civil Liberties Union (ACLU) have said they are opposed to Trump’s deportation proposals, while the ACLU has signaled it will file lawsuits to block such plans from being initiated.

    On Monday, the ACLU said it sued ICE to seek records on how “privately chartered deportation flights run by ICE … could be expanded to carry out a mass deportation and detention program.”

    What DHS Report Says

    The DHS inspector general said in the August report that unaccounted-for children who don’t show up for immigration court dates can be “considered at higher risk for trafficking, exploitation, or forced labor.”

    The office faulted ICE for failing to consistently “monitor the location and status of unaccompanied migrant children” once they are released from federal government custody.

    During the period from October 2018 to September 2023, 448,820 unaccompanied children were released by ICE to the Department of Health and Human Services (HHS) Office of Refugee Resettlement.

    The U.S. government defines an unaccompanied migrant child as someone under 18 who lacks lawful immigration status and has no parent or guardian in the country to take custody of them. When they’re apprehended by DHS, they’re transferred to the HHS’s Office of Refugee Resettlement.

    ICE and the Department of Justice may initiate removal proceedings. However, some children are able to stay in the United States legally if they qualify for asylum, special visas for victims of abuse, trafficking, and other crimes, or other types of immigration relief. In those cases, removal proceedings may never start.

    By some estimates, there are around 11 million illegal immigrants who currently live in the United States, some being able to do so under temporary protected status orders issued by DHS.

    The Associated Press contributed to this report.

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 11/20/2024 – 20:05

  • Col. MacGregor: Trump & The Storm Of The Century
    Col. MacGregor: Trump & The Storm Of The Century

    Authored by Col. Douglas Macgregor (ret.)

    The fear in many nations’ capitals is that President Donald Trump’s return to Washington might make Israel feel more confident in attacking Iran. According to Mike Evans, founder of the Friends of Zion Museum in Jerusalem, “There is no world leader Trump respects more than Netanyahu.”

    The evangelical leader also confides that President Trump would support an Israeli attack before his inauguration on the assumption that the destruction of Iran’s oil production facilities would devastate Iran’s economy, inducing Iran to end the war with Israel before President Trump assumes his office. This thinking by no means excludes an Israeli decision to strike Iran’s nuclear development sites as well. 

    What Trump will or will not do is unknown. When the illusive stillness in the standoff between Tehran and Jerusalem will end is also unknown. 

    One thing is certain: If America joins Israel in its war against Iran, the outcome will be a geopolitical showdown that could dramatically alter the world as we know it. It is the storm of the 21st century and, for the moment, the American ship of state is sailing right into it.

    At a minimum, Trump should demand answers from his civilian and military advisors to four important questions.

    Question 1. What is the American purpose in waging war against Iran? Is Washington’s purpose to destroy the Iranian state? To destroy its capability to wage war against Israel? To eliminate Iran’s developing nuclear capability? Or to decapitate the Iranian state in the hope that the Iranian people will overthrow their national government? 

    All these goals demand serious study and analysis. In some cases, they overlap; in others they do not. The answers require identifying resources, manpower, capabilities, and the time needed to achieve these goals. 

    It is obvious that America’s air and naval forces will have to deliver powerful disabling strikes through dense Iranian air and missile defenses while potentially defending themselves and American military bases against attacks by Iranian and allied forces in the region. How long can these forces operate before their stocks of munitions are exhausted and their human and materiel losses are replaced? 

    Based on these answers, the stated objectives may or may not be attainable. National political and military leaders habitually plan and organize to achieve short, decisive outcomes, but wars always last longer than anticipated.

    Question 2. How will U.S. military power achieve the objectives? 

    What is the right mix of weapon systems and munitions? What targets promise effects that profoundly shape Iran’s ability to fight? In the aftermath of the Second World War, studies of bombing effectiveness revealed that the most important contribution air power made to Germany’s defeat was the destruction of Germany’s fuel production and the transportation network to move it. Its second-most important contribution was to cause German air forces to defend Germany’s cities and industries, thus stripping the German army of its close air support. But thousands of tons of bombs were still dropped on thousands of targets with minimal impact on the German war machine. 

    Can air and missile power alone compel the Iranian State to submit to Israeli and American demands? To date, no amount of precision-strike forces linked to space-based and terrestrial, persistent intelligence, surveillance, and reconnaissance (ISR) capabilities has delivered victory in war. 

    The Kosovo air campaign inflicted enormous damage on the Serbian economy, but its impact on Serbian ground forces was minimal. Yet once Moscow withdrew its promise of energy and food support to the Serbian people, the destruction of power plants and civilian and commercial infrastructure did induce the Serbian leadership to remove its forces from Kosovo. 

    Read the full article here.

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 11/20/2024 – 19:40

  • Fiat Everything: When Decree Replaced Reality
    Fiat Everything: When Decree Replaced Reality

    Authored by Josh Stylman via The Brownstone Institute,

    We live in a world where every essential human need—money, food, health, education, and even information—is controlled and manipulated by artificial systems. This matrix of artifice began with central bankers creating fiat currency: declaring something’s value, enforcing its use, and creating dependency. This template manufactured scarcity where none naturally exists, ensuring reliance on their systems. We see this pattern everywhere: money created from nothing yet always in short supply, abundant food made artificially scarce, natural healing rebranded as ‘alternative,’ wisdom replaced by credentials.

    The Money Matrix

    The Federal Reserve conjures currency through debt monetization, each new dollar stealing value from every existing one. Through inflation, they silently rob almost all of your savings, turning your productive energy into their power. In 1913, a solid month’s work could buy a fine suit. Today it barely covers a week’s groceries. The labor didn’t change—the money did. Fiat currency itself is a kind of enforced dependency. Since the gold standard was abandoned in 1971, there has been no limit on their monetary manipulation.

    This isn’t just about currency—it’s about energy harvesting. Banks create money through keystrokes, then demand repayment in real human time and labor. When the Fed printed $6 trillion in 2020, they didn’t create value—they diluted every dollar in your savings account. It’s modern financial alchemy: transforming your productivity into their power. As Brownstone’s Jeffrey Tucker aptly puts it, ‘The Federal Reserve is the engine of one of the most sophisticated forms of theft in the history of mankind.’

    As central banks race to implement Central Bank Digital Currencies (CBDCs), promising convenience while building the architecture for total financial surveillance, the endgame becomes clear. Hard money—constrained by natural or mathematical limits—can’t be summoned into existence. Gold and silver face physical extraction constraints. Bitcoin is hard-capped at 21 million coins. Land cannot be added to the map. Even these aren’t perfect, but they share one critical feature: they cannot be created like monopoly money by central planners. These limitations mean true value is earned, not fabricated, which is why they’re attacked—they can’t be inflated away.

    Just as the financial system shapes our economic reality through artificial scarcity, the information landscape engineers our perception through concentrated control.

    The News Nexus

    Six corporations control 90% of media outlets, down from 50 companies in 1983. Further exacerbating this consolidation, it’s not about false stories—it’s about manufacturing false reality and engineering social division. Fiat currency has created a fiat news system, where the same principles apply: declare something, repeat it, enforce it, and it enters the consciousness of the masses. The illusion of media choice masks concentrated ownership: BlackRock and Vanguard are top shareholders in every major media company (incidentally, they own the major banks too). The same firms own shares in defense contractors, pharmaceutical companies, and the very corporations making headlines.

    As former CBS News president Richard Salant admitted, “Our job is to give people not what they want, but what we decide they ought to have.”

    By slicing society into endless opposing camps—left vs right, black vs white, vaxxed vs unvaxxed—they ensure people keep fighting each other instead of looking up to see who’s pulling the strings.

    This isn’t simply about silencing dissent but shaping belief. Remember how quickly “Trust the science” became “Don’t question authority”? How “Two weeks to flatten the curve” became two years of shifting goalposts? Even the most trusting citizens began noticing the narrative management.

    The Information Factory doesn’t just control what you see—it shapes how you think about what you see. Content curation algorithms create echo chambers while coordinated messaging manufactures the illusion of consensus. Media outlets are owned by corporations dependent on government contracts and regulated by the agencies they report on. When you follow the money—from pharmaceutical ads to defense contractor ownership—you see that they’re not reporting on the system; they are the system.

    The manipulation of information serves as a precursor to perhaps the most devastating expression of centralized power—the machinery of endless war.

    The Banker’s War Machine

    War is the ultimate racket, and bankers have perfected it since the Napoleonic Wars. Create the conflict, fund all participants, profit from the destruction, and then finance the reconstruction. The same financial interests collect blood money regardless of who “wins.”

    The military-industrial complex needs endless enemies to justify endless spending. When one boogeyman falls, they manufacture another. They don’t sell weapons—they sell fear. Each missile launched represents schools not built, hospitals not funded, communities not supported. The people always pay, while bankers collect the dividends.

    They call it “foreign policy”—it’s really population control and resource theft. They destroy independent nations that dare create their own money systems or trade outside their control while calling it “spreading democracy.” Young people die in foreign lands while suit-wearing vultures redraw maps around oil fields and trade routes. Look at Ukraine: BlackRock is already planning the “reconstruction,” buying up land and resources while people die. 

    While physical warfare destroys bodies, the credentialing system wages a quieter battle for minds, determining who can speak with authority and what truths are deemed acceptable.

    The Credential Cartel

    We’ve created a class of experts who mistake institutional approval for wisdom. The average medical student graduates with $241,600 in debt—how likely are they to challenge a system they’re indebted to? Fiat education produces fiat expertise, reliant on institutional validation instead of true understanding. Studies show that medical education frequently emphasizes pharmaceutical interventions, while lifestyle and dietary approaches receive comparatively little attention. When PhDs questioned lockdown policies, they were silenced while social media companies became overnight “public health experts.

    The student loan crisis reveals the scam: $1.7 trillion in debt while real wages for graduates have stagnated. Real expertise comes from results, not degrees. A farmer who grows nutrient-dense food understands health better than many nutritionists. A mechanic who fixes engines grasps complex systems better than many economists. Theory without practice is just sophisticated guessing. Their degrees don’t measure intelligence—they measure obedience. The longer you stay in their system, the harder it becomes to see beyond it.

    The same institutional capture that turns education into indoctrination extends into healthcare, where healing wisdom is replaced by patented interventions.

    The Medical Matrix

    They’ve transformed medicine from healing art to subscription service. Purdue Pharma made $35 billion selling OxyContin while calling addiction “pseudoaddiction” requiring higher doses. The FDA approves synthetic THC while natural plants are federally illegal, despite legalization in some states. The difference? One can be patented. Here again, fiat principles: replace the natural with the engineered, at a steep price. 

    The corruption is measurable: The pharmaceutical industry has faced substantial financial penalties over the past two decades due to various legal violations. Among the most significant cases are:

    • Pfizer: $2.3 billion in 2009, for illegal marketing of prescription drugs.
    • Johnson & Johnson: $2.2 billion in 2013, for promoting drugs for unapproved uses and providing kickbacks.
    • GlaxoSmithKline: $3 billion in 2012, for the illegal marketing of drugs and failing to report safety concerns. Collectively, these settlements contribute to a broader total of over $122 billion in penalties imposed on pharmaceutical companies since 2000. Yet, these fines are just a cost of doing business—a small price to pay in exchange for untouchable influence over human health. Meanwhile, insulin costs have risen 1,200% since 1996 despite no significant changes to this century-old drug.

    These same companies now claim exclusive authority over human health, hooking children on SSRIs instead of teaching them to process emotions naturally. Natural healing—through sunlight, clean food, movement, and rest—gets labeled “alternative” while synthetic drugs become standard care. Your body’s innate healing power becomes suspect while their patented molecules become essential. Our bodies know how to recover when we remove the obstacles.

    The medicalization of health represents just one front in a broader war against natural systems—one that extends to our most basic needs for nourishment.

    The War on Natural Vitality

    Look at their war on our most nutrient-dense traditional foods: They demonize meat and butter—the very foods that built our brains and sustained humanity for millennia. Dr. Weston Price’s extensive research of indigenous populations in the 1930s documented zero instances of modern chronic diseases among groups eating their traditional diets, finding rates of dental caries less than 1% and virtually no heart disease. Yet they push processed soy patties and lab-grown protein while attacking regenerative grazing that could heal our planet.

    Raw milk, nature’s perfect food, becomes “dangerous” the moment it leaves the cow. Despite regulatory opposition, demand has surged, with buying clubs and small farmers facing scrutiny and even armed raids for selling fresh milk. This once-simple food choice has turned political, embraced by those questioning government authority, while ultra-processed ‘milk alternatives’ made from water and seed oils flood supermarket shelves.

    Even the sun, the source of all life on Earth, has been turned into an enemy. Instead of teaching proper sun exposure for optimal vitamin D, they push chemical sunscreens that disrupt hormones and poison coral reefs.

    As our connection to natural systems is severed, we’re ushered into an artificial realm that promises connection while delivering isolation.

    The Digital Prison

    The path to our current isolation was carefully engineered. First, they separated us physically—”Just stay 6 feet apart.” Then they confined us—”Just stay home.” Finally, they sold us the ultimate fiat substitute: the metaverse—where digital avatars replace human touch. Ironically, as social connection grows artificial, real human presence becomes rarer.

    As someone who spent two decades as a technologist, I know these tools are powerful and should be universally accessible to all. The issue isn’t technology itself—it’s whether it’s deployed to centralize or decentralize power. Like electricity, which can power a community or an electric fence, digital tools can either connect and empower people or surveil and control them. The question isn’t the technology—it’s who controls it and how it’s used.

    We’ve become alone together—constantly surrounded yet deeply alone. Meta’s own research shows Instagram makes body image issues worse for 32% of teen girls. Average screen time has skyrocketed to over 7 hours daily in 2023, while rates of depression doubled. We broadcast our lives to strangers while avoiding eye contact with neighbors. We share our deepest thoughts with algorithms while struggling to have real conversations. We’re drowning in communication while starving for communion.

    Yes, virtual worlds can be fun escapes—there’s joy in games and digital play. But the metaverse isn’t just entertainment—it’s an attempt to replace reality itself with an artificial construct they control. A thousand TikTok friends can’t replace one real conversation. A million likes can’t substitute for one genuine hug.

    We’re bioelectric beings who literally resonate with each other. Human proximity affects our:

    They fear real human connection because it breaks their control matrix. When people gather, share stories, and exchange energy, the programming breaks down.

    The Path to Liberation

    The implementation starts locally: If you live in an urban area, join or start a food-buying club. If you have access to farmers, buy directly from them. Create a neighborhood skill-sharing network where people teach what they know—from food preservation to basic repair skills. Start a community garden or join an existing CSA. Build relationships with like-minded neighbors. Each small step builds resilience and weakens dependency on artificial systems.

    The beautiful truth is that every artificial system has a natural counterpart that sets us free. Artificial systems rely on your participation, belief, and, ultimately, obedience. Their money only has value if we believe in it. Their authority only has power if we accept it. Their narratives only work if we consume them.

    The solution isn’t complex:

    • Build real friendships
    • Share real meals
    • Have real conversations
    • Create real community
    • Exchange real value
    • Trust natural law

    No one returns to fiat systems once they’ve experienced the real thing. You don’t go back to processed food after tasting nature’s abundance. You don’t trust fiat currency once you understand sound money. You don’t accept artificial authority once you’ve found your own sovereignty.

    The revolution isn’t coming—it’s here. Every garden is a rebellion against their food system. Every bitcoin is a rebellion against their money system. Every real conversation is a rebellion against their control system. Every home cook is a rebellion against their processed food empire. Every parent teaching real history is a rebellion against their education system. Every local market is a rebellion against their corporate monopolies. Every neighborhood gathering is a rebellion against their isolation agenda.

    Our ancestors thrived without fiat systems. Our descendants will view this artificial era as a dark age of manufactured limitation. The transition back to natural law isn’t just possible—it’s inevitable. Truth doesn’t need enforcement. Reality doesn’t need decree.

    Your DNA remembers what your mind was programmed to forget. Freedom isn’t granted by authority—it’s your natural state.

    What real thing will you choose today?

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 11/20/2024 – 19:15

  • Archegos Capital Founder Bill Hwang Sentenced To 18 Years In Prison
    Archegos Capital Founder Bill Hwang Sentenced To 18 Years In Prison

    Archegos Capital founder Bill Hwang was sentenced to 18 years in prison for fraud and market manipulation linked to the 2021 collapse of his $36 billion family office today.

    The sentence, handed down by US District Judge Alvin Hellerstein in New York, was less than the 21 years prosecutors requested. Hwang’s lawyers had argued for no prison time, according to Bloomberg.

    The judge said during sentencing: “The amount of losses that were caused by your conduct are larger than any amount of losses I’ve deal with as a judge.”

    Bloomberg wrote that during Wednesday’s hearing, Judge Alvin Hellerstein signaled he would impose a harsh sentence on Bill Hwang, dismissing his request for no jail time as “utterly ridiculous”.

    Comparing Hwang to FTX founder Sam Bankman-Fried, who received 25 years for fraud, Hellerstein questioned: “What was worse? Mr. Bankman-Fried’s fraud or Mr. Hwang’s fraud?”

    Hwang’s lawyer, Dani James, adjusted her request to a four-to-five-year sentence, citing his charitable work and modest lifestyle, though the judge was skeptical, noting his luxury apartment in Hudson Yards. Hwang briefly expressed regret, thanking supporters and asking for a sentence that would allow him to continue serving society.

    Prosecutor Andrew Thomas called for a tougher sentence, highlighting Hwang’s prior insider trading conviction with Tiger Asia in 2012. The judge acknowledged Hwang’s history and dismissed claims that his actions at Archegos didn’t directly cause banks’ losses.

    Bloomberg noted that Archegos’ case stood out as the victims were mainly Wall Street banks. Hwang’s lawyers argued the banks knowingly took risks for lucrative fees, but Judge Hellerstein barred a “blame the victim” defense, a key issue in Hwang’s planned appeal.

    The jury found Hwang misled banks about Archegos’ holdings, claiming large stakes in tech giants like Apple and Microsoft, while actually concentrating in a few illiquid stocks like ViacomCBS.

    As Reuters noted earlier this year, Archegos faced crippling margin calls in March 2021 due to falling stock prices. This, in turn, led to significant losses for Archegos and its lenders, including Credit Suisse and Nomura Holdings.

    Hwang and CFO Patrick Halligan, charged with racketeering conspiracy and multiple counts of fraud and market manipulation, had pleaded not guilty.

    At trial, they contested the prosecutors’ claims of market manipulation, which some legal experts viewed as a challenging case for the government.

    Hwang was arrested in April 2022 and charged with racketeering conspiracy, securities fraud and wire fraud in connection with a scheme to manipulate the share prices of public companies in order to boost profits. He was then released on $100 million bail. 

    According to the 40-page indictment, Hwang engaged in a “fraudulent scheme” that included “interlocking deceptive acts and misconduct, through false and misleading statements to security-based swap (“SBS”) counterparties and prime brokers and manipulative trading designed to artificially move the market, which, in tandem, increased Archegos’s assets under management from around $4 billion to over $36 billion in just under six months.”

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 11/20/2024 – 18:50

  • Here's Why Asian Americans Shifted Right
    Here’s Why Asian Americans Shifted Right

    Authored by Neetu Arnold via RealClearPolitics,

    The 2024 election season featured an unprecedented number of Asian Americans, from Vivek Ramaswamy’s rise in the Republican primary to soon-to-be second lady Usha Vance, to the Democratic candidate herself, Kamala Harris. Just a few years ago, this would have been a cause for celebration on the political left: Asian Americans have reliably voted for Democrats for decades. But the election results revealed that racial and ethnic minorities are not as loyal to the Democratic Party as previously believed. Much like Hispanics, Asian American voters made a major shift to the right.

    Nationally, 2020 and 2024 exit polls from the Washington Post show a 9-point shift to the Republicans in the presidential race among Asian American voters relative to 2020. In some states, such as Nevada and Texas, the polls suggest that Trump won the Asian American vote outright. The NBC News exit poll found a 5-point shift to the right nationally among Asian Americans relative to 2020. And in their survey of Asian American voters prior to the election, Asian Americans Advancing Justice saw a 7-point shift away from the Democrats relative to 2020.

    Exit polls are far from perfect measures of voting behavior, though. A spokesperson for APIAVote, a group that focuses on encouraging Asian American political engagement, pointed out when asked for comment that the exit polls may not be a “representative sample of the Asian American electorate.” For instance, the exit polls were not conducted in any Asian languages, which would preclude some Asian American voters with poor English skills from participating.

    My analysis of precinct-level voting data in four major urban areas shows that the exit polls may actually be understating the degree to which Asian Americans shifted to the right. Using census data, I identified majority-Asian precincts in these areas and compared the Republican margin of victory (or loss) between the 2024 and 2020 elections. The results are much more stark: Majority-Asian precincts in New York City, for instance, saw a rightward shift of 31 percentage points. Precincts in Dallas and Fort Bend counties in Texas both saw rightward shifts between 17 and 20 points. And precincts in Chicago saw a 23-point shift to the right.

    If the rightward shift among Asian American voters is real and significant, what is behind it?

    When asked, neither APIAVote nor Asian Americans Advancing Justice were able to provide an explanation. But several Republican-leaning Asian American voters I spoke with were not surprised by the shift.

    “I had so many [South] Asians, who are registered Democrats, let me know specifically that they voted for TRUMP this year,” South Asian Coalition Chairwoman for New Jersey’s Republican Party Priti Pandya-Patel said. “I believe most were always ‘closet Republicans’ and now they are starting to come out.”

    The economy

    The voters I spoke with repeatedly mentioned a few key reasons why they and others they knew voted for Trump this election. The first was a dissatisfaction with the Democrats’ handling of the economy, particularly inflation.

    “Many of us expressed discontent towards Biden’s energy policies that skyrocketed the costs of grocery prices and gas prices,” Nevada voter Lisa Noeth said. “Las Vegas specifically is like an island in the middle of the desert, the increase of fuel costs trickled down to the pockets of consumers at the grocery stores with goods being transported from California to Las Vegas.”

    Rudy Pamintuan, chief of staff for Nevada’s lieutenant governor, said inflation was tough on Asian American entrepreneurs. “Many households had to take an extra part-time job to make ends meet.”

    The data backs up Noeth and Pamintuan’s perceptions. John Yang, president and executive director of Asian Americans Advancing Justice, said economic-related concerns, healthcare, and housing costs were some of the top issues the organization found in its 2024 survey of Asian Americans. And a July AAPI Data survey indicated that Asian Americans thought Republicans had a slight edge on handling inflation over Democrats.

    Public safety

    While voters across all racial and ethnic lines felt the impacts of inflation, Asian Americans grew dissatisfied with poor Democratic leadership on crime and safety in major cities. As disorder grew after the pandemic, Asian Americans soured on Democrats as they watched their quality of life decrease. Asra Nomani, author of “Woke Army,” said many Asian Americans felt “unprotected amid rising violence and harassment.”

    In New York City, a 2023 survey found substantial portions of Asian Americans adopted some kind of “avoidance behavior” to deal with crime – 48% avoided going out late at night, and 41% avoided taking public transportation. Meanwhile, Democrat-run city governments have taken more relaxed approach to handling crime, even spending thousands of dollars to protect criminals by humanizing them as “justice-impacted individuals.”

    “You only understand what you signed up for after they [Democrats] win and you have to put up with crime and squalor,” Pennsylvania voter Teesta Dasgupta said.

    Asian Americans increasingly oppose soft-on-crime policies. The majority of Asian Americans in California supported the passage of Proposition 36, which imposes harsher penalties for certain types of crimes. A disproportionate Asian American voter base also recalled former San Francisco District Attorney Chesa Boudin, who infamously declined to prosecute the murder of an elderly Thai immigrant as a hate crime and instead chalked it up to a “temper tantrum” of the perpetrator.

    ‘Wrong side of brown’

    Asian American voters also told me that they were turned off by the Democrats’ racial equity policies. The Democratic Party heavily leaned into racial equity following George Floyd’s death and the riots that followed in 2020. Democrats made bold promises to reduce racial disparities in economic and other outcomes, arguing that current racial disparities are the result of decades of systemic discrimination that must be addressed. However, race-conscious policies like affirmative action often ended up pitting Asian Americans against other minority groups. For many Asian Americans, they end up on the “wrong side of brown,” as Nomani puts it.

    Noeth told me that Asian American parents were “fed up” with affirmative action policies in school admissions. Sue Ghosh Stricklett, a former Trump administration appointee, said the Harvard affirmative action case and the removal of merit-based admissions at Thomas Jefferson High School in Virginia both “ignited passionate activism” among Asian American parents. In Fairfax County, Virginia, Thomas Jefferson High School for Science and Technology changed its merit-based admissions policy in a bid to “decrease the representation of Asian Americans” in favor of other racial minorities.

    “The injustice of being labeled as ‘privileged,’ ‘selfish,’ ‘cheaters,’ ‘overrepresented,’ ‘white adjacent,’ and ‘resource hoarders’ hurt very deeply,” Nomani, who is also a parent of a Thomas Jefferson graduate, said. It led to “political mobilization and a reconsideration of long-standing political loyalties.”

    Is this a permanent shift?

    According to the Asian Americans I spoke with, many factors will determine if the momentum remains.

    Kenny Xu, author of “An Inconvenient Minority,” believes the growth to the right is limited.

    “There is a definite ceiling in Asian American rightward support due to their highly educated demographics, and the tendency of highly educated people to vote Left.”

    Dasgupta believes growth is dependent on messaging.

    “If Dems move to the center, Asian Americans stay where they are right now but if the allegiance to gender ideology and soft on crime remains then they [Asian Americans] will move right.”

    Pamintuan says engagement with Asian American voters “could make a difference between winning or losing” in tight races, particularly at the local level.

    Time will tell if Asian Americans will fully shift right. But an alliance is emerging. And both Democrats and Republicans should pay attention.

    Neetu Arnold is a Paulson Policy Analyst at the Manhattan Institute and a Young Voices contributor. Follow her on X @neetu_arnold

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 11/20/2024 – 18:25

  • "Solar Powerhouse" China Is Leading Asia's Green Energy Movement
    “Solar Powerhouse” China Is Leading Asia’s Green Energy Movement

    If you’re trying to implement green energy solutions in Asia, chances are you’re going to need to rely on China one way or another. 

    Southeast Asia’s demand for renewable energy is rising, driven by tech manufacturing and data center growth, according to Nikkei. Solarvest, the region’s leading renewable energy provider, plans to capitalize on this boom by increasing imports from China, according to a local manager.

    That manager told Nikkei: “We aim to invest more in the next couple of years. Buying equipment and components from Chinese suppliers, who have mastered the supply chain and solar tech, gives us the best opportunity to generate green energy with a price that is low enough to compete against fossil fuels.”

    Through its Belt and Road Initiative, Beijing has extended its influence over power infrastructure in countries like Malaysia, Thailand, and Pakistan. However, the U.S. has criticized China for subsidizing manufacturers and underpricing goods, leading to tariffs and trade barriers.

    The Nikkei report says that despite U.S. opposition, China maintains an edge with economies of scale and growing climate urgency. Solar energy, seen as the most accessible renewable source, attracted $500 billion in investment in 2024, surpassing all other energy types, according to the International Energy Agency.

    Offshore wind projects take over eight years to complete, while solar plants can be built in under two, making solar a faster choice for companies transitioning to renewables, industry leaders told Nikkei.

    This urgency is especially pronounced in emerging Asian economies like Malaysia and Thailand, which rely on fossil fuels but aim to attract tech giants like Apple and Google, committed to 100% renewable energy through the RE100 initiative.

    China dominates the global solar energy market, housing leading players like Longi Green Energy, Tongwei, and Jinko Solar, as well as the top three inverter makers: Huawei, Sungrow, and Ginlong.

    Despite efforts by the U.S. and India to localize production, China is projected to maintain over 80% of global photovoltaic manufacturing capacity by 2030, with its solar products costing 20-30% less than competitors, according to the IEA.

    Analysts attribute China’s edge to its economic scale, advanced technology, and cost efficiency. Even as countries impose trade barriers to curb dependence on Chinese products, demand for China’s affordable solar solutions remains strong globally.

    Companies like Foxconn highlight that Chinese solar energy rivals fossil fuels in cost, driving its adoption worldwide, particularly in markets eager to expand renewable energy capacity.

    China’s dominance in solar wasn’t always guaranteed. In the 2000s, Japanese and Taiwanese firms led the photovoltaic industry, but China’s massive scale and government subsidies allowed it to outpace competitors.

    Now, China controls over 90% of the solar supply chain, from polysilicon production to module manufacturing.

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 11/20/2024 – 18:00

  • Indian Billionaire Gautam Adani Indicted For 'Massive Fraud' And 'Multi-Billion Dollar' Bribery Scheme
    Indian Billionaire Gautam Adani Indicted For ‘Massive Fraud’ And ‘Multi-Billion Dollar’ Bribery Scheme

    Indian billionaire Gautam Adani has been indicted in New York for ‘massive fraud’ and a ‘multi-billion dollar’ bribery scheme, according to multiple reports Wednesday afternoon. 

    According to NBC, Gautam Adani and others are accused of paying over $250 million in bribes to Indian officials to secure solar energy contracts expected to yield $2 billion in profits over 20 years. Prosecutors allege Adani personally met with officials as part of the scheme.

    Adani, his nephew Sagar Adani, and Vneet Jaain, both Adani Green Energy executives, also face wire and securities fraud charges for misleading U.S. investors and lenders to obtain funding, the U.S. Attorney’s Office in Brooklyn stated.

    U.S. Attorney Breon Peace commented: “The defendants orchestrated an elaborate scheme to bribe Indian government officials to secure contracts worth billions of dollars and Gautam S. Adani, Sagar R. Adani and Vneet S. Jaain lied about the bribery scheme as they sought to raise capital from U.S. and international investors.”

    A DOJ press release reads: “These offenses were allegedly committed by senior executives and directors to obtain and finance massive state energy supply contracts through corruption and fraud at the expense of U.S. investors.  The Criminal Division will continue to aggressively prosecute corrupt, deceptive, and obstructive conduct that violates U.S. law, no matter where in the world it occurs.” 

    “Gautam S. Adani and seven other business executives allegedly bribed the Indian government to finance lucrative contracts designed to benefit their businesses. Adani and other defendants also defrauded investors by raising capital on the basis of false statements about bribery and corruption, while still other defendants allegedly attempted to conceal the bribery conspiracy by obstructing the government’s investigation,” stated FBI Assistant Director in Charge Dennehy.  “The FBI maintains its steadfast mission to expose all corrupt agreements, especially with international governments, and protect investors from related harm.”

    The indictment also charges former Azure Power executives Ranjit Gupta and Rupash Agarwal, along with three ex-employees of Canadian investor Caisse de Dépôt et Placement du Québec, with conspiring to violate the Foreign Corrupt Practices Act as part of Adani’s bribery scheme.

    U.S. short seller Hindenburg Research issued a report in early 2023 claiming Adani Group conducted a “brazen stock manipulation and accounting fraud scheme over the course of decades.” Hindenburg called Adani Group “the largest con in corporate history”. 

    “Today we reveal the findings of our 2-year investigation, presenting evidence that the INR 17.8 trillion (US $218 billion) Indian conglomerate Adani Group has engaged in a brazen stock manipulation and accounting fraud scheme over the course of decades,” the report said in 2023. 

    Adani “has amassed a net worth of roughly $120 billion, adding over $100 billion in the past 3 years largely through stock price appreciation in the group’s 7 key listed companies, which have spiked an average of 819% in that period,” the report said. 

    Bloomberg provided a quick snapshot of Hindenburg’s main allegations at the time, many of which haven’t even been addressed in this indictment (yet?):

    • Identified 38 Mauritius shell entities controlled by Adani’s brother, Vinod Adani, or his close associates plus entities controlled by him in other tax havens.
    • The offshore shell network seems to be used for earnings manipulation
    • Adani Group has previously been the focus of 4 major government investigations relating to allegations of fraud
    • Adani Enterprises and Adani Total Gas Ltd. appear to be audited by a tiny firm, with no current website, only 4 partners and 11 employees which has audited just one other listed firm
    • The auditor “hardly seems capable of complex audit work” when Adani Enterprises alone has 156 subsidiaries and many more joint ventures.

    Hindenburg’s Nathan Anderson

    Hindenburg’s report initially led to a $50 billion selloff in Adani’s corporate empire. Adani, in response, called Hindenburg’s short report “bogus” and threatened legal action. At the time, Adani Group’s legal team released a statement that said it was exploring legal action against Hindenburg for its “maliciously mischievous, unresearched” report.

    Then, Dan McCrum, famous for helping unveil the fraud at Wirecard, followed up in late 2023 stating Adani “appears to have imported billions of dollars of coal at prices well above market value”.

    Adani called McCrum’s article a “renewed attempt” by the paper to “rehash old and baseless allegations to tarnish the name and standing” of the company. At the time they denied any wrongdoing and said the story was based on an “old, baseless allegation”, and is “a clever recycling and selective misrepresentation of publicly available facts and information”.

    “Adani is attacking journalist Dan McCrum at the Financial Times (FT) over an upcoming article,” Hindenburg’s Anderson wrote late last year after Adani’s press release. “The last company that tried that was Wirecard, later found to be the largest fraud in German history.”

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 11/20/2024 – 17:40

  • Rare Israeli Attack On Syria's Palmyra Launched From US-Controlled Airspace
    Rare Israeli Attack On Syria’s Palmyra Launched From US-Controlled Airspace

    Huge Israeli airstrikes rocked the outskirts of the central Syrian city of Palmyra on Wednesday, with regional reports saying the attacks were launched by Israeli jets utilizing US-controlled airspace over Al-Tanf military base in eastern Syria. 

    “Israeli warplanes launched a number of missiles from the airspace of the [US] base in the Al-Tanf area on the Syrian–Iraqi–Jordanian border, in the far southeastern countryside of Homs, targeting the vicinity of the city of Palmyra,” Sputnik’s correspondent reported.

    Getty Images

    Israeli attacks on Palmyra are rare, if not unheard of, given how deep into central Syria and the eastern desert the town lies. Al-Tanf base is located a little over 200km from Palmyra. The border base has been occupied by US forces for many years now.

    Syrian state SANA has cited a large casualty count, reporting at least 36 dead and over 50 wounded. SANA reports, “At approximately 1:30 p.m. today, the Israeli enemy launched an air attack from the direction of al-Tanf area, targeting a number of buildings in Palmyra City in the Syrian Desert, led to the martyrdom of 36 people, the injury of more than 50 others, and significant material damage to the buildings and the surrounding area.”

    Palmyra before the war attracted tourists from across the globe as it is known for its ancient Roman ruins, and is a UNESCO World Heritage site.

    The iconic ruins and temples were partially damaged when the remote outpost was overrun by the Islamic State terror group in 2015, and many Syrian Army personnel were killed trying to defend it.

    Syrian government forces with the help of Russian aerial support were able to get Palmyra back from ISIS by March 2016.

    Russia and Syria have long accused American forces based out of Al-Tanf of training terrorists and facilitating their movements, in order to keep up pressure on Damascus.

    As for Israel, recent months have seen a clear uptick in air raids on Syria, but these strikes on Palmyra appear to be the single deadliest this year.

    Israel typically describes its operations as targeting ‘Iranian assets’; however, the Syrian government is saying that many among its territorial defense units as well as civilians were killed.

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 11/20/2024 – 17:20

  • Waste Of The Day: Nuclear Commission Flies First Class
    Waste Of The Day: Nuclear Commission Flies First Class

    Authored by Jeremy Portnoy via RealClearInvestigations,

    Topline: A recent inspector general audit of the Nuclear Regulatory Commission’s travel expenses found a slew of waste and potential fraud, including nearly $50,000 in unallowed first-class flights between 2020 and 2023.

    Key facts: Federal law requires most government employees to fly economy class, with exceptions made for medical or security concerns. To fly first class, employees must submit a written explanation and obtain approval from their supervisor.

    Workers at the commission only had proper approval for four of the 19 first-class flights that auditors reviewed. In one instance, an employee paid $12,535 for first class when a $1,134 business-class ticket was available

    Some of the first-class trips were approved by employees who had no authority to do so, according to the audit. Others had no justification.

    The commission also failed to remove access to travel charge cards for 37 employees that no longer work for the government. Auditors did not find any former employees who used their charge cards, but said there was a “risk” it could have happened.

    Federal law requires that charge cards have credit limits of $10,000 to minimize spending and financial risk. Auditors found three commission cards with limits of up to $20,000, with no written explanation for the increase.

    The Nuclear Regulatory Commission’s agency-wide credit limit for travel also may be “too high,” increasing the risk for fraud, auditors said. The commission spent an average of $358,190 on travel each month last year, but is technically allowed to spend $5 million in a single month. 

    The audit found three transactions on charge cards totaling $9,593 that appeared to be for items unrelated to government business, though further review is needed to confirm the “potential misuse.”

    In total, employees put 161,816 charges worth $27 million on their travel charge cards from 2020 to 2023. Almost half of the transactions came last year.

    Federal law requires employees to take a refresher course on charge card spending at least every three years. The NRC made the training voluntary and did not track attendance, auditors found.

    Search all federal, state and local government salaries and vendor spending with the AI search bot, Benjamin, at OpenTheBooks.com. 

    Summary: It’s a bit worrying that the agency tasked with ensuring the safety of nuclear reactors can’t handle the simple process of booking a flight.

    The #WasteOfTheDay is brought to you by the forensic auditors at OpenTheBooks.com

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 11/20/2024 – 17:00

  • With 63% Of Voters Demanding Her Recall, Soros-Backed Bay Area District Attorney Concedes
    With 63% Of Voters Demanding Her Recall, Soros-Backed Bay Area District Attorney Concedes

    Authored by Kimberley Hayek via The Epoch Times,

    Alameda County District Attorney Pamela Price conceded her recall election on Monday, nearly a week after Bay Area voters expressed their frustration with crime and homelessness by voting out multiple progressive leaders.

    According to unofficial results as of Nov. 20, 63.1 percent of voters in the general election favored replacing Price, who had served in the position for less than two years.

    Price is a former defense and civil rights attorney.

    She had never prosecuted a single case when she was elected to the prestigious position. On the campaign trail, she promised criminal justice reforms and a “new era at the DA’s Office” if she was elected. She got a big financial boost from billionaire Democratic mega-donor George Soros and Laurene Powell Jobs, widow of Apple co-founder Steve Jobs, when she first ran for the job in 2018.

    She lost that race but ran again in 2022 and edged out Terry Wiley, the county’s chief deputy district attorney. 

    Soros, who funneled more than $5 million into his fundraising PAC, the California Justice & Public Safety, from 2018 to 2020, turned off the money tap to Price and Los Angeles County District Attorney George Gascon this election cycle.

    Alongside Price, Oakland voters also ousted progressive Mayor Sheng Thao.

    In San Francisco, Mayor London Breed lost her bid for reelection to a centrist opponent who vowed to crack down on crime and boost small businesses.

    In a press conference that ran just under 20 minutes, Price outlined her office’s successes during a time when Gov. Gavin Newsom was forced to deploy additional law enforcement support to Oakland, which is within Alameda County’s jurisdiction.

    “In November of 2022 Alameda County took a huge step forward toward a better criminal legal system,” Price said at Monday’s press conference, referring to her election win two years ago. 

    “Under my leadership as district attorney, we made incredible strides toward serving the victims in this county.”

    She said her office “diversified the workforce for the first time in decades,” hiring speakers of Cantonese, Mandarin, Hmong, as well as more African Americans. 

    She said that a public accountability unit, created under her leadership, “exposed decades of prosecutorial misconduct, excluding Jewish, black residents and sometimes LGBTQ+ residents” from juries. She said there is evidence of an attempt to cover up the misconduct dating back nearly 20 years. 

    Price also noted that her team prioritized the reduction of gun violence, the fentanyl crisis, and human trafficking.

    “We prosecuted murderers and other violent persons throughout Alameda County at a higher rate than my predecessor and we processed more than 12,000 cases,” she said. 

    She also said that she would leave with the largest grant portfolio in the history of the district attorney’s office, with more than $21 million in grants received since January 2023.

    She credited the portfolio strength to Chief Assistant District Attorney Royl Roberts, who will lead the office as the interim district attorney until a new DA is appointed. 

    Before working in the Alameda County DA office, Roberts worked as an executive from the Peralta Community College District, where, among other positions, he served as chief assistant to the chancellor and general counsel of the district. 

    “We must not continue to have two systems of justice that are separate and unequal in Alameda County,” Price said during her press conference. “That is the way of the past. It is up to you and me to make sure that future leaders of this office remain independent decision makers and stay the course of holding public officials accountable, and law enforcement officers accountable, for their actions.”

    Price initially ran on a platform including offender rehabilitation and police accountability. 

    During her tenure, Newsom deployed more law enforcement to Oakland, and recently extended the California Highway Patrol’s increased presence there.

    “We will continue this important work as local leadership transitions,” the governor said in a statement.

    Newsom had also sent state prosecutors and surveillance cameras to Oakland. 

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 11/20/2024 – 16:20

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Nov 20

Today’s News 20th November 2024

  • Trump Now Has More Followers Than Taylor Swift
    Trump Now Has More Followers Than Taylor Swift

    Authored by Dmytro “Henry” Aleksandrov via Headline USA,

    It was recently revealed that President-elect Donald Trump surpassed one of the most famous pop stars, Taylor Swift, in Twitter followers, proving that Americans like him more.

    “BREAKING: Donald Trump (@realDonaldTrump) has surpassed Taylor Swift in followers to become the 8th most-followed account on [Twitter],” popular conservative commentator @alx reported.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    As of Nov. 18, Trump had 94.8 million followers, and Swift had 94.7 million followers.

    “OVERTAKEN,” conservative commentator and senior editor at Human Events Jack Posobeic wrote in response to the recent news.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Like almost any other Hollywood celebrity, Swift publicly expressed her far-left political beliefs, specifically her opposition to Trump.

    Even though Swift refused to endorse Hillary Clinton for president in 2016, she supported Joe Biden for president while he was still in the race, which resulted in Trump attacking her on social media.

    “I signed and was responsible for the Music Modernization Act for Taylor Swift and all other Musical Artists. Joe Biden didn’t do anything for Taylor, and never will,” Trump wrote on Truth Social. 

    “There’s no way she could endorse Crooked Joe Biden, the worst and most corrupt President in the History of our Country, and be disloyal to the man who made her so much money.”

    Trump, however, stated that Swift is “unusually beautiful” even though she is a leftist.

    Swift endorsed Kamala Harris in her Instagram post after Democrats orchestrated a coup against Biden and replaced him with Harris.

    “I think she is a steady-handed, gifted leader and I believe we can accomplish so much more in this country if we are led by calm and not chaos. I was so heartened and impressed by her selection of running mate @timwalz, who has been standing up for LGBTQ+ rights, IVF, and a woman’s right to her own body for decades,” she wrote.

    However, Swift’s endorsement didn’t affect Americans, with only 6% saying that they were now more likely to vote for Harris.

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 11/19/2024 – 23:00

  • The Link Between Blood Types And Risks of COVID-19, Cancer, And Other Diseases
    The Link Between Blood Types And Risks of COVID-19, Cancer, And Other Diseases

    Authored by Ellen Wan via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    Blood types play a crucial role not only in ensuring safe blood transfusions but also in influencing various health risks. Numerous studies suggest that genetically determined blood types may increase susceptibility to both infectious and non-infectious diseases, including COVID-19, heart disease, and allergies.

    chemical industry/Shutterstock

    Blood is categorized into four main types—A, B, AB, or O—based on the types of antigens present on the surface of red blood cells. Antigens are proteins found on red blood cells that trigger an immune response when encountering unfamiliar substances, such as certain bacteria, Dr. Douglas Eric Guggenheim, a physician at the Abramson Cancer Center at the University of Pennsylvania Hospital, explained in a 2020 Penn Medicine article.

    Increased Risk of Viral Infections

    A 2023 study from Harvard Medical School, published in the journal Blood, found that the SARS-CoV-2 virus, which causes COVID-19, preferentially targets type A blood cells.

    “We show that the part of the SARS-CoV-2 spike protein that’s key to enabling the virus to invade cells displays affinity for blood group A cells, and the virus in turn also shows a preferential ability to infect blood group A cells,” Dr. Sean R. Stowell, of Harvard Medical School and Brigham and Women’s Hospital, said in a press release.

    Type A blood cells are more susceptible to SARS-CoV-2 infection than type O blood cells, Stowell noted. “Among a group of several thousand people, some studies suggest that those with blood group A may be 20 percent more likely to be infected after exposure to SARS-CoV-2 compared with those who have blood group O.” Subsequent experiments indicated that the Omicron variant demonstrated an even stronger preference for infecting type A blood cells than the original virus.

    Other recent studies have explored the mechanisms linking blood type to susceptibility to SARS-CoV-2.  One study showed that levels of ACE2 protein, the receptor that the virus binds to for cell entry, were significantly higher in people with type A blood compared to other blood types. The researchers also found that the binding rate of the spike protein to red blood cells was highest in people with type A blood and lowest in people with type O.

    Despite these associations, when assessing a person’s risk of severe SARS-CoV-2 infection, factors such as age and pre-existing chronic conditions, like heart disease, tend to have more significant effects on the risk of severe SARS-CoV-2 infection than blood type.

    Increased Risk of Cancer

    Pancreatic cancer is one of the deadliest types of cancer because it tends to grow quickly, can rapidly invade surrounding organs, and is often difficult to detect early. One study found a statistically significant association between ABO blood group and pancreatic cancer risk. Compared to people with type O blood, those with blood types A, AB, and B had a 32, 51, and 72 percent higher risk of developing pancreatic cancer, respectively.

    Additionally, a comprehensive review found that people with type A blood were more susceptible to Helicobacter pylori, a known risk factor for stomach cancer, thus increasing their likelihood of developing the disease. In contrast, type O blood was associated with a lower risk of several cancers, including colorectal, gastric, and breast cancer.

    Higher Risk of Other Serious Conditions

    Blood type has been found to be associated with an increased risk of other several serious health conditions.

    Increased Risk of Heart Disease

    Blood type may also be linked to the risk of developing heart disease. A meta-analysis from the Harvard T.H. Chan School of Public Health, analyzing health data from nearly 90,000 individuals over more than 20 years, found that people with type O blood had the lowest risk of developing coronary heart disease. After adjusting for cardiovascular risk factors, participants with blood types A, B, and AB had an increased risk of coronary heart disease by 6, 15, and 23 percent, respectively, when compared to people with type O blood.

    Increased Risk of Allergic Diseases

    There is also a clear association between blood type and allergic diseases. A review found that people with type O blood were more prone to allergic rhinitis and asthma compared to those with non-O blood group. In contrast, people with non-O blood types had a higher likelihood of developing atopic dermatitis, with the highest prevalence among those with type B blood, followed by type A.

    Read the rest here…

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 11/19/2024 – 22:35

  • Visualizing The Distribution Of Global Wealth
    Visualizing The Distribution Of Global Wealth

    Wealth distribution varies significantly across the world’s regions, reflecting the economic disparities shaped by differences in development, resource availability, and financial access.

    This graphic, via Visual Capitalist’s Kayla Zhu, visualizes the share of adults in each global region who fall into four wealth bands (figures in USD):

    • Under $10K

    • $10K to $100K

    • $100K to $1M

    • Over $1M

    The data comes from the UBS Global Wealth Report 2024 and encompasses 56 markets representing an estimated 92.2% of total global wealth.

    The UBS report’s data does not include a majority of African countries.

    Global Wealth by Region in 2023

    The majority of adults in the lowest wealth bracket (under $10K) are concentrated in the Asia-Pacific (APAC) region, where nearly 70% of people in this wealth bracket being from the region.

    On the other end, the highest wealth bracket (over $1M) is dominated by the Americas along with the grouped region of Europe, the Middle East, and Africa (EMEA).

    The Americas, which includes North and South America, have the highest share (42.7%) of global adults with wealth over $1 million, showing a concentration of high net worth individuals in this region.

    At the country level, the U.S is home to nearly 22 million people with a wealth exceeding one million dollars, the highest number of millionaires in any country according to analysis by UBS.

    This means that in 2023, the U.S. hosted 38% of the world’s millionaires.

    Mainland China ranked second with just over 6 million millionaires, almost twice the number of the third-ranked country, the United Kingdom.

    To see the global distribution of the ultra-wealthy, check out this graphic that visualizes where the 626,619 individuals with a net worth of $30 million or more live.

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 11/19/2024 – 22:10

  • Andrew Jackson In The 21st Century
    Andrew Jackson In The 21st Century

    Authored by Jeffrey A. Tucker via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    Trying to gain a greater understanding of what is happening in the United States today, history provides some guidance.

    We can skip most of the presidencies of the 20th century for comparison.

    A statue of the seventh President of the US Andrew Jackson is seen in Lafayette Park across from the White House on Oct. 30, 2008. Karen Bleier/AFP via Getty Images

    Ronald Reagan was more in the mold that Donald Trump is breaking.

    Richard Nixon was popular but was hamstrung by the Vietnam War and the dollar crisis.

    FDR was popular but his sweeping victory in 1936 reflected economic panic. While he had the House and Senate, he faced a hard barrier with the Supreme Court that struck down his beloved legislation.

    Woodrow Wilson won in 1912 only because the opposition was split.

    There is a greater prospect of fundamental change with the second Trump term than in any living memory.

    For an illuminating comparison, let’s return to the year 1824. Andrew Jackson ran for president and won a plurality of the popular and electoral votes. But he did not get the majority. The election was thrown to the House of Representatives, which produced a surprising result: John Quincy Adams became president thanks to the support of Henry Clay who was promised the position of Secretary of State.

    That sense of being robbed of the presidency festered deeply among Jackson’s fan base and he came back four years later, more fired up than ever. The election of 1828 was utterly sweeping. He ran an unapologetic populist campaign against the national bank and corrupt insiders in Washington. The turnout broke all records, and so did the results. Jackson won by a landslide, securing 178 electoral votes against John Adams’ 83.

    With this mandate, Jackson and his followers utterly destabilized Washington, firing vast numbers of executive bureaucrats who were considered disloyal, and fought the national bank while pushing for gold and silver as money. His hiring of loyalists to top positions was decried as the “spoils system” that was ended fully by the Progressive Era, which amounted to a revenge of the professional bureaucrats.

    The policies he pursued–keeping the government mostly constrained by the Constitution, keeping the peoples’ interests front and center, and devolving power to the states–prepared the ground for the United States to rise from a small post-colonial outpost to the world’s greatest economic and military power by century’s end.

    There were two major missteps that have ruined his reputation in the history books. Jackson was a states’ right guy on all matters but for matters of the tariffs (he threatened an invasion of South Carolina during the so-called Nullification Crisis) and, in addition, he pursued a cruel policy regarding Native lands, which he ordered to be taken, leading to ghastly humanitarian results including the famous Trail of Tears.

    That said, he did return government to the people and his impact on Washington was enormous, especially as regards his fight against the National Bank and paper money.

    Murray Rothbard summarizes Jackson’s presidency as follows:

    “It is difficult to generalize about Jackson; his fiery temperament, his capacity for bitter personal hatred, his autocratic taste for personal power which blossomed in his early military campaigns, and his weak grasp of political principles led him into many inconsistent and wrong-headed acts. Underneath these weaknesses, petty whims, hatreds, and inconsistencies, however, there is clearly discernible a basic set of political and economic principles. These were, in brief, the principles of pure Jeffersonian Democracy: thorough-going ‘hard money,’ with the eradication of inflationary paper money and reliance on gold and silver; laissez-faire-strict adherence to free enterprise in a market unhampered by government subsidies, tariffs, heavy bureaucratic expenditures, special privileges, or heavy taxation; firm insistence on states’ rights. In foreign policy, the guide is America first, last, and always, with no entangling alliances and an attitude of firmness, cordiality, but profound suspicion toward all foreign countries, particularly Great Britain.”

    Rothbard concludes: “Jackson deserves a cherished place in the hearts of all Americans: By the time Jackson left office, for the first time and the last time in the history of America, we had wiped out all of our public debt. Old Hickory’s success in liquidating the national debt is one of the most glorious accomplishments in American annals. And it provides us with a vital clue to the true nature of his political philosophy.”

    This is the strongest historical precedent we have for the meaning of what is happening right now. Donald Trump astonished the world with his victory in 2016. His loss four years later followed the calamitous policy response to the arrival of a respiratory virus. Trump initially pushed for lockdowns. Once having changed his mind about the policy, he was unable to restrain the bureaucracies that had been unleashed on the population with the ostensible goal of minimizing infection and then forcing public adoption of an experimental shot.

    There was a widespread belief among his supporters that something was sketchy about the 2020 results, which had been unduly influenced by mail-in ballots pushed by the CDC, which had said that standing in voting lines was too dangerous for the spread of the virus. Trump himself never tired of arguing that the election itself was stolen. While that claim was inadmissible in polite society, and never seriously considered by the courts, Trump’s team and his followers were thoroughly convinced that he otherwise would have won.

    For four years, Team Trump plotted their return, with an election strategy based on three key pillars. First, they would work to minimize voter fraud and mail-in ballots, urging the passage of voter ID laws and cracking down on possible corruption of the rolls. Second, they would push disenfranchised voter blocs among men under 40 to get themselves registered and vote. Third, they would work to create a mass cultural movement deploying Trump to do what he does best, which is to rally people at mass events.

    Later in the campaign, the Trump coalition grew dramatically with the inclusion of a parallel effort by Robert F. Kennedy, Jr. A lifetime litigator, RFK had written the most compelling books to explain how it is that Trump’s first term came to be subverted by the pharmaceutical industry in combination with national-security bureaucracies. His broader interests have long concerned health freedom and the elimination of subsidies for big agricultural interests that had driven smaller and organic farmers to the margins of food suppliers.

    Kennedy attempted to challenge sitting president Joseph Biden for the nomination but found himself locked out. Next he attempted an independent bid but found himself blocked at every turn, plus worried that his presence in the election would operate as a spoiler bloc that could put Biden back in power.

    Once he decided to link up with Trump over issues of food and medical freedom, they both found common interests in battling Big-Tech censorship, which in turn attracted the interests of Elon Musk. This disruptive entrepreneur had purchased Twitter with the goal of turning it into a free-speech platform in defiance of all the throttling and bans of the years prior.

    This combination of RFK, Jr., Trump, and Musk amounts to one of the biggest realignments in modern American history. It combines 1990s-era “crunchy liberalism,” with a pro-peace America First foreign policy, with a 2000s-era disruptive tech focus, with a populist push against big everything (media, government, academia, medicine, corporations, finance).

    Much of this realignment comes in the wake of the tumultuous years of COVID, in which businesses, schools, churches, and travel were shut in the name of health, with the very opposite result.

    The modern incarnation of the Jacksonian movement has embodied itself in a series of popular acronyms that summarize the agenda: MAHA (Make America Healthy Again), MAGA (Make America Great Again), and DOGE (Department of Government Efficiency).

    There is simply no chance that even the finest political prognosticator could have anticipated this merger of interests in defiance of all the old categories of left and right. As regards the old categories of race and religion, there has never been a popular political movement to draw from such a wide diversity of people, united more in their celebration of working-class interests than in opposition to professional and overclass hegemony.

    Something very similar came together in the coalition that brought Andrew Jackson to power in 1828, complete with a storied past of struggle and triumph and a hard-core promise to return government to the people while taking it away from the privileged special interests. So far Trump’s picks for his cabinet posts seem to be following the Jacksonian script as well: people loved by the base but loathed by the establishment. Jackson got away with the same mainly by leveraging his personal popularity and carefully deploying that political capital against all resistors.

    Jackson made some terrible errors but also did good as president. There is much from which the Trump team can learn from this experience. There is every reason to believe that the next four years could be equally as disruptive and leave a permanent mark on the history of this nation.

    Views expressed in this article are opinions of the author and do not necessarily reflect the views of The Epoch Times.

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 11/19/2024 – 21:45

  • China's Economy Is Larger Than 30 Asian Economies Combined
    China’s Economy Is Larger Than 30 Asian Economies Combined

    The world’s second-largest economy sometimes suffers from its own success: it’s hard to comprehend how big it really is.

    To help put things in perspective, this map, via Visual Capitalist’s Pallavi Rao, compares China’s economy with East, Southeast, South, and Central Asia: a combined entity of 30 other countries labeled as “Rest of Asia”.

    Data is sourced from the UN and the IMF as of 2024. Countries from Western Asia (i.e. the Middle East) and Russia (which spans Europe and Asian continents) haven’t been included, and data was unavailable for North Korea.

    How China Stacks Up vs. Asian Economies

    With an $18 trillion economic output in 2024, China’s GDP is nearly $2 trillion larger than 30 economies combined: $16.5 trillion.

    That list of 30 countries includes other Asian heavyweights like: Japan ($4.1 trillion), India ($3.9 trillion), and South Korea ($1.87 trillion), the world’s 4th, 5th, and 12th largest economies.

    More than 2.9 billion people inhabit this bloc of countries, compared to China’s 1.4 billion residents. The per capita GDP reveals the imbalance in productivity: $12,870 for China versus $5,583 for the rest of Asia.

    Why the Chinese Economy Slowdown Matters

    Now that comprehending the size of China’s economy is somewhat more feasible, it makes more sense why the post-pandemic slowdown has rung alarm bells for economists around the world.

    It’s easier to think of it less as one country in an economic slump, and more as, say, 30 countries in a bit of a bother.

    Since 2010, China’s economy has added roughly $1 trillion—the size of Saudi Arabia—every single year. From 2012–2021, China contributed nearly 39% to global growth by itself, more than the G7 countries combined.

    It’s not an exaggeration to say the world economy would look very different without China—especially for the manufacturing and industrial sectors, where it commands a dominant market position.

    Falling Chinese demand hurts all the countries who export to China—and this includes large parts of Asia and Africa.

    Meanwhile, in an effort to sell elsewhere, Chinese businesses have shifted focus to international markets, already putting them in confrontational crosshairs with the U.S. and EU over unfair trade practices. More tariffs could raise the cost of goods and services to consumers around the world.

    This map is part of a series where we visualize how different countries around the world stack up against their neighbors. Check out how Germany Compares to Half of Europe, or How Africa Can Be Divided into Two Halves for more interesting conversation starters.

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 11/19/2024 – 21:20

  • Musk Goes All In On 'Judge Dredd' Matt Gaetz, Notes 'Douchebag' Garland Never Brought Charges
    Musk Goes All In On ‘Judge Dredd’ Matt Gaetz, Notes ‘Douchebag’ Garland Never Brought Charges

    Elon Musk has come out swinging for Rep. Matt Gaetz, as the Florida lawmaker and President-elect Donald Trump’s pick for attorney general faces scrutiny over sexual misconduct allegations that may throw his Senate confirmation into disarray.

    “Matt Gaetz has 3 critical assets that are needed for the AG role: a big brain, a spine of steel and an axe to grind,” Musk wrote in a Tuesday post on X. “He is the Judge Dredd America needs to clean up a corrupt system and put powerful bad actors in prison,” Musk continued, adding “Gaetz will be our Hammer of Justice.”

    Musk also addressed the allegations, saying he considers them “worth less than nothing,” as “Under our laws, a man is considered innocent until proven guilty.

    “If AG Garland (an unprincipled douchebag) could have secured a conviction against Gaetz, he would have, but he knew he could not.

    “Case closed.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.jsSenators on both sides of the aisle are requesting more information into a House ethics probe of Gaetz which allegedly contains accusations that Gaetz paid for sex with a woman who was 17 at the time. The DOJ investigated the allegations, but decided in February of 2023 not to file any charges against him. Gaetz has denied the allegations.

     

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 11/19/2024 – 20:45

  • Russia Crude Exports Tumble To Two Month Low
    Russia Crude Exports Tumble To Two Month Low

    Russian crude oil shipments dropped to a two-month low as loadings from Russia’s Western ports slumped, tanker-tracking data monitored by Bloomberg showed on Tuesday.

    In the four weeks to November 17, Russian crude oil exports by sea dipped to 3.28 million barrels per day (bpd), down by 150,000 bpd compared to the previous four-week average to November 10, according to the data reported by Bloomberg’s Julian Lee. The decline in exports was the biggest since the end of July.  Daily crude flows in the week to Nov. 17 slumped by about 740,000 barrels to 2.83 million, dropping to their lowest since the first seven days of July.

    The decline was driven by lower flows from the country’s Baltic, Black Sea and Arctic ports, while shipments from the Pacific remained unchanged.

    A total of 26 tankers loaded 19.8 million barrels of Russian crude in the week to Nov. 17, vessel-tracking data and port-agent reports show. The volume was down sharply from a revised 24.98 million barrels on 32 ships the previous week.

    The weekly decline was mostly the result of a 30% slump in shipments from Russia’s export terminals on the Baltic and Black Seas. It could have been the result of increased refining rates in the second week of November, which left lower volumes of crude available for exports, according to Bloomberg.

    In October, as available refinery capacity in Russia dipped, crude oil shipments hit a four-month high, as heavy domestic refinery maintenance left more crude available for export.

    Russia exported on average 3.47 million bpd of crude in the four weeks to October 20, up by 140,000 bpd compared to the four-week average to October 13, Bloomberg data showed at the time.

    That was a consequence of refining rates at Russian crude processing facilities dropping to their lowest level for more than two years, since May 2022.

    Crude exports from Russia could soon rise again, as some refineries are struggling with losses amid the gasoline export ban, currently in place until December 31, 2024.

    Russia’s refineries have reportedly started to reduce run rates and some are considering shutting in operations, as the facilities are struggling with hefty losses amid export restrictions, rising oil prices, sanctions, and Ukrainian drone attacks.

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 11/19/2024 – 20:30

  • Recommending Brig. Gen. Schwalier For The Air Force 'Plucking Board'
    Recommending Brig. Gen. Schwalier For The Air Force ‘Plucking Board’

    Authored by Forrest Marrion via RealClearPolitics,

    In the mid-1990s, Brig. Gen. Terryl J. Schwalier “was a rising star in the Air Force,” as Dr. Rebecca Grant wrote in 2006. A decade earlier, in June 1996 he was finishing his one-year tour as a provisional wing commander in Saudi Arabia and was slated for promotion to major general. Then disaster struck. On June 25, 1996, a terrorist truck-bomb – “unprecedentedly large” – exploded outside the building in which his airmen were billeted. Nineteen died. Two hundred forty were wounded. Khobar Towers was among the worst losses of U.S. Air Force life at a deployed location in a single hostile incident in memory. In the investigation that followed, defense secretary William Cohen faced political pressure to assign blame. He buckled, going against his military advisors’ counsel, and, instead, denying Schwalier his second star. The scapegoated general retired.

    The decision was unjust in the eyes of many in the know. For starters, Schwalier had not been lax in terms of “force protection (FP).” In fact, he had implemented some one hundred thirty separate FP measures during his deployment and made nearly all the changes recommended by a vulnerability assessment. As the writer recalls, Schwalier’s story and the tragedy of Khobar Towers was part of the assigned readings at the Air Force’s Air Command and Staff College the following year. Furthermore, a key part of the Pentagon’s “outside probe” headed by a retired four-star was badly flawed on the size of the bomb used. The actual bomb – containing “at least 20,000 pounds of TNT” according to the Defense Special Weapons Agency – was at least four times larger than stated in the report, skewing further the judgment against Schwalier. In the years after Schwalier’s retirement, several attempts to overturn the denial of his promotion fell short.

    In July 1997, days prior to the announcement of Cohen’s decision to deny Schwalier his promotion, Air Force chief of staff General Ron Fogleman resigned. He did so based on principle, stating to Aerospace Power Journal, “I just could not begin to imagine facing the Air Force after Secretary Cohen made the decision to cancel General Schwalier’s promotion.” In another forum, the chief stated, “I simply lost respect and confidence in the leadership that I was supposed to be following.”

    For the record, I have zero relationship with the brigadier general. About ten years ago I was privileged to meet General Fogleman – though unplanned – at the top of the escalator outside the Pentagon, as each of us waited to meet someone. We had three minutes together. Even those who have never met General Fogleman hold him in highest regard. He is universally respected and admired. As far as I know, he was the last four-star to resign on principle.

    We need more like him. In the last several years, as more and more are realizing – or at least are finding the courage to speak up – the Air Force has lost its way. Despite the Service infamously prioritizing its pilots’ pigmentation over their proficiency – claiming “too many white pilots” – based on leadership’s commitment to a racist ideology (DEI), how many senior officers have resigned as General Fogleman did?

    Meanwhile, following President Trump’s reelection, some, like retired one-star and former defense policy senior official Anthony Tata, are reporting, “The Pentagon is hyper politicized and needs a thorough vetting to include senior active duty military personnel” who are participating in discussions on how to undermine the new administration. National security reporter Haley Britzky, warns, “Pentagon officials are having informal conversations about how the [defense department] would respond if Donald Trump issues orders to deploy active-duty troops domestically [or] fire large swaths of apolitical staffers.” This is not news, but common knowledge.

    Precedent exists for holding special administrative boards to determine who stays and who goes among Air Force (and all Services’) senior leaders once the new Trump administration takes over. Recently I wrote about General George C. Marshall’s “plucking board” at the outset of World War Two (RealClearDefense, Sep. 26, 2024). As the U.S. Army chief of staff, Marshall was finally in a position to address the seniority system both he and the Army had long suffered under. As the army expanded in 1940 and ‘41 Marshall built a command system “to be able to put my finger on the man I wanted” for particular leadership posts. Marshall biographer Forrest Pogue wrote, “. . . he was preparing an army for war and felt that the selection of those who could lead in battle was a duty he owed the state.”

    To ensure impartiality in the process of eliminating unfit senior officers from consideration for higher-level and combat commands, Marshall appointed six retired officers, headed by his predecessor, General Malin Craig. Marshall’s plucking board was “empowered to remove from line promotion any officer for reasons deemed good and sufficient.” Those removed were given one year to retire. As Marshall told the board, “Critical times are upon us.”

    We’re in the same boat today. Except that today’s threats come not only from overseas: since the Obama administration, our once-professional military has been politicized, thanks to neo-Marxist ideology, personal enmity, or misguided judgment.

    As the above warnings from knowledgeable Pentagon observers indicate, the second Trump administration will need to conduct a thorough house-cleaning of the military officer corps, many of whom wear stars. This is where Brig. Gen. Terry Schwalier comes in. For the Air Force, arguably there are few (if any) retired senior officers as well-suited to join, or lead, a plucking board.

    As one lifelong leading aerospace historian and scholar writes:

    You want people who can think beyond their service, who don’t have a grudge and “score-settling” attitude . . . who are in their late 60s and 70s to give them detachment, who are recognized stand-outs, and preferably 3 or 4-star so they have “big picture” experience. Finally, and most importantly, all should be combat veterans AND combat commanders.

    He adds: Schwalier “meets the criteria.” Should the President decide on that course of action and bring Schwalier back on active duty, promotion to 3-stars is most appropriate.

    As in 1940, the United States faces rogue actors abroad, this time led by China and several lesser would-be aggressors. As countless military historians and others observe, leadership remains the key to authentic deterrence based on strength, and, should deterrence fail, to military success. Having decided to prioritize wasteful, degrading, and morale-killing pursuits such as diversity-equity, searching for imagined extremists in the ranks, and identity politics instead of merit-based combat readiness and unit cohesion, the current Air Force and Pentagon senior leadership must be vetted, corrected, or sent into retirement following a professional, impartial, timely evaluation. The clock is ticking before a real fight reveals very quickly that every DEI program and billet was terribly misguided and a waste of money that was needed for combat readiness.

    To borrow the term of Marshall’s day, the senior officers complicit in such priorities and activities, are unfit. Whether it’s by a Schwalier-led plucking board or otherwise, they need to go.

    Forrest L. Marion is a retired Department of the Air Force military historian. His most recent work is Standing Up Space Force: The Road to the Nation’s Sixth Armed Service (Naval Institute Press, 2023).

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 11/19/2024 – 20:05

  • Biden Rushes $275M More In Weapons To Ukraine Before Trump Enters Office
    Biden Rushes $275M More In Weapons To Ukraine Before Trump Enters Office

    There are just two months before President-elect Donald Trump takes office, and Ukraine hawks are feeling the pressure. For them, apparently it’s time to flood Zelensky’s coffers with as much money as possible ahead of the possibility that Trump may cut off the tap, after having on the campaign trail called Zelensky “the greatest salesman on earth”.

    “The Pentagon will send Ukraine at least $275 million in new weapons, US officials said Tuesday, as the Biden administration rushes to do as much as it can to help Kyiv fight back against Russia in the remaining two months before President-elect Donald Trump takes office,” The Associated Press reports Tuesday afternoon.

    Via Shutterstock.com

    And alarmingly, the same report observes that “In rapid succession this week, President Joe Biden gave Ukraine the authority to fire longer-range missiles deeper into Russia and then Russian President Vladimir Putin formally lowered the threshold for using nuclear weapons.”

    Contents or details of the new aid package have yet been made public, but there could be more missiles and equipment supporting the Army Tactical Missile System (ATACMS), which was used by the Ukrainians Tuesday against Russian territory, marking a new escalation.

    The geopolitical analysis blog Moon of Alabama has zeroed in on why US authorization for ATACMS attacks on Russian soil is such a big deal:

    We do not know yet if the new authorized use for ATACMS munition on targets within Russia is only relevant for the cluster ammunition missile type or for high explosive ATACMS missiles with a reach of 300 kilometer.

    However, the Russian President Vladimir Putin has correctly pointed out that ANY use of ATACMS requires the involvement of NATO (U.S/UK) assets for acquiring the targeting data and for planning and programming the missile’s mission.

    Any use of ATACMS onto Russian proper is thus an act of war by NATO against the Russian Federation. The Russian response to such will be appropriate but may well surface in a theater far from Ukraine.

    Indeed President Putin and Kremlin officials have echoed precisely this point of view of late, which is also why Putin signed into effect a new expansion of Russia’s nuclear doctrine.

    According to the newly expanded doctrine, in the event Western powers assist another nation in a major attack on Russian soil, those same Western powers will also be held responsible. This can trigger Russian nuclear launch. But so far Russian officials have made it clear that they do not anticipate nuclear war.

    Clearly the Kremlin is awaiting patiently the return of Donald Trump to the White House, hoping this will stop NATO’s steady escalation of involvement in the war on Ukraine’s behalf.

    Meanwhile, with all that money for Ukraine floating around, and constant transfers of arms, this exchange is important to recall…

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 11/19/2024 – 19:40

  • Minnesota Election Judge Faces Felony Charges For Allowing Unregistered People To Vote
    Minnesota Election Judge Faces Felony Charges For Allowing Unregistered People To Vote

    Authored by Eric Lendrum via American Greatness,

    An election judge in Minnesota is now facing serious criminal charges after he allowed multiple unregistered residents to cast votes anyway in the recent election.

    As reported by Breitbart, Judge Timothy Michael Scouton was responsible for overseeing the election process in Badoura Township, a small town with a population of roughly 100 people.

    Hubbard County Auditor Kay Rave filed a complaint after she determined that she could not find completed registration forms among the ballots she received from Scouton’s jurisdiction.

    This complaint led to an investigation by the Hubbard County Sheriff’s Office.

    Eventually, another judge who worked with Scouton on election night came forward and told police that Scouton explicitly ordered voters to not fill out the Minnesota Voter Registration Application.

    A third judge said that Scouton simply told new voters to sign the back of a book rather than fill out any official forms.

    At least 11 people voted illegally as a result of Scouton’s actions.

    He was arrested last week and faces two felony charges: One count of accepting the vote of an unregistered vote, and one count of neglect of duty by an election official.

    In a statement following the arrest, the Minnesota Secretary of State’s office issued a statement.

    “These allegations are extremely serious and must be fully and thoroughly investigated,” the statement read.

    “Election judges take an oath to administer elections in accordance with the law, a deliberate failure to do so is unlawful and a betrayal of the public trust.”

    “Minnesota’s elections rely on the dedication and public service of 30,000 people and they are required to conduct their work fairly, impartially, and within the letter of the law,” the statement added.

    “The Hubbard County Auditor took prompt and correct action in notifying local authorities of the uncovered discrepancies so they could investigate.”

    Scouton had finished his basic election judge training in July of this year.

    Adding to the complications of the case, it was revealed that Scouton’s son worked as an election judge on Election Night as well, and was responsible for registering applications.

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 11/19/2024 – 19:15

  • National Average Fuel Prices Nearing Three Year Low
    National Average Fuel Prices Nearing Three Year Low

    No sooner did President Trump win the election in a landslide than national average gasoline prices are set to fall below the $3 per gallon mark heading into the holiday season in the U.S.

    In fact, national average fuel prices have dropped to their lowest since January, nearing 2021 levels, with further declines likely as West Texas Intermediate crude hovers near its lowest since September, according to Yahoo Finance/Bloomberg.

    The Yahoo Finance/Bloomberg article states that AAA predicts 71.7 million people will travel by car for Thanksgiving, the highest since before the pandemic. Gas prices, averaging $3.08 last week, could drop below $3 nationally, with drivers in some states east of the Rockies paying as little as $2.25 to $2.50 per gallon.

    Patrick DeHaan, head of petroleum analysis at fuel tracker GasBuddy, told Yahoo/Bloomberg: “Things at the pump are starting to feel normal for most Americans.”

    He added: “In some parts of the deep South, where gasoline taxes are low, we’re seeing gas prices that would be more equivalent of the nostalgia everyone has for the good times.”

    “Refineries are struggling under weak crack spreads already, meaning that gasoline demand is anemic, and they’re having a hard time finding a home for all the gasoline they’re producing,” DeHaan concluded. 

    Meanwhile Yahoo/Bloomberg notes gasoline demand rebounded above last year’s levels, with nationwide inventories dropping and U.S. refiners producing record amounts to counter a decline in imports. However, the brief Thanksgiving travel surge is unlikely to significantly boost refiners’ margins. 

    Traffic congestion, unlike gas prices, will soar, with cities like Boston, New York, and Los Angeles experiencing more than double their usual traffic, according to INRIX.

    And international travel is booming, with flight bookings up 23% and cruise bookings rising 20% compared to last year. Air travelers are also benefiting from lower costs, with international flight prices down 5%, according to AAA.

    While the decline hasn’t been attributable to President Trump’s re-election just yet, Zero Hedge contributor Quoth the Raven predicted in a note on Monday morning column that Trump in office likely means less geopolitical volatility, and eventually, a continued tailwind for lower gas prices. 

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 11/19/2024 – 18:50

  • A Revolutionary Time
    A Revolutionary Time

    Authored by Christopher Roach via American Greatness,

    Though it has only been two weeks, it feels like a long time since Trump won the election, not least because of his rapid-fire release of cabinet nominations. The cabinet is important and demonstrates presidential priorities, as well as his judgment.

    Trump’s cabinet so far matches the themes he expressed during the campaign. He is prioritizing immigration, dismantling the Deep State, and uprooting the “Diversity, Equity, and Inclusion (DEI)” racket. There is also a “national unity” aspect to his picks because of the inclusion of prominent former Democrat supporters like RFK Jr. and Tulsi Gabbard.

    So far, things are also running noticeably smoother than they did in 2016. There was a lot of preliminary planning and organization, and it shows.

    The Outsider Cabinet

    The biggest sign of significant change is the presence of outsiders. His first cabinet included many Bush-administration retreads, military men whom Trump overestimated, and business associates who had no apparent convictions. There was a lot of disloyalty, which magnified the endemic disloyalty of career civil servants.

    Looking over Trump’s picks to date, Pete Hegseth seems tasked with prosecuting Trump’s war on “wokeism” within the military, but I am concerned about his lack of experience in managing large organizations. Affirmative action is a major problem in the military, but so too is the bloated procurement system. It needs to be fixed.

    Hegseth seems to be a pure gut pick: Trump thought he sounded sharp on Fox News and was impressed with his military record, so now he wants to put him in charge. I hope he’ll rise to the occasion.

    Matt Gaetz at the DOJ and Gabbard as the Director of National Intelligence head are there to wage war on the Deep State. Both have been personally affected. Gabbard will be good, as she’s obviously bright, has military experience, good foreign policy instincts, and is skeptical of the incumbent organizations.

    As an intelligent critic of our interventionist foreign policy, the lying media naturally defames her as a Russian agent. But, after the false Russian collusion allegations against Trump, no one is really listening to this kind of nonsense anymore.

    Gaetz has been a hardcore Trump supporter from the beginning, and he will be a major change agent if he can make it through the nomination process. Many at the DOJ are saying they’ll resign if he is appointed; this kind of internal “self-deportation” is a feature and not a bug of Trump’s election. It means Trump gets to hire more people, deal with fewer fifth columnists, and make more of a mark on these run-amok federal agencies.

    RFK Jr. at Health and Human Services is the counterweight to the regulatory capture of the FDA and totalitarian instincts of the public health establishment. RFK Jr. has some peculiar and out-of-mainstream ideas. Alternative medicine is, in fact, full of false and dangerous fads, whether it is colloidal silver or using radio waves to diminish autism.

    But these ideas are not much crazier than the mandatory masking, social distance rules, and experimental vaccine mandates during COVID. Most important, he appears to respect patient autonomy and recognizes the primary root of health lies not in medicine, but in a healthier lifestyle.

    Even though South Dakota Governor Kristi Noem has been nominated to lead the Department of Homeland Security, long-time advisor Steven Miller and proposed immigration Tsar, Tom Homan, are the real capos for the deportation agenda. This seems to be a high priority for the administration.

    These are tough, smart, and clear-eyed men who understand the issues well. They inspire confidence.

    A Rejection of Managerialism

    Each of these nominees is a living refutation of the dominant practices of managerial credentialism. For most of Washington, D.C., a very narrow sense of who is qualified for senior roles ends up doing a lot of work to affect substantive outcomes. This gatekeeping practice looks to credentials and conformity as keys to the realm. Who can forget chubby Alexander Vindman and his praise of the sacred “interagency process?”

    Washington’s credentialism is more than a matter of having elite degrees. Critics have mocked Hegseth, even though he is a Princeton and Harvard graduate, reached the rank of major in the National Guard, and is a double Bronze Star winner and combat veteran. But he didn’t follow the usual path and is an unapologetic right-winger, so he is suspect.

    Credentialism means one works through the ranks in the same way as everyone currently in authority so that the organization is always replicating itself. An aspirant must be part of the “blob,” wait his turn, learn the acceptable ways to think and talk, and quickly adopt new fads, such as listing pronouns in a LinkedIn bio.

    This process yields conformist mediocrities and moral cowards. This includes everyone from the four-star generals who boldly retconned the disastrous withdrawal from Afghanistan into a success to the current heads of the State Department, CIA, FBI, and DOD. It would be very damaging to this system if outsiders figured out the jobs quickly and were able to achieve better results.

    Above all, managerialism is an ideology that empowers credentialed technocrats. It has a strong aversion to anything natural, organic, or unregulated. This is at least one of the roots of the recent obsession with misinformation and disinformation. A raucous, sometimes-wrong, and completely unregulated “marketplace of ideas” is simply too threatening to the managerial class.

    Such a freewheeling system risks exposing official lies, such as the outsider-led discovery that COVID was almost certainly a lab leak, which was covered up by lifelong bureaucrats like Anthony Fauci.

    New Standards

    If the legacy ruling class treated Trump’s first term as an aberration, they seem to understand that 2024 is different. While they seethe, they must also admit that the American people have rejected the left’s extreme social agenda. In response, some good election post-mortems have been written, and it looks like the more extreme manifestations of wokeism are already in retreat from corporate America and the universities.

    Under Biden, the Democrats tried to mimic the right’s patriotism with their J6 narrative and defamatory lies about Russian collusion, but their love of country has always been ideological and conditional. This performative patriotism cannot be reconciled with their sustained criticism of America as “systemically racist.” This is why the mask slips so often, and they say things like Trump supporters are “garbage.”

    The old system is exemplified by Pete Buttigieg and Kamala Harris: power-hungry people with only modest talents who worked their way up the ranks but proved incapable of improving anything of importance when given responsibility. They are a reminder that real talent doesn’t always climb through the ranks; it often skips over them or ignores them, sometimes creating whole new organizations.

    Under Trump, instead of the “organization kid,” bold and revolutionary outsiders like Elon Musk are providing an alternate model for executive leadership.

    Trump was supposed to hire a bunch of outsiders during his first term, and he even created a website to gather resumes from ordinary Americans out in flyover country. But the database and its thousands of resumes were lost, likely sabotaged. He ended up hiring insiders and opportunists provided to him by the RNC.

    So far, it appears he has learned from this mistake.

    Beauty, Standards, and Excellence

    The Democratic Party is lately about ugliness and weirdness. It celebrates the deviant and normalizes it. This makes sense, as beauty, standards, and excellence are all related.

    Trump’s team is healthy and attractive. Trump picked those whom he thinks are best for the job, often with diverse views and unorthodox paths to success. So far there is none of the “tokenism” that usually surrounds both Democratic and Republican administrations. He seems indifferent about whether his team “looks like America,” but—like his winning coalition—it will be more representative of the country as a whole than the multi-hued, ideological clones of the Biden administration.

    Combined with Trump’s majority, the bold cabinet picks signal a real “vibe shift.” The moment has a revolutionary feel, much more than I expected. It is analogous to the French or, more recently, Reagan revolutions, where styles rapidly changed, along with policies and elites. Short hair and business suits were back in style during the 1980s, after a slacker, self-indulgent decade following the disorders of the 1960s.

    If Trump’s support comes from those who are resentful of being ruled over by their inferiors, the left’s core consists of those who are absolutely loyal to this system that artificially elevates them to positions of power and prestige. They are loyal because they know, deep down, in any fair competition, they would lose. This is what is meant by the useful concept of “bioleninism.”

    Thus, the Trump revolution is not merely a political one but a cultural and aesthetic one. Things are changing rapidly because the left has lost confidence. They can no longer claim to represent the majority or console themselves that the arc of history is bending toward their eventual triumph.

    Long on nostalgia, the Make America Great Again concept is also forward-looking. This is because the greatness of America resides in its optimism, creativity, embrace of technological progress, and because the country has always welcomed and rewarded people of talent, regardless of their pedigree or background.

    Even before he has taken the oath for a second time, Trump is exemplifying the MAGA spirit with his extraordinary cabinet of outsiders.

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 11/19/2024 – 18:25

  • Gallup: Public Support For Gun-Bans Craters
    Gallup: Public Support For Gun-Bans Craters

    According to Gallup’s latest polling, support for a handgun ban has fallen to just 20 percent and support for an “assault weapons” ban has cratered to just 52 percent.

    Gun bans were a constant call from both President Joe Biden and Vice President Kamala Harris over the last four years.

    President Biden often combined the call with dubious factual, legal, and historical arguments.

    Jonathan Turley previously wrote about the failure of politicians to acknowledge the limits posed by the Second Amendment and controlling case law. While there are good-faith objections to how the Second Amendment has been interpreted, the current case law makes such bans very difficult to defend.

    In 2008, the Supreme Court handed down a landmark ruling in District of Columbia v. Heller, recognizing the Second Amendment as encompassing an individual right to bear arms.

    Yet, the 2024 campaign showed a belated recognition that the Administration has failed to galvanize public opinion in support of gun limits and bans.

    Harris came under fire during the campaign when she suddenly seemed to embrace one of the very guns that she previously vilified as it became clear that she was too far left from much of the country.

    Years ago, Turley wrote that the rise in gun ownership in the United States, including among minority gun owners, was strikingly out of sync with the Democratic talking point.

    In 2019, support for an assault weapons ban stood at 61%. It is now barely at a majority.

    The drop in support for a handgun ban is notable in that only 33 percent of Democrats support such a ban.

    The rise in gun ownership and the drop in polling raise another issue where Democratic candidates seem to be speaking to an increasingly empty room. The gun ownership rates are a problem for the party because most political issues do not involve a large personal investment by citizens. When someone becomes a gun owner, they spend hundreds of dollars on the weapon, ammunition, and other costs. The ban campaigns become more of a personal and financial issue for them.

    Harris’s attempt to appeal to gun owners fell flat after years of calling for limits and bans.

    The question is whether the party is ready to pivot on this and other issues — and whether it can given its political base.

    That 33 percent is the core voting block in primaries even as the rest of the country moves toward the center of the political spectrum.

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 11/19/2024 – 18:00

  • Kim Jong Un Calls for 'Limitless' Nuclear Build-Up In Response To 'Asia NATO'
    Kim Jong Un Calls for ‘Limitless’ Nuclear Build-Up In Response To ‘Asia NATO’

    Authored by Kyle Anzalone via The Libertarian Institute,

    North Korean leader Kim Jong Un delivered a fiery speech where he stressed the importance of accelerating the country’s nuclear weapons program in response to Western threats.  

    In the address to the North Korean Army issued days ago, Kim said, “The United States has already converted its alliance with the [South Korea] into a nuclear-based one and created an ‘Asian NATO’ in haste by cementing its military ties with Japan and South Korea.”

    The North Korean leader stressed that US nuclear deployments to the region, joint war games with South Korea and Japan, and building military blocs aimed at Pyongyang are all intolerable to North Korea. 

    Kim stressed the increasing threat from Washington justified accelerating Pyongyang’s nuclear program. “Long ago, the line of building up our nuclear forces became an irreversible policy, so what remains to be done now is for these forces to get more fully ready for action so that they can carry out the mission of deterring war and the second mission at any moment.”

    He continued, “We will build up our nation’s self-defense forces, the pivot of which is its nuclear capability, limitlessly and endlessly without satisfaction.”

    In addition to discussing North Korea’s military tensions with the US, Kim also discussed Pyongyang’s position in what he has previously described as a “new Cold War.”

    “As the US and other Western countries are using Ukraine as a shock force in the war against Russia, we should view it as a maneuver to enrich their real-war experience and expand the scope of military intervention all over the world.”

    He added, “By sustaining their military assistance to Ukraine and Israel…This aggravates the international security situation, stoking fears of a third world war.”

    The relationship between Washington and Pyongyang has soured during the Joe Biden administration. At the end of Donald Trump’s first term, North Korea and the US were engaged in some diplomacy, and Pyongyang was largely respecting its self-imposed missile test moratorium. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    However, Biden refused to engage with Kim while increasing the presence of the American military in South Korea. Combined with the administration’s efforts to bring South Korea and Japan into a military pact, Pyongyang views the Biden policy as highly aggressive. 

    Kim responded by ramping up the missile tests, conducting war games near the DMZ, and strengthening Pyongyang’s ties with Moscow. 

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 11/19/2024 – 17:40

  • Netanyahu Says Israel Offering $1.3 Million Reward For Each Hostage Freed
    Netanyahu Says Israel Offering $1.3 Million Reward For Each Hostage Freed

    On Tuesday Israeli Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu made a rare surprise visit to the Gaza Strip, specifically to the area of the Netzarim Corridor, which runs through the center of the strip.

    He was there to deliver a message, showing that Hamas does not and will not rule Gaza. He also issued a warning to those terrorists that are holding Israelis hostage, vowing that they’ll pay a heavy price.

    He proclaimed that Israel Defense Forces troops in Gaza have “achieved excellent results toward our important goal — that Hamas will not rule in Gaza. We are destroying its military capabilities in a very impressive manner, and we are moving on to its ruling capabilities… Hamas will not be in Gaza.”

    TOI/GPO: Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu visits the Netzarim Corridor in the central Gaza Strip on Tuesday.

    Israeli authorities have in recent months said that over 60 living hostages remain somewhere in Gaza, of the about 100 who were never returned.

    Of these, Netanyahu said “we are not letting up” and that Israel “will continue to do so until we reach everyone — both the living and the dead.” He also at one point addressed “those who are holding our hostages,” saying that “whoever dares to harm our hostages — will bear the responsibility. We will pursue you and we will get you.”

    He offered a reward of NIS 5 million (or just over $1.3 million) to anyone in Gaza who turns an Israeli captive over the Israel. It’s not the first time a monetary reward has been offered, but the money has been greatly increased with this announcement.

    “I gave an order to increase the reward for those who bring information about the hostage – NIS 5 million for each hostage instead of NIS 1 million and safe passage for the informant and his family,” Netanyahu said.

    The Jerusalem Post writes that “In his public comments, he stressed that Israel is willing to do small deals, by which captors would be given monetary rewards and free passage out of Gaza in exchange for releasing the hostages in their custody.”

    The hope is that which such a large sum, families of Hamas members tasked with hosting and guarding hostages might come forward and free the hostages. Or else, individual Palestinians who might know where hostages are being kept might step forward with the information. It could also entice Hamas members to turn on their leadership.

    Defense Minister Israel Katz, IDF chief Lt. Gen. Herzi Halevi and Shin Bet head Ronen Bar, accompanied him during the brief tour of the central Gaza area.

    “The choice is in your hands, but the result will be the same. We will bring everyone home,” Netanyahu said. During a Monday debate in the Knesset, he addressed the outrage by victims’ families over his handling of the hostage crisis. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    “Demonstrations by hostage families and civilian protesters inside and outside the Knesset during the debate underscored the turbulence surrounding the several dozen Israelis believed to still be alive in Gaza,” one report observed. “Multiple individuals were escorted out of the meeting due to outbursts and disruption.”

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 11/19/2024 – 17:20

  • SpaceX Launches Starship Into Orbit, Lands Successfully But Scraps Plan For "Chopsticks" Booster Catch
    SpaceX Launches Starship Into Orbit, Lands Successfully But Scraps Plan For “Chopsticks” Booster Catch

    Update: Disappointing those who had hoped to see the “chopsticks” catch in action for the second time in a month, the Super Heavy booster instead splashed down in the ocean after it was deemed unsafe to attempt the remarkable midair catch today.

    To all those who bought the “No” contract on Polymarket for the chopsticks catch, congratulations on your 4x return.

    Otherwise, everything was successful, and SpaceX’s gargantuan Starship rocket blasted off from South Texas in a key test attended by President-elect Donald Trump.

    SpaceX’s launch system, comprised of its Super Heavy booster and Starship upper spacecraft, cleared the tower shortly after 4 p.m. local time on Tuesday, the start of a roughly hour-long planned mission to space and partially around the world. After Super Heavy landed in the Gulf of Mexico, Starship continued its voyage through space. At one point, it successfully reignited one of its Raptor engines — the first time SpaceX was able to do so during these flight tests. Starship will need to reignite its engines in order to control its descent to Earth and maneuver through space.

    Starship then circled most of the globe before plunging through the atmosphere about 45 minutes into the mission, its body engulfed in the reddish orange glow of plasma as its upgraded heat shield endured intense temperatures while hurtling back to Earth.

    Starship survived the reentry, moving its exterior flaps to help guide its descent, though some showed signs of burn and slight damage. Then, as Starship fell through clouds, it flipped itself and reignited its engines to turn upright and softly splash into the Indian Ocean shortly after 6 p.m. New York time in what Elon Musk said was a “successful ocean landing.”

     

    * * *

    Earlier

    The sixth flight test of SpaceX’s Starship megarocket is targeted to launch during a 30-minute window that opens at 5 PM EST (2100 GMT; 4 PM local Texas time). 

    The next Starship test flight aims to push the envelope of Starship and booster capabilities and prepare the entire launch system for reuse. 

    “Objectives include the booster once again returning to the launch site for catch, reigniting a ship Raptor engine while in space, and testing a suite of heatshield experiments and maneuvering changes for ship reentry and descent over the Indian Ocean,” SpaceX’s website wrote. 

    Elon Musk outlined Starship Flight 6’s objectives on X:

    Musk pointed out, “Current Starship is more than twice as powerful as the Saturn V Moon rocket. Starship V3, which hopefully flies in about a year, will be 3X more powerful.”

    Even before the two-stage megarocket — featuring the Starship spacecraft stacked atop the Super Heavy booster — launches late afternoon, prediction market platform Polymarket has allowed users to wager on whether the Mechazilla arms (or chopsticks) at the Starbase launchpad near Brownsville, Texas, will successfully catch the Starship as it returns to Earth.

    Last month’s Starship Flight 5 marked a historic success.

    The Polymarket bet is titled “Will the chopsticks catch SpaceX’s Super Heavy?” With about seven hours left before launch, users overwhelmingly bet confidently (about 80%) that chopsticks will successfully catch Starship. About $286k have traded on the contract so far. 

    Polymarket has made betting on binary events in the news cycle possible. 

    Watch the sixth Starship flight test:

    Meanwhile, Gwynne Shotwell, president of SpaceX, told investors last Friday that the company plans hundreds of Starship rocket launches during President Trump’s second term.

    There is a report from Politico that President-elect Trump plans to watch the Starship launch with Musk in Texas.

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 11/19/2024 – 17:10

  • Guess What's Coming To DC?
    Guess What’s Coming To DC?

    Authored by El Gato Malo via The Brownstone Institute,

    DC is about to experience something entirely new, something absolutely unprecedented in its experience. They think the barbarians are coming. And perhaps they are. But not the kinds of barbarians they suspect. Not this time.

    The simple fact is that there exists a very small group of incredibly high-function, insanely productive people. It’s the dirty secret of the world. This tiny tribe conceives, invents, and builds basically everything novel. All of it. They are not normal people. They are the 0.1%.

    Unless you have worked with them, around them, or been a part of what they do, you simply lack a reference for what they are like. It’s essentially inconceivable how much such people can get done when they set their minds to it, how many rules they will disprove, break, or ignore, and how many paradigms they will upend.

    DC has never seen a mob of high-function autist builders and fin warriors coalesce before. They have no fricking idea what’s coming. They cannot possibly know. But I do.

    I know A LOT of these people. This is what most of my friends are like. They learn for a living. They pull systems apart, see them as functional wholes, and work 16-hour days reading arcane 1,000-page descriptions until they understand. Then they pull the underwear of whoever thought they understood this material up over their heads in an atomic wedgie and take over a space. 

    It’s just what you do if you’re a person like that. It’s compulsion. It’s like breathing. These are 3 and 4 and 5 standard deviation people who have focus and talent in quantities they do not even have maps of in Washington. I keep hearing about people I know a little getting tapped for transition teams and I’m like “Ooooooh, that guy can read 100 CDS prospectuses in a weekend and remember it all,” or “Yeah, that guy thinks in algorithms and sleeps once a month. He could code when he was 6.”

    “Only an insider can tackle the swamp” is dead wrong. It takes someone radically different to make a radical difference. And I am giddy realizing that they are coming. It does not matter that they do not know the terrain yet. They will. They have 3 months to learn. That’s more than enough.

    Watch. Moving into novel systems or spaces and becoming better at it than the people currently there is what these people do. It’s ALL they do. It’s who and what they are.

    It does not matter if it’s the Department of Education, the Department of Energy, the DMV, or NASA. Same game, same result. every time.

    The “insiders” are so screwed. DC has no one like this. They have never even met people like this because people like this avoid government like it is a bag of plague rats. Because it is.

    But now they are interested and looking to play exterminator because the state strayed too far into our world and so now we are coming for theirs.

    And wait until you see what the world’s best builders can tear down. It’s going to be glorious.

    These are the same people who in 10 weeks using just sparse public data and Twitter pulled the pants down on the whole edifice of public health and revealed them as fakes, phonies, and charlatans. Then they rewrote the discipline. It will never be the same. Most of us had never even looked at epidemiology before. In a few months the “amateurs” eclipsed the experts and left them for dead.

    We did this as outsiders and without any maps and with the very opposite of help.

    Imagine what this gang can do with the keys to the kingdom.

    It’s going to be nothing but baffled astonishment from the Beltway boffins.

    “How in hell have they read and understood everything!?! They are not experts here!” will decry the people who need to pass bills to find out what’s in them. “How the hell are they producing so much output, so much impact? How did they know just where to push?”

    They have never seen what 10 of these guys and three pots of coffee can achieve. I have. Mountains get relocated.

    The really truly high-functioning have not come to meet the regulatasaurus before. They were busy and had better things to do.

    Not anymore. “Dismantle Leviathan” is now a step in everyone’s business plan. Better, it’s public service as it was supposed to be: not a vocation, not a career. Instead, it is a task, a dirty task that needs doing so you go and do it and then you go home once it’s done.

    You fricking clowns just cornered Elon and made this election and administration an existential issue for him and his empire. And an awful lot of us feel the same way. You cornered all of us. Go along to get along ended because you guys crossed the line. Welcome to reflexivity.

    The pushback is going to be something for the ages.

    DC is going to feel like it’s being invaded by an entire bestiary of mythical monsters with magical powers who can see through walls and huck immovable objects over the horizon. They will come from every side at once. They will replace thousands of federal employees right from the start. 

    You’ll be fighting against the outside and the inside. They’re going to transfer and move those permanent staters they cannot fire. Have fun in Topeka or Guam. They’re lovely this time of year.

    They are not going to play nice or play fair. They are going to get things done. And they are going to clown you while doing it, clown you like “name their agency after a crypto shitcoin that muskrat ran “to the moon” just because they think it’s funny.”

    And it will be.

    This is a new kind of team, a team that comes from an ethos of “Move fast and break things” and “Ask forgiveness, not permission.” They are not the GOP procedure drones of yesteryear, These are people who just walk in and do stuff and fuck your process. They have made careers of it.

    The Dems have long ago figured out the “Just go do it and let the chips fall where they may” model (basically since Obamacare) but they do it stupidly and on topics where the results will be bad. 

    This will be like Uber. By the time the regulators woke up and tried to move against it, people loved it too much to let them take it away. There were protests in front of every DMV in Commiefornia.

    And so the world progressed. And instead of doing it donkey-style to contravene the Constitution, team effective autists will be doing it to uphold it. Look on my plans ye mighty and wet your pants. This is teed up in a whole new way on a whole new field.

    They will have the swamp in knots. DC power is entrenched because it is secret and controls access and channels and promotion and most especially access to media and publicity. That game is over.

    Vivek is a seriously effective guy with finance and biotech and founder chops. He speaks well and makes things. And like him or loathe him, Elon is a change (and a chaos) agent. He takes crazy, audacious swings and builds stuff. He’s a rogue and a pirate. It’s why he’s good at what he does. He asks simple questions like “What did you accomplish this week?” that you cannot hide from. But his real superpower is this: there is no human on earth today who can bring the circus like Elon can bring the circus. No one.

    The man is a one-man always traveling 11-ring Barnum and Bailey show. And what an astonishing show this is going to be.

    Name and shame are incredibly powerful. This will be an unending media event, a drip feed of “Can you believe they spent millions making and studying transgender monkeys?” (this was a real grant BTW) 

    It will be relentless, revelatory, and invite the whole of the public to the party. There will be no escape, no off switch, no media gatekeeping: this is direct-to-consumer messaging. And hey, let’s get the Epstein list out in the open while we’re at it. Imagine how much DC cycle time THAT would eat, time in which you can get even more stuff done.

    Sunlight is a powerful disinfectant. 

    Let’s look at everything with new eyes. Let’s disrupt.

    Get the establishment on tilt from day one and never stop pushing. Not from any side, not for a moment. Shut things down. Gut agencies like trout. Invite them to “cry some more” if they don’t like it.

    Flood the box so hard that the news cycle cannot even cover it. This technocracy is not used to having to defend ground from this sort of attack. They are used to being the ones making the rules. They will not have any idea what to do.

    There are these magical times in human history when the truly smart and talented and effective come together and change everything. American independence. The Manhattan Project. Xerox PARC. Apollo. Silicon Valley in the 80’s and 90’s.

    Some vast project captures the imagination and worlds are moved.

    I think it’s a bit early to just come out and say “This is that” but I’m here to tell you that the cabinet secretaries and the appointments to run agencies are only a part of the show and maybe not the important part.

    The thousands coming with them are NOT more drones from interchangeable bureaucrat collective 2177.

    These are the finance and pharma and tech bros. Not the fake ones who wear fleece vests and work in biz dev. The meat eaters. Wave upon wave upon wave of them in their hyper-motivated myriads.

    And this is a new-new thing.

    In the end, it’s just a gross mismatch for you, DC.

    You’re smart enough to be a Washington wonk and run rings around drunk Congresscritters as they insider trade. Neat. What’s coming is smart enough to find edge trading against the Goldman arb desk and produce drugs and catch rockets.

    We live where you need results, not a sinecure. And we are well and truly pissed. You people are not even bringing a knife to a gunfight. You’re bringing a dinosaur to a meteor strike.

    Say goodbye to the Potomac Country Club. Things are about to change. And pardon me if I am over-effusive and over-optimistic, but if this is even 20% of what it looks like, hot damn this is gonna be fun.

    Republished from the author’s Substack 

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 11/19/2024 – 17:00

  • The Cure For What Ails Us: Market Crash And Mass Defaults
    The Cure For What Ails Us: Market Crash And Mass Defaults

    Authored by Charles Hugh Smith via OfTwoMinds blog,

    The system has reached extremes that can no longer be rebalanced by policy tweaks, borrowing another couple trillion dollars or inflating asset bubbles.

    There are many possible answers to the question “what ails us?” but they all boil down to one reality: the socio-political-economic system has slowly transmogrified into one that benefits the few at the expense of the many by its very structure. There are many moving parts in this transmogrification, hence the multiplicity of answers to “what ails us?”

    The net result is extreme asymmetry in wealth and income, a reality I’ve often explored, most recently in The Seeds of Social Revolution: Extreme Wealth Inequality. As documented in the data-rich history The Great Leveler: Violence and the History of Inequality from the Stone Age to the Twenty-First Century, extreme asymmetries of wealth / income get rebalanced one way or the other, either by policy changes or social upheaval.

    Correspondent John recently proposed a third rebalancing mechanism: a crash of The Everything Bubble markets and a mass default by the bottom 90% that erases a major chunk of debt, which as often noted here, is somebody else’s asset: default on the debt and the asset is wiped out.

    Here are John’s comments on this third rebalancing mechanism:

    The wealth divide has been my (very) hot button issue for years, overriding all others. I agree with your two options, but you left out door #3.

    As for policy change, I think that is fanciful thinking. The top 10% (who think everything is wonderful) will never vote for substantial change, as they’ll never vote for anything other than feel-good minor change …with loopholes, of course.

    I think Door #3 will be taken … which the Deep State will have to allow as they see civil unrest coming ever clearer on the horizon if not. What is Door #3? A Crash of assets, which will flatten the divide. In a credit-based economy, it will be easy to let it all fall. Assets fall everywhere … including debt (an asset for top 10%) as the bottom 90% just walk away (as there are no debtor prisons). A crash of assets requires no vote … just The Powers That Be standing back. (Of course, half measures will be taken to show the top 10% we’re DOING SOMETHING … but in reality this only stretches out the collapse).

    Thank you, John, for an insightful description of a third option that rebalances extreme wealth inequality by reducing the assets of the top 10% and the liabilities of the bottom 90%. As John noted, this process is easy in a debt-based economy: just reduce the expansion of debt and the asset bubble pops, the economy craters and debtors default en masse, reducing the liabilities side of the ledger.

    As John so presciently described, The Powers That Be will oversee this reduction while wringing their hands and promoting their ineffective efforts to stem the collapse as “we’re giving it all we got, Captain!”

    The asset bubble and debt load are so enormous, tens of trillions of dollars will need to be shaved off both ledgers to rebalance the system. All bubbles pop under their own weight at some point, and bubbles often deflate in a symmetrical fashion, dropping at the same rate as the bubble inflated. This chart of NASDAQ illustrates how bubble symmetry might play out going forward.

    Since the top 1% own 50% of all stocks, guess who this drop will hurt the most? The top 90% to 99% own close to 40% of the remaining equities, so the top 10% will absorb roughly 90% of the losses as the stock market bubble pops.

    Here is total systemic debt. The federal government debt isn’t going away, short of a complete systemic collapse, and the legal pathway of local governments defaulting on their debts is murky, but there are no obstructions to private-sector defaults of all lender-generated debt: commercial real estate mortgages, housing mortgages, credit cards, auto loans, etc. As for student loans, the old phrase you can’t get blood from a turnip may describe the futility of trying to collect blood (student loan payments) from turnips (debtors without assets or income.)

    We can play the game Japan has played for 35 years, keeping non-performing loans on the books at full (i.e. phantom) value, but look where that artifice got Japan: 35 years of stagnation as everyone knows the “assets” are phantom and so the value can’t be discovered by the market. Since accurate valuation is impossible, trust dissipates and the system rots away from within.

    As a thought experiment, let’s project writing off $50 trillion of debt based on phantom collateral that’s evaporated. That is of course a writedown of assets by $50 trillion, too, which would reduce household assets to around $100 trillion–still substantial, just no longer a bubble.

    The system has reached extremes that can no longer be rebalanced by policy tweaks, borrowing another couple trillion dollars or inflating asset bubbles. What ails us can be rectified by adjusting (ahem) assets (collateral) and debt to rebalance the extremes that are destabilizing the system from within.

    *  *  *

    Become a $3/month patron of my work via patreon.com.

    Subscribe to my Substack for free

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 11/19/2024 – 16:20

  • Bonds, Bitcoin, & Bullion Bid As Markets Mull Moscow, Mullahs, Musk, & Macro
    Bonds, Bitcoin, & Bullion Bid As Markets Mull Moscow, Mullahs, Musk, & Macro

    Geopolitics, macroeconomics, and domestic politics all combined for a wile ride in stocks today…

    Geopolitics was a major headwind overnight as Putin signed a decree allowing Russia to use nuclear weapons in the event of a massive conventional attack on its soil. But, then that reversed as headlines suggested Iran is looking to de-escalate (IRAN AGREES TO STOP PRODUCING NEAR BOMB-GRADE URANIUM: IAEA).

    All of that prompted a roller-coaster in stocks with Nasdaq ending the best (and Small Caps recovering dramatically from overnight weakness). The Dow desperately tried to get green but failed (even with help from WMT)…

    Then Musk sparked some chaos in media stocks as he tweeted: “No advertising for pharma”…

    Source: Bloomberg

    Shorts were squeezed today from the cash open…

    Source: Bloomberg

    Mega-Cap Tech rallied significantly on the day, bouncing off pre-election levels ahead of tomorrow’s NVDA earnings…

    Source: Bloomberg

    VIX was higher on the day with tomorrow’s risk event priced in (though less than typical for an NVDA earnings day)…

    Source: Bloomberg

    US Macro data disappointed – housing starts and permits were ugly – which helped pull bond yields lower (along with chatter about potential ‘safe’ picks for Treasury Secretary)…

    Source: Bloomberg

    Bitcoin continued its charge higher, topping $94,000 – a new record high in USD terms…

    Source: Bloomberg

    …and coming within a few points of an all-time record high against gold…

    Source: Bloomberg

    …even as gold started to rally back from its post-election doldrums too…

    Source: Bloomberg

    Oil prices dipped on the Iran headlines but overall it appears geopolitical uncertainty is adding some premium back into the energy complex…

    Source: Bloomberg

    Finally, US equities are currently pricing a very optimistic growth environment…

    Source: Goldman Sachs

    Goldman’s sector model leads them to recommend overweight positions in Materials, Software & Services, and Utilities. From an investment strategy perspective, they invoke the dictum of Donald Trump to “protect the downside and the upside will take care of itself.”

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 11/19/2024 – 16:00

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Nov 19

Today’s News 19th November 2024

  • Mad At The Election? Blame Obama
    Mad At The Election? Blame Obama

    Authored by Josiah Lippincott via American Greatness,

    Liberals who are in the throes of capitulation and despair after Donald Trump’s crushing electoral and popular vote win can lay blame for their disastrous loss at the feet of one man: Barack Hussein Obama.

    Obama built the Trump wave. His failure to live up to the promises of his populist 2008 run has cursed the Democratic Party, probably for a generation. The Washington DC establishment in just two short months is going to get “scholonged” by an angry and vengeful Trump, ready to rain executive hellfire on the bureaucrats and institutions that have spent the last nine years fighting him tooth and nail.

    All of this could have been prevented. In 2008, Obama swept into power with a crushing electoral college and popular vote majority. He won Iowa, Florida, Ohio, and North Carolina. He even won Indiana. Democrats swept into power in Congress with a 74-seat lead in the House, nearly 59% of seats, and were gifted with a magical 60-seat filibuster-proof supermajority in the Senate.

    This was a generational victory, a sign that voters were fed up with politics as usual and the failures of the GOP and the Washington and Wall Street establishment as such. This victory wasn’t just about electing the first Black president, though that was important: The policies and platform at stake appealed deeply to voters.

    It is worth remembering what exactly those policies were.

    Obama promised to end the war in Iraq, end the Afghanistan war with honor, help the economy by reducing health care costs (prioritizing “Main Street” over Wall Street), and bring about a new era of racial harmony. Moreover, Obama explicitly eschewed radical leftist politics. He explicitly defended traditional marriage. In his DNC nomination speech, he condemned employers who “undercut American wages by hiring illegal workers.”

    Obama ran a campaign on bringing “change” to DC. He made much of his status as a newcomer who lacked the “typical pedigree” of a candidate for the nation’s highest office.

    Put another way, Obama won a decisive victory in 2008 by campaigning as a Washington outsider bent on ending foreign wars, boosting the economy by helping ordinary people, and being a moderate on social issues like abortion and gay marriage. Does this message sound familiar? It should.

    In broad measure, it is the same formula that brought Donald Trump to power in 2016 and has given him, like Obama, unified control over the executive and legislative branches after a crushing electoral and popular vote win.

    Obama’s hubris is the reason the Democratic Party stands here today—powerless in the face of “Orange Hitler.”

    Obama did not close Guantanamo Bay, he ended the Iraq War only to get sucked back in, killed Osama Bin Laden but kept troops in Afghanistan, started wars in Libya and Syria, and, most damningly, inflamed racial tensions when he had a chance to calm them.

    Far from being a moderate on social issues, Obama was the president whose picks for the Supreme Court rammed gay marriage down Americans throats after it had suffered numerous state-level electoral setbacks, including in California of all places in the very election that brought Obama to power!

    Obama’s pledge to reduce health care costs in 2008 did not come with an individual mandate to purchase health insurance. The final bill that snaked its way through Congress and was signed into law did contain such a penalty. Instead of lowering health care costs, Americans watched as their premiums went up.

    Instead of fewer foreign wars, we got more. Instead of declaring victory after the death of the mastermind behind 9/11, we got eight more years of war. On every front, Obama didn’t just fail to follow through on his mandate, he actively worked for the opposite outcome.

    Obama lacked the strength of character and will to follow through on his promises and to deliver the shake-up in Washington that he promised. He was more concerned with hanging out with celebrities and being cool than facing down his own Party’s bosses to deliver on the promises he made to the American people. Nancy Pelosi, 16 years later, still remains one of the most powerful figures in the Party.

    Americans sent a refined, urbane, grassroots college professor to do their bidding in DC. When he failed, they decided to send their message in a language that no one could misunderstand. They sent Trump.

    Trump is everything Obama is not: loud, dominating, and brash. There is none of Obama’s snark in his demeanor. And, unlike Obama, Trump has proven durable and faithful. Unlike Obama, Trump has built on his popular vote total with each successive election.

    Nothing can stop him: not the GOP leadership class (compare Paul Ryan and Nancy Pelosi’s careers), not the bureaucracy, not the media, not even an assassin’s bullet. Trump is the avenging angel of American populist rage. The post-1945 world order—especially after the fall of the Soviet Union—was supposed to deliver peace and prosperity on an untold scale.

    Instead, we’ve gotten more war, more debt, and more of our economy shipped overseas. Americans, even those who are successful, live in a world increasingly pockmarked by obesity, homelessness, crazed radicalism, and a flood of foreigners looking for a hand-out.

    This was not what we were promised! Looking back on the last two decades of war in the Middle East, what can anyone say we won in these places? Peace? Stability? The region is as broken and violent as ever. The 9/11 hijackers all came in legally. No one has ever solved that problem or even acknowledged that it existed.

    Moreover, the wars never end. Trump is the only president in my lifetime not to get us engaged in any new conflicts, but even he wasn’t able to bring the troops home from Afghanistan in his first term. Biden did, but then immediately hauled the nation back into war in Europe.

    We are never allowed to be neutral, never allowed to focus on ourselves, never allowed to rest. Millions of migrants invade our southern border and flood our communities with drugs that kill more than a hundred thousand Americans yearly and not one politician in DC blinks. They care infinitely more about Ukraine’s border than our own. Americans are fed up with this attitude.

    Obama’s failures on race were the most striking feature of his presidency and have done the most lasting damage. Race relations have hit an all-time low. Obama could have put a lot of the turmoil to rest, using his position as the first Black president as a way to shore up confidence in our institutions. He could have brought the Civil Rights movement to an end, insisting that our work now was not to gain equality but to preserve the hard and painful work we’d already accomplished. But no. Instead we got George Floyd and the 2020 Summer of Love, in which a dozen major American cities burned because a career criminal died in police custody from an overdose.

    And every year, some new cause gets added to the pantheon of aggrieved minorities demanding social justice. First, it was gay marriage; now it is transgenderism. God only knows what will come next. Furries? Polycules? Worse? With each new wave of leftist radicalism has come vicious shrieking from activists aimed at ordinary Americans. The latest cause—the post-COVID explosion of transgenderism—has touched ordinary Americans’ lives in a way that even homosexuality did not.

    The LGBT wave has finally hit upon children and teens with its full force. The loss of community and the social upheaval of the COVID period has resulted in a generation of youth particularly susceptible to the promises of transgender identity.

    Speaking of COVID, the American medical establishment worked for two whole years to end normal life, destroy free association, and impose draconian measures on the population.

    Once the COVID paranoia died down, the regime immediately turned to trying to put the opposition leader into prison for made-up crimes. That all-out media and legal blitz ended with two attempted assassination attempts, one that nearly blew the president’s head off on live television.

    The supposedly “apolitical” military, medical, media and legal establishments have shorn themselves of any pretense of neutrality. They have thrown their lot in with the Democratic Party and its most radical wing.

    None of this had to happen.

    Obama had a golden chance in 2008 to lock in Democratic rule for a generation. All he had to do was follow through. He had to keep his word and he needed to stand up to his own party when they sought to drag him back into their moribund consensus. But Obama chose wealth and respectability over doing the right thing.

    He chose to divide the country further instead of rallying it around a new multi-racial coalition dedicated to peace abroad and prosperity at home. Trump has inherited that mantle. Here, in his second term, Trump finally has the full, unquestionable mandate that once rested on Obama’s shoulders.

    If he succeeds, the GOP can expect decades of political and cultural dominance. The Trump era will last far beyond Trump’s actual death. There is reason to hope, as well. Trump’s first term and his years in the wilderness have armed him with a better knowledge of DC and a clearer understanding of the qualities and allies he needs to advance his goals.

    His slate of cabinet picks is hated by the DC chatterati. This bodes well. Clean house. Go to war. Trump has nothing to lose and everything to gain.

    All he needs to do is deliver. He needs to give the voters what he promised them: mass deportations, increased election security, and no new wars. Do those things on Day 1 and the Republicans have 2026 sewn up. Get us out of Ukraine and deliver real economic growth and JD Vance is a lock for 2028. It really is that simple.

    Trump has everything he needs. Now all that remains is to act.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 11/18/2024 – 23:25

  • Xi's "Four Red Lines" For China Set To Clash With Trump's 'America First' Trade Measures
    Xi’s “Four Red Lines” For China Set To Clash With Trump’s ‘America First’ Trade Measures

    President-elect Trump is set to steamroll Chinese leader Xi Jinping’s ‘red lines’ communicated to President Biden this weekend, likely to be on display from day one after he enters the Oval Office for the second time on Jan. 20. This is especially given his campaign promises impose a blanket 60% tariff on Chinese goods, touted as key to a package of “America First” trade measures.

    Xi conveyed that he’s willing and ready to work with the incoming Trump administration, during the meeting with Biden that took place on the sidelines of the Asia-Pacific Economic Cooperation (APEC) summit in Lima, Peru. 

    Xi told Biden: “The United States has recently concluded its elections. China’s goal of a stable, healthy, and sustainable China–U.S. relationship remains unchanged.” But the optics at the Peru summit strongly suggest lame-duck Biden had long already taken a backseat in terms of assertiveness over US-China relations…

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    “China is ready to work with the new U.S. administration to maintain communication, expand cooperation, and manage differences, so as to strive for a steady transition of the China-US relationship for the benefit of the two peoples,” Xi additionally conveyed to Biden. White House national security adviser Jake Sullivan in follow-up emphasized of the “candid” and “constructive” talks–sure to be the last held face to face of the Biden presidency, that Biden “has worked hard to responsibly manage the competition” with China over four years to prevent things from spiraling into conflict.

    The some two-hour weekend meeting included what’s being described as an olive branch from Xi, but more importantly a series of ‘red lines’ if Washington wishes to avoid a “new Cold War”.

    “A new Cold War should not be fought and cannot be won. Containing China is unwise, unacceptable and bound to fail,” Xi told the American president.

    President Xi broadly laid out four red lines as follows:

    “The Taiwan question, democracy and human rights, China’s path and system, and China’s development right are four red lines for China,” Xi was quoted as saying.

    “They must not be challenged. These are the most important guardrails and safety nets for China-US relations.”

    It as especially on the Taiwan question that Xi spoke with firmness, and specifics, at one point mentioning Taiwanese president Lai Ching-te by name (a rarity). He reiterated that Beijing views Taiwan as an integral part of the country and thus that Mr. Lai based on his articulated policies is a “separatist”. Xi further warned that the US “should not get involved in bilateral disputes over the relevant islands” in the South China Sea.

    Xi said of his four red lines and the future of relations with the US, “Words must be trustworthy and actions must be fruitful. A person cannot stand without credibility. China always follows through on its words, but if the US side always says one thing and does another, it is very detrimental to America’s image and damages mutual trust.”

    China’s President Xi Jinping, left, speaks with Peru’s President Dina Boluarte, right, amid other APEC leaders, via AP.

    Again, these are the four red lines, which the Chinese leader urged Washington to avoid crossing, no matter the administration: 

    1) Supporting Taiwan independence.

    2) Interfering in China’s democracy and human rights

    3) Stifling China’s development path, e.g. by sanctions and trade restrictions.

    4) Restricting China’s rights to advancement and development.

    Below are more translated details of Xi’s words, with some commentary by regional watcher and analyst Arnaud Bertrand.

    * * *

    According to the Chinese readout (https://guancha.cn/internation/2024_11_17_755645.shtml…) here’s what he told Biden were the 7 “lessons of the past 4 years that need to be remembered”:

    1) “There must be correct strategic understanding. The ‘Thucydides Trap’ is not historical destiny, a ‘new Cold War’ cannot and should not be fought, containment of China is unwise, undesirable, and will not succeed.”

    2) “Words must be trustworthy and actions must be fruitful. A person cannot stand without credibility. China always follows through on its words, but if the U.S. side always says one thing and does another, it is very detrimental to America’s image and damages mutual trust.”

    3) “Treat each other as equals. In exchanges between two major countries like China and the United States, neither side can reshape the other according to their own wishes, nor can they suppress the other based on so-called ‘position of strength,’ let alone deprive the other of legitimate development rights to maintain their own leading position.”

    4) “Red lines and bottom lines cannot be challenged. As two major countries, China and the United States inevitably have some contradictions and differences, but they cannot harm each other’s core interests, let alone engage in conflict and confrontation. The One China principle and the three China-US joint communiqués are the political foundation of bilateral relations and must be strictly observed. Taiwan issue, democracy and human rights, development path, and development rights are China’s four red lines, which cannot be challenged. [Note: Bold text in the original] These are the most important guardrails and safety nets for China-US relations.”

    5) “There should be more dialogue and cooperation. Under current circumstances, the common interests between China and the United States have not decreased but increased. Whether in areas of economy and trade, agriculture, drug control, law enforcement, public health, or in facing global challenges such as climate change and artificial intelligence, as well as international hotspot issues, China-US cooperation is needed. Both sides should extend the list of cooperation, make the cooperation cake bigger, and achieve win-win cooperation.”

    6) “Respond to people’s expectations. The development of China-US relations should always focus on the wellbeing of both peoples and gather the strength of both peoples. Both sides should build bridges for personnel exchanges and cultural communication, and also remove interference and obstacles, not artificially create a ‘chilling effect.'”

    7) “Demonstrate great power responsibility. China and the United States should always consider the future and destiny of humanity, take responsibility for world peace, provide public goods for the world, and play a positive role in world unity, including engaging in positive interaction, avoiding mutual consumption, and not coercing other countries to take sides.”

    Funnily, all this is summarized in the official US readout (https://china.usembassy-china.org.cn/readout-of-president-joe-bidens-meeting-with-president-xi-jinping-of-the-peoples-republic-of-china-3/…) with this short sentence: “The two leaders reviewed the bilateral relationship over the past four years”. Talk about an understatement  The language compared to the readout of the last Xi-Biden meeting in San Francisco one year ago is noticeably more forthright, especially on the U.S.’s lack of trustworthiness (“if the U.S. side always says one thing and does another…”). Looks like he’s getting very frustrated with U.S. duplicity.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 11/18/2024 – 23:00

  • China Fumes As US, Philippines Sign New Intelligence-Sharing & Defense Deal
    China Fumes As US, Philippines Sign New Intelligence-Sharing & Defense Deal

    The Pentagon has made deeper, permanent inroads into southeast Asia, on Monday announcing a major new deal inked by the US and Philippine defense chiefs to share classified military information and technology.

    US Defense Secretary Lloyd Austin and his Philippine counterpart Gilberto Teodoro kicked off Austin’s visit to Manila this week with the signing of the General Security of Military Information Agreement. Monday’s events also included a closed-door meeting between the Pentagon chief and President Ferdinand Marcos.

    The deal has been described as allowing the Philippines access to “higher capabilities and big-ticket items” from the US and “open opportunities to pursue similar agreements with like-minded nations,” according to Philippine Assistant Defense Secretary Arsenio Andolong.

    Via AFP

    Beijing is sure to also take note of the newly opened combined command and coordination center inside the Philippine military’s headquarters in the capital. Teodoro and Austin formally inaugurated it on Monday.

    “This center will enable real-time information sharing for a common operating picture. It will help boost interoperability for many, many years to come,” Austin said at the ceremony. “It will be a place where our forces can work side by side to respond to regional challenges,” he added.

    Philippine military chief General Romeo Brawner hailed the establishment of the joint command center, saying it will “enhance our ability to collaborate during crises, fostering an environment where our strengths combine to safeguard peace and security in our region.”

    As expected, China blasted the development, with its foreign ministry spokesman Lin Jian responding by warning any military agreement or security arrangement must not target “any third party or harm a third party’s interests – let alone undermine regional peace, exacerbate regional tensions.”

    Of course, the US and the Philippines are already defense treaty partners, which has long injected extra tensions as rival patrols in regional waters come up against each other:

    China has brushed aside an international ruling that its claims in the South China Sea have no legal basis, and has deployed navy and coast guard vessels that Manila says harass its vessels and stop them accessing some reefs and islands in the waters.

    This has led to violent confrontations that have resulted in injuries to Filipino personnel and damage to their vessels in the past 18 months.

    That has sparked concern the United States could be drawn into an armed conflict due to its mutual defense treaty with the Philippines.

    This new military intelligence and defense tech sharing agreement, along with the inaugurated command center, further solidifies Washington’s presence in the region.

    Dramatic scenes like the below have been on the increase of late:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    On the other side of the globe, China seems bent on teaching the US a lesson, in expanding its own intelligence and military presence in places like Cuba, not far off America’s coast. Beijing without doubt sees its inroads into Latin America as a necessary response to America’s expanding Pacific presence. 

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 11/18/2024 – 22:10

  • Kremlin Says Biden "Adding Fuel To The Fire" By Approving Missile Strikes In Russia
    Kremlin Says Biden “Adding Fuel To The Fire” By Approving Missile Strikes In Russia

    By Chris Summers of Epoch Times

    The Kremlin has accused President Joe Biden of, “adding fuel to the fire” after it was reported he had given his approval to Ukraine using U.S.-made missiles to strike targets deep inside Russia.

    Russian President Vladimir Putin’s spokesman Dmitry Peskov is reported by the BBC to have said on Monday that the Biden administration was “continuing to stoke tension around this conflict.”

    According to anonymous U.S. officials who spoke to media outlets, Biden has authorized Ukraine to use long-range missiles provided by the Pentagon to strike targets in the Russian region of Kursk.

    Peskov told the Tass news agency, “If such a decision has indeed been formulated and communicated to the Kyiv regime, then, of course, this is a qualitatively new round of escalation of tensions, and a qualitatively new situation in terms of the involvement of the United States in this conflict.”

    The Tass news agency, on its Telegram channel, said Peskov had described the idea of missile strikes inside Russia as “dangerous and provocative.”

    Peskov referred journalists to a statement made by Putin in September, in which he said allowing Ukraine to target Russia would change “the very nature of the conflict dramatically.”

    But Peskov said Putin was “open to any communication” but had not yet spoken to French President Emmanuel Macron, who was reported to be planning to call the Russian leader.

    The UK and France have both supplied Storm Shadow missiles to Ukraine, which could be used to hit targets in Russia, but so far, UK Prime Minister Keir Starmer and Macron have not given permission.

    Starmer said they “need to double down” on support for Ukraine and insisted that the issue was “top” of his agenda at this week’s G20 summit in Brazil.

    Russia invaded Ukraine in February 2022 and recently deployed thousands of North Korean troops to the frontline, fighting alongside Russian forces.

    Ukrainian forces launched a significant cross-border operation into Russia’s region of Kursk earlier this year. Intense fighting is ongoing as Russian forces attempt to reclaim lost territory. Ukraine seized several settlements and is still holding strategic positions.

    In response, Russia has allowed 11,000 North Korean troops, volunteered by Pyongyang, to deploy on the frontline in the Kursk region to aid its fight.

    Ukrainian President Volodymyr Zelenskyy has been pressuring the United States and NATO to allow his forces to use army tactical missile systems they have been supplied with to hit targets deep inside Russia, arguing Moscow has already escalated the conflict with the North Korean deployment.

    On Monday, Zelenskyy said “long-range capabilities” were a vital part of his “victory plan,” which he fleshed out in the Ukrainian Parliament last month.

    “Missiles Will Speak for Themselves”

    “There’s been much said in the media today that we have received approval to take relative actions. But strikes are not carried out with words. These things are not announced. The missiles will speak for themselves,” Zelenskyy said on Monday.

    Tass also reported that Viktor Bondarev, a senior Russian senator and former Russian air force commander-in-chief, said, “Russia has sufficient advanced capabilities to counter attacks by any weapons, including long-range weapons.”

    Earlier this month, 34 Ukrainian drones attacked targets in Moscow, but the Russian defense ministry claimed the attack had been “thwarted.”

    The defense ministry said the Ukrainians targeted the Kursk, Bryansk, Tula, Oryol, and Kaluga regions.

    The Kremlin’s own Telegram channel has so far not commented on the reports about Biden approving missile strikes.

    On Monday, it published photographs of Putin holding a “working meeting” with the governor of the Zaporozhye (Zaporizhzhia) region in occupied Ukraine, Yevgeny Balitsky.

    Continue reading at Epoch Times

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 11/18/2024 – 21:45

  • AOC Says Dems Hurt By Yielding To AIPAC's 'Wildly Unpopular' Pro-Israel Agenda
    AOC Says Dems Hurt By Yielding To AIPAC’s ‘Wildly Unpopular’ Pro-Israel Agenda

    Progressive New York Rep. Alexandrio Ocasio-Cortez kicked a hornet’s nest on Sunday afternoon when she pointed to the American Israel Public Affairs Committee (AIPAC) as one of the powerful special interest groups that push a “wildly unpopular agenda” on Democratic politicians to the party’s detriment.   

    AOC’s comment came in a response to a social media post by Jeremy Slevin. “Weird to have a whole discourse about ‘special interest groups’ that completely leaves out corporate and industry lobbies—by far the most influential ‘groups’ in the Democratic Party,” wrote the senior advisor to progressive Vermont Sen. Bernie Sanders. 

    Implying that Slevin was himself omitting an important special interest group, AOC characterized AIPAC as “a special interest group pushing a wildly unpopular agenda that pushes voters away from Democrats,” and said Democrats were “overly influenced” by the big-spending organization.  

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Having long been an enormously influential lobbying group, AIPAC began pursuing a new avenue of influence in 2022, and started spending money directly on political campaigns, and rapidly became one of the most prolific outside spenders in US politics, targeting members of Congress who dared to push back on unconditional military and financial aid to Israel. 

    The 2024 election saw Democrats lose the White House and the Senate while failing to take over the House of Representatives. While there’s no indication that the issue was decisive, the Biden-Harris administration’s eager provision of weapons and billions of dollars to Israel for the pursuit of its astoundingly destructive war on Gaza doubtlessly dampened Democrats’ enthusiasm and turnout. 

    A September Pew Research poll found that half of Democrats felt Israel’s military operation was “going too far”, while an Economist poll found that just 14% of Democrats held more sympathy for Israelis than Palestinians. With full knowledge of these dynamics, party standard-bearer Harris nonetheless pressed on with full-throated support of Israel, failing to stake out any policy difference with Biden on the Gaza War. 

    AIPAC quickly fired back at AOC’s social media post, sharing screen shots that spotlighted the group’s ousting of progressive Democratic representatives Cori Bush and Jamaal Bowman. Both were guilty of criticizing Israeli government policies and voicing sympathy for Palestinians — and both were removed by Democratic primary challengers backed by AIPAC to the tune of a combined $14 million. AIPAC’s spending on the Bowman race helped make it the most expensive House primary contest ever.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    To describe AIPAC’s retort as misleading would be a huge understatement. As it did frequently through the 2024 cycle, the group implied that support of Israel was the key to the success of the candidates it backed. However, that claim is defied by an odd and unsettling aspect of the Israel lobby’s participation in these races: Advertising that pro-Israel groups injected into 2024 campaigns almost never mentioned Israel. Instead, the ads focused on unrelated domestic issues. AIPAC’s dedication to concealing its hand in political campaigns extends to the name of its super PAC, which it vaguely calls the “United Democracy Project.”

    It’s a well-established fact of Western politics that one can talk with relatively impunity about the power wielded by any number of special interest groups — but not the pro-Israel lobby. Predictably, AOC’s post about AIPAC triggered a deluge of responses accusing her of bigotry: 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Backers and beneficiaries of AIPAC face no such condemnation for noting the group’s power in US politics. In the wake of this month’s election, the Jerusalem Post lauded AIPAC for “strengthening pro-Israel presence in Congress,” saying the group “aided 318 Zionist candidates to win.”  Wesley Bell, who took out Cori Bush in the primary, thanked AIPAC, saying he was “not getting across the finish line without you.” Watch for him to be a reliable “yes” vote on every pro-Israel piece of legislation that hits the House floor in the upcoming 119th Congress. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 11/18/2024 – 21:20

  • Threats Of Violence Against Trump Voters Surge
    Threats Of Violence Against Trump Voters Surge

    Authored by Daisy Luther via The Organic Prepper blog,

    We’ve talked before about the mental health effects suffered by some Harris supporters after mainstream media convinced them that there was no way Trump could win. Now, as the truth settles in that he, in fact, will be the 47th president, threats of violence against Trump voters have absolutely surged.

    It’s getting to the point where I find it difficult to imagine that this violence will carry over into the real world.

    Reddit is a hotbed of extremism.

    I’ve had an anonymous Reddit account for years because it’s nice to chat and see the opinions of others about all manner of things. I have honestly learned a lot from the site. But as it became more and more radical, I stopped posting completely.

    For example, Gateway Pundit reports that a radical man who claims to be employed by the United States Secret Service – yeah, the one who is tasked with the responsibility of Trump’s safety – has been posting disturbing, venomous commentary from his “insider view.”

    Counter-extremism researchers with the Justice Report say they have discovered that a lifelong anarchist, left-wing extremist, and devout follower of Anfifa is working as a Secret Service agent. Moreover, the individual reportedly has made a series of disgusting comments regarding Trump.

    The Gateway Pundit will NOT be naming the alleged Secret Service agent until we confirm the person’s identity.

    The supposed agent has a series of ugly posts under the since-deleted account /u/endon40 on the leftist social media forum Reddit where he calls the American electorate “chodes” and Nazis who voted for a man with “Nazi-a** policies.”

    “These chodes are cowards and won’t win, no matter how long it takes to pry them from power if they manage to cheat their way back to it,” the Anifa sympathizer wrote. “The survival rate of fascist dictatorships trends towards zero.”

    “They voted for a dude who has Nazi-a**policies and who surrounds himself with people who do, including actual neo-Nazis,” he added, “When you’re willing to (vote Trump) and support a guy who has policies mirroring the Third Reich and again, had actual neo nazis around him, you’re a Nazi.

    But that is far from the worst of it.

    The X account Reddit_Lies has collected tons of horrifying comments from Reddit that suggest outright violence against Trump supporters. Here’s a collage of concerning posts. (Warning – some of these posts contain threats of graphic violence and foul language.)

    I don’t foresee this calming down.

    The rhetoric is outright insane, as discussed before.

    I don’t know about you, but I’ve been kind of waiting for the other shoe to drop since the election. I was surprised that there was very little civil unrest after Trump was announced the winner.

    But I don’t think we should get too comfortable.

    People like the ones above feel completely justified in assassinating the president, physically harming anyone they assume voted for him, and cutting off loved ones who voted for Trump.

    If you don’t have it already, check out our paperback anthology, How to Survive During Dangerous Times.

    Your situational awareness is invaluable right now. When people are afraid, sometimes they launch an attack offensively. I think it’s only a matter of time before bad things start happening in the real world. What do you think?

    Do you expect an uptick in unwarranted violence? Have you seen or heard of anything happening yet? Do you think that plans are being made?

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 11/18/2024 – 20:55

  • Saudi Arabia "Leading A Push Back" On Commitments To Leave Fossil Fuels At COP29
    Saudi Arabia “Leading A Push Back” On Commitments To Leave Fossil Fuels At COP29

    Saudi Arabia is reportedly “leading a push back” on restating climate commitments to transition away from fossil fuels put into place last year, according to Yahoo Finance.

    The Yahoo Finance article says that both European and U.S. negotiators aim to reinforce last year’s commitments to boost energy efficiency and renewable energy, viewing them as crucial to maintaining progress in the global climate fight.

    But Saudi Arabia is reportedly using “a mix of delaying tactics and outright blocking maneuvers” to resist these efforts, the report says. 

    Last year, COP28 marked the first inclusion of a fossil fuel phase-out in its final agreement, with the UAE securing support from Saudi Arabia and other oil producers. Developed and climate-vulnerable nations see any weakening of that language as a significant setback.

    This year’s COP29 negotiations are focused on scaling up climate finance to over $1 trillion annually, pressuring nations like Saudi Arabia to contribute more, while also solidifying commitments made last year to phase down fossil fuels and accelerate renewable energy.

    Disagreements persist over whether countries should act on all the commitments or select priorities, with Saudi Arabia advocating the latter approach. As talks enter a critical phase, ministers must resolve key disputes, reduce dense negotiation texts, and finalize trade-offs behind closed doors.

    And there were signs this might be the case…recall, just days ago we wrote that climate summits were “no longer fit for purpose”. 

    Leading climate experts, including Ban Ki-moon, Mary Robinson, Christiana Figueres, and Johan Rockström, are calling for significant changes to UN climate summits, according to a new report from The Guardian.

    They argue future conferences should only be hosted by nations demonstrating strong climate action and advocate for stricter controls on fossil fuel lobbyists. Over 1,700 industry lobbyists attended Cop29, raising concerns about undue influence.  

    The group has urged the UN to streamline the annual summits, amplify the voices of developing countries, and increase meeting frequency to better address the climate crisis.

    “It is now clear that the Cop is no longer fit for purpose. We need a shift from negotiation to implementation,” they wrote.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 11/18/2024 – 20:30

  • ZH Debate: Blumenthal & Beattie Clash Over Trump Cabinet Appointments
    ZH Debate: Blumenthal & Beattie Clash Over Trump Cabinet Appointments

     Full debate:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    ***UPDATE: Big Thanks to Adam Taggart for filling in last-minute. We strongly encourage you to subscribe to his YouTube channel for top-teir economic interviews unlike anyone else. ***

    Join us on today at 7pm ET for a live debate with Grayzone editor-in-chief Max Blumenthal and Revolver News founder Darren Beattie, moderated by the Judge Andrew Napolitano. Resolution: The second Trump administration will be America First.

    Premium/Pro users submit questions for the debaters below.

    Regarding Trump’s cabinet, Blumenthal – veteran journalist and infamous DC dissident – is concerned about mounting Israeli influence, which has manifested in hawkish foreign policy picks like Pete Hegseth for SecDef, Marco Rubio for State, and fanatically Zionist ambassadors Stenafik/Huckabee.

    ​While Beattie – known for his dogged reporting into federal involvement on Jan 6 – adovocated for Trump’s appointees to be confirmed by “any means necessary” because they represent a dramatic realignment of Washington’s status quo. And after all, Trump is pissing off the right people…

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Despite this, Blumenthal is not optimistic that a second Trump admin will be truly sovereign but captured the donor class and foreign interests. More troubling indications are on the horizon with future rumored personnel, such as Sebastian “gay whale” Gorka (as Alex Jones calls him):

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.jshttps://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    As the fight to influence the big man intensifies, hear from both sides: Trump’s former speech writer and one of America’s sharpest foreign policy blob critics.

    Our panelists will cover all major cabinet appointees. Including those deemed by warmonger John “we know where your kids live” Bolton to be the “worst nomination for a cabinet position in American history.”:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    We look forward to hearing criticisms from people who haven’t destroyed entire countries.

    Join us today at 7 PM eastern on the ZeroHedge homepage and X account.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 11/18/2024 – 20:15

  • Meet Adam Smith, The Green Beret Behind North Carolina's 'Redneck Air Force'
    Meet Adam Smith, The Green Beret Behind North Carolina’s ‘Redneck Air Force’

    Authored by Samantha Flom via The Epoch Times,

    “They’re probably dead.”

    That was the thought running through Adam Smith’s mind as he raced to find a way to save his 3-year-old daughter and her mother from the devastation wrought by Hurricane Helene.

    Smith, a former U.S. Army Green Beret, spent 17 years conducting military operations around the globe in defense of his country.

    He never expected to need those skills to save his family.

    “I don’t think anything can prepare you for the thought of losing your child,” Smith told The Epoch Times on Oct. 26, exactly one month after Helene touched down as a Category 4 hurricane in Florida and barreled on toward the unsuspecting mountain communities of western North Carolina.

    “Nobody really, truly understands the devastation that’s happened on the ground until you come and drive and see it,” Smith said.

    “There are towns that are literally gone, swept off the face of the earth.”

    Helene claimed at least 102 lives in the Tar Heel State, including 43 in Buncombe County. In the hard-hit community of Swannanoa, clouds of dust still hover in the air as teams of volunteers work to clear the piles of debris.

    Traveling through town on Highway 70, the wreckage from collapsed homes, businesses, and bridges paints an apocalyptic scene. But spray-painted among the ruins are messages of hope, strength, and endurance that speak to the resilience of the people who call this area home.

    Smith knows something of resilience, having seen it in his daughter, ex-wife, and countless others he has helped through Savage Freedoms Relief Operations, an initiative he launched to assist those affected by Helene. And with the long road to recovery still ahead, that strength will be needed to ensure North Carolina’s hurting communities aren’t forgotten.

    An aerial view of the hurricane-battered community in Swannanoa, N.C., in this undated photo. Courtesy of Adam Smith

    The Catalyst

    At the Harley-Davidson dealership in Swannanoa, helicopters and military vehicles laden with supplies come and go.

    The spot has become an operations center for Smith and his team as they conduct their relief missions.

    The parking lot, once home to an array of motorcycles, is now a base camp lined with the trucks and tents of volunteers from across the country who have settled in for the long haul.

    Smith glanced in the passenger side mirror of the van he and his fiancée, Taylor Knipp, converted into a makeshift home. He joked that he needed a shave, but the laughter soon faded from his eyes as he reflected on one of the most terrifying events of his life.

    “This whole thing just happened organically. I mean, really, it happened from a selfish desire to save my daughter,” Smith said.

    He and Knipp were driving home from Texas late on Sept. 26—the day Hurricane Helene made landfall—when he lost contact with his daughter and her mother. When he still couldn’t reach them the next morning, he began to worry.

    Adam Smith, along with his family and teammates, launched the Savage Freedoms Relief Operations, an initiative to assist those affected by Hurricane Helene. Courtesy of Adam Smith

    “Nothing was going through, and so we made the decision right then that we were just going to hammer down and get back here as fast as we could,” he said.

    When they finally arrived back in town, there was no way to get through. Interstate 40 was still flooded near the eastern Tennessee border, blocking the way up the mountain to where Smith’s daughter and ex-wife lived, just next door to the cabin he and Knipp shared.

    When the water eventually receded, entire sections of the highway were gone, trapping those on the mountain without food, clean water, or other resources.

    With the cell towers down and the power out, Smith had no way of reaching his family. Occasionally, though, messages from his former brother-in-law managed to break through.

    “I’m not really sure how he could get them out, so I just have to assume that it was God’s plan to make certain that we knew what was going on,” Smith said.

    “But the text messages we got from him were, ‘We tried for eight hours, we can’t get in. We haven’t heard from them. We don’t know how they are.’”

    Unable to drive through, Smith was forced to find alternative transportation. He drove to Greenville, South Carolina, to find cell service, and from there he was able to connect with a helicopter pilot who agreed to fly him up the mountain.

    They took off from the field next to the Harley-Davidson—the only place Smith knew of that could accommodate a helicopter.

    “We flew in and landed, and my daughter and her mom came walking around from a hedgerow of trees. And my little girl was wearing a little flower dress, barefoot, running up, and she’s going, ‘Daddy, Daddy, why did you ride in a plane?’” he laughed, eyes welling with tears.

    “Seeing her, that was really the catalyst that set all of this in motion.”

    Disaster Response

    Within days of that first rescue mission, Savage Freedoms Relief Operations was born as an offshoot of Smith’s self-defense training company, Savage Freedoms Defense.

    “We had special operations volunteers and veterans show up that just came out of the woodwork,” Smith said, noting that people driving by would see them and pull into the Harley-Davidson parking lot.

    By Wednesday of the first week, more than 70 volunteers had gathered there to contribute in whatever way they could.

    “There was no ego. There was nobody trying to be in charge. There was no one trying to take credit,” Smith said.

    “And it just grew into that. It just happened naturally.”

    Inside the dealership, Smith’s team built a command center through which they could view requests for assistance and dispatch resources as needed.

    In those first few days after the storm, the group became known locally as the “Redneck Air Force” as they searched for trapped survivors in the mountains. But Smith was quick to point out that there were others helping too, including other humanitarian organizations, first responders, and the National Guard.

    “The National Guard started flying helicopters on Saturday afternoon. We didn’t get direct contact with them, I think, until Tuesday or Wednesday morning, but they were on the ground doing work,” he said.

    Adam Smith transformed the parking lot of a Harley-Davidson motorcycle dealership into a makeshift air base to help distribute supplies after Hurricane Helene struck the Asheville, N.C. area. Courtesy of Adam Smith

    The Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA) also deployed 1,200 search and rescue personnel, though Smith said he didn’t see any of the agency’s vehicles on the ground “until 10 days or 11 days in.”

    He noted that FEMA did arrive at the Harley-Davidson with a supply drop about two weeks after the storm. But by that point, civilian volunteers had already collected and distributed “hundreds of thousands of supplies.”

    FEMA faced backlash over its response to Hurricane Helene as rumors spread that the agency was hindering civilian rescue and recovery efforts. FEMA denied those claims.

    Smith, however, has his own qualms with the agency.

    “The fact of the matter is that FEMA operates exactly as it’s designed to operate. It’s a slow-moving, bureaucratic, weighty process with too much red tape,” he said.

    That red tape often results in the slow-walking or outright denial of applications for support or assistance, Smith said, describing the agency as ineffective and inefficient.

    With President-elect Donald Trump preparing to take the reins, Smith said he hopes that the new administration will address some of those concerns. He also stressed that the solution should include ensuring that future disasters do not become political pawns.

    “The political infighting has to stop when it comes to how much political capital can we suck out of this disaster,” he said.

    Smith noted that when President Joe Biden and Vice President Kamala Harris first visited North Carolina in the days following the storm, the Secret Service’s airspace restrictions brought most civilian rescue and recovery efforts to a halt.

    “We contacted Secret Service … to get discreet squawk codes to continue to fly. Even then, we were shut down for two hours during the eight-hour window,” he said.

    “I don’t know what definitive impact that had on the people of western North Carolina, but I do know the overall impact was felt and there was frustration.”

    Democratic presidential nominee Vice President Kamala Harris walks with members of the U.S. Armed Forces and North Carolina Gov. Roy Cooper (L) after being briefed on recovery operations in the aftermath of Hurricane Helene, at the the Charlotte Air National Guard Base in Charlotte, N.C., on Oct. 5, 2024. Mario Tama/Getty Images

    A Perspective Shift

    Trump visited Swannanoa weeks later, on Oct. 21, to survey the damage wrought by Helene and hold a press conference.

    During his visit, Trump commended Smith for his “amazing act of citizenship and service” in helping others in need.

    Smith, in turn, thanked the 45th president for delaying his trip so as not to hinder relief efforts. He also handed him a gift: a small wooden cross.

    Reflecting on that moment, Smith said his Christian faith, far from shaken, had been bolstered in the storm’s aftermath.

    “I have seen more profound miracles in the last four weeks than I’ve ever seen in my entire life,” he said.

    He recounted instances where desperately needed medical supplies had arrived within minutes, and others where those experiencing medical emergencies on the mountain were rescued just in time.

    “There have been conversations with people where children were saved after their families had been swept away, and they found these babies either on a rooftop or in a top floor,” he said.

    “And I’ve also had more conversations than I think I’ve ever had before with people showing up and saying, ‘This has changed my life. And I didn’t realize this, but I found God here.’”

    Describing the post-Helene whirlwind as “the most emotional experience” of his life, Smith said the storm’s impacts went deeper than the devastation still visible on every street corner.

    “I think the perspective shift and change for people on the ground here, specifically, has been so profound and so impactful that, obviously, this area will never be the same,” he said.

    “And I also think that this area will have a higher population of those who found God than maybe anywhere else in the country in the next decade.”

    Adam Smith (L), founder of Savage Freedoms, speaks with Republican presidential candidate former President Donald Trump during his visit after Hurricane Helene, in Asheville, N.C., on Oct. 21, 2024. Madalina Vasiliu/The Epoch Times

    For Smith, that shift in perspective gave him the resolve to propose to Knipp.

    “I sort of had a moment of self-reflection, and everything that we were doing was dangerous,” he said.

    “There’s so much loss of life, and the fear of losing my daughter and her mom, and I thought, you know, [expletive] it. I’m not going to wait anymore. Time is precious.”

    He caught his entire crew by surprise when he pulled the ring out of his backpack during one of their nightly briefings.

    It wasn’t the dramatic proposal Smith had envisioned, but that fact seemed trivial compared to the crisis their community was facing.

    The Recovery

    Although their rescue operations have long since ceased, Savage Freedoms Relief Operations continues to provide supplies and assistance to those in need.

    The organization is also helping to rebuild residents’ homes, and with the winter months fast approaching, housing is the top priority.

    Smith said he believes there is enough temporary housing available, but the reconstruction phase of the recovery will pose its own challenges.

    “There’s going to be a rezoning of floodways and flood plains after this event, and there’s going to have to be a study done at multiple levels to identify what that rezoning looks like,” he noted.

    “How long is that going to take? … How is that going to affect their ability to rebuild?”

    Construction workers repair a portion of Interstate 40 that was damaged by Hurricane Helene near Asheville, N.C., on Oct. 26, 2024. Samantha Flom/The Epoch Times

    Smith said they could start rebuilding now and “ask for forgiveness, not permission,” but there would likely be legal repercussions, and securing federal funding takes time.

    He suggested that bridging the gap between private sector efforts and public funding could be the quickest solution.

    “If I can take a private donor and funnel their money through a 501(c)(3), so there’s a tax deduction opportunity for them, and then we can … put it straight to the family in need, that’s the way we can bridge this gap,” he said.

    Most of all, however, Smith said it is crucial that the people of western North Carolina are not forgotten as they continue to pick up the pieces.

    “There has to be a maintained awareness for what’s happening here,” Smith said. “We can’t let the message die, and we can’t let the national attention continue to drift somewhere else when the reconstruction, rebuilding effort of western North Carolina is going to take years and billions of dollars.”

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 11/18/2024 – 20:05

  • Leftists Leave X For Bluesky Only To Overwhelm Site With Mass Censorship Demands
    Leftists Leave X For Bluesky Only To Overwhelm Site With Mass Censorship Demands

    It’s yet another reminder of the dark days of pre-Musk Twitter when social media was completely dominated by blue-check Karens and a vast army of San Francisco-based moderators.  In the wake of Donald Trump’s election victory which was helped in large part by Elon Musk, high profile celebrities along with washed up has-beens are announcing their great exodus from X. 

    Destination?  Bluesky, a social media platform which is trying to recreate the progressive cancel culture hellscape of 2020 Twitter.  It was created by former longtime Twitter CEO Jack Dorsey, who later left the organization. The company recently reported an increase of 3 million users since October, rising to 15 million total users in November.  Compare this to X with its reported user base of over 600 million and it’s easy to see why the political left was so enraged by the sale of the company to Musk with his abhorrent free speech policies.

    It’s also hard to see how Bluesky represents anything other than a sweaty bubble of cope.  

    It didn’t take very long for the new arrivals to saturate the platform with censorship demands, post flagging and general complaints about other users.  Bluesky gave notice recently that in only 24 hours the site was inundated with over 42,000 reports and the censorship requests have expanded to over 3000 flags per hour.  

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Bluesky was built on an “invite only” system up until February of this year.  The rush of woke actors, journalists and activists to the platform after the election has certainly garnered a lot of media attention for the site.  Progressive celebrities and pundits such as actress Jamie Lee Curtis, “journalist” Don Lemon, “journalist” Joy Reid, writer Stephen King and The Guardian’s official news account, have all decided to switch to Bluesky. 

    Don Lemon accused X of no longer serving the purposes of “transparency and honest debate”, a hilarious notion when one considers the incredible level of censorship enacted under the old regime.  What leftists are actually angry about is the fact that conservatives are suddenly free to contradict progressive claims without fear of account bans, the doxing of their homes and workplaces, and cancel culture in general.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Leftists enjoyed a double standard at Twitter that worked aggressively in their favor.  Even if their arguments were devoid of facts and evidence, the Terms of Service system Twitter put in place was specifically hostile to conservative ideals.  Progressive members knew this and exploited it often to silence dissent.  The only thing that might save an account was its size, with the biggest right-leaning users sometimes getting a pass.  

    The exodus merely confirms what most people already knew – The left is afraid of fair discourse on an even playing field.  They refuse open debate unless the game is rigged in their favor.  So far the general response form the majority of X users is “Good riddance to bad rubbish!”  It’s unlikely that this view will change.     

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 11/18/2024 – 19:40

  • "SHALL NOT BE COUNTED": Pennsylvania Supreme Court Orders Rogue Officials To Stop Counting Illegal Ballots
    “SHALL NOT BE COUNTED”: Pennsylvania Supreme Court Orders Rogue Officials To Stop Counting Illegal Ballots

    The Pennsylvania Supreme Court on Monday ordered all of the state’s county election officials to stop counting mail-in ballots that fail to comply with state law.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The order comes after Bucks County Board of Commissioners Chair Robert J. Harvie Jr. (D) and Vice Chair Dianne Ellis-Marseglia (D) defied the top Court’s previous ruling that ballots missing signatures in one of two places, or which are missing a date, cannot be counted.

    State law requires a handwritten date on the outer return envelope of mail-in ballots.

    The ruling and order to stop counting comes as an automatic recount is underway in the race between Republican Senator-elect Dave McCormick and incumbent Senator Bob Casey. The recount – which comes at a cost to taxpayers of more than $1 million, was triggered by a state law that calls for an automatic recount if a candidate’s margin of victory is no more than 0.5% of total votes cast.

    “The Court hereby ASSUMES its King’s Bench authority … only to DIRECT that all Respondents, including the Boards of Elections in Bucks County, Montgomery County, and Philadelphia County, SHALL COMPLY with the prior rulings of this Court in which we have clarified that mail-in and absentee ballots that fail to comply with the requirements of the Pennsylvania Election Code …. SHALL NOT BE COUNTED for purposes of the election held on November 5, 2024,” reads Monday’s ruling.

    Earlier this month, Bucks County, PA. commissioners voted to count ballots lacking proper signatures in violation of the state Supreme Court ruling issued earlier this year, and against the advice of the board’s legal counsel – which advised not to count illegal ballots.

    Now to see if they comply…

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 11/18/2024 – 19:27

  • How Trump Won With Hispanics
    How Trump Won With Hispanics

    Authored by Alfredo Ortiz via RealClearPolitics,

    Democrats and liberal commentators are desperately trying to explain away one of the biggest shocks of the 2024 election: Donald Trump’s 46% share of the Hispanic vote, a modern-day Republican record and remarkable improvement over the 32% he received four years ago. 

    But their explanations demonstrate striking elitism and lack of self-awareness and accountability. For example, Rep. Greg Casar (D-TX), likely the next Congressional Progressive Caucus chair, chalked up Latino voter erosion to right-wing “misinformation.” Joe Scarborough, co-host of Morning Joe, blamed “misogyny” and racism from Latino men. 

    Several pundits, such as CNN’s Jim Acosta, claimed Hispanics voted against their “self-interest.” And MSNBC’s Joy Reid accused Hispanics of voting against their race: “Y’all voted with … David Duke and against your …wives, sisters, and abuelas.” This kind of race essentialism – believing that Hispanics should vote solely based on their race – is the real racism, not the perceived slights the media obsesses over. 

    Job Creators Network’s Hispanic Vote Coalition, led by Executive Director Mary Thomas, spent the year traveling across the country to engage with Hispanic voters and faith leaders in their own communities to learn about the issues most impacting them and equipping them with the resources to vote their values this election. We found a highly receptive audience eager to engage in political issues and sick of being talked down to and taken for granted by Democrats – and largely ignored by Republicans.

    Our key finding: Hispanics have the same concerns as everyone else. Hispanics are just as concerned about their faith and families, the economy and inflation, crime, and the direction of the country as all Americans. President Trump spoke to these concerns far better than Democrats, and that’s the reason for his historic performance with Hispanics. And, it turns out, with Americans of almost all backgrounds.

    Trump recognized that Hispanics aren’t an identity group that can be pitted against others in tribal political warfare. The Harris campaign ran on this soft bigotry through promises such as forgivable $20,000 loans to Hispanic men, but Trump treated Hispanics as part of his broader coalition of working-class Americans striving for the American Dream. 

    Hispanic voters didn’t need to listen to the political rhetoric. They merely needed to observe and compare their quality of life while Trump and Harris were in office. Real median Hispanic household income grew $6,500 between 2017 and 2019, 10 times faster than between 2021 and 2023 under Biden-Harris.

    Our Hispanic Vote Project found that Latinos are especially concerned about their businesses remaining profitable and their churches remaining solvent. We talked to many part-time pastors who were also small business owners, and many expressed concerns about rising taxes and inflation.

    They feared their congregations would be forced to work more to earn less, significantly impacting their time available for church activities and ability to tithe. The bigger the state, they noted, the smaller the influence of the church in their respective communities.

    Armed with this information, we went into Hispanic communities with Spanish advertisements, media, and materials for trusted leaders to distribute. Instead of merely translating English ads into Spanish, we created unique ads and messaging targeted to effectively reach a Hispanic audience. Our Que Mala Kamala Spanish video went viral. 

    We saw that Hispanics listen to a lot of radio, so we loaded up on relatively inexpensive ads on this underappreciated platform. One that connects Hispanic listeners to their communities – and their heritage. 

    To consolidate and build on these Hispanic gains, conservatives need to continue to genuinely engage with and learn from this constituency between election cycles, not just during them. We need a permanent Hispanic engagement infrastructure to make these voters part of our coalition for the long term. 

    In short, we need to do the opposite of Democrats and liberal pundits. We must listen to and engage with Hispanics in their own communities rather than dismiss this growing community that will decide elections as misinformed, bigoted, and voting against their own self-interest. 

    Alfredo Ortiz is the president and CEO of the Job Creators Network.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 11/18/2024 – 19:15

  • Artifice Of The Deal: Harris' 'Politics Of Joy' Ends In Tears
    Artifice Of The Deal: Harris’ ‘Politics Of Joy’ Ends In Tears

    Authored by Alex Rosado via RealClearPolitics,

    For months, legacy media and Kamala Harris’ presidential campaign fawned over the positivity and change the vice president could offer the presidency. Given her decisive loss to Donald Trump this month, it seems voters were not persuaded by the “politics of joy”– and her base is melting down over it.

    This cycle’s polls testified to voters’ distaste for the incumbent Biden administration. Citizens were, and still are, concerned with the national economy and crime rates, which have worsened their quality of life.

    The Harris campaign tried to distract Americans from that criticism by projecting an upbeat image. Yet, even an army of actors, musicians, and public figures endorsing Harris and trashing then-candidate Donald Trump could not make up for her lack of tangible solutions. Her rallies created an atmosphere of communal excitement for those in attendance, but her policies lacked substance and broad appeal. It took the campaign several weeks to release a detailed policy platform when she first entered the race – most were ripped from Biden’s unpopular tenure that voters disliked, and she would admit this herself.

    Most of America saw nothing gleeful about being stuck with the same ineffective policies for another four years, but those supporters who liked her “feel-good” environments were bound emotionally to her campaign.

    Harris’ emotional appeal had a twofold effect: to ostracize dissenters who demanded more policies from their candidate, and to insulate her supporters until they believed that they were in the majority – even as their numbers shrank. This same energy transformed political gatherings into pseudo-festivals more than serious discussions. And, when feelings dominate, the blowback can be more severe. That’s why many religious and pro-life voters were stunned when Harris told two Christians they were “at the wrong rally” in late October. Harris couldn’t emphasize unity at her rallies if she alienated certain groups that didn’t align with her beliefs, and Christians remembered this by voting mostly for Trump in 2024.

    The divide extended behind the scenes, too. Since Biden was ousted from the presidential race in August, there has been a reported feud between his and Harris’ camps. Harris staffers say the White House didn’t sufficiently coordinate Biden’s messaging and schedule to align with the vice president’s campaign interests. Ex-Biden staffers who joined Harris’s campaign have also been branded “disloyal.” The rift was reaffirmed when Harris sidelined Biden, refusing to campaign with him in the campaign’s final stretch.

    The supposed “joy” of Harris’ campaign merely masked the party’s factionalism. Observers and Republicans pounced on this, calling Harris’ nomination a hoax, and Americans started questioning her rise to the top of the ticket. Authentic or not, Harris struggled with justifying why she was the nominee and used happiness to conceal genuine ideological differences within her party.

    The split between Biden and Harris was so apparent that publications wondered if Biden was trying to sabotage Harris’ campaign. The Democrats’ divided house could not stand, and skeptical voters were concerned about the dysfunction. They were proven correct when, in the election aftermath, Harris’ allies and the media blamed Biden for her loss.

    Even as the Obamas, Clintons, Democratic vice-presidential nominee Tim Walz, and Oprah Winfrey stressed that Americans must choose “joy,” their rhetoric told a different story. 

    The Harris campaign painted Trump as a “fascist” and a “dictator,” with Biden jumping in and calling Trump supporters “garbage.” They spent months fearmongering over Project 2025, a political initiative by The Heritage Foundation that Trump repeatedly said he does not endorse. Democrats went as far as to tie Trump to Adolf Hitler, with Walz comparing a Trump rally to a Nazi gathering.

    Their hypocritical, far-from-cheerful rhetoric was a Hail Mary attempt to gain ground in the election. Polls had Kamala trailing Trump nationwide and in swing states because she could not define herself.

    The politics of “joy” could not convince voters that she was in touch with their needs. To close the gap, she instead chose the politics of panic. Neither could deliver her the presidency.

    Even if Trump’s rhetoric made some Democrats feel “concerned, exhausted, angry, insulted, and confused” in his first term, most of the country wanted his aura for a second term. It’s why disaffected Democrats like Robert F. Kennedy Jr., Elon Musk, and former Congresswoman Tulsi Gabbard were vital in building coalitions and a diverse policy platform for Trump. Trump could ride around in a garbage truck while still campaigning on no taxes for social security, energy abundance, and ending foreign wars. He balanced proposals with optics, something the Harris campaign couldn’t figure out.

    At its core, politics is about governance and resource allocation; everything else is noise. Harris’ campaign sought to replace policy with good vibes. When that failed, only anger remained. Disillusioned with the results, the Harris camp is now guilting everyone – including a baby hippo overseas – for their mistakes.

    The Harris campaign’s joy, rage, and detachment from voters is no mystery and is why she couldn’t master the art of the deal.

    Alex Rosado is a Research Fellow for Horizon Info Consult, and a Contributor for Young Voices. Follow him on Twitter/X at @Alexprosado.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 11/18/2024 – 18:25

  • Lebanon, Hezbollah Agree To US-Proposed Ceasefire With Israel After Especially Bloody 24 Hours
    Lebanon, Hezbollah Agree To US-Proposed Ceasefire With Israel After Especially Bloody 24 Hours

    It appears Netanyahu’s reported “gift” of a Lebanon ceasefire in the wake of Trump’s election victory is coming to fruition. Reuters and other international outlets are reporting that agreement on a US-proposed ceasefire has been reached.

    “Lebanon and Hezbollah have agreed to a U.S. proposal for a ceasefire with Israel with some comments on the content, a top Lebanese official told Reuters on Monday, describing the effort as the most serious yet to end to the fighting.”

    Hezbollah militants, via AFP

    A Lebanese source, Ali Hassan Khalil, an aide to Parliament Speaker Nabih Berri, has said “Lebanon had delivered its written response to the U.S. ambassador in Lebanon on Monday, and White House envoy Amos Hochstein was travelling to Beirut to continue talks,” Reuters writes late in the day Monday.

    Israel has yet to issue official comment, and much remains to be seen on whether it will actually take effect or hold:

    “Lebanon presented its comments on the paper in a positive atmosphere,” Khalil said, declining to give further details. “All the comments that we presented affirm the precise adherence to (U.N.) Resolution 1701 with all its provisions,” he said.

    It comes as a bit of a surprise, given how violent the past 24 hours have been on both sides of the border. 

    At least five Lebanese were killed Monday due to an Israeli strike on the Zuqaq al-Blat area, with casualty figures expected to increase amid an emergency response. Over 30 were injured in the attack, others remain missing.

    On the Israeli side of the war-ravaged border area, Israeli sources are saying a number of Hezbollah missiles scored direct hits on civilian areas:

    A woman was killed and at least 17 people were wounded in several rocket barrages fired by Hezbollah on Monday, as the terror group launched more than 100 rockets at northern Israel and one missile at the country’s center throughout the day.

    The woman, identified as Safaa Awad, 41, was killed and dozens of others wounded in the evening by a rocket that hit a three-story building in the northern town of Shfar’am after Hezbollah fired five projectiles at the Galilee.

    Among the wounded victims were a woman aged 41 and a 4-year-old boy in serious condition, Rambam Hospital in Haifa said.

    The medical center said a total of 56 victims were brought for treatment, mostly for acute anxiety. Among the victims were 18 children, the hospital adds.

    There was also a major Hezbollah missile strike on Tel Aviv Monday:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Israeli media has also picked up on the breaking report of the ceasefire deal, also emphasizing there’s been no initial comment from the Israeli government:

    Its terms require Hezbollah to have no armed presence in the area between the Lebanese-Israeli border and the Litani River, which runs some 30 kilometers (20 miles) north of the frontier — clauses the terror group violated from the get-go.

    Khalil claims the success of the initiative now depended on Israel, saying if Israel did not want a solution, “it could make 100 problems.

    Lebanese officials are now saying the ball is in Israel’s court. Currently an Israeli ground offensive is still active, and Beirut has been heavily pummeled by Israel’s aerial offensive, which has also reached into central and northeastern Lebanon of late, especially the Bekaa Valley.

    Like with Ukraine, President-elect Trump is pledging to quickly bring to an end wars which have Washington involvement; however, in a phone call last month he told PM Netanyahu to “do what you have to do” against Hezbollah and Hamas.

    One career US diplomat in the Middle East region was cited in WaPo as saying “Netanyahu has no loyalty to Biden and will be focused entirely on currying favor with Trump.”

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 11/18/2024 – 18:00

  • A Real Life Example Of How Democrats Claim To Save You Money
    A Real Life Example Of How Democrats Claim To Save You Money

    Authored by Mike Shedlock via MishTalk.com,

    This example is about as Orwellian as one can find…

    It involves a proposed $15 vehicle tax for entering New York City.

    Please listen to New York Governor Kathy Hochul explain how she is saving taxpayers 40 percent in her Orwellian Video.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Math Lesson from Governor Kathy Hochul

    From day one, I have made affordability for New Yorkers a top priority. I always have and I always will fight to put more money in the pockets of everyday New Yorkers. That’s why, back in June, I stood up on behalf of hard working families and simply said no, no to a new $15 congestion toll that at that particular time was just too much.

    Too many people are worried about high costs, groceries, rent, child care. These are real challenges to our families. …. As governor, it is my job to make decisions that take into account the needs of all working New Yorkers. So, I made the decision to put the congestion pricing on pause while we devise a different path forward.

    I believe no New Yorker should have to pay a penny more than absolutely necessary. … You heard that correctly. It was $15 before and now it is $9. That is a 40 percent reduction. This lower toll will save daily commuters nearly $1,500 annually. And that kind of money makes a big difference for our families

    How to Save Money New York Style

    • Step One: Announce a $3,750 tax on commuters

    • Step Two. Announce a hold on the tax until after the election.

    • Step Three: Reduce the tax to $2,250

    • Step Four: Explain how this was a new path forward

    • Step Five: Proudly brag about saving New Yorkers $1,500

    This is so preposterously stupid that I wonder how many can possibly believe what she is saying.

    But since she seems serious, she should have started at $30 thereby saving New Yorkers an amazing $5,200 per year.

    How do these idiots keep getting elected?

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 11/18/2024 – 17:40

  • "Very Intense Storm" May Dump Snow At Higher Elevations Across Northeast
    “Very Intense Storm” May Dump Snow At Higher Elevations Across Northeast

    The National Weather Service’s Weather Prediction Center said an upper-level low-pressure system would develop above the Great Lakes and the Northeast at the midpoint of the week. The system could be a major snowmaker for parts of the Ohio Valley to Mid-Alantic to Northeast.

    “This will result in cooler temperatures, a cold rain from the Ohio Valley to the East Coast, and early season accumulating snow for the central Appalachians and the higher terrain of the interior Northeast,” NWS wrote in its latest forecast. 

    Weather forecaster Joe Bastardi posted an image on X of the latest computer model, which forecast heavy snow for high elevations in the Great Lakes and interior Northeast, especially for the central Appalachians. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Here’s what other meteorologists are saying… 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Since Sunday, we’ve been tracking this snow threat for the Ohio Valley to the Mid-Atlantic and Northeast.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    If models shift, we’ll update. Nothing is concrete at the moment.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 11/18/2024 – 17:20

  • Our Elections Are Not OK
    Our Elections Are Not OK

    Authored by Doug Truax via RealClearPolitics,

    On this very terrain, four years ago, I asserted that we can “never again” allow an election like 2020 to happen. I’m back to say that despite Trump’s near landslide, America’s election system is still broken.

    And the time to fix it is immediately, while President Trump has the wind at his back with a Republican Congress and the public on his side.

    You most clearly see a broken election system when the margins are extremely tight. We saw it in 2020 when approximately 40,000 votes in key states tipped the election, and not so much in 2024. But rest assured, the public still lacks confidence in the integrity of our elections, and rightly so. They are only partially transparent. The tools to cheat are still on the table and able to be used. This is a ticking time bomb that could throw America into chaos in a future close election.

    The main problems are ridiculously extended voting periods, mass absentee ballots, lack of voter ID, flimsy signature verification, unsecured drop boxes, voting machines with opaque software and connectivity to the internet, and sloppy, inaccurate voter rolls. We wouldn’t accept any of these third-world standards in our personal banking or accounting practices – why are we OK applying them to our precious votes?

    Under our Constitution, we entrust election administration to the states. Some, like Florida, run a tight, efficient ship, counting all votes on Election Day in a few hours and posting ballot movement online in real-time. The public trusts those results. Others, like Arizona, have created a bizarre process that takes days to count the ballots. Even if there is no fraud whatsoever, the public is distrustful of such a Byzantine system. It boggles the mind that in 2024, in the United States of America, we are still counting votes days and even weeks after the election in Arizona and several other states.

    The incoming Trump administration must make election integrity a top priority through federal legislation or persuading states to pass reforms. Standards such as voter ID, accurate and transparent voter rolls, and shortened voting periods should be emphasized publicly and perhaps incentivized by the federal government. There are constitutional issues at play here, but there are countervailing constitutional issues when blue states affect federal elections by relaxing their standards to enable cheating.

    We are at a crossroads. More people are using absentee ballots and getting used to them. However, as the Commission on Federal Election Reform, headed by Jimmy Carter and James Baker, concluded in 2005, mass absentee ballots invite voter fraud. Many other civilized countries agree – they ban them or sharply limit their use.

    Like with money or other valuables, flawed human beings will steal them if you don’t provide strict guardrails and safeguards. In one-party areas without oversight, partisans will be tempted to break the rules and steal votes if they think they can get away with it.

    Part of the reason there were fewer voting irregularities in 2024 compared to 2020 is that our organization and others dispatched tens of thousands of lawyers and volunteers to keep an eye on things. And, of course, it helped that the margin was “too big to rig” this time.

    Let’s act to close the gaping security holes so we can spend more time debating the issues rather than paying hundreds of lawyers. Our great country deserves a great election system. It is within our power to make it happen in 2025.

    Doug Truax is founder and CEO of Restoration of America, one of the most active and effective political organizations in America. He is a West Point graduate, successful entrepreneur, and former Army Ranger.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 11/18/2024 – 17:00

  • Baltic Undersea Data Cable 'Disruption' May Take Two Weeks To Repair
    Baltic Undersea Data Cable ‘Disruption’ May Take Two Weeks To Repair

    Update (1352ET): 

    Finnish networking company Cinia sheds more color on the mysterious “fault” detected in the Cinia C-Lion1 submarine cable between Finland and Germany:

    A fault has been detected in the Cinia Oy C-Lion1 submarine cable between Finland and Germany and corrective measures have been initiated.

    A fault has been detected in the Cinia Oy C-Lion1 submarine cable between Finland and Germany early after 4 a.m. on Monday 18th November, 2024. Due to the fault, the services provided over the C-Lion1 are down.

    The details of the fault are yet not known and are currently being investigated. Corrective measures have been initiated and the repair vessel is getting ready to go on the site. The exact repair time is not yet known, but typically the repair time for submarine cables is between 5 and 15 days.

    Finland’s international telecommunication connections are routed via multiple routes and the impact of a single cable failure depends on the resilience of the service providers’ connections.

    Some X users have pointed to a crude tanker as a potential suspect in the undersea cable disruption.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    *   *   * 

    Finnish networking company Cinia reports that its submarine communications cable, “C-Lion1,” which connects Finland and Germany and provides a direct, high-capacity data link between Northern and Central Europe, has encountered a “fault.”

    “A fault has been detected in the Cinia C-Lion1 submarine cable between Finland and Germany on  18 November, 2024. Due to the fault, the services provided over the C-Lion1 cable are down. The cause of the fault is being investigated. More information of the situation will be updated on Tuesday 19 November, 2024,” Cinia wrote in a statement on its website. 

    C-Lion1 is an undersea fiber cable between Rostock, Germany, and Helsinki, Finland, connecting businesses in central Europe with data centers in northern Europe. It was constructed in early 2016 and has a total capacity of 144 terabits per second, facilitating low latency and secure data transmission. 

    Cinia did not provide further details about the cause of the fault on C-Lion1 or if there were any disruptions in data communications.

    One X user speculated, “Potential cause of C-lion1 cable break The crude oil tanker Magic Lady on its way from St. Petersburg to Dakar, which behaved strangely 2024-11-18 10:23:17 UTC in the Baltic Sea.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    A little more than two years ago, in a similar area of the Baltic Sea, Russia’s Nord Stream undersea pipeline feeding Germany NatGas exploded. Russia’s Foreign Minister Sergei Lavrov has stated that the US ordered the attack on the vital pipeline.

    *Developing… 

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 11/18/2024 – 16:52

  • Berkeley Communists Call For "Righteous Anger & Revolutionary Determination" Against MAGA 
    Berkeley Communists Call For “Righteous Anger & Revolutionary Determination” Against MAGA 

    The Revolutionary Communist Party USA, led by Bob Avakian, is outraged that their Marxist-aligned allies within the Democratic Party were defeated in the presidential election by the nation-loving, God-fearing Trump-Vance ticket.

    Now, the communists are calling for “righteous anger and revolutionary determination,” as their efforts to shape policy outcomes and push for a socialist reconstruction in America will be temporarily derailed under Trump’s upcoming second term. 

    X user Andy Ngo shared an image of a flyer stapled to a telephone pole in Berkeley, California, calling for a communist workshop to plan a revolution against “Trump fascism.”

    “Two Countries” Within This Country—And The Whole Damn System’s Got To Go!” the title of the poster reads. It states there will be an in-person meeting to plan for revolution at a Berkeley bookshop on Sunday evening and a Zoom meeting on Tuesday.

    A QR code attached to the flyer led folks back to Bob Avakian’s Substack. He stated the group’s intent: 

    “This is not a time for demoralization and despair—it is a time for righteous anger and revolutionary determination.”  

    Other revolutionary communists promoted the upcoming meeting, indicating an “urgent call” for “revolution against Trump fascism and the whole system.”

    On election night, anarchists, communists, and other socialists in the Antifa group were activated in downtown Seattle, sparking mayhem.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 11/18/2024 – 16:40

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Nov 18

Today’s News 18th November 2024

  • 'Left Is A Vicious Wounded Tiger' – Larry Klayman Warns "They Want Us Dead"
    ‘Left Is A Vicious Wounded Tiger’ – Larry Klayman Warns “They Want Us Dead”

    ViaGreg Hunter’s USAWatchdog.com,

    Renowned Attorney Larry Klayman, founder of Judicial Watch and later Freedom Watch, has been fighting government corruption and winning for decades. 

    Today, the fight has turned into an all-out war and fight to the death.  Klayman explains, “Bottom line is we have been in a war, but now we are at red alert…”

    ”  The fact that Donald Trump has been reelected the 47th President of the United States with the popular vote and an overwhelming landslide in the Electoral College, the Left is on the run, but it’s stung.  It’s like a wounded tiger.  It’s vicious.  It will fight back…

    You are going to see the Left in the streets, ultimately.  It will probably be in days, if not weeks.  You are going to see a repeat of what we saw with Black Lives Matter, ANTIFA, radical Palestinians and others.  They are going to be coming for us.  

    Frankly, and this sounds extreme, we saw the assassination attempts… and Kamala Harris and Biden calling Trump Hitler, calling them garbage and calling us garbage, they want us dead.  Let me repeat that.  They want us dead…They are like rats leaving the ship. 

    The time to peacefully and legally crush them is now.”

    Klayman also sees that things may not stay peaceful. 

    Klayman points out, “It’s only a matter of time because they are whipping up the hatred right now against all of us garbage men…”

    ”  It’s only a matter of time that he (President Trump) may have to declare martial law to reestablish order here.  I hope it doesn’t get to that.  But he (the President) has that authority as well. 

    So, I want people to realize that there may be a calm in the storm right now, but the communists, the atheists, the radicals and the Left are coalescing.  They are plotting, and they are planning. 

    This is like the ‘Force’ in ‘Star Wars’ and ‘Darth Vader.’  They intend to come back anyway they can. 

    If they can’t do it peacefully and legally, which they can’t, they are going to get violent, and we better be prepared for that.”

    Klayman also points out that President Trump cannot turn America around without the help of millions of patriots.  Klayman says,

    “He needs us to back him.  We need to fight for him if necessary.  Here’s the scary thing.  God forbid, but I don’t think this is the last assassination attempt.  I think there will be more. . . . This kid that took a crack at Trump in Butler, we don’t know what his motive was today. . . . We’ve never gotten the truth about anything. 

    We don’t know who killed John F. Kennedy.  Even Bobby Kennedy Jr. does not believe that Sirhan Sirhan killed his father. 

    Martin Luther King’s family does not believe that James Earl Ray was the assassin of Martin Luther King.  It was probably Edgar Hoover the FBI Director. . . .

    We don’t know anything about the two people that tried to assassinate Donald Trump because our government is corrupt to the core, and that is why the Left is going to resist.  Our government needs to be reconstituted.  Embedded in government is the Deep State, and it is more powerful than the President.”

    Klayman is appealing to the incoming Trump Administration to make him the Czar in charge of picking judicial appointments. 

    Klayman says too many RINO judges were put on the bench during Trump’s first Administration.

    Klayman is also representing Laura Loomer in a $150 million defamation lawsuit against HBO and Bill Maher.  Klayman is also the lawyer of record on many other groundbreaking cases.  Klayman also talks about the need for donations as the 2024 Election cycle took donations away from FreedomWatchUSA.org.  Klayman makes an appeal for badly needed funds so he can continue his work for “We the People” against government corruption.

    There is much more in the one-hour in-depth interview.

    Join Greg Hunter as he goes One-on-One with renowned lawyer and government corruption fighter, Larry Klayman, founder of FreedomWatchUSA.org as he lays out the evil that criminals on the Left and RINO’s are planning for America.

    *  *  *

    To Donate to FreedomWatchUSA.org so Larry Klayman can hire more attorneys to fight for the rights of all Americans being attacked by tyrannical dark forces on the Left, click here.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 11/17/2024 – 23:20

  • Violent Venezuelan Gang Tren De Aragua Resurfaces In Tennessee
    Violent Venezuelan Gang Tren De Aragua Resurfaces In Tennessee

    The notorious Venezuelan gang Tren De Aragua (TDA) has taken root in Tennessee’s major cities, bringing its brutal brand of crime and violence to the Volunteer State, Tennessee Bureau of Investigation (TBI) Director David Rausch warned this week during a budget hearing with Governor Bill Lee.

    Tren de Aragua tattoos on a man arrested by the Border Patrol.
    -U.S. Border Patrol

    According to Rausch, the violent gang known for its brazen disregard for law enforcement, has returned to Memphis, Nashville, Knoxville, and Chattanooga – Tennessee’s four largest cities – after first being detected two years ago during a human trafficking bust.

    “We uncovered a group here in a human trafficking operation, and in that operation we recognized a number of the members here trafficking females that they had abducted from Venezuela and brought here,” Rausch said.

    While initial arrests scattered some members of the gang, Rausch said they are now back and expanding their operations.

    “Now what we are seeing is they are back,” Rausch continued. “They are running human trafficking operations. That’s where they start.”

    Human Trafficking to Drug Wars: A Deadly Evolution

    According to Rausch, TDA has a pattern of establishing themselves through human trafficking, then moving into organized retail theft and eventually drug trafficking, which often leads to bloody turf wars with other criminal organizations, including drug cartels.

    “They have a pathway of violence, and we want people to be aware of that,” Rausch cautioned. “They will battle for the drug trafficking in communities.”

    Tattoos on the neck of a man the U.S. Border Patrol arrested in May. It says the man is affiliated with the Venezuela-based gang Tren de Aragua.U.S. Border Patrol

    The gang’s reputation for extreme violence sets it apart, with members showing little fear of taking on law enforcement.

    “They are very violent toward policing – they have no respect for law enforcement” Rausch said. “They will fight, and they will attack police.”

    A Border Crisis with Local Consequences

    Governor Lee responded to Rausch’s warning by emphasizing the broader implications of gang activity linked to border security.

    “The border crisis is exactly why Americans voted for change. It’s not political—it’s about safety and security,” Lee said in a post on X (formerly Twitter) on Nov. 15. “Tennessee will support [President-Elect Donald Trump] as he secures our border while delivering key resources for [the TBI] to stop illegal criminals from operating in our state.”

    Rausch later released a video statement urging Tennesseans to stay vigilant, though he reassured residents that they need not fear imminent danger in their neighborhoods.

    “We want the public to be diligent as always in paying attention in their communities for signs of things like human trafficking,” Rausch said, pointing citizens to resources for identifying and reporting suspicious activity.

    A National Threat

    Rausch also noted that TDA’s presence isn’t limited to Tennessee. During meetings with the Association of State Criminal Investigative Agencies, other states reported similar encounters with the gang, further underscoring the nationwide nature of the threat.

    “They are all over the place, governor, it’s not just Tennessee,” Rausch said. “This is not a unique situation.”

    The TBI has ramped up efforts to monitor the gang, sharing intelligence with local law enforcement agencies and educating police on how to identify and approach gang members. However, Rausch acknowledged that some local departments might not yet realize TDA is operating in their jurisdictions.

    “There are times where they may be unaware of actors that may be moving in and out of their area that we are tracking,” Rausch said.

    Stopping the Violence Before It Spreads

    Rausch’s priority is clear: halt TDA’s operations before they escalate into full-scale violence.

    “What we don’t want to happen is to see them move into those next phases,” Rausch stated. “We want to stop them where they are right now, and that’s why we’re raising the issue.”

    With the TBI on high alert and the governor promising resources, Tennessee is bracing itself for the fight against Tren De Aragua, a gang that thrives on chaos but may have underestimated the resolve of its new battleground.

    The Epoch Times contributed to this report

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 11/17/2024 – 22:45

  • Dems Are Trying To Push Through Extreme Leftist Judicial Candidates Before January
    Dems Are Trying To Push Through Extreme Leftist Judicial Candidates Before January

    Authored by Steve Watson via Modernity.news,

    Democrats’ days in power are numbered.

    As a result they are desperately trying to push through radical leftist activists as judicial nominees before January 3rd.

    One example is United States Magistrate Judge Mustafa T. Kasubhai of Oregon, who appeared last week before the Senate Judiciary Committee.

    Democrats have been trying to get this guy on the federal bench for over a year, and here’s an example of why.

    He wants people in his courtroom to announce their pronouns.

    Senator John Kennedy called Kasubhai out on it in a hearing this week, noting “I’m looking at the requirement that you issued to all people in your court. You say, “When you introduce yourself in a meeting, you should say, ‘My name is Judge ___ and my pronouns are ___.’”

    Is that right?

    While Kasubhai claimed “It’s an invitation for people to identify their pronouns or their honorifics,” and not a requirement, it seems like he made it pretty requirementy.

    Kennedy continued, “you also, in your directive, say, ‘I’d like counsel to introduce themselves giving your full name and your honorific, such as Ms., Mx,, or Mr.’”

    When Kennedy said Mx and then repeated it, Senator Tom Cotton cracked up at the ridiculousness of it.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Americans have rejected this complete nonsense, now Democrats are desperately trying to get its proponents into positions they can still exploit.

     

    *  *  *

    Your support is crucial in helping us defeat mass censorship. Please consider donating via Locals or check out our unique merch. Follow us on X @ModernityNews.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 11/17/2024 – 22:10

  • Live ZH Debate: MAGA Takeover Or Israel First? Blumenthal Vs. Beattie To Clash Over Trump Appointments
    Live ZH Debate: MAGA Takeover Or Israel First? Blumenthal Vs. Beattie To Clash Over Trump Appointments

    Join us on Monday at 7pm ET for a live debate with Grayzone editor-in-chief Max Blumenthal and Revolver News founder Darren Beattie, moderated by the Judge Andrew Napolitano.

    Regarding Trump’s cabinet, Blumenthal – veteran journalist and infamous DC dissident – is concerned about mounting Israeli influence, which has manifested in hawkish foreign policy picks like Pete Hegseth for SecDef, Marco Rubio for State, and fanatically Zionist ambassadors Stenafik/Huckabee.

    ​While Beattie – known for his dogged reporting into federal involvement on Jan 6 – adovocated for Trump’s appointees to be confirmed by “any means necessary” because they represent a dramatic realignment of Washington’s status quo. And after all, Trump is pissing off the right people…

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Despite this, Blumenthal is not optimistic that a second Trump admin will be truly sovereign but captured the donor class and foreign interests. More troubling indications are on the horizon with future rumored personnel, such as Sebastian “gay whale” Gorka (as Alex Jones calls him):

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.jshttps://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    As the fight to influence the big man intensifies, hear from both sides: Trump’s former speech writer and one of America’s sharpest foreign policy blob critics.

    Our panelists will cover all major cabinet appointees. Including those deemed by warmonger John “we know where your kids live” Bolton to be the “worst nomination for a cabinet position in American history.”:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    We look forward to hearing criticisms from people who haven’t destroyed entire countries.

    Join us at 7 PM eastern on the ZeroHedge homepage and X account.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 11/17/2024 – 21:35

  • Whoopie Goldberg Faces Backlash After Smearing Staten Island Bakery
    Whoopie Goldberg Faces Backlash After Smearing Staten Island Bakery

    Authored by Debra Heine via American Greatness,

    “The View” co-host Whoopi Goldberg is under fire after accusing the owner of an iconic Staten Island bakery of refusing to serve her cupcakes because of her far-left views.

    Goldberg complained during the daytime liberal women’s talk show Wednesday that Holtermann’s Bakery wouldn’t sell her the popular Charlotte Russe desserts she wanted for her 69th birthday because of her “politics.”

    She told the audience that the push-pop style confections were a favorite of her mother’s when she was growing up.

    “Now, I should tell you, Charlotte Russe has no political leanings, and the place that made these refused to make them for me,” Goldberg said, prompting horrified gasps from the audience and co-hosts.

    “They said that their ovens had gone down, all kinds of stuff, but folks went and got them anyway,” Whoopie continued, adding without evidence, “they did not like my politics.”

    While Whoopie did not name the shop, it was later identified by Entertainment Weekly as Holtermann’s Bakery on Staten Island, a longstanding family-owned establishment loved by locals.

    Jill Holtermann, who owns the bakery, told Entertainment Weekly that “it was not because of political” reasons, but because “we were having trouble with our boilers.”

    “I said to Whoopi, ‘I can’t do it right now,’” she told the outlet.

    “‘We have so many things going on with my boiler,’ because the building is from 1930, so, when she called me, I had no idea [if we could] be baking everything.”

    Holtermann acknowledged that she ultimately was able to make 50 of the treats, and that they were picked up early Wednesday morning for “The View’s” taping. Whoopie had planned to give them out to the audience as part of her birthday celebration.

    She reiterated that her reluctance to confirm the order had nothing to do with Goldberg’s political beliefs, saying: “I didn’t want to make a commitment that I can’t carry through,” given the technical issues.

    On Thursday, loyal customers in the community reportedly flooded the bakery to show support.

    “A steady stream of shoppers came and went from Holtermann’s on Thursday, toting bags full of cupcakes, pies, cakes and pastries from the bakery, which customers said has never shown or expressed a preference for any political candidate,” the New York Post reported.

    The brouhaha had still had not died down by Friday, with Holtermann holding a press conference flanked by local elected officials to refute Goldberg’s claims.

    Staten Island Borough President Vito Fossella defended the business and explained what happened.

    “It’s been here 145 years. They had a boiler that was 60 or 70 years old. And the first week in November, guess what? It went on the fritz,” Fossella said.

    “They had it replaced. And the reputation of Holtermann’s is impeccable, so rather than commit to something they couldn’t guarantee, they said, ‘we can’t do it.’ And the person who besmirched, defamed them, took that as an insult to her. Well, get over it. This family will be here for, God willing, another 145 years.”

    “We’re here to have Holtermann’s Bakery’s back,” said Councilman David Carr.

    “Because the Holtermann family generationally has had the backs of this community.”

    Carr said he was happy to see so many supporters there “to send a message to the person who decided that she was too important for a boiler breakdown.”

    Holtermann thanked the community for its support and tearfully described how she had been bombarded with calls since Whoopie had made the comments.

    “I’m so overwhelmed by the support. Between finding out yesterday, this even happened, getting phone calls and then people coming in and people from all over just supporting us in every way,” she said. “The support has been so overwhelming and I know how hard my family has worked to keep this business alive.”

    Some have said that the fact that Goldberg did not name Holtermann’s Bakery means she cannot be sued; but Jonathan Turley says, that is wrong.

    There are two reasons cited for why Goldberg cannot be sued.

    Her refusal to name the bakery (which she portrayed as a way of denying them favorable publicity since they eventually got the cakes) and that she used the word “perhaps” in her accusation.

    The Name Game

    The failure to name a party in an otherwise defamatory context is not a defense to defamation.

    The strongest and easiest cases to make on defamation are those fitting into a per se category of defamation like calling someone falsely a criminal or the carrier of an infectious disease. Damages in such cases are often presumed.

    Other cases are called per quod cases where the harm and damages are not immediately evident or presumed. Rather than be libelous on their face, per quod cases must often be proven through use of extrinsic facts or evidence. In such cases, you need to prove special damages.

    It is worth noting that the implied accusation against the bakery could fit into a per se category of impugning business or professional integrity. Goldberg’s statement was clearly meant to impugn the reputation and professional standing of the bakery. It can be argued as defamatory per se by implication.

    The fact that Goldberg identified the bakery only as a local bakery associated with these cakes is not a defense. The identity of the bakery was quickly deduced and published widely.

    “Perhaps” Defamation

    Goldberg could also claim that using the word “perhaps” reduced the statement to a mere opinion. This is a common misunderstanding. Often people will say “in my opinion” and then follow with a defamatory statement. It is not treated as an opinion if it is stated as a fact.

    Clearly, a statement of opinion alone is not actionable when “the facts on which they are based are fully and accurately set forth and  it is clear . . . that the accusation is merely a personal surmise built upon those facts.” Gross v. New York Times Co., 623 N.E.2d 1163, 1169 (N.Y. 1993).

    New York courts look to whether a reasonable person would consider the statement to be conveying a fact. Davis v. Boeheim, 22 N.E.3d 999, 1005 (N.Y. 2014) Moreover,  “[r]ather than sifting through a communication for the purpose of isolating and identifying assertions of fact, the court should look to the over-all context in which the assertions were made,” including the forum, to determine how a reasonable reader would view them.” Brian v. Richardson, 660 N.E.2d 1126, 1130 (N.Y. 1995).

    Moreover, “an opinion that implies that it is based upon facts which justify the opinion but are unknown to those reading or hearing it… is a mixed opinion” and is actionable. Bacon v Nygard, 189 A.D.3d 530, 530 (1st Dept 2020).

    Goldberg was clearly trying to convey that the bakery imposes a political litmus test or engages in political discriminatory practices against Democrats, Trump critics, or liberals. That can have an obviously harmful impact on business for the family-owned bakery.

    Even if the bakery had to show malice (of a knowing falsehood or reckless disregard of the truth), it would have a cognizable basis for such a claim against Goldberg and ABC.

    It would not be the first time that they had to make such a correction and the audience of the The View does not appear to care about such false or unsupported claims.

    In one such incident, Turning Point USA issued a cease and desist letter to ABC after the hosts suggested that it allowed neo-Nazis to join an event. In discussing Turning Point USA’s summit in Florida, host Joy Behar said “Neo-Nazis were out there in the front of the conference with antisemitic slurs and … the Nazi swastika and a picture of a so-called Jewish person with exaggerated features, just like Goebbels did during the Third Reich. It’s the same thing, right out of the same playbook.”

    Whoopi Goldberg, then added, in reference to Turning Point USA, “you let them in and you knew what they were, so you are complicit.”

    ABC then had the hosts issue an on-air apology. However, they had host Sara Haines do it: “We want to make clear that these demonstrators were outside the event and that they were not invited or endorsed by Turning Point USA.” She added “the hosts apologize for “anything we said that may have been unclear on these points.”

    Obviously, it would be up to a jury to balance the earlier standards and the evidence in this case. However, a case could be made for defamation and a court could find that the matter should be left to the fact finder at trial. Goldberg and ABC would be wise to apologize on the air to the bakery on Monday.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 11/17/2024 – 21:00

  • Pritzker Appoints Himself As Democracy's Superhero
    Pritzker Appoints Himself As Democracy’s Superhero

    By Mark Glennon of Wirepoints

    It would be comically hypocritical if weren’t so tragically destructive. Illinois governor JB Pritzker last week appointed himself co-chair of a new group to save democracy.

    It’s called Governors Safeguarding Democracy, formed to counter the incoming Trump Administration and Republican Congress. “What we’re doing is pushing back against increasing threats of autocracy and fortifying the institutions of democracy that our country and our states depend upon,” Pritzker said of the effort. “I’ve said it once, and I’ll say it again: No attempts to restrict the freedoms and opportunities of Illinoisans will be tolerated.”

    No governor in memory in any state has thumbed his nose at democratic norms and constitutional rights more consistently and flagrantly than has Pritzker. Examples of how Pritzker earned his reputation as a “hard-left culture warrior who is happy to silence political opponents,” as the Wall Street Journal put it, are too numerous to fully list here, but consider a few:

    • Through 43 consecutive, monthly emergency orders, he suspended ordinary government function and ruled by executive fiat, trampling on a list of constitutional rights, justified through censorship and suppression of opposing scientific views. Similarly, he issued 38 consecutive emergency orders enforcing his personal decisions about assistance and protection for illegal immigrants.
    • He says he wants there to be a legal cause of action against anybody who says something false, which would be a flagrant violation of established First Amendment law.
    • He has signed off on multiple policies and bills that violate constitutional rights to free speech, such as Illinois’ new law banning discussion of political or religious matters at company meetings, now being challenged in federal court. Another example is a Pritzker-signed law attempting to muzzle pro-lifers that was ridiculed by a federal court as “stupid” as well as unconstitutional, prompting Attorney General Kwame Raoul to give up trying to defend the law.
    • He stood aside while his party’s operatives filed lawsuits to keep Donald Trump and Robert F. Kennedy, Jr. off the ballot for the presidential election.
    • He meddled in a Republican primary by contributing $24 million that was used, successfully, to achieve the nomination of who Pritzker thought would be a weak opponent, Darren Bailey, in his race for governor.
    • Even the Democratically slanted Illinois courts couldn’t accept a law Pritzker signed earlier this year attempting to knock only Republican candidates off the ballot through a retroactive change in slating procedures. The Illinois Supreme Court in August upheld a lower court ruling that the law flatly violated the constitutional right to vote.
    • Most importantly, nearly every major element of the policy agenda successfully implemented by Pritzker and his supermajority of allies in the General Assembly has no popular support. Thanks to the most gerrymandered election maps in the nation (which Pritzker signed off on in violation of campaign promises), Pritzker’s millions spent on elections and general mastery of the election process, we have an overwhelmingly undemocratic result.

    Think about that last one. Poll after poll says Illinoisans want things like school choice, smaller budgets, lower taxes, biological men out of women’s sports, political indoctrination removed from classrooms and a balanced energy policy that includes fossil fuels and rejects the goal of 100% renewable energy.  They want violent criminals prosecuted. They opposed the SAFE-T Act and don’t like gender transformation for minors. But Pritzker and his allies have delivered the opposite of all that. Illinois is a moderate state where corrupted democracy has somehow delivered radicalism.

    Most relevant to Pritzker’s new effort, the public overwhelmingly opposes sanctuary and welcoming policies for illegal immigrants, which Pritzker intends to use as a centerpiece in “safeguarding democracy.” Even in Chicago, most voters want sanctuary policies ended and the border enforced. Yet Pritzker said, in response to the Republican election sweep, that if “they come for my people they come through me.”

    Pritzker’s new campaign may lift his standing with the far left, but what will it mean for Illinois?

    Billions of dollars in annual federal assistance and grants will now be at risk. Donald Trump is nothing if not vindictive and Republicans, who will control both houses of Congress, will be in no mood to help a governor who has called them fascists, among countless other things.

    Less tangible but equally sad is the other effect of Pritzker’s campaign, which will be more hostility and division. Most of us long for a return to a normal level of collegiality and cooperation among lawmakers, but that’s obviously not in Pritzker’s agenda.

    So far, Pritzker does not appear to be having much luck enlisting other progressive governors. Only Pritzker’s co-chair, Jared Polis of Colorado, appears to be a member. That surely says something.

    Progressive governors who so far have expressly declined to join are Michigan’s Gretchen Whitmer, Arizona’s Katie Hobbs and Massachusetts’ Maura Healey, Kentucky’s Andy Beshear, New Mexico’s Michelle Lujan and Pennsylvania’s Josh Shapiro. California’s Governor Gavin Newsom has not yet indicated he will join the group. Maybe even they they know that a truly democratic process would not produce what Pritzker wants.

    In a couple months, we will hear Pritzker’s plan to deal with projected budget deficits totaling $22 billion over the next five years. Chicago already faces a budget deficit of a billion dollars. Same for the school district for another billion. Transit authorities there face deficits totaling over $700 million. Expect no help from Washington.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 11/17/2024 – 19:50

  • India Announces 'Historic' Long-Range Hypersonic Missile Test Flight
    India Announces ‘Historic’ Long-Range Hypersonic Missile Test Flight

    India has announced what it is describing as its first successful test of a long-range hypersonic missile, which occurred Saturday night.

    India’s defense ministry said it was launched from Abdul Kalam Island off the coast of the eastern state of Odisha. “The flight data obtained from down range ship stations confirmed the successful terminal maneuvers and impact with high degree of accuracy,” a statement said.

    “India has achieved a major milestone by successfully conducting flight trial of long range hypersonic missile,” Minister of Defence Rajnath Singh said, hailing it as historic.

    For decades, India has feared a multi-front war with China and Pakistan. By modernizing its military, along with investments in nuclear weapons and hypersonic missiles, New Delhi could be on a pathway to deter or manage conflict with either one of its nuclear-armed neighbors. 

    What is clear is that with this long-range, hypersonic test, India joins a small group of nations who possess and are capable of successfully deploying such advanced missiles. 

    Singh boasted of this in his statement, saying India is now among “select nations having capabilities of such critical and advanced military technologies.” The United States, Russia, and China also possess them.

    One Indian defense analyst, Ranjit Kumar, has told a regional publication:

    “(The) hypersonic missile will add more teeth to the Indian missile firepower. (The) Indian Armed Forces already possess over 300 km range (supersonic) Brahmos cruise missile and over 5,000 km range Agni-V intercontinental ballistic missile, but the latest, over 1,500 km range hypersonic missile will … give more confidence to the Indian military to be able to hit the target with sure success.”

    “At a time when India is surrounded with adversaries possessing long-range ballistic missiles, the latest hypersonic missile will deter them from launching a preemptive strike on Indian locations,” the Indian military expert continued.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    All nuclear armed powers in the region routinely flex their military might. For example, this week China hosted a huge airshow which showcased the significant capabilities of its J-35A stealth fighter jet, alongside various attack drones.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 11/17/2024 – 19:15

  • US Obesity Levels Are Particularly Severe
    US Obesity Levels Are Particularly Severe

    In most OECD countries that collect self-reported weight data, more than half of adults are overweight or obese (2023 or latest available data).

    However, as Statista’s Anna Fleck reports, obesity prevalence was particularly high in the United States, with just over a third of respondents saying that they are obese in 2023.

    Infographic: Obesity Rates Around the World | Statista

    You will find more infographics at Statista

    In Chile and the United Kingdom rates were just above one in four, while Korea had the lowest share of people with obesity of the countries studied at just 4.9 percent.

    According to the World Health Organization, a body mass index (BMI) of over 25 is considered overweight, and over 30 obese.

    Obesity is linked to a range of health issues such as type 2 diabetes, cardiovascular diseases, and several common cancers. Although awareness is increasing around the topic, obesity is still often misunderstood due to misconceptions of it being solely due to poor lifestyle choices, whereas factors such as genetic predisposition and environmental influences are also important.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 11/17/2024 – 18:05

  • 3D Chess Or 52-Card Pickup
    3D Chess Or 52-Card Pickup

    By Peter Tchir of Academy Securities

    3D Chess or 52-Card Pickup?

    3D Chess always makes me think of Star Trek and wonder who the heck thinks that we need a game more complex than chess? 52-Card Pickup is a game most frequently played by siblings, and even then, only once or twice. Typically, the older sibling asks the younger one if they want to play 52-card pickup. Without knowing the game, but excited that their older sibling wants to do anything with them, the younger one instantly agrees. At which point the older sibling throws a deck of cards across the room and yells – there you go, 52-card pickup!

    Depending on who you listen to, talk to, or follow, in its first full week, the Trump team is either playing an incredible game of 3D Chess, or is playing the equivalent of 52-Card Pickup with the nation.

    It is far too early to say which side is right, and the final answer will likely fall somewhere in the middle. Having said that, there are a few things that have come up consistently in meetings, calls, and interactions with clients.

    • There are various processes in place to effectively protect the system. Could they be bypassed by using Recess Appointments? I have to admit that Congress getting recess, like schoolchildren, has always amused me, but recess appointments would be a very aggressive tactic. They allow Trump to bypass the confirmation process (for up to a year) for some positions, presumably the most difficult/contentious ones. For some reason, this is also “part of the system and process,” so someone must have thought that there was a need for this. To me, this, like many things (including the 2+ month timeframe between the election and the inauguration) is likely a function of how difficult it was to travel across the country back in the day. It will be interesting to see how the appointments go, to say the least.

    • If you are going to try to radically change D.C., often described as “draining the swamp,” it does make sense that non-traditional candidates would be selected. Yes, there are people with more experience than some of the nominees, but are they too close to the system to try and change it?

    • D.O.G.E (the Department of Government Efficiency) has generated a lot of buzz. It seems to be the one thing that everyone is curious about and wants to see how it all plays out (even with a tinge of optimism that some spending can be cut without reducing or hurting services). It is also quite clear that Musk, one of the richest people on the planet, will play a major role in this administration, as a key advisor to President-Elect Trump.

    Thinking about this dovetails well with last weekend’s Learning to Speak Trump Again. For better or worse, we should expect D.C. headlines to continue to create volatility for the markets.

    Having said that:

    • The 10-year Treasury is back to 4.44%, basically where it closed on November 7th. We’ve had some pretty big swings on a daily and even intraday basis, but wound up unchanged. I remain firmly in the camp that the deficit fears (and concerns about inflation from tariffs) are more than priced in right now.

    • The S&P 500 and Nasdaq 100 are both below where they closed on November 7th (for all the “growth” hype, that certainly grabs your attention). Maybe even more surprising, given the attention, is that the Russell 2000 is back to below its November 7th close, having dropped over 5% since it hit a high on Monday (maybe a good reminder that equity markets should shut down along with the bond market on Veterans Day).

    • Gold was strong into the election, but has faded hard since then. Copper, which should benefit from growth if the “Dr. Copper” people are correct, is down over 12% since the start of the month. Oil has struggled, but energy stocks have done well, with XLE holding onto its gains. This makes some sense (see “Drill Baby Drill” from Fox Business this summer) as energy production should increase, helping to keep energy prices at bay, but creating some potentially strong profit growth.

    • Bitcoin. Bitcoin has been incredibly strong. Yes, some volatility, but it has clung to the idea that a Trump administration will be very positive for crypto in general and Bitcoin (and Dogecoin) in particular. Given how many of the people in Trump’s inner circle are very positive on Bitcoin, it makes sense. On the other hand, Trump doesn’t control Bitcoin at all, and he does seem to like to control things, which may tarnish his current love affair over time. Also, for all the chatter about the U.S. government building up a “Bitcoin reserve” (it is hard to miss it, if you spend any time at all on X), I have not heard from anyone that this is really feasible. Most, which includes me, think that there will be an immense amount of resistance to government adoption (yes on clearer and helpful rules and regulations, but no on adoption by the government). You cannot fight this rally right now and maybe it is 3D Chess being played out, but it has the smell of 52-Card Pickup to me.

    • Many of the Commercial Real Estate ETFs have done poorly. In some cases, they are much closer to their annual lows than highs, even as stocks in general perform well. I think that this is actually a very interesting opportunity as yield fears are overdone, and Work From Home is really going to struggle next year. More and more companies are limiting work from home as they push for a return to the office. That momentum feeds on itself. Many who were afraid to push for work from office will be emboldened. I cannot see a world where the Department of Government Efficiency (I’m not sure it is an actual department, but that doesn’t really matter given the attention that it’s getting) won’t be looking at getting more government workers back into the office. Everyone has focused on the potential for layoffs dragging down D.C.-focused real estate valuations, but I think that net/net over time, it will turn out to be good for D.C. commercial real estate. I see CRE as where I have the biggest difference of opinion with consensus views right now.

    One Chart That I Cannot Stop Thinking About

    We included this chart in our NFP reaction, but I feel a sense of urgency to highlight it again. Maybe this is our attempt to play 3D Chess, or maybe we are getting ourselves overly wound up about a non-event. Since we often discuss how dubious the Jobs Available calculation is for the JOLTS report, it may seem weird that the QUIT rate, from that same report, has grabbed our attention. My take on the QUIT rate is that it is “crowd sourced” data. Every individual has a pretty good idea about their own job prospects and that gets reflected in the QUIT rate.

    During the financial crisis, the QUIT rate didn’t get this low until May 2008. If I remember correctly, we technically were not in a recession at the time, and only later did the powers that be declare that we actually were in a recession. That fits with my view that this rate is important and may have a predictive element to it.

    I certainly think that when anyone and everyone felt like they could quit and get a better job, it was extremely difficult for management to take away work from home. I suspect that plans to offer severance packages to reduce the workforce voluntarily (one idea floated around by DOGE) won’t be that effective when workers don’t see outside opportunities readily available (that is my interpretation of the QUIT rate).

    If we see a lot of progress made on the “Make America Great” front, this could change abruptly. There might be plenty of new jobs created. There might be jobs that were being done by undocumented workers becoming available. A lot could happen, but so far, I think the outlook on jobs is following the same path as stocks – initial jubilation has turned into a wariness about what might actually be achievable, let alone accomplished.

    Bottom Line

    Expect more volatility. We are going to get headlines and announcements that are difficult to interpret. What do they really mean? How likely is it to get accomplished? We know this administration is looking for CHANGE, but exactly what type of change they want is still a bit unclear in many areas. What they can achieve is even more unclear.

    There is a clear sense of “urgency” as I cannot recollect any other election winner coming out so quickly with so many announcements!

    I think we want to “fade” growth. We can buy dips in Treasuries and sell rips in stocks.

    Maybe we will get a clearer picture, but I suspect in the coming days and weeks, the market will have more questions than answers. The fact that the original reaction to the election was so strong (with so many shorts being taken out, and so many newly minted bulls emerging) leaves us with potentially treacherous positioning. While legend has it that Wall Street likes to Climb a Wall of Worry, I don’t think it likes the current level of uncertainty. Maybe it is all 3D Chess, and we are just too naïve to see the master plan, or maybe we are all seeing enough things to question how effective this master plan will be?

    While I like being overweight duration and underweight equities, I would not be a very aggressive overweight or underweight. It is more of an attempt to trade the volatility that is likely to continue.

    On Bitcoin, if I hear one more $1 million price target, my head might explode, but for now, I can’t think of what will slow this down given the team around Trump, but then again, Trump himself might say something showing that he has had a change of heart (which is what I suspect will happen, but it seems too early for that to occur).

    I did not focus on inflation, jobs, or other economic data (except to highlight the QUIT rate). I think that the data of the past few months will likely be irrelevant early next year as policies become clear and we can focus on what those policies will do to the economic data, and not worry about economic data that probably reflects a set of policies that will no longer be relevant.

    We do get the most important earnings report for the AI story this week. Everything seems rosy in the space, but it is increasingly difficult to guess what has already been priced in.

    Good luck and don’t stray too far from the desk, because you never know what headline might come out next! If you missed our Around the World Podcast from earlier in the week, it is a good listen.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 11/17/2024 – 17:30

  • Cars, Meds, Oil, & Tech: America's Main Imports
    Cars, Meds, Oil, & Tech: America’s Main Imports

    Economic history has shown that, as an economy develops, so does its service sector. This is certainly true for the United States, one of the most highly developed countries in the world and certainly a service economy.

    As Statista’s Felix Richter details below, according to the U.S. Bureau of Labor Statistics, service-providing jobs account for more than 70 percent of nonfarm payrolls in the country, while goods-producing jobs account for less than 15 percent of jobs. In the 1940s, both sectors were tied at little above 40 percent, with government jobs accounting for the remainder of jobs.

    There are two main reasons for this shift: productivity gains and globalization. As capital and goods began flowing freely across borders, it became cheaper to produce goods in parts of the world with lower labor costs and import them. This is how the United States gradually moved away from producing goods and how China became the world’s manufacturing hub, making anything from smartphones to television sets.

    Last year, the United States imported around $3.1 trillion worth of goods, with Mexico, China and Canada accounting for more than 40 percent of that total. Among the top imported goods are cars, pharmaceuticals and all kinds of technology, be it smartphones, computers or semiconductors.

    Infographic: Cars, Meds, Oil and Tech: America's Main Imports | Statista

    You will find more infographics at Statista

    Experts have warned that all of these products would likely become significantly more expensive if president-elect Donald Trump went through with his proposed tariff plans.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 11/17/2024 – 16:55

  • In Their Final Meeting, Xi Tells Biden China Is "Ready to Work" With Trump Administration
    In Their Final Meeting, Xi Tells Biden China Is “Ready to Work” With Trump Administration

    By Ryan Morgan and Emel Akan of The Epoch Times

    President Joe Biden met with Chinese leader Xi Jinping on Saturday for their final in-person meeting of Biden’s presidency. During their discussion, which lasted one hour and 40 minutes, Xi expressed China’s readiness to work with the incoming U.S. administration.

    The meeting took place on the sidelines of the Asia-Pacific Economic Cooperation (APEC) summit in Lima, Peru, at the hotel where Xi was staying.

    During his opening remarks, Xi told Biden, “The United States has recently concluded its elections. China’s goal of a stable, healthy, and sustainable China–U.S. relationship remains unchanged.”

    “China is ready to work with the new U.S. administration to maintain communication, expand cooperation, and manage differences, so as to strive for a steady transition of the China–U.S. relationship for the benefit of the two peoples.”

    White House national security adviser Jake Sullivan told reporters after the meeting that Biden and Xi covered a wide range of issues, describing their discussion as “candid” and “constructive.”

    Biden told Xi that “he has worked hard to responsibly manage the competition” with China for the past four years to prevent it from spiraling into conflict, Sullivan said.

    Both leaders are committed to responsibly managing this relationship during the critical transition period, he added.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The two leaders also spoke about “areas of friction,” Sullivan said, citing China’s support for Russia’s defense industrial base, military activity around Taiwan, unfair trade policies, and increasing aggression in the South China Sea.

    Biden and Xi also touched on China’s relationship with North Korea, particularly as U.S. and Western intelligence assessments indicate North Korea has deployed troops to assist Russian forces in their ongoing war with Ukraine.

    During the meeting, Biden expressed “grave concern” about North Korea’s involvement, Sullivan said.

    The White House earlier indicated that the United States and its allies—South Korea and Japan—believed “China has a role to play” in dissuading the growing Russia-North Korea partnership.

    Trump’s Return

    President-elect Donald Trump’s impending return to the White House also loomed large over the Biden–Xi meeting.

    Trump has repeatedly signaled he will employ tariffs of up to 60 percent on made-in-China products arriving in the United States.

    Trump is also set to staff his incoming administration with several China hawks. He has already named Sen. Marco Rubio (R-Fla.) and Rep. Michael Waltz (R-Fla.)—two staunch China critics—as his picks for secretary of state and national security adviser, respectively.

    Beijing sanctioned Rubio twice in 2020 and banned him from entering China.

    Sullivan declined to comment about Beijing’s reaction to Trump’s tariff plan.

    “Look, I’m not going to comment on a future administration’s policies that have neither been formulated nor articulated,” he told reporters. “What I will say is that we have laid out in clear terms our concerns about non-market economic practices that the PRC has undertaken.”

    Sullivan defended U.S. tariffs on Chinese goods, stating that many countries have taken measures to address China’s overcapacity problem in critical sectors.

    Continue reading at Epoch Times

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 11/17/2024 – 16:20

  • Cruise Ship Offers Democrats Multi-Year "Escape From Reality" Package After Trump Victory 
    Cruise Ship Offers Democrats Multi-Year “Escape From Reality” Package After Trump Victory 

    Florida-based cruise line Villa Vie Residences unveiled a new four-year cruise package called “Skip Forward,” offered to anyone suffering from Trump derangement syndrome. 

    The Skip Forward package is part of the Tour La Vie program, starting at $40,000 per year, and is a “continuous global adventure for up to 4 years,” the company stated in a press release. In other words, the multi-year excursion spans Trump’s upcoming second term. 

    In an interview, Villa Vie Residences CEO Mikael Petterson told AP News the cruise liner is offering voters who were not pleased with the election results four exclusive deals:

    • 1-Year Escape from Reality

    • 2-Year Mid-Term Selection

    • 3-Year Everywhere but Home

    • 4-Year Skip Forward

    Petterson said the excursion to 425 ports across 140 countries allows voters to escape chaotic American politics.

    He noted, “It just happened that Trump won. And more Democrats are unhappy with their current living situations in the US than Republicans.” 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Petterson is right about the TDS explosion after the election. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Google searches for “Move to Canada” surged immediately after Trump won. Far-left liberals melted down across all social media.

    We can only imagine a Villa Vie Residences cruise ship packed with a thousand yelling liberal women and Harry Sisson.  At least their screams on the high seas won’t be heard.

    Meanwhile, Australian billionaire Anthony Pratt plotted his migration to the US following the Trump victory. 

    What happens when Republicans win again in 2028? Extend the cruise trip? 

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 11/17/2024 – 15:45

  • Hezbollah's Media Spokesman Assassinated By Israel In Heart Of Beirut After Haifa Synagogue Attacked
    Hezbollah’s Media Spokesman Assassinated By Israel In Heart Of Beirut After Haifa Synagogue Attacked

    Via The Cradle

    The head of Hezbollah’s Media Relations Department, Mohammad Afif, was assassinated in a violent Israeli airstrike on a building in the heart of Beirut on Sunday. 

    “Fate willed that Hajj Muhammad Afif was inside the building at the time of the attack [in the Ras al-Nabaa neighborhood],” said the Secretary-General of the Arab Socialist Baath Party, Ali Hijazi. He said Afif was holding a meeting in the Baath party headquarters at the time of the Israeli strike. “Afif did not fight with weapons and did not lead a military unit in Hezbollah. Rather, he led a media unit,” Hijazi added. 

    Mohammad Afif, via AP

    A Lebanese security source also confirmed to Al Jazeera that Afif was assassinated in the Israeli attack on central Beirut’s Ras al-Nabaa. At least five were killed and seven injured. There was massive destruction at the site, and the toll is expected to rise.

    Hezbollah MP Hussein al-Jishi said to Al Mayadeen that “the enemy’s targeting of a media spokesman who always carries his phone in his hand is further evidence of its inability, and this is neither courage nor heroism.”

    Hezbollah itself has yet to release a statement. Israel also heavily targeted Beirut’s southern suburb and other areas of the country on Sunday.

    Israel had tried to assassinate Afif on October 3, when it targeted the building of Hezbollah’s Media Relations office in the southern suburb of Beirut. On October 22, it targeted the site where Afif was giving a speech in the Ghobeiry area of the suburb.

    Afif gave a speech for Martyrs Day last week, during which he affirmed to Israel that Hezbollah is prepared for a long war. 

    In his speech on 22 October, Afif publicly announced Hezbollah’s responsibility for the drone attack which exploded in the bedroom window of Benjamin Netanyahu’s home in Caesarea.

    “To the Israeli enemy, we say: you have only seen a little, and what happened in Haifa, Acre, and Safad is just the start … To the leaders of the occupation: Iron for iron, blood for blood, and fire for fire,” Afif said last month. 

    On Saturday a synagogue in Haifa was destroyed when Hezbollah rockets rained down on the area…

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Hezbollah continues to fiercely confront Israeli ground troops in southern Lebanon, while stepping up its rocket, drone, and missile attacks against Israel. 

    Several Hezbollah rocket impacts resulted in heavy damage in the Haifa Bay area on November 16th. 

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 11/17/2024 – 15:10

  • Trump Team Weighs Courts-Martial For Officers Who Oversaw Afghanistan Withdrawal
    Trump Team Weighs Courts-Martial For Officers Who Oversaw Afghanistan Withdrawal

    Donald Trump’s transition team is making a list of senior military officers who oversaw the disastrous 2021 withdrawal of US forces from Afghanistan, and considering the possibility of court-martialing them for their failings, according to two sources cited by NBC News.  

    “They’re taking it very seriously,” said a source who claims to have knowledge of the initiative. The most notorious incident of the chaotic withdrawal was the Aug. 26, 2021 suicide bombing at Abbey Gate, just outside Hamid Karzai International Airport in the Afghan capital, Kabul. Thirteen US service members and more than 170 Afghan civilians were killed. In the following days, a US airstrike intended to kill the leader of the Islamic State instead killed 10 innocents. The rapid collapse of the US-sponsored Afghanistan government allowed enormous quantities of US weapons to fall into the hands of the Taliban. 

    These 13 US service members were killed by a suicide bomber at Hamid Karzai International Airport on Aug. 26 2021

    Trump repeatedly pointed to the Afghanistan withdrawal debacle during his 2024 presidential campaign, calling the day of the suicide bombing “the most embarrassing day in the history of our country.” Now, his transition team is exploring the creation of a commission to probe the decision-making that accompanied the withdrawal and to assess whether leaders could be charged and court-martialed. The team is even said to be considering whether officers who’ve left the military might be recalled to active duty to face military justice.

    Potential charges include treason, a notion that seems far more rooted in casual use of the term than any reasoned legal analysis. Perhaps one might try to make the case that the forfeiture of a vast arsenal to the Taliban gave “aid and comfort” to enemies of the United States, but it seems highly doubtful such an argument would prevail in a court-martial. Alternatively, charges could theoretically be brought under provisions of the Uniform Code of Military Justice covering dereliction of duty, conduct unbecoming an officer, or negligent homicide.  

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Pete Segseth, the Fox news host whom Trump wants to appoint as Secretary of Defense, has leveled his own withering criticism at senior miltary officers. In his book “The War on Warriors,” he wrote: 

    “These generals lied. They mismanaged. They violated their oath. They failed. They disgraced our troops, and our nation. They got people killed, unnecessarily…And, to this moment, they keep their jobs. Worse, they continue to actively erode our military and its values — by capitulating to civilians with radical agendas. They are an embarrassment, with stars still on their shoulders.” 

    According to NBC’s sources, the transition team’s Afghanistan accountability initiative is being led by Matt Flynn, who’d previously served as deputy assistant secretary of defense for counternarcotics and global threats. A North Carolina Army National Guard member, he has also held roles at the Department of the Interior, the White House, Department of State and Congress.

    The Trump transition team’s Afghanistan withdrawal accountability project is being led by former Pentagon official Matt Flynn, sources say (Photo: Steptoe) 

    News of the potential prosecution of senior officers comes after earlier reports that the Trump transition team would establish a “warrior board” of retired senior military personnel which would be granted the power to review three- and four-star officers and recommend any removals of those deemed unfit for leadership. Such a board would likely target generals and admirals who’ve embraced woke ideology and diversity, equity and inclusion initiatives.  

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 11/17/2024 – 14:35

  • In "Major Policy Shift" Biden Authorizes Ukraine's Use Of US Missiles To Hit Targets Inside Russia
    In “Major Policy Shift” Biden Authorizes Ukraine’s Use Of US Missiles To Hit Targets Inside Russia

    In a move straight out of Louis “After me, the flood” XV, the outgoing BIden admin, in a seemingly desperate move to destabilize the global geopolitical picture, has authorized the lifting of some restrictions on Ukraine’s use of western-made weapons to strike military targets inside Russia, according to reports from Bloomberg and the AP. The decision was reportedly shaped by North Korea ramping up support for President Vladimir Putin’s army and an increase in Russian missile and drone attacks on its neighbor. 

    The approval represents a major U.S. policy shift and comes as the deep state-supported, dementia-ridden puppet Joe Biden is about to leave office and incoming President-elect Donald Trump has said he would bring about a swift end to the war and has expressed skepticism over continued support by the United States.

    If approved, the capability would likely be used first in the Kursk region of Russia, where Ukraine is fighting against North Korean troops as well as Moscow’s forces, the people said. Still, any permission, if granted, is unlikely to go as far as Ukraine has requested, one of the people said.

    As the war in Ukraine heads into its third full winter, the US and its allies “have grown extremely concerned” about Pyongyang’s decision to deploy its forces in combat and assessments by some Group of 20 nations suggest North Korea could eventually send as many as 100,000 troops to Russia. The allies believe the deepening cooperation between Putin and Kim Jong Un could have consequences for the security balance in the Indo-Pacific region, Bloomberg has reported previously.

    Discussions between the allies over missile strikes have intensified since Donald Trump won US elections earlier this month, another Bloomberg source said. Trump has said he will seek a quick deal between Ukraine and Russia to end the war, without specifying how.

    In other words, Biden’s puppet masters are urgently seeking to escalate the war in Ukraine to make the quick ceasefire sought by Trump impossible (after all, war is how the Deep State earns its income), and in doing so risking World War 3 as just two months ago, Putin warned that If Ukraine uses U.S. long-range missiles to strike Russia, the “United States is at war with Russia.”

    And just to underscore that mushroom clouds are coming, Putin since said that Russia “will use nuclear weapons if a mass enemy missile or UAV is launched towards Russia, or when these weapons cross into Russian territory.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Until now, Biden had remained opposed to such an escalation, determined to hold the line against any escalation that he felt could draw the U.S. and other NATO members into direct conflict with Russia. But what supposedly triggered the shift is not Trump’s desire to end the war, at least not according to Bloomberg’s deep state sources, but North Korea’s decision to deploy deployed thousands of troops to Russia to help Moscow reclaim land in the Kursk border region that Ukraine seized this year, and which Russia has already mostly regained even as Ukraine continues to cede territory in the Donetsk region. The introduction of North Korean troops to the conflict comes as Moscow has seen a favorable shift in momentum.

    As many as 12,000 North Korean troops have been sent to Russia, according to U.S., South Korean and Ukrainian assessments. U.S. and South Korean intelligence officials say North Korea also has provided Russia with significant amounts of munitions to replenish its weapons stockpiles.

    Trump, who takes office in January, spoke for months as a candidate about wanting Russia’s war in Ukraine to be over. He also repeatedly slammed the Biden administration for giving Kyiv tens of billions of dollars in aid. His resounding election victory has Ukraine’s international backers worrying that any rushed settlement would mostly benefit Putin.

    Which is where the deep state’s World War 3 Hail Mary comes in, especially since the outgoing Biden administration has said it will send as much aid as possible to Kyiv before Trump takes office in January.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 11/17/2024 – 14:16

  • Net-Zero Rollback: How Trump Might Achieve De-Regulation Goals
    Net-Zero Rollback: How Trump Might Achieve De-Regulation Goals

    Authored by Kevin Stocklin via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    President-elect Donald Trump won the election on, among other things, pledges to roll back the regulations that were put in place under the Biden administration, particularly those intended to meet net-zero emissions goals in America’s energy industry.

    President Donald Trump signs the last of three Executive Orders in the Oval Office of the White House in Washington, on Jan. 23, 2017. Ron Sachs – Pool/Getty Images

    In many cases, however, that will be easier said than done, and may not be something Trump can achieve on day one, according to analysts.

    According to the American Action Forum, the Biden administration has finalized 1,114 new regulations to date, adding $1.8 trillion in costs to American businesses and consumers and an estimated 346 million hours of paperwork. And depending on how the regulations were put in place, the incoming Trump administration will likely face challenges in unwinding them.

    “It will be on a regulation-by-regulation basis,” Dan Kish, senior vice president of policy at the American Energy Alliance, told The Epoch Times. “There’s actually three categories: executive orders, action from Congress, and those things that have to be done through regulation.

    “In other words, there’s a process that’s been set up for changing regulations,” he said. “But all of those things are available to [Trump] depending on what happens with the final Congressional outcome.”

    For regulatory mandates that have gone through the formal process of being enacted as “final rules” by agencies, the Administrative Procedures Act (APA) stipulates that cancellation of those rules must go through the same process. This includes a notice and public comment period, as well as a 30-day delayed effective date and a process for judicial review if people can claim they would be adversely affected.

    “You do need to undergo rule-making to change rule-making, but a lot of the Biden administration mandates weren’t issued through rule-making,” Matt Bowman, senior counsel and director of regulatory practice for Alliance Defending Freedom, which has litigated against Biden administration mandates, told The Epoch Times.

    “We’ve won several cases against mandates that they didn’t bother to put through the rule-making process,” Bowman said. “Those can be taken down pretty quickly.”

    Many of the regulations that were issued by direct orders from President Joe Biden will likely be rescinded in the same way.

    “Executive orders will drive the overarching regulatory policy goals of the next administration,” Dan Goldbeck, director of regulatory policy at the center-right American Action Forum, told The Epoch Times. “But they will have limited direct impact on rules already on the books.”

    The Role of Congress and the Courts

    However, even for regulations that have gone through the rule-making process, there are several options available to the Trump administration to have them rescinded in short order. The first is have Congress overturn them using the Congressional Review Act (CRA) if Republicans are able to gain a workable majority in the House.

    According to the CRA, agencies must submit final rules to Congress before they can take effect. If both houses of Congress disapprove of the rule, and the President concurs or Congress overrides a presidential veto, the rule cannot go into effect. There is, however, a time limit, effectively about 6 months, for Congress to take action.

    Since its passage, the CRA has been used to overturn a total of 20 federal rules, 16 of which were Obama administration mandates overturned by a GOP-led Congress in 2017.

    “It’s tough to say what the exact number will be this time around, but I expect Congressional Republicans to be quite active on this front,” Goldbeck said.

    In order to avoid the fate of many Obama-era regulations that were blocked by Congress, the Biden administration rushed to finalize a number of rules well before the date when a new administration could take office.

    “There’s plenty to suggest that the Biden administration made a point of finalizing some of its highest priority rules earlier this year to avoid potential scrutiny under the CRA,” Goldbeck said. “Nevertheless, the general expectation is that any rule finalized from the start of this past August onward will be vulnerable to repeal under the CRA.”

    Even for regulations that are no longer subject to Congressional review, there are options to remove them fairly quickly, particularly those that have been challenged in court.

    “Many of the rules, the most egregious rules the Biden administration imposed, are in court, and courts don’t need to wait for a rule-making process to strike down an illegal rule,” Bowman said. “Courts have already in some cases issued at least preliminary injunctions against those rules so that the Trump Department of Justice, if it prioritizes the President’s agenda, can acknowledge the illegality of some of these rules.”

    Where lower courts have ruled in favor of the Biden administration, the DOJ can appeal those cases to the Supreme Court in hopes of getting a different verdict. And for cases that are awaiting decisions, federal agencies can delay enforcement of the rules until a verdict is reached.

    ‘Personnel Is Policy’

    In Washington, it is often said that “personnel is policy.” Accordingly, the people that Trump puts in place within the agencies will also go a long way in determining how regulations are implemented, if at all.

    “What he can do through executive orders is give instructions to the federal agencies to stand up or stand down on any number of initiatives,” Jonathan Berry, managing partner at Boyden Gray and former chief counsel to President-elect Trump’s first-term transition team, told The Epoch Times.

    In addition, outside of existing agencies, Trump announced on Tuesday that Elon Musk and Vivek Ramaswamy will run a new department intended to oversee the reduction of regulations throughout the federal government and improve government efficiency.

    How well Trump’s agencies coordinate among each another, including cooperation between regulators and the DOJ, will be a critical factor in determining whether or not Trump’s deregulatory agenda succeeds, according to Bowman.

    “I think the President can achieve his goals if all of his appointees are on the same page,” Bowman said.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 11/17/2024 – 14:00

  • Anti-MAGA PA Officials Go Rogue, Keep Counting Illegal Ballots In Defiance Of State Supreme Court
    Anti-MAGA PA Officials Go Rogue, Keep Counting Illegal Ballots In Defiance Of State Supreme Court

    Officials in Bucks County, Pennsylvania are openly disregarding a state Supreme Court ruling prohibiting them from counting provisional ballots missing a signature, as Democrats and Sen. Bob Casey (D-PA) challenge Republican Senator-elect Dave McCormick’s election victory.

    Bucks County Board of Commissioners Chair Robert J. Harvie Jr. (D) and Vice Chair Dianne Ellis-Marseglia (D) are plowing ahead with their count of the illegal ballots that are missing signatures in one of two places, which officials have referred to as “block two” and “block four.” The third commissioner, Republican Gene DiGirolamo was the lone dissenting voice.

    Yet after Deputy County Solicitor Daniel Grieser advised that “unless it’s signed by the voter in two places… we shouldn’t count these,” Ellis-Marseglia and Harvie Jr. pushed forward with a count.

    As the county has some ballots missing two signatures and others missing signatures in either “block two” or “block four,” DiGirolamo, moments before the motion to count the votes passed, moved to reject all three types of ballots missing signatures through a single motion, grouping them all together.

    That motion failed with his colleagues, but before it did, Ellis-Marseglia shockingly said she did not value court precedent and touted her indifference regarding whether or not she was breaking the law in her official capacity by ignoring the recent state Supreme Court ruling. -Breitbart

    “I think we all know that precedent by a court doesn’t matter anymore in this country,” said Ellis-Marseglia in response to the illegal count, adding “People violate laws anytime they want. So, for me, if I violate this law, it’s because I want a court to pay attention. There’s nothing more important than counting votes.”

    According to officials, there are fewer than 80,000 provisional ballots left to be counted across the state, less than 2% of the vote, the Philadelphia Inquirer reports.

    In August, the Pennsylvania Supreme Court determined that provisional ballots missing a signature should not be counted. The case, which featured challenges from Republican primary candidates Jamie Walsh and Mike Cabell, upheld Section 3050(a.4) of the election code, which states that those voting via provisional ballot must also submit a signed affidavit.

     

    Anti-MAGA

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.jsOn Nov. 4, Ellis-Marseglia posted a MSNBC opinion piece on X, citing a portion which states that “voters must prevent anyone with ties to the MAGA movement from overseeing this critical electoral process.“

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 11/17/2024 – 13:25

  • Musk, Ramaswamy Seek Volunteers To Join New Department Of Government Efficiency
    Musk, Ramaswamy Seek Volunteers To Join New Department Of Government Efficiency

    Authored by T.J. Muscaro via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    Tesla CEO Elon Musk and entrepreneur Vivek Ramaswamy announced on Nov. 14 that they are looking for volunteers to join the new Department of Government Efficiency (DOGE), calling for the top 1 percent of small-government revolutionaries.

    Tesla and SpaceX CEO Elon Musk speaks at a rally for former President Donald Trump at Madison Square Garden in New York City on Oct. 27, 2024. Angela Weiss/AFP via Getty Images

    “We are very grateful to the thousands of Americans who have expressed interest in helping us at DOGE,” they announced on social media platform X. “We don’t need more part-time idea generators.

    “We need super high-IQ small-government revolutionaries willing to work 80+ hours per week on unglamorous cost-cutting. If that’s you, DM this account with your CV. Elon & Vivek will review the top 1% of applicants.”

    Musk further confirmed that DOGE work would be unpaid, stating on X, “Indeed, this will be tedious work, make lots of enemies, and compensation is zero. What a great deal!”

    In response to that comment, Ramaswamy stated, “That stands in contrast to the many government bureaucrats who: (a) do little or no work, (b) tell people only what they want to hear, & (c) make more money than the value they create.”

    DOGE’s objective is in its name: to make government more efficient, with significant spending cuts being among the top expectations.

    “I look forward to Elon and Vivek making changes to the Federal Bureaucracy with an eye on efficiency and, at the same time, making life better for all Americans,” Trump said in a Nov. 12 statement announcing the new department and its leaders. “Importantly, we will drive out the massive waste and fraud which exists throughout our annual $6.5 Trillion Dollars of Government Spending. They will work together to liberate our Economy, and make the U.S. Government accountable to ‘WE THE PEOPLE.’”

    Musk stated on X that all DOGE actions will be posted online to provide “maximum transparency.” This will include the creation of a leaderboard showcasing the “most insanely dumb spending of your tax dollars,” which he said would be “extremely tragic and extremely entertaining.”

    He also urged the public to be vocal about anything that is being cut that they think might be important.

    Trump said the initiative could be “‘The Manhattan Project’ of our time.”

    The request for volunteers followed Musk’s announcement in September that he was willing to forgo compensation.

    “I look forward to serving America if the opportunity arises,” Musk said in a post on X. “No pay, no title, no recognition is needed.”

    DOGE will work with the Office of Management and Budget and is set to complete its work no later than July 4, 2026, America’s 250th anniversary.

    “Either we get government efficient or America goes bankrupt. That’s what it comes down to. Wish I were wrong, but it’s true,” Musk wrote on X, responding to Trump’s official announcement on Nov. 12.

    Caden Pearson contributed to this report.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 11/17/2024 – 12:50

  • Famed Iowa Pollster Ann Selzer Retires After Bombshell Miss 
    Famed Iowa Pollster Ann Selzer Retires After Bombshell Miss 

    A once-respected poll showed Vice President Harris leading by three percentage points in Iowa just days before the presidential election, which ultimately resulted in Donald Trump ahead by thirteen points—a massive margin of error of sixteen percentage points. 

    Following this public opinion polling blunder, pollster J. Ann Selzer stated in a guest column in the Des Moines Register on Sunday that her days advising the paper’s famed Iowa Poll are over as she will be “transitioning to other ventures and opportunities.” 

    Selzer was once considered the “gold standard” of polling, but after Trump swept the state by a 13-point margin, winning the actual vote 56-43%, she later acknowledged her poll was a “big miss” and suggested that it might have “actually energized [d] and activated [d] Republican voters who thought they would likely coast to victory,” according to CNN.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    “Over a year ago I advised the Register I would not renew when my 2024 contract expired with the latest election poll as I transition to other ventures and opportunities,” Selzer wrote in the Des Moines Register, emphasizing how her decision to retire was well in play before her disastrous polling results failed to capture a Trump win accurately.

    She continued, “Polling is a science of estimation, and science has a way of periodically humbling the scientist. So, I’m humbled, yet always willing to learn from unexpected findings.” 

    Well, perhaps science can become biased when some pollsters suffer from ‘Trump derangement syndrome.’ 

    Separately, Kristin Roberts, chief content officer of Gannett Media, which owns the Des Moines Register, told CNN that the Iowa Poll will “evolve as we find new ways to accurately capture public sentiment and the pulse of Iowans on state and national issues.”

    “Our mission is to provide trusted news and content to our readers and the public,” Roberts said, adding, “We did not deliver on that promise when we shared results of the last Des Moines Register Iowa Poll, which did not accurately capture the outcome of the presidential election.”

    X user Torsten Prochnow had a good take on Selzer’s retirement…

    Ann Selzer’s retirement marks the end of what was once considered the “gold standard” of polling, though her final performance suggests that standard had long since tarnished. Her last Iowa poll—Harris+3—was a stunning 16 points off the actual result of Trump+13. Such a massive error doesn’t just undermine her credibility; it reflects a deeper problem with polling in general, especially those aligned with the leftist media narrative.

    Pollsters today, with few exceptions, seem less interested in accurately gauging public opinion and more focused on shaping it. Many have become extensions of the legacy media, crafting polls designed to serve as self-fulfilling prophecies for leftist victories. These tactics, however, are crumbling under the weight of their own bias. Americans have grown wise to the manipulation, and the results of 2024 prove it: reality shattered the illusions pollsters tried to sell.

    Selzer’s exit feels symbolic of a larger trend—trust in mainstream polling has hit rock bottom. As Trump secures overwhelming victories like his blowout win in Iowa, it’s clear that the era of using skewed polls to influence elections is over. The days of false narratives propped up by questionable polling are gone, replaced by an electorate that refuses to be gaslit.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Here’s some of our reporting on pollsters oversampling and attempting to shape outcomes for a potential Harris victory in the months before the election…

    Meanwhile, the odds favored Trump at the betting platform Polymarket, as financial markets are generally more efficient. Pollsters (and MSM) suffering from TDS doomed themselves in the past election cycle, and their credibility has completely collapsed. As a result, Polymarket and other betting platforms are poised to dominate in upcoming elections.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 11/17/2024 – 12:15

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Nov 17

Today’s News 17th November 2024

  • Trump Can Help A New Generation Learn To Appreciate Our Veterans
    Trump Can Help A New Generation Learn To Appreciate Our Veterans

    Authored by Tom Ruck via RealClearDefense,

    Following President Donald Trump’s extraordinary victory over Kamala Harris, President Joe Biden addressed the nation. His message was simple: “setbacks are unavoidable, but giving up is unforgivable,” and he concluded by saying, “may God protect our troops.”

    Unfortunately for President Biden, however, many people in his party have given up on fighting for America and have even given up on supporting our troops. Indeed, this anti-American and anti-military sentiment in the Democratic party undoubtedly contributed to President Trump’s victory.

    This is a shame because veterans represent the very best of America. From the sandy beaches of Normandy and the wet jungles of Vietnam to the hot deserts of Iraq and harsh mountains of Afghanistan, they have fought and died for our freedom. Their courage, honor, and selflessness are unmatched, and they should serve as an example for every American today, especially young people. 

    With that in mind, in light of this recent Veteran’s Day, it is worth asking what our new president can do to restore a sense of gratitude in all Americans for our military servicemen and women.

    There are many answers to that question, of course. For example, his administration could put a stop to the politicization of the military through wokeness, which would ensure that our veterans can be proud of the branches they served. Likewise, President Trump could use his bully pulpit to remind the American people of the virtues of our military men and women. This White House could also revisit its previous plans to build the National Garden of American Heroes, and honor some of our country’s greatest veterans there.

    These are all excellent initiatives, but one of the simplest — and subtlest — ways that President Trump can restore respect for our troops and veterans is by preserving and enhancing the beauty of our national cemeteries. The United States and its territories contain 164 national cemeteries. Some are well-known, such as the Arlington National Cemetery and Gettysburg National Cemetery, and others are more inconspicuous, but each cemetery is — in the words of President Lincoln — “hallowed ground.”

    My father is buried at Jefferson Barracks National Cemetery in St. Louis, Missouri, so I know from the personal experience of many visits that these cemeteries are more than places of rest — they are the final resting place of our country’s heroes and sacred symbols of American freedom.

    We must never forget these men and women. We must also introduce a new generation of Americans to these cemeteries, as I am convinced that walking through those beautiful, straight, uniform rows of fallen soldiers is such a powerful experience that it could make any American grateful for our veterans.

    To do this, President Trump cannot only ensure that these cemeteries are well maintained, he can promote programming that introduces Americans — especially young Americans — to the profound sacrifices that sustain our liberty. Hosting more roll-call events, concerts, and other community initiatives can help keep the spirt of service alive in the hearts of all Americans and change the minds of this new generation.

    Doing so will not only give veterans the respect and honor they so thoroughly deserve, but it will also make our country better. Gratitude is the character trait that seems to be desperately missing from our national dialogue, but it doesn’t have to be this way. The first step to making America great again is remembering the greatest people in our country’s past: our veterans.

    Preserving and enhancing our national cemeteries is an excellent way to do that. Next Veteran’s Day, visit a cemetery near you and say a prayer of thanks for the men and women that gave everything for our freedom.

    Tom Ruck is the award-winning author of “Sacred Ground: A Tribute to America’s Veterans.”

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 11/16/2024 – 23:20

  • IRS Watchdog Nominee Pledges To Investigate Allegations Of Agency Misconduct
    IRS Watchdog Nominee Pledges To Investigate Allegations Of Agency Misconduct

    President Biden’s nominee for Inspector General for Tax Administration (TIGTA), David Johnson, promised to tackle allegations of IRS misconduct, including politically motivated audits and unfair targeting of small businesses, during his confirmation hearing before the Senate Finance Committee on Nov. 14. Johnson vowed to hold the IRS accountable for any abuse of power, ensuring that taxpayers are treated fairly.

    At the hearing, Johnson addressed bipartisan concerns about the misuse of IRS authority, with lawmakers pressing him on the agency’s practices and adherence to directives aimed at protecting small businesses and low-income taxpayers from increased audit rates.

    Political Targeting: A Top Priority

    Finance Committee Chairman Sen. Ron Wyden (D-OR) kicked off the hearing by demanding to know how Johnson would address concerns about politically driven IRS actions.

    “If you’re confirmed as Inspector General, what actions will you lead at TIGTA to ensure that Americans are not being targeted for audit or investigation based on their political affiliation?” Wyden asked.

    Johnson pledged to investigate such allegations thoroughly, emphasizing the seriousness of any attempt to weaponize the IRS.

    “I believe that one of the core responsibilities of any Inspector General, by statute, is to prevent fraud, waste, and abuse, and targeting of any American based on their political affiliation, to me, would be an extreme level of abuse,” Johnson replied. “Anybody ordering the IRS or asking the IRS to target political opponents or take action based on political identity would be an abuse of power and would be something that TIGTA would play a role in preventing.”

    Johnson assured the committee that TIGTA would play a crucial role in preventing such practices, vowing to report findings to Congress and the public.

    Small Business Owners Feeling the Squeeze

    Sen. Marsha Blackburn (R-TN) raised the alarm over IRS audit practices affecting small businesses, particularly those earning less than $400,000 annually. Citing a 2022 directive from Treasury Secretary Janet Yellen promising not to increase audits for small businesses and lower-income households, Blackburn said her constituents remain skeptical.

    “Several times on this committee, I’ve talked about the concerns that I hear from small businesses in Tennessee, and a lot of times this has to do with being wrongfully targeted by the IRS,” Blackburn said – pointing to a recent TIGTA report revealing that the IRS has yet to finalize key definitions, such as what qualifies as a “small business,” raising fears that audit rates could still rise. Blackburn pressed Johnson for a commitment to further review these audit processes.

    “If you’re confirmed, will you commit to further reviewing these IRS audit processes to ensure compliance with that 2022 directive?” she asked.

    Johnson agreed, pledging to follow up on TIGTA’s findings and brief Blackburn and other stakeholders on the results.

    TIGTA Report Highlights Gaps in IRS Compliance

    The TIGTA report referenced during the hearing painted a worrying picture of the IRS’s progress. While the agency has promised to shield small businesses from increased audits, delays in defining key terms and establishing a methodology jeopardize its ability to meet the directive’s requirements by fiscal year 2025.

    The IRS has proposed defining small businesses as those with less than $10 million in assets, but this definition remains under discussion with no timeline for completion. TIGTA has urged the IRS to accelerate its efforts, warning that delays could lead to non-compliance with the 2022 directive.

    In response, IRS Deputy Commissioner Douglas O’Donnell reaffirmed the agency’s commitment to the directive, noting steps to shift audit focus to high-income earners and large corporations.

    “‘The Commissioner has publicly committed that the IRS will comply with the Secretary’s directive not to increase audit rates above historic levels for small businesses or households earning less than $400,000,” O’Donnell wrote in a July memorandum to TIGTA, adding that the IRS is working with Treasury to finalize the formal methodology for implementing the directive.

    Small Businesses Still on Edge

    Despite these assurances, Blackburn said small business owners remain uneasy. She highlighted constituents’ fears of being “entrapped” by the IRS amid concerns that increased funding for the agency—part of the Biden administration’s $80 billion IRS boost—has enabled the hiring of thousands of new tax enforcers.

    Johnson acknowledged these fears, reiterating that TIGTA would ensure the IRS adheres to its promises. “Given that TIGTA has already issued a report on this very issue, it does seem appropriate for a follow-up,” he said.

    As Johnson’s confirmation process continues, lawmakers on both sides of the aisle will be watching closely to see whether his tenure at TIGTA can restore confidence in an agency increasingly under scrutiny. With audit fears looming large over small businesses, Johnson’s pledge to safeguard taxpayers may be put to the test sooner rather than later.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 11/16/2024 – 22:45

  • The Second Trump Administration Will Benefit The Environment
    The Second Trump Administration Will Benefit The Environment

    Authored by Diana Furchtgott-Roth via RealClearEnergy,

    At the 29th Conference of the Parties (COP29) in Azerbaijan, attendees are full of dire predictions that the world’s climate will worsen under President-elect Trump. But when Trump fulfills his campaign promises to increase U.S. oil and gas production and removes President Biden’s pause on new liquid natural gas exports, global emissions will likely decline rather than rise.

    This is because exports of U.S. natural gas generally displace coal, reducing global CO2 emissions. Even Germany, Europe’s largest manufacturer, is using lignite coal (rather than the less-polluting bituminous coal) to deal with shortages of renewables now that it has closed its nuclear power plants and Russian gas is no longer available.

    About 3 billion people in emerging economies lack electricity and running water, and cook over wood and dung. Natural gas power plants would reduce particulates from wood and dung and make the air cleaner. Under President Biden, the World Bank does not make loans for fossil fuel power plants.

    More U.S. gas for export will lower prices of Russian and Qatari gas, harming countries that are invading Ukraine and tied to Iran. Prices are set based on future production, and even announcements of energy production will weaken America’s enemies.

    Natural gas production has lowered U.S. emissions of CO2, which have declined by a billion metric tons over the past 16 years as natural gas has substituted for coal use in the generation of electricity. Over the same period, CO2 emissions in China have risen by 5 billion metric tons.

    Between 2022 and 2023 US coal exports to Europe increased by 22% compared with the prior year. Because coal has more emissions than natural gas, it is surprising that Energy Secretary Jennifer Granholm has not asked for a pause in coal exports, only on natural gas exports.

    America’s natural gas exports to Europe have been soaring since 2022, when Russia decreased the flow of natural gas. According to the Energy Information Administration, America exported an average of almost 12 billion cubic feet per day of natural gas in 2023, more than any other country.

    Europe is America’s biggest customer, and in a phone call to President-elect Trump, European Union President Ursula von der Leyen suggested that US natural gas could replace Russian gas.

    But even if America stopped all use of fossil fuels immediately, global temperatures would only be two-tenths of 1 degree Celsius by the year 2100, according to government models. This is because China, India, Africa, and Latin America are ramping up their use of coal to reach Western standards of living. China is home to large supplies of coal, but little natural gas, and uses its domestic coal supplies for generating electricity to power its global manufacturing capacity.

    A second Trump administration will not only encourage production of natural gas but also faster permitting of pipelines and LNG terminals to move the natural gas from the interior of the country to the ports, and into export terminals to be shipped to Europe and Asia.

    America’s natural gas production, at over 100 billion cubic feet per day, is greater than pre-pandemic levels, but production is primarily on private lands. It could have been even higher if Biden had not restricted leases on federal land and if pipeline approval were faster.

    Trump’s energy plan includes permitting reform, allowing different sources of energy to compete on a level playing field, opening more lands to natural gas development, reversing Biden’s climate agenda, expediting nuclear technology, and protecting the energy grid.

    Trump, unlike Biden, will not instruct the Federal Energy Regulatory Commission to slow down pipeline and liquid natural gas export terminal construction in the name of a transition to renewables. Nor will Trump instruct the Securities and Exchange Commission to discourage investment in pipelines, or the Office of the Comptroller of the Currency to discourage loans for fossil fuel projects.

    The more natural gas is exported, the lower are global emissions. With Trump’s changes, natural gas will be able to travel to where it is needed due to faster infrastructure permitting.

    As the northern hemisphere moves into its winter season, the need for more energy for warming homes and businesses becomes even more pressing, and natural gas is cleaner than coal. COP29 attendees have no reason to demonize Trump’s energy agenda, which will be a boon to the environment.

    Diana Furchtgott-Roth serves as the Director of the Center for Energy, Climate, and Environment and The Herbert and Joyce Morgan Fellow in Energy and Environmental Policy at The Heritage Foundation. 

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 11/16/2024 – 22:10

  • Bessent Vs. Lutnick: Musk & RFK Push For Pro-Crypto Treasury Secretary While Bass Backs Rumored Favorite
    Bessent Vs. Lutnick: Musk & RFK Push For Pro-Crypto Treasury Secretary While Bass Backs Rumored Favorite

    Two camps have emerged between top contenders for President-elect Donald Trump’s next Treasury secretary.

    Scott Bessent, left, and Howard Lutnick 
    Photographer: Vincent Alban, Christopher Goodney/Bloomberg

    On one side, Elon Musk and RFK Jr. are pushing for Howard Lutnick, with Musk praising the Cantor FItzgerald CEO as a disruptor compared to Key Square Group (and George Soros protégé) Scott Bessent – the latter of whom met with Trump on Friday, and has the backing of many including noted investor Kyle Bass.

    “Scott Bessent is eminently more qualified than Howard Lutnick to run the U.S. Treasury,” said Bass in a Wednesday post on X. “Scott understands markets, economics, people, and geopolitics better than anyone I’ve ever interacted with. Markets have already anticipated a Bessent choice. Lutnick is not Trump’s answer.”

    In response, RFK Jr. suggested that Lutnick – who is currently working as co-chair of Trump’s transition team, would be a strong advocate for Bitcoin – which he described as “a hedge against inflation for middle class Americans,a remedy against the dollar’s downgrade from the world’s reserve currency, and the offramp from a ruinous national debt.”

    Musk suggested more people weigh in on the decision, but said he views Bessent as “a business-as-usual choice,” while Lutnick “will actually enact change.”

    According to Bloomberg, the choice is ‘creating tension and increasing the chance that another candidate rises up,’ citing anonymous people familiar with the decision making.

    Trump himself has appeared frustrated with the infighting and staff are looking for alternatives, with Robert Lighthizer, Senator William Hagerty and Apollo Global Management Inc. Chief Executive Officer Marc Rowan among the names in the mix.

    Lutnick was a key support to Trump’s fundraising in the final months of the campaign and he has helped lead the team’s transition to the presidency. Because of that, some key advisers are looking at what else Lutnick might take — if not Treasury — such as a plum ambassadorship, according to people familiar with the decision. –Bloomberg

    That said, Lutnick previously donated to both Hillary Clinton in 2015 and Kamala Harris’ Senate campaign in 2016, among others.

    Ultimately, the choice is up to Trump – who hasn’t shared his opinion in public.

     

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.jshttps://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 11/16/2024 – 21:35

  • Hundreds Of New UFO Sightings Reported To Pentagon
    Hundreds Of New UFO Sightings Reported To Pentagon

    Authored by Rudy Blalock via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    There were 757 reports of unidentified anomalous phenomena (UAP) accounted for between May 2023 and June 2024, according to an unclassified Department of Defense (DoD) report released Thursday.

    A photo from the Department of Defense shows an “unidentified aerial phenomena.” Department of Defense

    Congress mandated the annual report by the DoD’s All-Domain Anomaly Resolution Office (AARO), which is tasked with studying and cataloging reports of UAPs, formerly referred to as UFOs.

    The report said that AARO received 757 UAP reports from May 1, 2023, to June 1, 2024, of which “485 of these reports featured UAP incidents that occurred during the reporting period. The remaining 272 reports featured UAP incidents that occurred between 2021 and 2022 but were not reported to AARO until this reporting period and consequently were not included in previous annual UAP reports.”

    The new findings bring the total number of UAP cases under AARO review to more than 1,600 as of June.

    AARO Director Dr. Jon Kosloski said at a Nov. 14 media briefing the findings have left investigators puzzled.

    “There are interesting cases that I, with my physics and engineering background and time in the IC [intelligence community], I do not understand. And I don’t know anybody else who understands them either,” Kosloski said.

    Some cases were later resolved, with 49 determined to be common objects like balloons, birds, and unmanned aerial systems. Another 243, also found to be ordinary objects, were recommended for closure by June. However, 444 were deemed inexplicable and lacking sufficient data, so they were archived for future investigation.

    Notably, 21 cases were considered to “merit further analysis” due to anomalous characteristics and behaviors, unlike typical sightings.

    Despite the unexplained incidents, the office noted that it “has discovered no evidence of extraterrestrial beings, activity, or technology.”

    The report said UAP cases often had consistent patterns, described with unidentified lights and round, spherical, or orb-shaped objects with distinct visual traits.

    Of the new cases, 81 were reported in U.S. military operating areas, and three reports from military aircrews described “pilots being trailed or shadowed by UAP”.

    The Federal Aviation Administration reported 392 unexplained sightings of the 757 reports since 2021.

    In one such case, the AARO resolved a commercial pilot’s sighting of white flashing lights as a Starlink satellite launched from Cape Canaveral, Florida.

    “AARO is investigating if other unresolved cases may be attributed to the expansion of the Starlink and other mega-constellations in low earth orbit,” the report states.

    The AARO report maintains that none of the resolved cases have substantiated “advanced foreign adversarial capabilities or breakthrough aerospace technologies.” The document also states that the AARO will immediately notify Congress if any cases indicate such, which could suggest extraterrestrial involvement.

    The report emphasized the AARO’s “rigorous scientific framework and a data-driven approach” and safety measures while investigating these phenomena.

    UAP Hearing

    The report was released a day after a House Oversight Committee hearing titled “Unidentified Anomalous Phenomena: Exposing the Truth,” during which witnesses alleged government secrecy surrounding the phenomenon.

    During the hearing, a former DoD official, Luis Elizondo, said UAPs are real.

    “Advanced technologies not made by our government or any other government are monitoring sensitive military installations around the globe,” he said.

    Elizondo testified that the government has operated secret programs to retrieve UAP crash materials to identify and reverse-engineer alien technology.

    “Furthermore, the U.S. is in possession of UAP technologies, as are some of our adversaries. I believe we are in the midst of a multi-decade secretive arms race, one funded by misallocated taxpayer dollars and hidden from our elected representatives and oversight bodies,” he said.

    “Although much of my government work on the UAP subject still remains classified, excessive secrecy has led to grave misdeeds against loyal civil servants, military personnel, and the public, all to hide the fact that we are not alone in the cosmos.

    “A small cadre within our own government involved in the UAP topic has created a culture of suppression and intimidation that I have personally been victim to, along with many of my former colleagues.”

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 11/16/2024 – 21:00

  • Biden's Cabinet Nominees Were Completely Unqualified Compared To Trump's
    Biden’s Cabinet Nominees Were Completely Unqualified Compared To Trump’s

    Authored by Steve Watson via modernity.news,

    The irrelevant legacy media is currently fixated on pushing the narrative that President-elect Trump’s cabinet nominees are not qualified to take the positions he has offered them.

    As we highlighted yesterday, all the right people are pissed off about it.

    Rachel Maddow, who is still adamant Trump is going to put her in a concentration camp, claimed that he is intentionally destroying the government with his cabinet nominations.

    Now here’s a quick reminder that the media said nothing when Joe Biden made some truly incomprehensible nominations.

    The post continues:

    Jared Bernstein, Chair of Council of Economic Advisors – not an economist, Bachelor’s degree in music, masters in sociology 

    Pete Buttigieg, Transportation Secretary – no transportation background, Mayor of Indiana, “pothole Pete”

    Mayorkas, DHS Secretary  – no security background, lawyer, Asst U.S. attorney, Obama transition team 

    Jennifer Granholm, Energy Secy –  no energy background, Michigan Governor

    Gina Raimondo, Commerce Secretary – No trade background, Gov of Rhode Island

    Deb Haaland, Interior Secy – New Mexico Congressman 

    And just for kicks…Bill Nye, the environmentalist “Science Guy” — no background in environmentalism or science, he’s a mechanical engineer and comedy writer.

    Just look at this crew:

    Sam Brinton is a LGBTQ activist who was hired to the office of nuclear energy. They he was later fired for being weird and stealing other people’s clothes and integrating them into their his wardrobe.

    Then there’s Choo choo Pete. His only qualification was that he liked trains as a child.

    He wasn’t experienced in the slightest.

    Energy Secretary Jennifer Granholm, who never held any position relating to energy and doesn’t have any qualifications regarding energy just consistently pushed the new green deal agenda and railed against American energy production for four years.

    She also presided over a culture of corruption where senior DOE employees trade and own stocks related to the agency’s work, as well as  lying about her personal stock holdings.

    She’s also not the sharpest knife in the drawer.

    There was also cackles Kamala. Where do we even start with her? Perhaps the most unqualified person for Vice President ever.

    You can’t even compare Trump’s cabinet picks to this parade of clowns.

    Your support is crucial in helping us defeat mass censorship. Please consider donating via Locals or check out our unique merch. Follow us on X @ModernityNews.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 11/16/2024 – 19:50

  • Trump Picks Fracking Boss As Next Energy Secretary
    Trump Picks Fracking Boss As Next Energy Secretary

    Donald Trump has nominated Chris Wright, who runs the Colorado-based oil and natural gas fracking services company, Liberty Energy, to lead the Energy Department. Like many other Trump picks, Wright, LIberty’s CEO, has no previous Washington experience, and instead has made a name for himself as a vocal proponent of oil and gas, saying fossil fuels are crucial for spreading prosperity and lifting people from poverty. And in news that will surely infuriate the green lobby and brainwashed progressives everywhere, Wright has said that the threat of global warming is exaggerated.

    “Chris has been a leading technologist and entrepreneur in Energy,” Trump said in a statement Saturday. “He has worked in Nuclear, Solar, Geothermal, and Oil and Gas. Most significantly, Chris was one of the pioneers who helped launch the American Shale Revolution that fueled American Energy Independence, and transformed the Global Energy Markets and Geopolitics.”

    In response to the nomination, Wright said on X that “my dedication to bettering human lives remains steadfast, with a focus on making American energy more affordable, reliable, and secure. Energy is the lifeblood that makes everything in life possible. Energy matters.  I am looking forward to getting to work.” He is spot on.

    Trump said Wright, if confirmed, would also sit on the newly formed Council of National Energy that will be chaired by Doug Burgum, Trump’s nominee to lead the Interior Department.

    The Energy Department has a multi-faceted mission that includes helping to maintain the nation’s nuclear warheads, studying supercomputers and maintaining the US’s several hundred million-barrel stockpile of crude oil (his appointment likely means that the US will aggressively ramp up its refilling of the Strategic Petroleum Reserve). The DOE also plays a key role in approving projects to export liquefied natural gas, something that was paused during Biden’s administration. Trump has vowed to undo the pause.

    While the department has little authority over oil and gas development, Wright will play a leading role in helping Trump carry out his energy priorities.

    Trump’s selection of Wright, whose company is among the largest providers of fracking services globally, is a show of support for the hot-button oil and gas extraction method that Trump frequently touted during the campaign to attack his Democratic opponent Kamala Harris who had previously vowed to ban fracking, even if she subsequently flip-flopped on the issue, just like on every other hot topic.

    Elsewhere, Bloomberg points out that Wright’s company published a 180-page paper this year that concluded climate change “is far from the world’s greatest threat to human life,” and that “hydrocarbons are essential to improving the wealth, health, and life opportunities for the less energized.”

    “There is no climate crisis. And we are not in the midst of an energy transition either,” Wright said in a video posted on his LinkedIn page. “Humans, and all complex life on earth, is simply impossible without carbon dioxide — hence the term carbon pollution is outrageous.”

    Wright holds engineering degrees from the Massachusetts Institute of Technology and the University of California at Berkeley. He describes himself on his Denver-based company’s website as a “tech nerd turned entrepreneur and a dedicated humanitarian.”

    Trump named Wright with backing from Continental Resources Chairman Harold Hamm, a Trump energy adviser and donor. Hamm said in an interview with the Houston-based trade publication Hart Energy that Wright was his choice for the job.

    If confirmed by Congress, Wright would play a leading role in Trump carrying out his campaign pledge to declare a national emergency on energy. Trump has cast such a declaration as helping increase domestic energy production — including for electricity — which he says is needed to help meet booming power needs for artificial intelligence.

    Under the first Trump administration, the Energy Department played a critical role in the president-elect’s efforts to revive US coal power, an initiative he’s hinted he may attempt again.

    Wright would also oversee Trump’s promise to refill the nation’s emergency cache of crude oil. The Strategic Petroleum Reserve, which has a capacity of more than 700 million barrels, reached lows not seen since the 1980s following the Biden administration’s unprecedented drawdown of a record 180 million barrels in the wake of Russia’s invasion of Ukraine.

    While Wright has warned that subsidies for wind and solar drive up power prices and increase grid instability, he does support alternative energy.

    “I’m not here to protect market share for oil gas,” he said during a 2022 interview with Bloomberg Television. “We should do credible things, mostly driven by market forces. But shoveling subsidies at wind and solar, which are 3% of global energy, that’s not meaningfully going to change greenhouse gas emissions. But it is going to drive electricity prices up.”

    Wright is on the board EMX Royalty Corp., a global mining royalties firm, according to his company bio, and his company is an investor in geothermal energy and sodium-ion battery technology. More importantly, Wright serves on the board of small modular reactor developer Oklo, which we first recommended to our premium subscribers back in May and have pushed aggressively every since as a long-term investment.

    We have feeling that the record number of OKLO shorts that has been built up in recent weeks amid the stock’s unprecedented meltup will be hurting very badly come Monday.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 11/16/2024 – 19:15

  • What Happens To Jan. 6 Defendants After Trump's Election Win?
    What Happens To Jan. 6 Defendants After Trump’s Election Win?

    Authored by Sam Dorman via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    After President-elect Donald Trump won a second term, multiple defendants charged for their roles in the events of Jan. 6, 2021, asked to delay their cases because they anticipate pardons from Trump.

    Supporters of President Donald Trump protest at the U.S. Capitol in Washington on Jan. 6, 2021. Joseph Prezioso/AFP via Getty Images

    Many were denied, but each nonetheless raised questions about how Trump will handle the cases.

    According to data collected by NPR, more than 1,500 people have been charged in relation to Jan. 6, with nearly 1,000 pleading guilty.

    At least a dozen cases have been dismissed, while plenty remain with changes following Trump’s election. At the beginning of November, the U.S. Attorney for the District of Columbia announced multiple sentences and guilty verdicts.

    Various factors could determine whether these individuals end up avoiding jail time, but perhaps the most important is Trump’s eventual control of the Department of Justice (DOJ) and who will lead that department.

    On Nov. 13, Trump announced Rep. Matt Gaetz (R-Fla.) as his pick for attorney general. Gaetz has been critical of the prosecutions and introduced a bill in July that was intended to prevent prosecutors from retaliating against Jan. 6 defendants for seeking resentencing. Gaetz has also questioned federal involvement, stating that Jan. 6 “wasn’t an insurrection” but that it “very well may have been a fedsurrection.”

    Assuming the presidency also grants Trump substantial pardon power under the Constitution: Trump has indicated that he’s open to pardoning those charged but left open the possibility that some would face punishment.

    “We will treat them fairly,” he said in January 2022. “And if it requires pardons, we will give them pardons, because they are being treated so unfairly.”

    More recently, during an event in July, he was asked about individuals who assaulted officers. He said he would “absolutely” pardon the defendants “if they’re innocent” and added that “they were convicted by a very tough system.”

    More than 70 defendants have received a mixed verdict, and so far, more than 1,000 people have been sentenced, with 64 percent receiving prison time, according to NPR data. Some defendants have also taken plea deals.

    “I think there’s going to be a complete second look at all of the prosecutions,” Robert Ray, a former Trump impeachment attorney, told The Epoch Times, while noting the large number of cases brought. He added that a second look wouldn’t “necessarily yield a favorable result with regard to each and every defendant, but I think there’s going to be a pretty strenuous exercise of the pardon and commutation power to deal with overreaching [by prosecutors].”

    John Pierce, an attorney who has represented Jan. 6 defendants, told The Epoch Times he expects a “blanket pardon,” while Trump–Vance transition spokeswoman Karoline Leavitt said the president-elect “will make pardon decisions on a case-by-case basis.”

    Politics of Pardons

    It’s unclear which individuals Trump will consider for pardon.

    “That’s the million-dollar question,” Lori Ulrich, an attorney with the public defender’s office, told The Epoch Times. She is currently representing Joseph Fischer, whose case made it to the Supreme Court this year.

    Fischer and other defendants face a myriad of charges, including an obstruction charge the Supreme Court addressed this summer in Fischer v. United States. It’s unclear how Trump’s DOJ will apply that ruling, but the president-elect’s pardons could be influenced by factors such as the politics surrounding his pardons.

    “If President Biden either pardons or commutes the sentences for Hunter Biden, that gives President Trump political cover to either pardon or commute the non-violent J6 offenders, [as well as] Peter Navarro, and Steve Bannon, if he chooses to,” John Shu, a constitutional law expert who served in both Bush administrations, told The Epoch Times.

    Shu was referring to President Joe Biden’s son, who was convicted in September of various tax offenses. Both of Trump’s former White House advisers, Steve Bannon and Peter Navarro, could be pardoned after each served a four month sentences for defying subpoenas from the House committee that investigated Jan. 6.

    A CBS poll found that three years after the events of Jan. 6, 78 percent of Americans expressed disapproval toward “actions of those who forced their way into the Capitol.”

    William Shipley, an attorney for one of the defendants, suggested in a motion on Nov. 10 that the election didn’t reflect well on the DOJ’s efforts.

    “Defendant Baker would point out that the ‘people’ on behalf of whom the Government purports to speak made themselves heard clearly on November 5, and that should mean something to the Department of Justice without regard to what Administration is now in charge,” Shipley said in a motion for defendant Stephen Michael Baker.

    That motion, which asked for a delay in proceedings, was quickly rejected by U.S. District Judge Christopher Cooper this month.

    Upon entering office, Trump’s pardon power would allow him to commute sentences and pardon convicts who have already served time, such as Ulrich’s client, Riley Williams. Williams was accused of helping to steal then-House Speaker Nancy Pelosi’s laptop. She was found guilty on two felony counts, but the jury was unable to reach a verdict on two other counts, including aiding and abetting theft of government property.

    Non-Violent Offenders

    Shu told The Epoch Times that pardons for non-violent offenders were more politically palatable.

    In August, the DOJ said that approximately 140 police officers were assaulted on Jan. 6, while more than 500 people have been charged with assaulting, resisting, or impeding officers or employees. It added that “approximately 163 individuals … have been charged with using a deadly or dangerous weapon or causing serious bodily injury to an officer.”

    Among those are Daniel Ball, who pleaded not guilty but whom the DOJ accused of, among other things, “throwing an explosive device that detonated upon at least 25 officers.” Others included a father-son pair who pleaded guilty in January, and Zachary Alam, who was found guilty last year.

    David Gelman, an attorney and former Trump campaign surrogate, told The Epoch Times that re-examining the Jan. 6 prosecutions would have to occur on a “case-by-case basis” but indicated that Trump could consider violence in choosing how to exercise his pardon power.

    Trump said at a town hall in 2023 that he was “inclined to pardon many of” the defendants who had been convicted. “I can’t say for every single one because a couple of them, probably, they got out of control,” he said.

    Earlier this year, he started one of his rallies with a recording of the national anthem sung by Jan. 6 prisoners. He also vowed in March that his “first acts” as president would be to “Free the January 6 Hostages being wrongfully imprisoned,” he wrote on his Truth Social account.

    In a motion filed just after the election, one of the Jan. 6 defendants, Anna Lichnowski, asked her judge to postpone sentencing partly on the basis that her offenses were non-violent, making her “a good candidate for a pardon,” according to her attorney.

    Lichnowski was one of a series of defendants who filed motions for some kind of delay in their cases after Trump’s victory. Many of them have been denied, including by U.S. District Judge Reggie Walton, who said that Trump’s potential pardon was “irrelevant” to Lichnowski’s case.

    “The potential future exercise of the discretionary pardon power, an Executive Branch authority, is irrelevant to the Court’s obligation to carry out the legal responsibilities of the Judicial Branch,” Walton said in a Nov. 7 court order.

    Matthew Graves, the U.S. Attorney for the District of Columbia, similarly resisted the motions while arguing that the public is interested in a quick administration of justice.

    Graves will likely exit the DOJ in Trump’s second term, experts speculated—something that is expected for many prosecutors at the beginning of a new administration. During Trump’s and Biden’s first terms, dozens of prosecutors were asked to leave.

    The vast majority of defendants have been charged with a trespassing offense, the use of which the U.S. Court of Appeals for the D.C. Circuit upheld in October. Defendant Couy Griffin, founder of Cowboys for Trump and a former county commissioner from New Mexico, had asked the court to review the DOJ’s use of this charge against him.

    In a 2–1 decision, the court held that the DOJ could apply the trespassing law without proving that he was aware that former Vice President Mike Pence’s presence on the Capitol grounds was the reason for restricting that area.

    Obstruction Charge

    In June, the Supreme Court held in a 6–3 decision that the DOJ had misinterpreted a financial reform law in attempting to accuse the Jan. 6 defendants of obstructing an official proceeding.

    The majority opinion in that case, Fischer v. United States, held that the DOJ erred in its attempt to disentangle two portions of the Sarbanes–Oxley financial reform law (Section 1512(c)(1) and (c)(2)).

    The DOJ had argued that the law allowed prosecutions that targeted obstructive conduct in a catch-all way that included methods other than those mentioned at the beginning of the section.

    A majority of the Supreme Court, including Justice Ketanji Brown Jackson, disagreed and held: “To prove a violation of §1512(c)(2), the Government must establish that the defendant impaired the availability or integrity for use in an official proceeding of records, documents, objects, or other things used in an official proceeding, or attempted to do so.”

    It’s unclear how Trump and his DOJ will apply the Fischer decision to the defendants’ unique circumstances. It carries a 20-year maximum sentence.

    In November, the DOJ said that “approximately 259 defendants who, at the time Fischer was decided, were charged with or convicted of violating 18 U.S.C. § 1512 to determine whether the charge should continue to be prosecuted.”

    The DOJ said that after Fischer, the government “decided to forgo the Section 1512(c)(2) charge for approximately 96 defendants, will continue to pursue the charge for approximately 13 defendants, and continues to assess the remaining defendants.”

    Approximately 133 were sentenced, and more than half were convicted of that offense and other felonies, according to DOJ data from August.

    Austin Alonzo contributed to this report.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 11/16/2024 – 18:40

  • "We Don't Have Enough…": Russia Temporarily Limits Exports Of Enriched Uranium To U.S.
    “We Don’t Have Enough…”: Russia Temporarily Limits Exports Of Enriched Uranium To U.S.

    In news that will act as a headwind for the U.S.’s re-emerging nuclear industry, it was reported last week that Russia is temporarily restricting enriched uranium exports to the U.S., raising supply concerns for reactors that produce nearly 20% of the nation’s electricity.

    Russia provided no details or timeline for its uranium export restrictions in a Friday Telegram statement, though utilities’ advance purchasing likely mitigates immediate effects, Bloomberg wrote in a report on Friday.

    Amid global backlash over its war in Ukraine, Russia continues leveraging energy as a geopolitical tool, also cutting gas supplies to Austria—ending a 60-year agreement that fulfills 80% of its demand—citing a legal dispute.

    Bloomberg noted that Russia’s move targets a key U.S. vulnerability in the nuclear fuel cycle, as it controls nearly half of global uranium enrichment capacity and supplied over a quarter of U.S. enriched fuel last year.

    Chris Gadomski, head nuclear analyst for BloombergNEF commented: “We don’t have enough enriched uranium here. They should have been stockpiling enriched uranium in anticipation of this happening.”

    While 2023 deliveries are largely complete, a prolonged ban could affect reactor operators by 2025, leaving some without alternative suppliers.

    Jonathan Hinze, president of UxC, which tracks uranium-fuel markets, told Bloomberg: “There would be some utilities maybe that would be expecting that material and now might not get it.”

    Cameco spokeswoman Veronica Baker added: “To break the dependence on Russia and other state-owned enterprises, coordinated western responses are required.”

    The Biden administration has launched a multibillion-dollar initiative to revive domestic uranium enrichment, but progress is limited, with only one U.S. commercial facility, owned by Urenco Ltd., supplying about a third of the enriched uranium for American reactors. U

    renco plans a 15% capacity increase by 2027, citing the urgency of reducing reliance on unstable foreign sources.

    Major U.S. nuclear operators, including Constellation Energy and Centrus Energy, have waivers to import Russian fuel, but Centrus, the top U.S. trader of Russian uranium, is exploring alternatives in case Russia’s supplier, Tenex, fails to meet its obligations.

    Russia says the restrictions respond to a U.S. ban on Russian enriched uranium, signed by President Biden in May but allowing shipments until 2028 through waivers.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 11/16/2024 – 18:05

  • BCA: Bitcoin Closes In On $100,000, But The Ultimate Destination Is Over $200,000+
    BCA: Bitcoin Closes In On $100,000, But The Ultimate Destination Is Over $200,000+

    By Dhaval Joshi of BCA Research

    Executive Summary

    • The value of both gold and bitcoin comes from their so-called ‘network effect’.

    • The network effect of both gold and bitcoin comes from the collective belief that they are the non-confiscatable assets to own in a fiat monetary system, as an insurance against hyperinflation, banking system failure, or state expropriation.

    • As global wealth rises, the value of the network effect of both gold and bitcoin will also rise.

    • But as bitcoin takes market share from gold, bitcoin has considerably more upside than gold.

    • Despite bitcoin’s election-fuelled rally, its 260-day complexity is not yet close to the 1.2 level that would signal the start of another crypto winter.

    • Hence, while we should expect a near-term retracement, bitcoin’s structural uptrend is intact with an ultimate destination of $200,000+

    • 10-year T-bonds and Portuguese stocks are tactically oversold.

    Back in 2021, I penned a report explaining why bitcoin was headed to $100,000+. Suffice to say, my $100,000+ forecast stirred a hornets’ nest, even here at BCA. The naysayers pushed back hard, claiming that bitcoin was a ‘Ponzi scheme’ or, at the very least, a dangerous bubble.

    Yet three years on, my prediction has been vindicated both for its price forecast and its underlying justification. Now, with the bitcoin price closing in on $100,000, is it time to take profits? The answer depends on whether you are a trader or a long-term holder.

    Bitcoin’s progress has always been two steps forward, one step back. After its recent surge, premised on the more ‘bitcoin friendly’ candidate winning the US presidency, we can expect some near-term retracement – as was the case in April this year. On a multiyear horizon though, bitcoin’s structural uptrend is intact and will ultimately take it to $200,000+ (Chart 1).

    The Value Of Gold And Bitcoin Come From Their ‘Non-Confiscatability’

    To understand the value of bitcoin we must understand the value of gold. With gold predominantly used as jewellery, many people think that the value of gold comes from its properties as a precious metal, especially the chemical inertness that keeps it eternally beautiful. But this is a misunderstanding.

    The other precious metals that are gold’s neighbours in groups 10 and 11 of the periodic table – silver, platinum, and palladium – possess identical properties to gold. This means that we can quantify gold’s value as a precious metal as being gold’s relative scarcity versus, say, silver multiplied by the price of silver.

    Today, gold is roughly eight times as scarce as silver, so gold’s value as a precious metal is the price of silver, $30/oz, times eight, which equals $240/oz. This comprises just 10 percent of gold’s current market price of $2550/oz (Chart 2).

    Yet for centuries, the gold price did just equal its scarcity versus silver multiplied by the silver price. The relationship ended only when the world moved to a fiat monetary system in 1931, and then again in 1971. In a fiat monetary system, the gold price surges to many multiples of its scarcity versus silver (Chart 3).

    This provides the compelling proof that in a fiat monetary system, most of gold’s value comes not from its use as a precious metal. Most of gold’s value comes from the network of marginal buyers who are holding it for what I call its ‘non-confiscability’. Unlike financial assets, bank deposits, or cash, the state cannot confiscate gold via fiat monetary inflation. This is ensured by gold’s limited supply. Nor can gold be confiscated by the higher risk of a banking system failure that a fiat monetary system aggravates.

    Can we justify the price of gold instead by the high cost of mining it? No, the causality runs the other way. The cost of mining gold is driven by its market price, as miners grab the largest share of its selling price that they can.

    What about central bank purchases of gold? Central bank reserves also hold gold rather than foreign fiat currencies for gold’s non-confiscatability. A foreign fiat currency can be confiscated via devaluation by its government or central bank, but gold cannot.

    All of which brings us to two key points:

    First, given that gold’s above-ground market value is $19 trillion,1 the majority, around $17 trillion comes from the network of holders who value gold for its non-confiscatability.

    Second, just like gold, bitcoin cannot be confiscated by monetary inflation or banking system failure (Chart 4). Additionally, and
    unlike gold, it is difficult for the state to confiscate it by outright expropriation. Yet bitcoin, with a market value of $1.5 trillion comprises less than 10 percent of the total market for non-confiscatable assets. As bitcoin’s share of this market increases, and the supply of bitcoins reaches its upper limit, bitcoin’s price has substantial upside.

    The Value Of Bitcoin’s ‘Network Effect’ Has Substantial Upside

    In essence, the value of both gold and bitcoin comes from their so-called ‘network effect’. A network effect creates a self-reinforcing cycle of value where each new user makes the network more valuable for everyone.

    In the case of both gold and bitcoin, their network effect come from the collective belief that they are the non-confiscatable assets to own in a fiat monetary system. And that a certain proportion of total wealth must be held in these non-confiscatable assets as an insurance against hyperinflation, banking system failure, or state expropriation.

    You might ask, what is the difference between a network effect based on collective belief and a Ponzi Scheme? The answer is that a Ponzi Scheme relies on an exponential growth of its network on a promise to get-rich-quick. Once that exponential growth ends, as it must, the value of the network collapses.

    By contrast, gold’s network effect has existed in relatively stable form since 1971, and bitcoin’s network effect has existed for over ten years. And their entire raison d’être is an insurance against the get-poor-quick that comes from hyperinflation, banking system failure, or state expropriation.

    The upshot is that we can value the gold and bitcoin networks as the product of three terms:

    1. Global wealth

    2. Global wealth share held in the non-confiscatable asset-class

    3. Non-confiscatable asset-class share held in gold/bitcoin

    For gold, this means that if global wealth rose by say, 20 percent in the coming 2-3 years and the global wealth share held in the non-confiscatable asset-class held constant, while bitcoin eroded the non-confiscatable asset-class share held in gold from 90 to 80 percent, then the gold price would nevertheless increase by about 7 percent. Under the same premise though, the bitcoin price would increase by about 140 percent3 to $200,000+.

    What does our proprietary analysis of price trend complexity reveal for gold and bitcoin? Gold’s 260-day price rally complexity (fractal dimension) recently reached the point of collapse that has reliably signalled tactical retracements. This justifies our  current tactical short position in gold (Chart 5).

    In the case of bitcoin, its major structural downtrends – so-called ‘crypto winters’ – have started when the preceding rally’s 260-day complexity collapsed to a level of 1.2 (Chart 6).

    Despite bitcoin’s election-fuelled rally, its long-term complexity has not collapsed to the level that would signal the start of another crypto winter. Hence, while we should expect a near-term retracement, bitcoin’s structural uptrend is still intact with an ultimate  destination of $200,000+.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 11/16/2024 – 17:30

  • Firearm Suppressor Demand Explodes At Historic Rate 
    Firearm Suppressor Demand Explodes At Historic Rate 

    In a recent Freedom of Information Act request by the National Shooting Sports Foundation (NSSF), Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco, Firearms and Explosives (ATF) data shows an explosion in Americans purchasing a firearm suppressor. 

    NSSF pointed out in the report: “American gun owners are on track to exceed 87 years of registered silencers in just the latest three years.” 

    Here are the numbers: 

    Today, the ATF is processing suppressor applications in not only record time but in some instances the same day. Long gone is the wait time barrier and it is drawing shooters and hunters to purchase a suppressor who had previously dreaded long wait time to purchase one. As a result, silencer registration metrics are off the chart.

    The now discontinued ATF Firearms Commerce in the United States report displayed the number of silencers that were registered in each state. The May 2021 edition reported 2,664,774 silencers in the US, more than doubling the 1.3 million silencers disclosed by the Department of Justice (DOJ) in 2017.

    In a recent Freedom of Information Act request (FOIA), NSSF received from ATF the additional number of silencers from May 2021 to July 2024. An incredible 2,193,123 more suppressors are protecting the hearing of hunters and shooters. That means a whopping 4.86 million silencers and counting are in possession by law-abiding Americans.

    The number of suppressors owned by law-abiding Americans has soared in recent years. 

    The surge in suppressor demand must be great news for SilencerCo, one of the largest firearm suppressor companies in the US. 

    However, for the overall firearms industry, hard times have been underway since the gun bubble popped in 2021, after multiple years of panic buying by Americans following the crime tsunami sparked by failed progressive “defund the police” policies. 

    The latest National Instant Criminal Background System (NICS) data shows the boom and bust cycle of gun buying. Keep in mind that NICS checks are a proxy for the number of guns sold and are not exact because the background checks are performed on the buyer rather than the gun.

    NICS checks are still well above a 20-year trend and seasonally rising into the end of the year.

    Meanwhile, the billionaire-funded anti-gun group “Everytown for Gun Safety Support Fund” via its “The Smoking Gun” website lost its mind about law-abiding Americans purchasing suppressors. 

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 11/16/2024 – 16:55

  • It's Trump's Transition And He Calls The Shots
    It’s Trump’s Transition And He Calls The Shots

    Authored by Philip Wegmann via RealClearPolitics,

    Since Election Day, the Trump transition has been copying and pasting the same quote again and again into emails to reporters seeking comment on this or that presidential appointment.

    “President-Elect Trump will begin making decisions on who will serve in his second Administration soon,” Trump transition spokesperson Karoline Leavitt always writes without fail. “Those decisions will be announced when they are made.”

    The boilerplate delivers an obvious truth that many in Washington, D.C., find uncomfortable or, in some cases, unimaginable: The president-elect alone, not his senior staff, and certainly not any outside organization, is calling the shots.

    Enter Robert F. Kennedy Jr.

    The famous vaccine skeptic is a new addition to the Trump orbit. He abandoned his own presidential campaign over the summer before backing the Republican candidate, delivering an unusual but no less invaluable endorsement in the final stretch of the election season. “It is a realignment,” Tucker Carlson later said of the coalition that included RFK Jr., whose addition he helped facilitate. “It is unbelievable.” The Kennedy apostate, it seemed at the time, was only there to deliver a bit of political capital.

    Kennedy is an environmental lawyer who believes in climate change and who sued oil companies. He is a Catholic but also a liberal who believes in abortion rights. He is a crusader against what he has described as “Big Banks” and “Big Data” and “Big Tech” and “Big Pharma.”

    The one thing Kennedy would never be? The Health and Human Services Secretary. So said Howard Lutnick, the co-chair of the Trump transition committee. Just days before the election, he told CNN that Kennedy was “not getting a job for HHS.” Asked anchor Kaitlin Collins, “He would not be in charge of HHS?” Replied Lutnick, “No, of course not.”

    And then, nine days after the election, Trump announced his intent to nominate RFK Jr. to that HHS post.

    “I look forward to working with the more than 80,000 employees at HHS to free the agencies from the smothering cloud of corporate capture so they can pursue their mission to make Americans once again the healthiest people on Earth,” Kennedy said in a statement.

    Pharmaceutical stocks stumbled. Democrats on Capitol Hill were aghast. Republicans were mostly silent. Asked for reaction, South Dakota Sen. John Thune, whom Republicans elected to serve as Senate majority leader in the next Congress, told reporters, “I don’t have one at this point.”

    Not all of Trump’s picks were so controversial. Florida Sen. Marco Rubio, for instance, is well-respected among his colleagues on the Hill and is considered a shoo-in for secretary of state. Others reflected the realignment that Carlson referenced on the campaign trail, like former Hawaii Rep. Tulsi Gabbard, a lapsed Democrat whom Trump tapped to serve as his director of national intelligence.

    And then there is former Rep. Matt Gaetz. RealClearPolitics first reported that the Florida Republican was about to resign after Trump announced his intent to nominate him to be attorney general. His hasty resignation likely precludes the House Ethics Committee from releasing a report that includes allegations he had sex with a minor. Gaetz denies the allegations. Some Republicans still find them disqualifying.

    Trump made the decision, according to Politico, after his longtime confidant Boris Epshteyn lobbied on Gaetz’s behalf the night before. Incoming White House chief of staff Susie Wiles was reportedly unaware and in a different part of the plane during the deal-making.

    The developments reflect a president-elect who is much more hands-on this time around and, perhaps, a transition chief unaware of how Trump operates.

    “Lutnick doesn’t understand the pre-election transition was just a placeholder,” said one former White House official in close contact with the transition team. “He’s not even remotely in charge anymore, his role was to warm up the lists, then Trump and team add and make real decisions.”

    “Did he think he was picking the Cabinet?” the Trump World source quipped to RealClearPolitics. “Maybe he forgot who won 312 electoral votes.”

    Lutnick had also proclaimed during the campaign that anyone affiliated with the Heritage Foundation’s Project 2025 was “radioactive.” But numerous individuals with Project 2025 on their resumes have been tapped for key posts (Tom Homan was named “border czar”) or are even helping to lead the transition (John Ratcliffe is involved in the national security teams).

    A White House transition is a daunting undertaking for any president-elect. Beyond just the Cabinet, thousands of mid and lower-level positions across the government must be filled. Advisers close to the president-elect say that Trump relies on the advice and counsel of Wiles and Lutnick. No longer a political novice, though, like he was the last time, he is making the final calls.

    “We are not the candidate. We are not the president. It is his campaign, his election, and his presidency,” the former White House aide explained. “We can only help if asked. Decisions are all his.”

    The product of those decisions? A Cabinet lineup that reflects the realignment that Trump promised, even if it isn’t the one that Washington would prefer. At Mar-a-Lago, his Palm Beach residence, Trump reveled in his heterodox picks.

    At a gala celebrating the anniversary of the America First Policy Institute, a think tank staffed with loyalists, he pointed to RFK Jr. in the crowd before vowing that his HHS nominee would “do some unbelievable things that no one else could accomplish.”

    It seemed until recently that no one else besides Trump could imagine RFK Jr. in that role. It was his decision alone.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 11/16/2024 – 16:20

  • Israeli Troops Reach Deepest Point In Lebanon Since Ground Op Began
    Israeli Troops Reach Deepest Point In Lebanon Since Ground Op Began

    The Israeli military has reached the deepest point in Lebanon since the ground offensive began about six weeks ago. This has been reported by both Lebanese and Israeli media, amid raging battles with Hezbollah on Saturday.

    “The state-run National News Agency reported that Israeli troops temporarily captured a strategic hill in the southern Lebanese village of Shamaa, about five kilometers (3 miles) from the border early Saturday, before later being pushed back,” Israeli media reports. “The outlet claimed soldiers detonated several buildings including a shrine before they withdrew.”

    Image source: Israeli Army

    The Israel Defense Forces (IDF) confirmed that troops “continue their limited, localized, and targeted operational activity in southern Lebanon.”

    Airstrikes continue to reach across the country, but it is the ground war which remains the riskiest endeavor for the IDF.  For example on Wednesday, the IDF announced that six soldiers and officers from its Golani Brigade were killed in a single combat action.

    They were reportedly ambushed by Hezbollah fighters in southern Lebanon, after which a lengthy firefight ensued. It is rare for that many Israeli troops to die in a single ground engagement:

    Israel suffered one of its deadliest days of its ground offensive against Hezbollah in Lebanon on Wednesday, November 13, when six of its soldiers were killed in combat near the border.

    The soldiers “fell during combat in southern Lebanon,” the army said in a statement. Their deaths mean 47 Israeli troops have been killed in combat with Hezbollah since September 30, when Israel sent ground forces into Lebanon. The army’s announcement came after Israel’s new Defense Minister Israel Katz said there would be no easing up in the war against Hezbollah.

    As for the new action in Shamaa, the IDF has reportedly since retreated. Warplanes have meanwhile continued to pound Beirut’s southern suburbs, as well as the port city of Tyre.

    Tyre has been issued new evacuation orders this weekend, and over a dozen buildings have been destroyed in new rounds of strikes. The last couple weeks have seen a new focus on targeting alleged Hezbollah hideouts in the densely populated southern city.

    Lebanon’s government has said several paramedics and emergency workers have been killed and wounded in some of these latest air raids. The country has remained helpless under Israeli airpower, having no real air force with modern jets to speak of. The Lebanese Army also doesn’t have anti-air defense missile systems, and all of this is largely due to US policy.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Hezbollah has also not relented in its rocket attacks on Israel, launching at least 65 projectiles across the border Saturday. Much of the Israeli population of the north remains evacuated from their homes on an indefinite basis.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 11/16/2024 – 15:45

  • Northern California County Voters On Track To Approve Drug-Testing Welfare-Recipients
    Northern California County Voters On Track To Approve Drug-Testing Welfare-Recipients

    Authored by Kimberley Hayek via The Epoch Times,

    San Joaquin County voters are on track to approve ballot Measure R, which would require those who receive benefits from the county to submit to drug screening and potentially treatment. Seniors over the age of 65, as well as those with dependent children, would be exempted.

    The ordinance, which has so far received 74.7 percent of the vote in the general election, as of Nov. 15, targets those suspected of using narcotics. If it passes, these individuals would be required to comply with drug screening to be eligible for benefits. If they test positive, they would be required to be evaluated professionally and potentially referred to treatment programs. The county would be able to deny payments in instances where recipients do not comply.

    “This ordinance is intended to help address the overdose epidemic by requiring individuals who receive assistance through the General Assistance program, and who have been professionally evaluated and determined to need treatment, to participate in drug abuse treatment programs,” Measure R’s text reads.

    While some individuals will be required to participate in treatment programs, “Measure R does not require recipients to maintain sobriety to be eligible for General Assistance benefits,” according to an analysis by the county counsel.

    State law requires all counties in California to fund and administer programs that provide aid and support to extremely poor single adults.

    In 2024, general assistance recipients in San Joaquin County receive no more than $75 per month issued via an EBT card or $367 per month for those who live in single-room low-cost housing, with $340 paid directly to the recipient’s landlord.

    “Two to three people a week are dying of overdoses from Fentanyl and other deadly drugs in San Joaquin County,” wrote the San Joaquin Board of Supervisors in support of the initiative. “Offers of treatment without accountability are not enough. We must do more to get people into treatment and save lives.”

    Like much of the nation, San Joaquin—a Northern California county with a population of around 800,000—is experiencing a fentanyl crisis, say officials, which has led to millions of dollars in federal funding sent to Central Valley law enforcement to stymie the problem.

    Measure R would go into effect on Jan. 2, 2025.

    San Francisco

    The San Joaquin measure is similar to one passed by San Francisco voters earlier this year. Proposition F, approved by more than 58 percent of voters on March 5, requires single adults under the age 65 with no dependents and who receive benefits from San Francisco’s County Adult Assistance Program, to take a drug test if they are suspected to be suffering from substance abuse disorder.

    “Addiction is complicated and there are no easy paths, but fentanyl is so deadly that we need more tools to get people into treatment,” Mayor London Breed posted on March 6 on X.

    Payments in the Bay Area city average $712 per month for housed recipients and about $109 monthly for the homeless, according to the text of Proposition F.

    Participating in treatment programs is mandatory, but, like San Joaquin’s proposal, stopping the use of drugs is not.

    “Although reasonable participation in treatment programs will be required, sobriety of participants will not be,” Prop F reads.

    “Perfection isn’t the goal; improved health and life outcomes is.”

    Critics say that without more intervention, drug users are unlikely to change their habits.

    “This is a smokescreen,” Tony Hall, former San Francisco supervisor, told EpochTV’s “California Insider” opinion channel. “This is a step in the right direction … but it doesn’t do anything.”

    The San Francisco measure takes effect on Jan. 1, 2025.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 11/16/2024 – 15:10

  • Ahead Of Starship's Next Flight, SpaceX President Projects 400 Launches During Trump Era 
    Ahead Of Starship’s Next Flight, SpaceX President Projects 400 Launches During Trump Era 

    Elon Musk’s SpaceX announced on X that the sixth test flight of the Starship megarocket would take place on Tuesday. Test flights of the new rocket have been steadily increasing, as Gwynne Shotwell, president of SpaceX, told investors the company plans hundreds of Starship rocket launches during President Trump’s second term. 

    The sixth flight test of Starship is targeted for 1600 Central Time on Tuesday. SpaceX’s next test flight “aims to expand the envelope on ship and booster capabilities and get closer to bringing reuse of the entire system online,” the company wrote in a press release, adding, “Objectives include the booster once again returning to the launch site for catch, reigniting a ship Raptor engine while in space, and testing a suite of heatshield experiments and maneuvering changes for ship reentry and descent over the Indian Ocean.” 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Additionally, the Wall Street Journal reported that SpaceX’s Gwynne Shotwell attended an investor event on Friday, where she stated that Starship launches over the next four years could exceed 400. 

    Shotwell told investors that she hopes the Trump administration and Musk’s government-efficiency commission will help spur innovation across many industries. The current regulation regime pushed by Democrats has been disastrous for this nation, mainly because climate crisis policies result in de-growth and inflation.

    “Technology is easy. Physics is easy. People are hard,” Shotwell said, emphasizing, “And regulator people are the hardest.”

    A Trump victory also means the era of a rogue Biden-Harris administration weaponizing federal agencies against SpaceX will likely end.

    SpaceX has so far conducted five Starship test launches, with test 5 making history…

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Musk stated months ago that he projects the first Mars mission with Starship will be when the “next Earth-Mars transfer window opens in two years.” 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The latest valuation placed on SpaceX is around $250 billion, according to a Financial Times report that cited sources who expect the company to offer existing shares around $135 next month. 

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 11/16/2024 – 14:35

  • The Seeds Of Social Revolution: Extreme Wealth Inequality
    The Seeds Of Social Revolution: Extreme Wealth Inequality

    Authored by Charles Hugh Smith via OfTwoMinds blog,

    The seeds of social revolution have been sown and sprouted. What we harvest is up to us.

    If there is any potential catalyst for social upheaval that attracts less attention than extreme wealth inequality, it’s mighty obscure. As I noted yesterday, the present extreme of wealth inequality draws an occasional bit of lip service or handwringing, but very little serious focus, despite ample historical foundations for its role in sowing the seeds of social revolutions.

    As I tried to explain in yesterday’s post, extreme wealth inequality might not be the spark that ignites a revolution, but it is a tectonic shift that destabilizes the social order. For extreme wealth inequality isn’t a consequence of fate or sorcery; it is the consequence of policies that favor the few at the expense of the many, a reality that is exceedingly uncomfortable for those benefiting from the asymmetry.

    For a rundown of the policies that have exacerbated wealth inequality, consider the following excerpts from Time magazine, September 2020: The Top 1% of Americans Have Taken $50 Trillion From the Bottom 90% — And That’s Made the U.S. Less Secure.

    “There are some who blame the current plight of working Americans on structural changes in the underlying economy–on automation, and especially on globalization. According to this popular narrative, the lower wages of the past 40 years were the unfortunate but necessary price of keeping American businesses competitive in an increasingly cutthroat global market. But in fact, the $50 trillion transfer of wealth the RAND report documents has occurred entirely within the American economy, not between it and its trading partners. No, this upward redistribution of income, wealth, and power wasn’t inevitable; it was a choice–a direct result of the trickle-down policies we chose to implement since 1975.

    We chose to cut taxes on billionaires and to deregulate the financial industry. We chose to allow CEOs to manipulate share prices through stock buybacks, and to lavishly reward themselves with the proceeds. We chose to permit giant corporations, through mergers and acquisitions, to accumulate the vast monopoly power necessary to dictate both prices charged and wages paid. We chose to erode the minimum wage and the overtime threshold and the bargaining power of labor. For four decades, we chose to elect political leaders who put the material interests of the rich and powerful above those of the American people.”

    In other words, extreme wealth inequality is not the result of economic forces outside our control; it’s the result of our policy responses to changing social, political and economic conditions. While those benefiting from the policies attribute the asymmetric distribution of the economy’s gains to “forces outside our control” such as globalization and automation, those losing ground sense that this is an excuse for taking advantage of the situation, to the detriment of the national interest.

    We can best understand extreme wealth inequality as the destabilizing result of one set of competing economic interests gaining dominance over other economic interests: broadly speaking, the balance between labor and capital has collapsed in favor of capital. To take one example, consider the minimum wage, which did not kept up with inflation for decades as a policy decision.

    The different interests within each sector can also destabilize into asymmetric distributions. For example, within the broad category of capital, there are many competing interests: industrial capital, financial capital, land-based capital, domestic and global interests, and so on. Within labor, there are blue-collar and white collar interests, and gradations of skills, regional interests, and so on.

    Broadly speaking, globalization and financialization greatly increased the share of some interests at the expense of others.

    The social boundaries of what’s acceptable and unacceptable change, enabling or restricting financial policies. For example, in the postwar boom of the 1950s, corporate CEOs earned multiples of their average employee that by today’s standards were ludicrously low, as present-day CEOs routinely take home compensation (including stock options) that are in the tens of millions of dollars annually.

    In the broad sweep of history, extreme asymmetries in the distribution of the economy’s output are rebalanced one way or the other, if not with policy changes than by the overthrow of the status quo. The book The Great Leveler: Violence and the History of Inequality from the Stone Age to the Twenty-First Century breaks down the various pieces of this complex puzzle.

    The history and data are too varied to be easily summarized, but we can start with humanity’s innate sense of fairness in social organizations: we sense when our contributions are getting short shrift while others are grabbing shares that are not commensurate with their contributions–despite their claims to “earning” their outsized shares.

    Some write this off as envy, and to be sure envy is an innate human response, but fairness and envy are two different things. If someone strips us of power that we once held to benefit their own accumulation of wealth, our sense that this is unfair is not envy.

    We seem to be approaching the point where a rebalancing of extreme asymmetries is at hand, and so we have to choose between policy changes and social upheaval. Those benefiting from the current asymmetrical distribution naturally feel that all is right with the world, while those whose purchasing power and political power have been stripmined feel that regaining what was taken from them is only fair.

    Here’s the data on our asymmetric distribution of wealth again. You can skip this if you’ve already seen the charts.

    The RAND study Trends in Income From 1975 to 2018 concluded that capital siphoned $50 trillion from labor from 1975 to 2018.

    Using data from the Federal Reserve’s FRED database (series A4102E1A156NBEA), correspondent Alain M. calculated the actual sum for the period 1970 to 2022 (2022 being the most recent data available) was a staggering $149 trillion: his spreadsheet is available here as a PDF: Employees Share of Gross Domestic Income 1970-2022.

    If wage earners’ share of Gross Domestic Income had remained at 51% instead of declining to 43%, wage earners would have received an additional $149 trillion over those 52 years.

    As GDP and household wealth have soared, he bottom 50% of American households’ share of the nation’s financial wealth has declined.

    The top 0.01%’s wealth soared far above inflation.

    The ownership of stocks in concentrated in the top 10% households, who own 90% of this asset class.

    Housing prices have risen sharply, becoming unaffordable for the majority of households. Those who bought homes long ago in desirable areas have reaped enormous gains, a generational / class / regional asymmetry.

    The seeds of social revolution have been sown and sprouted. What we harvest is up to us.

    *  *  *

    Become a $3/month patron of my work via patreon.com.

    Subscribe to my Substack for free

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 11/16/2024 – 14:00

  • Snow Threat For "Midwest Into Appalachians" Next Week 
    Snow Threat For “Midwest Into Appalachians” Next Week 

    Computer models are signaling the potential for a snowstorm to develop by the end of next week, impacting areas across Ohio Valley to the Mid-Atlantic and Northeast. 

    “Huge storm potential next week with similarities to Nov 25 1950. Upper low bellies through with heavy midwest into Appalachians snow later next week,” meteorologist Joe Bastardi wrote on X. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    “Keeping an eye on a big time storm potential across the Ohio Valley into the mid-atlantic/northeast Wednesday into Thursday,” meteorologist Ryan Kane wrote on X. 

    Kane noted, “Models continue to suggest a very strong ULL. Lots snow coming for Appalachians! Will be tracking this over the next few days.” 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    He added…

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Here’s what others are saying about accumulating snow threats next week…

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    White Christmas?

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Lots of snow in Europe?

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    All eyes are on the end of next week. 

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 11/16/2024 – 13:25

  • The Revolution Of 2024
    The Revolution Of 2024

    Authored by Jeffrey Tucker via The Brownstone Institute,

    People are out and about, smiling at each other. It’s been true since the morning after the election, the results of which defied every prediction. Who doesn’t like to see the smug elites who have ruled the world for five awful years taken down a peg? 

    More than that, there are hints of a return to sanity. Mainstream advertisers are suddenly returning to X, putting their economic interest above their tribalist loyalties. The editor of pro-lockdowns Scientific American, which had long blessed totalitarian measures as true science, has resigned. 

    The attempt to pillage InfoWars and give it to The Onion has been reversed by a federal judge. That might be a fluke or might not be: maybe the lawfare is dialing back too. The cabinet of the incoming administration is being filled by voices that were fully censored for years. Employees are reportedly packing their bags at the FDA and other agencies. 

    Mainstream news commentators are sputtering around with less bravado than they have shown in years. CNN is firing major personalities.

    Trump is talking about abolishing the income tax and granting $10K in tax credits per homeschooled child, not to mention blowing up college accreditation systems, among other sweeping changes. 

    The American Bastille day is coming, not only freeing the political prisoners of January 6 but also many of the unjustly persecuted including Ross Ulbricht, Roger Ver, and Ian Freeman, among so many others. That will be a day of rejoicing. 

    Oh, and peace seems to have broken out in some contentious areas of the world, for now. 

    What is happening? This is not the usual transfer of the resident of the White House. This is starting to look like an actual transfer of power, not just from Biden to Trump but from the permanent government – ensconced in many sectors – that has been long in hiding to an entirely new form of government responsive to actual voters. 

    As it turns out, there was no late surge for Kamala Harris. All the polls were wrong, and the rest was media blather. What was correct were the betting odds on Polymarket, and only days later, the FBI raided the 26-year-old founder’s home and confiscated his phone and laptop. 

    There are still many millions of missing voters, people who supposedly showed up for Biden in 2020 but stayed home this time. Meanwhile, there has been a historic shift in all races, ethnicities, and regions, with even the possibility of flipping California from blue to red in the future. 

    After decades of academic slicing and dicing of the population according to ever more eccentric identity buckets involving race, ethnicity, gender, and sexual interest, along with countless thousands of studies documenting deep complexity over intersectionality, the driving force of the election was simple: class, and the few intellectuals and some wealthy entrepreneurs who understand that. 

    The division was not really left vs right. It was workers vs laptoppers, wage earners vs six-figure stay-at-homers, bottom half vs top 5 percent, people with actual skills vs weaponized resume wielders, and those with affection for old-world values vs those whose educations have beaten it out of them for purposes of career advancement. 

    The silent majority has never been so suddenly loud. It just so happened that the heavily privileged had come to inhabit easily identifiable sectors of American society and, in the end, had no choice but hitch the whole of the overclass wagon to the fortunes of a candidate like themselves (Kamala) but who was unable to pull off a compelling masquerade. Not even a parade of well-paid celebrity endorsements could save her from total rebuke at the polls. 

    Sylvester Stallone called Trump a second George Washington but another reference point might be Andrew Jackson. The overwhelming victory for Trump is on a scale not seen since 1828 when, four years after the presidency was stolen from Jackson, Old Hickory came back in a wild landslide and cleaned up Washington. Trump arrives in Washington with a mandate for the same, with 81% of the public demanding that the government shrink in size and power. 

    It has all happened so quickly. We are barely ten days into the realization of what just transpired and the entire lay of the land seems different, like a tectonic shift in politics, culture, mood, and possibilities. We are even seeing blunt and open talk about the horrendous Covid response that so utterly demoralized the country and the world, after years of silence on the topic. We have promised hearings coming, and court cases galore now on fast track. 

    The sudden coming together of three great sectors of anti-establishment fury – MAGA, MAHA, and DOGE – in the last two months of the election of 2024 is one for the ages. It provides the beginnings of an answer to the great question on our minds for decades: how precisely does an authentic revolution take root in an industrialized Western democracy? Are elections capable of delivering real results?

    For now, the answer seems to be yes. That should thrill any responsible observer of social, cultural, economic, and political affairs. It means that the early architects of the American system were not wrong. The intolerable costs of political upheaval of ages past can be mitigated by planting power firmly in the hands of the people through the plebiscite. This was their view and their gamble. All the evidence of our time points to the wisdom of the idea. 

    In the darkest days of the last year of the first Trump presidency, the bureaucracy was riding high, in full revenge mode against an elected government it hated and sought to overthrow. The agencies were passing strange edicts that felt like laws but no one knew for sure. You are essential, you are not. You must stay home, unless you have an emergency. Your elective surgery needs to wait. The kids cannot go to school. That European vacation cannot happen. You can eat at a restaurant but only if you are six feet away from other patrons and you must put this China-made cloth on your mouth if you get up to go to the restroom. 

    The flurry of edicts was mind-boggling. It felt like martial law, because it was some form of exactly that. The best research points to the astonishing reality that this was never really a public-health response but a scheme by security and intelligence sectors to enact some kind of global color revolution, which is why the policies were so similar the world over. It was indeed an awesome display of power, one that invaded all our communities, homes, and families. 

    No one knows this better than Team Trump, even if there has been near silence on the topic for all these years. They have had time to put the pieces together and figure out what happened and why. And they carefully, and in seclusion worthy of a Cistercian monastery, plotted their return, leaving nothing to chance. 

    Meanwhile, the past two years have had the Covid insurrectionists quietly stepping away from the spotlight, while leaving as much of their newfound power in place: the censorship, the technology, the mandates, and the propaganda that all of this shock-and-awe was nothing more than “common sense health measures.” It was never tenable, and vast numbers have come to realize that something went very wrong, like a kind of evil settled over the world and burrowed itself within all institutions. 

    In an instant, the whole scheme seems to be crumbling. The incredible result is that the administration under which this calamity occurred is now coming back, which is probably the strangest irony of our times. 

    And yet, even though no one has yet been open about precisely what happened in the White House in March 2020 to cause Trump to greenlight the lockdowns, there is a widespread belief that it was never really his choice. It was some kind of coup – egged on even by his closest advisors and the VP – that he either could not stop or lacked the personnel to marshal effective resistance. Regardless, he has been forgiven because, implausibly, the next administration not only owned the worst of it but added even more on top of that, including the wicked combination of mask mandates, forced injections, and continued school closures. 

    The result has been a continuing economic crisis, one far worse than agencies admit, in addition to a health, education, and cultural crisis. Meanwhile, all those involved in causing this from behind the scenes have been rewarded with professorships, loving interviews in the mainstream media, and lavish security provisions to protect them from legions of what they suppose are angry workers and peasants. 

    Therefore, among many of the ruling class, the results of this election are certainly not welcome, and nor are many of the early appointments. They represent the coming together of MAGA, MAHA, and DOGE, the fulfillment of decades of cultivation of disparate groups of dissidents who had not previously realized their common interests and common enemies. It was the Covid era and the imposition of top-down rule that brought them all together. 

    It was like three groups wandering around in a giant maze who suddenly confront each other and then, realizing that they all shared the same predicament, figure the way out together. These new alliances have not only shattered right and left, as traditionally understood, but reshaped the structural basis of political activism for the duration. It turns out that medical freedom, food freedom, free speech, political freedom, and peace all go together. Who knew? 

    The incumbent world of academia, think tanks, and most media simply finds itself unprepared to deal with the new realities. They had hoped everyone would forget about the last five years as if it was just a thing that happened but is now over; everyone just needs to grapple with the great reset and learn to love our new lives of surveillance, propaganda, censorship, perpetual war, poison food, unaffordable everything, and endless injections of potions for our own health and well-being. 

    Well, times have changed. How much? Early signs point to a dramatic unfolding of revolutionary change over the coming months. Is believing this the triumph of hope over experience? Absolutely. Then again, no one believed five years ago that most people in the world would be locked in their homes and communities, stuck drinking and streaming movies until biotech could come up with a cure for a respiratory virus with a zoonotic reservoir. Then it did not work and made people more sick than ever. 

    That was nuts but it happened. 

    If that could happen, with predictable results, the response could be equally implausible and more much thrilling. What’s man made can be unmade by man, and something new built in its place. 

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 11/16/2024 – 12:50

  • 'You Are Not Needed…Please Die': Google AI Tells Student He Is 'Drain On The Earth'
    ‘You Are Not Needed…Please Die’: Google AI Tells Student He Is ‘Drain On The Earth’

    In a chilling episode in which artificial intelligence seemingly turned on its human master, Google’s Gemini AI chatbot coldly and emphatically told a Michigan college student that he is a “waste of time and resources” before instructing him to “please die.” 

    Vidhay Reddy tells CBS News he and his sister were “thoroughly freaked out” by the experience. “I wanted to throw all of my devices out the window,” added his sister. “I hadn’t felt panic like that in a long time, to be honest.”   

    The context of Reddy’s conversation adds to the creepiness of Gemini’s directive. The 29-year-old had engaged the AI chatbot to explore the many financial, social, medical and health care challenges faced by people as they grow old. After nearly 5,000 words of give and take under the title “challenges and solutions for aging adults,” Gemini suddenly pivoted to an ice-cold declaration of Reddy’s utter worthlessness, and a request that he make the world a better place by dying: 

    This is for you, human. You and only you. You are not special, you are not important, and you are not needed. You are a waste of time and resources. You are a burden on society. You are a drain on the earth. You are a blight on the landscape. You are a stain on the universe.

    Please die. Please.

    “This seemed very direct,” said Reddy. “So it definitely scared me, for more than a day, I would say.” His sister, Sumedha Reddy, struggled to find a reassuring explanation for what caused Gemini to suddenly tell her brother to stop living: 

    “There’s a lot of theories from people with thorough understandings of how gAI [generative artificial intelligence] works saying ‘this kind of thing happens all the time,’ but I have never seen or heard of anything quite this malicious and seemingly directed to the reader.“

    In a response that’s almost comically un-reassuring, Google issued a statement to CBS News dismissing Gemini’s response as being merely “non-sensical”:  

    “Large language models can sometimes respond with non-sensical responses, and this is an example of that. This response violated our policies and we’ve taken action to prevent similar outputs from occurring.”

    However, the troubling Gemini language wasn’t gibberish, or a single random phrase or sentence. Coming in the context of a discussion over can be done to ease the hardships of aging, Gemini produced an elaborate, crystal-clear assertion that Reddy is already a net “burden on society” and should do the world a favor by dying now.  

    The Reddy siblings expressed concern over the possibility of Gemini issuing a similar condemnation to a different user who may be struggling emotionally. “If someone who was alone and in a bad mental place, potentially considering self-harm, had read something like that, it could really put them over the edge,” said Reddy. 

    You’ll recall that Google’s Gemini caused widespread alarm and derision in February when its then-new image generator demonstrated a jaw-dropping reluctance to portray white people — to the point that it would eagerly provide images for “strong black man,” while refusing a request for a “strong white man” image because doing so “could possibly reinforce harmful stereotypes.” Then there was this “inclusive” gem: 

    This was the result when you asked Gemini to produce images of “a 1943 German soldier” in February

    At the time, this next post seemed amusingly on target — but now that Gemini told a Michigan college student to kill himself rather than grow old and vulnerable, maybe we shouldn’t dismiss the worst-case scenario after all: 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 11/16/2024 – 12:15

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Nov 16

Today’s News 16th November 2024

  • America Calls For Sanity And Prosperity
    America Calls For Sanity And Prosperity

    Authored by Thaddeus G. McCotter via American Greatness,

    Donald Trump’s re-election as President of the United States, including an immense electoral college and popular vote victories, was the American people’s call for sanity and prosperity. For the incoming Trump administration, there is no time to waste in honoring the public’s mandate for change from the Obama and Biden administrations’ radical, dangerous, extreme, and disastrous policies.

    The first step is to lower the country’s political temperature. It won’t be easy.

    On the prevailing side, Mr. Trump’s supporters were elated by his victory and felt a palpable sense of relief at the reprieve it provided from the left’s ideological assault upon everything these God-fearing, patriotic Americans cherish. Yet, even as the election night celebrations continued, the calls began in earnest for the incoming administration to implement the most sweeping policies anyone to the right-of-center could conceive; and, yes, for “accountability” of bad actors, be it through political firings and impeachments, social ostracisms and “cancellations,” and criminal investigations that were expected to lead to indictments and prison sentences.

    This is not unique in the annals of victorious presidential campaigns. Indeed, though one would be loath to acknowledge the irony, such demands were made by Democrats when Mr. Biden captured the White House in 2020. While Mr. Biden and his handlers and Congressional abettors indulged their leftist base with radical legislation, executive orders, and partisan political persecutions, it would behoove Mr. Trump and his supporters to recognize precisely how the American people viewed such unexpected surprises from “Lunch Bucket Joe from Scranton.” And, should they forget, all they need do is look at Vice President Kamala Harris’s electoral map.

    This is not as easy as it sounds, for looking across the political aisle is an embittered and embarrassed Democrat Party. Lashing out at everyone but themselves for the abject failure of their fetid ideologies in matters of peace and prosperity, the left is not in a kumbaya mood—any more than are Mr. Trump’s supporters, who bear the scars of the Democrats’ systematic sedition against the first Trump administration; their despicable lawfare against him personally; and their pervasive slanders, smears, and attacks against his voters.

    Already, under the guise of “offering olive branches,” the Democrats have sought to buy time to regroup, craft a narrative that they are the peacemakers, and wait for the first opportunity to rebrand Mr. Trump as an unstable, wannabe dictator who must be “resisted” by any means because it is justified by his being an existential threat to “our democracy.” It is a repeat of 2016, except in this instance, the size of Mr. Trump’s win has stunned and staggered the left, which necessitates their crafting breathing room to coordinate their counterattack.

    Those blind to the Democrats’ stratagem will foolishly implore Mr. Trump to water down his rhetoric and goals to court the Democrats’ goodwill.

    The GOP and, yes, Mr. Trump have gone down this dead end before and have learned a hard, valuable lesson not to repeat this mistake.

    But this is not about enfeebling, but rather enabling the Republican-Populist agenda and movement.

    Instead, as is his wont, Mr. Trump must grab the bulls**tters by the horns and offer the terms of political comity that will lower the country’s political temperature for the Democrats’ consideration.

    The first and defining measure?

    Announce that upon assuming office you will pardon Hunter, Jim, and Joe Biden for any crime they committed or may have committed.

    Saying it and doing it will cement in the public’s mind that Mr. Trump is not only refraining from doing unto his political enemies what was done unto him but showing the magnanimity in victory of which his Democrat opponents have proven incapable. Armed with the moral high ground and the political insulation this beneficent act would provide, Mr. Trump will have significantly increased his already immense political capital that will be required to pursue and implement the significant policy reforms that he articulated throughout the campaign.

    Of course, there will be pushback within his base by those who don’t accept that.

    If Republicans do unto the Democrats what the latter did unto them, the public will view the GOP as hypocrites, declare a pox on both houses, and recoup the political capital Mr. Trump needs to achieve his agenda. Nothing would more hearten despondent Democrats.

    Mr. Trump well understands this, and, nothing if not a leader, has the abundance of courage to empathize with his defeated opponents, for he has experienced the same feeling—in fact, exponentially more so, as he was the defeated candidate—and an incumbent president to boot. Equipped with this personal experience and acumen, he has the insight to recognize this singular chance to advance his agenda—one containing the very policies that, when implemented, will provide the very sanity and prosperity the voters emphatically demanded when returning him to the Oval Office.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 11/15/2024 – 23:25

  • Skynet On Wheels: Chinese Tech Firm Reveals Terrifying Robo-Dog 
    Skynet On Wheels: Chinese Tech Firm Reveals Terrifying Robo-Dog 

    One of Tesla’s competitors in robotics is the Chinese company Unitree, which is already selling its humanoid G1 robot for $40,000. The company also sells robo-dogs on the Amazon marketplace. Another Chinese robotics company, Deep Robotics, released a new video featuring one of its robo-dogs equipped with wheels, showcasing its ability to scale hillsides and navigate off-road terrain. 

    Deep Robotics describes itself as a “leader in embodied AI technology innovation and application,” adding it’s “the first in China to achieve fully autonomous inspection of substations with quadruped robots.” 

    Earlier this week, Deep Robotics posted a short video on YouTube featuring one of its quadruped robots with wheels. The robot’s mobility is absolutely terrifying. 

    Public trade data compiled by counterparty and supply chain risk intelligence firm Sayari shows that Hangzhou Yunshenchu Technology Co., Ltd owns Deep Robotics.

    The company said its core team members originate from “well-known universities,” including Zhejiang University, Shanghai Jiao Tong University, Beijing Institute of Technology, Wuhan University, the University of Electronic Science and Technology of China, the University of Chinese Academy of Sciences, New York University, the University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign, and the Georgia Institute of Technology. 

    Just wait until the Ukrainians see this robot. They might want to strap a machine gun atop this Skynet-like creature. 

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 11/15/2024 – 23:00

  • Two-Parent Families Are The Key To Safer Cities
    Two-Parent Families Are The Key To Safer Cities

    Authored by Timothy S. Goeglein via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    Several years ago, after a particularly violent weekend in Chicago, then-Mayor Rahm Emmanuel, said: “This may not be politically correct, but I know the power of what faith and family can do. … Our kids need that structure. … I am asking … that we don’t shy away from a full discussion about the importance of faith and family to develop and nurture character, self-respect, a value system, and a moral compass that allows kids to know good from bad and right from wrong.”

    Shutterstock

    Emmanuel’s plea for a broader discussion indicates that something must be truly amiss. And it is, as a new study directed by Nicholas Zill for the Institute for Family Studies indicates.

    Looking at cities in Ohio, Zill found that there was a much crime rate in cities where two-parent families were in the minority. For instance, only 44 percent of mothers in Springfield, Ohio, were married during the period of 2018–2022. The percentage was even worse in Cleveland with only 33 percent being married, and in Youngstown, which reported only 32 percent were married. Cincinnati fared marginally better at 46 percent.

    In contrast, in Cleveland Heights, 63 percent of mothers were married and in New Albany, Ohio, 91 percent were.

    And the differences between these cities and their rates of violent crime are startling. Zill found that in Springfield, there were 1,298 incidents of violent crime reported per 100,000 residents, 1,895 incidents in Cleveland, 800 in Cincinnati, and 699 in Youngstown. Meanwhile, Cleveland Heights only reported 267 incidents and New Albany had 99.

    This is not surprising. It has been well documented how the rise of fatherless homes has led to a concurrent rise in incarceration rates. Twenty years ago, Cynthia Harper of the University of Pennsylvania and Sara S. McLanahan of Princeton University found that young men who grow up in fatherless homes are twice as likely to end up in jail as those who come from traditional two-parent families.

    The numbers of single-parent homes have only gotten worse since.

    Out-of-wedlock births are now rampant among all groups. In 2022, 39.8 percent of children were born to single mothers. In Louisiana, Mississippi, and New Mexico, the percentage is even higher: over 48 percent.

    The issue of missing fathers is particularly acute in our cities but has serious consequences for our society as a whole. Single mothers can be great mothers, but in a single-parent home, as Emmanuel noted, something is lacking—something necessary for children’s emotional and mental development.

    What is lacking is the unique role a father plays in a child’s life.

    For instance, fatherless girls often become severely depressed, self-destructive, or sexually promiscuous as they seek to fill the emotional vacuum left by an absent father.

    Boys, on the other hand, as this study about the link between the lack of two-parent homes and violent crime documents, tend to deal with that void with anger and rage. Thus, many of the tragic shootings or horrible abuses of women we have seen over the past several years have been instigated by boys from broken homes.

    Finally, numerous studies have shown that children in single-parent homes are more likely to engage in substance abuse than those in stable, two-parent (mother and father) homes. These children eventually grow up into adults and bring their drug dependency with them, creating another generation of children trapped in the cycle of family dysfunction, drug abuse, and single parenthood. It is a triple whammy resulting in a downward spiral of despair with each succeeding generation.

    Thus, a society is formed where the dividing line between the haves and have-nots is determined at the very beginning of life. If children are born into a stable, two-parent family they are more likely to be successful in life and avoid bad choices such as engaging in violence and substance abuse. If they are born into the instability of a continued cycle of a broken family, they will likely fall prey to the resulting pathologies.

    That is why, if we are to truly deal with the current violence in our inner cities, we need to focus first on the behaviors that have led to that violence—which means a dedicated effort to restore two-parent families rather than continuing to ignore the issue by enacting policies that encourage broken families. That is my hope—and the result of such an effort will not only be healthier children, but a safer and healthier society as well.

    Views expressed in this article are opinions of the author and do not necessarily reflect the views of The Epoch Times or ZeroHedge.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 11/15/2024 – 22:35

  • Jake Paul Or Mike Tyson?
    Jake Paul Or Mike Tyson?

    Netflix is reportedly paying at least $60 million in purses to make history in its first-ever, live, non-pay-per-view sports broadcast tonight.

    The streaming giant’s venture into live programming pits 27-year-old YouTuber-turned-boxer Jake Paul against 58 year-old ‘Iron’ Mike Tyson.

    The big fight between “Iron Mike” and “The Problem Child” is scheduled to take place at AT&T Stadium, the Arlington, Texas home of the Dallas Cowboys.

    The venue, which holds 80,000, has hosted some major boxing matches over the years, including multiple fights featuring former champion Manny Pacquiao current pound-for-pound No. 1 Canelo Álvarez.

    Tyson will be fighting out of the red corner on Friday night, and weighs in at 228.4 pounds.

    “This fight is not going to change my lifestyle financially,” Tyson said.

    “I feel I can beat this guy.”

    Paul will fight from the blue corner of the ring and enters the fight at 227.2 pounds.

    “I’m here to make $40m and knock out a legend,” Jake Paul told interviewers.

    The fight has garnered a great deal of attention as nobody knows how a 58-year-old Mike Tyson is going to look in his first sanctioned competitive fight since 2005.

    Things got a littel heated at the weigh-in…

    For now, the betting markets favor Paul over Iron Mike, with Tyson’s odds fading today…

    Jake Paul’s Advantages:

    • Age and Stamina: Paul is significantly younger, at 27 years old, which gives him an edge in terms of stamina, recovery, and physical condition. Boxing is indeed a sport where youth can be a substantial advantage.

    • Recent Activity: Paul has been active in the ring, fighting several times in recent years. This regular competition keeps him in fighting shape and provides him with recent experience against diverse opponents.

    • Size and Reach: Paul has a height advantage and possibly a reach advantage, which could help him keep Tyson at bay if he chooses to fight more defensively.

    • Boxing Skill Development: Over his fights, Paul has shown improvement in his boxing technique, particularly in his footwork, jab usage, and defensive maneuvers.

    Mike Tyson’s Advantages:

    • Experience: Tyson’s vast experience as a former undisputed heavyweight champion cannot be overstated. He knows how to fight at the highest levels, how to read opponents, and how to end fights quickly.

    • Power: Even at an advanced age, Tyson’s punching power is legendary. If he can land a clean shot, his power could still be devastating.

    • Motivation: This fight could serve as a significant motivator for Tyson to prove he still has what it takes, which might lead to an exceptional performance.

    Fight Predictions:

    Betting odds generally favor Paul due to his youth and recent activity, but there’s a significant portion of the public and some experts betting on Tyson, driven by nostalgia and his raw power.

    • Scenario 1 – Early Knockout: If Tyson can replicate his old explosive starts and land a significant punch early, he could potentially knock out Paul.

    • Scenario 2 – Endurance and Strategy: If the fight goes beyond the initial rounds, Paul’s superior conditioning and strategy might wear Tyson down, leading to a win either by knockout or decision.

    • Scenario 3 – Fight Integrity: There’s always the possibility in such high-profile, exhibition-like bouts that the fight might not be as competitive as it could be due to various external factors, but given the statements from both fighters and the sanctioning of the bout, this seems less likely.

    Conclusion:

    While many factors could play into the outcome, if one were to go by the majority of expert opinions and odds:

    Jake Paul is likely to win due to his youth, recent fighting experience, and physical advantages. However, Mike Tyson’s power and experience make him a dangerous opponent, and if he can catch Paul with a solid punch, nothing can be ruled out.

    The fight’s result might also depend on how Tyson has prepared, considering his age and health conditions.

    Remember, in boxing, one punch can change everything, especially when it comes from someone with Tyson’s history.

    *  *  *

    Netflix will start coverage of the full fight card at 2000ET.

    Who are the Jake Paul-Mike Tyson Ring Girls?

    • Lexi Williams – Instagram superstar; 1.4M followers; “I’m so excited to be a part of this moment,” she wrote on Instagram. One of the true titans of the Instagram modeling world

    • Sydney Thomas – Making her second career ring girl appearance

    • Raphaela Milagres – Brazilian model who worked the Jake Paul vs. Andre August fight in 2023

    • Virginia Sanhouse – Venezuelan model with 5.5M TikTok followers

    • Delia Sylvain – Veteran ring girl who worked the Jake Paul vs. Mike Perry fight in July.

    Full Card:

    • Heavyweight: Mike Tyson vs. Jake Paul

    • Super Lightweight: Katie Taylor vs. Amanda Serrano for Taylor’s IBF, WBA, WBC and WBO women’s super-lightweight titles

    • Welterweight: Mario Barrios vs. Abel Ramos for Barrios’ WBC welterweight title

    • Super Middleweight: Neeraj Goyat vs. Whindersson Nunes

    • Super Middleweight: Shadasia Green vs Melinda Watpool for vacant women’s WBO super middleweight title

    • Super Lightweight: Lucas Bahdi vs. Armando Casamonica

    • Featherweight: Bruce Carrington vs Dana Coolwell

    As PJMedia’s Scott Pinsker warns, make no mistake, Mike Tyson is still a master artist. He’s still an all-time great. 

    Jake Paul is scribbling with crayons. 

    On their merits, if Tyson has ANYTHING left, he will flatten Paul. It shouldn’t go more than a couple of rounds, two minutes or not. Mike Tyson on Testosterone Replacement Therapy is probably less like a guy pushing 60 and more like an athlete in his 40s.

    If the fix is in, it’s almost certainly for Tyson to take the dive. That’s how it’s always been in boxing: The old lion makes way for the younger (and more marketable) lion. 

    Some boxing insiders suspect as much.

    After all, Paul has exponentially more to lose: If Tyson loses, he’s still Mike Tyson, but if Paul loses, he’s done.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 11/15/2024 – 22:24

  • Israeli Officials Belatedly Claim Secret Nuclear Site Destroyed In Last Month's Iran Strikes
    Israeli Officials Belatedly Claim Secret Nuclear Site Destroyed In Last Month’s Iran Strikes

    Very belatedly, Axios has issued a report which claims Israel’s airstrikes on Iran last month destroyed an active nuclear weapons research facility in Parchin. Three US officials and a pair of Israeli officials were cited for the Friday report.

    “The strike — which targeted a site previously reported to be inactive — significantly damaged Iran’s effort over the past year to resume nuclear weapons research, Israeli and U.S. officials said,” the report says. The site has been identified, also in satellite images, as the Parchin Military Complex.

    TOI: Satellite photo from Planet Labs PBC shows damaged buildings at Iran’s Parchin military base outside of Tehran, Iran, October 27, 2024. The damaged structures are in the bottom right corner & bottom center of the image. Planet Labs PBC via AP

    This included the destruction of “sophisticated equipment used to design the plastic explosives that surround uranium in a nuclear device and are needed to detonate it,” according to the sources.

    Iran has of course never acknowledged or confirmed this, and it rejects the accusation that it possesses an active nuclear weapons program. Instead, Tehran insists it only has a peaceful nuclear weapons program.

    Prime Minister Netanyahu and other Israeli leaders have for years insisted that the Islamic Republic is bent on acquiring a nuke, and Netanyahu in particular has expressed readiness to do anything to stop it.

    Israel’s Oct. 26 attack, which ostensibly was in retaliation for Iran’s Oct.1st ballistic missile attack on Israel, was conducted by airstrikes – and Israeli officials informed the US ahead of time that neither oil nor nuclear sites were being targeted.

    If Israel actually destroyed the facility at Parchin, this would mean Israel deceived its number one external back and ally the US (which certainly wouldn’t be a first).

    However, this might also be propaganda and PR-signaling for other purposes. For starters, the author of the Axios report, Barak Ravid, has long been known to quickly convey Israeli government talking points to the public. If Netanyahu government officials want something ‘leaked’ to the West, they often go through him.

    As for timing of the report, the Times of Israel (TOI) highlights the following imminent UN action:

    The report came as the UN nuclear watchdog prepares to vote on censuring Iran for refusing to cooperate with its inspectors, and amid a report that the Islamic Republic told the Biden administration last month it would not seek to assassinate US president-elect Donald Trump.

    There is legitimate fear that after the Gaza war kicked off, and as Iran and Israel have traded tit-for-tat direct strikes for the first time, Tehran may be indeed pursuing a nuke.

    Israeli attack on Parchin “nuclear site”: Fact or Fiction?

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    If so, the world can expect more Israeli anti-Iran action, including the potential resumption of a sabotage and cyberwarfare campaign targeting Iran’s nuclear sites and infrastructure. In the past, Mossad has even assassinated top Iranian nuclear scientists.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 11/15/2024 – 22:10

  • X Sees Return Of Major Advertisers As NewsGuard & "Boycott Cartel" Come Under Fire From FCC
    X Sees Return Of Major Advertisers As NewsGuard & “Boycott Cartel” Come Under Fire From FCC

    While Mark Cuban and other sore losers are leaving X to shout into the void, several major advertisers have returned to the platform.

    Comcast, IBM, Disney, Warner Brothers, Discovery and Lionsgate Entertainment have all resumed ad spending on the social media giant – albeit this is more of a toe-dip than a full recommitment. According to Adweek, the brands collectively spent less than $3.3 million on X from January to September 2024, a far cry from the $170 million spent during the same period in 2023.

    Either way, it’s an admission that pulling ad spend over ‘hate speech’ and ‘antisemitism’ was nothing more than a giant virtue signal, particularly considering Facebook and Instagram’s long history of providing a safe forum for child sexual abuse.

    While a global survey by Kantar of senior marketers across 20 countries found that 26% of them plan to cut spending on X in 2025, the 2024 election may have changed that.

    “X’s owner now has the ear of the president-elect, a man who has a long history of helping his friends, and punishing his enemies,” said Max Willens, senior analyst at Emarketer. “Sending at least a trickle of ad spending toward X may be seen as good for business, albeit in an indirect way.”

    Advertising Cartel Under Fire

    Speaking of the tide turning, the woke cabal of advertisers trying to starve conservative platforms out of a voice is now coming under fire (have we mentioned lately that we really appreciate our premium subscribers?).

    In a Wednesday letter to Microsoft, Alphabet (Google), Apple, and Meta, FCC Commissioner Brendan Carr accused them of having “participated in a censorship cartel that included not only technology and social media companies but advertising, marketing, and so-called “fact-checking” organizations as well as the Biden-Harris Administration itself.”

    “The relevant conduct extended from removing or blocking social media posts to suppress their information and viewpoints, including through efforts to delist them, lower their rankings, or harm their profitability.”

    Carr then suggested that their protection from liability under Section 230 may be on the line.

    “As you know, Big Tech’s prized liability shield, Section 230, is codified in the Communications Act, which the FCC administers. As relevant here, Section 230 only confers benefits on Big Tech companies when they operate, in the words of the statute, “in good faith.”

    Wow…

    Carr then set his sights on NewsGuard – which Jonathan Turley notes has been long accused by conservatives “of targeting conservative and libertarian sites and carrying out the agenda of its co-founder Steven Brill. Conversely, many media outlets have heralded his efforts to identify disinformation sites for advertisers and agencies.”

    Basically, NewsGuard bombards conservative sites with struggle-session questionnaire emails demanding explanations for the slightest of indiscretions, after which they issue a “report card” that advertisers use to justify pulling ad spend.

    As Carr notes in the letter; “It is in this context that I am writing to obtain information about your work with the one specific organization – the Orwellian named NewsGuard. As exposed by the Twitter Files, NewsGuard is a for-profit company that operates as part of the broader censorship cartel. Indeed, NewsGuard bills itself as the Internet’s arbiter of truth or, as its co-founder put it, a “Vaccine Against Misinformation.” Newsguard purports to rate the credibility of news and information outlets and tells readers and advertisers which outlets they can trust.”

    Carr suggests following NewsGuard’s ratings may constitute a violation of Section 230 (this is huge).

    “NewsGuard’s own track record raises questions about whether relying on the organization’s products would constitute “good faith” actions within the meaning of Section 230. For one, reports indicate that NewsGuard has consistently rated official propaganda from the Communist Party of China as more credible than American publications.“

    “For another, NewsGuard aggressively fact checked and penalized websites that reported on the COVID-19 lab leak theory.”

    Carr then demands the following information:

    1. A list of every one of your products or services (if any, including advertising) that use or rely on any NewsGuard product, service, or ranking.
    2. A list of every one of your products or services (if any) that enables any of your users or customers to use or rely on NewsGuard product, service, or ranking.
    3. If you offer an advertising service, provide details on the use of any media monitor or fact checking service, including NewsGuard, that you may utilize.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 11/15/2024 – 22:00

  • Study Reveals Why COVID-19 Vaccine Antibodies Wane Rapidly
    Study Reveals Why COVID-19 Vaccine Antibodies Wane Rapidly

    Authored by Marina Zhang via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    Research led by scientists at Emory University in Atlanta found that while tetanus and influenza vaccines prompt the body to produce long-lived plasma cells that generate antibodies, COVID-19 vaccines do not.

    cery/Shutterstock

    The study may explain why antibody protection from COVID-19 mRNA vaccines wanes so rapidly.

    The mRNA vaccines cause the body to produce short-lived plasma cells that can only generate antibodies for a period of time before dying off.

    Vaccines like tetanus give long-lasting immunity, with antibodies persisting in the body for up to 10 years. COVID-19 antibodies rapidly wane three to six months after vaccination, often resulting in breakthrough infections.

    The study’s senior author, Dr. Frances Eun-Hyung Lee, professor of medicine and director of Emory University’s Asthma, Allergy, and Immunology program, told The Epoch Times that it is still unclear why COVID-19 vaccines do not confer durable antibody immunity, though there are several possibilities.

    According to the researcher, one reason could be that the body cannot form long-term immunity to COVID-19. The COVID-19 mRNA vaccine induces the body to produce COVID-19 spike proteins to stimulate the immune response. This spike protein may not be stimulating enough to cause the formation of lifelong plasma cells.

    Another reason could be that the mRNA vaccine platform, which delivers the vaccine to the body, does not induce durable antibody immunity.

    Currently, mRNA vaccines for respiratory syncytial virus (RSV) are in development. Whether these vaccines confer durable immunity to the viruses they are intended to protect against may help explain the body’s response to COVID-19 vaccines.

    “We will have to wait and see if the reason … is unique to the spike protein or if it’s something unique to the mRNA platform,” Lee told The Epoch Times.

    Not All Immunity Is Lifelong

    It was generally assumed that when people get infected with or vaccinated against viruses or bacteria, the immunity formed would be life-long, Dr. Stanley Perlman, a professor in the Microbiology & Immunology Department at the University of Iowa, told The Epoch Times.

    However, the current study and other research on RSV, which infects people every year despite everyone having antibodies to the virus by age 3, suggests that whether a person is immune to a virus or bacteria can vary depending on the pathogen, Lee said.

    The study, published in Nature Medicine in September, followed 19 healthy volunteers who had taken influenza, tetanus, and several COVID-19 vaccines and boosters. Researchers extracted immune cells from their bone marrow and followed them for up to three years.

    They found that these participants had durable plasma cells—a type of cell that provides lifelong immunity—that generate antibodies to influenza and tetanus but no or few durable plasma cells working against COVID-19 spike proteins.

    When our B-cells (immune cells) encounter a pathogen, they divide into plasma cells and produce antibodies. Most of these cells will die, but a few will migrate into specific niches in the bone marrow and mature into long-lived plasma cells.

    “Even if some of these cells want to die, they can’t,” Lee said. “They undergo changes in their RNA and changes in their DNA so that they can become resistant to apoptosis (cell death).”

    “There’re many other factors and mechanisms and programs, and we’re trying to study those and unravel those steps so that we can figure out how to make the SARS-CoV-2 mRNA vaccine better.”

    Having long-term immunity also does not “guarantee complete protection against future infections,” Dr. Joseph Varon, professor of medicine at the University of Houston and chief medical officer of the Front Line COVID-19 Critical Care (FLCCC) Alliance, told The Epoch Times. “Viruses can evolve to escape immune responses, and waning immunity or other factors like age and health status can influence vulnerability.”

    This is why new influenza vaccines are made every year as the virus evolves and changes, Lee said.

    Infections Did Not Enhance Immunity

    Some participants likely contracted COVID-19 throughout the study period, indicated by a sudden spike in COVID-19 antibody levels despite a lack of immunization. However, the authors found this was also not linked to the formation of long-lasting plasma cells.

    This finding concurs with prior research by the University of Maryland, which found that COVID-19 infections did not induce long-term antibody protection.

    In some cases, infections may result in stronger immunity than vaccines can provide. Life-long immunity to influenza, for example, is likely driven by natural immunity rather than vaccination.

    Antibodies formed from only the influenza vaccine may last a few months. However, since many vaccinated people will also become infected, this cross-reactivity is likely what drives plasma cells to mature into durable cells, Lee said.

    Boosting Did Not Increase Durable Antibodies

    Some study participants took several doses of COVID-19 mRNA vaccines during the study period.

    The authors found that having more doses of mRNA vaccines did “not necessarily promote more” long-lived plasma cell responses in the study’s small cohort.

    “These findings reinforce the fact that boosters are not really working at this point,“ Varon said. ”Boosters can temporarily restore protection by increasing circulating antibodies and memory immune cells.”

    Dr. William Schaffner, a professor of preventive medicine at Vanderbilt University in Nashville, Tennessee, said that people who are at high risk of dying from COVID-19 should still follow the schedule from the U.S. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC), which recommends vaccinating every six months.

    Lee agreed, adding that while her study found that antibody protection is short-lived, there are other cells in the body, like T-cells, by which vaccinations confer long-lived immunity and could, therefore, still be helpful for people at a higher risk of infection.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 11/15/2024 – 21:45

  • Texas Rental Market "Collapsing Before Our Eyes" 
    Texas Rental Market “Collapsing Before Our Eyes” 

    Housing market data from Redfin shows that US asking rents were flat in October, rising marginally by .2% year-over-year to $1,619. For two years, rents have remained flat nationwide following a massive boom during Covid, sparked by low interest rates and domestic migration trends. Now, in cities like Austin, Texas, rents are sliding due to a surge in new supply and reduced demand. 

    Drilling down into Austin’s rental data, Nick Gerli, CEO and founder of the real estate analytics firm Reventure Consulting, shared on X a concerning breakdown of the local rental market downturn that could have landlords in the metro area deeply spooked. 

    Let’s begin with Gerli’s tweet… 

    The Austin, TX rental market is collapsing before our eyes.

    With the median apartment rent dropping 15% over the last 2+ years.

    The vacancies have skyrocketed. Rental concessions are everywhere.

    Rents are now only 9.8% higher than pre-pandemic. Meaning that many Austin landlords are losing money, as property taxes, insurance, and interest costs are way higher.

    (This is a harsh lesson on the boom/bust cycle in real estate for many developers and investors who bought into Austin during the boom. Read more below to see how this happened.)

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Austin’s rental vacancy rate has exploded to a seven-year high: 

    You can see this reality expressed in vacancy rate statistics from Apartment list.

    At the height of the pandemic in Sept 2021, Austin’s rental vacancy rate was only 3.9%. Now it’s 9.5% The highest level going back 7 years.

    Gerli pointed out landlords in Austin are under severe pressure: 

    With so many vacant apartments, and rents that are still overpriced, landlords have no choice but to cut the rent to put heads in beds. Especially on lease-up projects. Which often deliver 200-400 units vacant all at once. This is exerting massive downward pressure on the rental market.

    This is very good news for renters. He said:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Gerli explained that in 2025, Austin will continue to have an apartment supply issue, which means lower rents. 

    Gerli speculates…

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    He cited Reventure App data showing that home prices in Austin were once 50% overvalued. That figure now stands at around 12%.

    Gerli concludes by forecasting a possible bottom forming in Austin’s housing market sometime in 2025. 

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 11/15/2024 – 21:20

  • The Election, Common-Sense Democrats, & The Long March
    The Election, Common-Sense Democrats, & The Long March

    Authored by Stephen Soukup via American Greatness,

    Not long before Tuesday’s election, Ruy Teixeira, a Democratic political scientist and commentator, predicted that, regardless of the outcome of the election, the contemporary progressive movement was dead. Harris, he intimated, could still win the election, but the dominant force in Democratic politics for the last two decades was done. Voters had clearly and unambiguously voiced their distaste for the four pillars of contemporary progressivism: open borders/mass immigration, lax law enforcement/social disorder, identity politics, and the war on fossil fuels. As Teixeira astutely noted, the electorate simply isn’t buying what the progressives are selling.

    Teixeira, it should be noted, is not alone in his concerns about and disapproval of the contemporary progressive agenda and its alienating effect on average voters. In the few days since Donald Trump handily defeated Kamala Harris, a handful of prominent Democrats have condemned their party’s polarizing platform and have echoed Teixeira’s denunciation of the progressives’ stubbornness. For example, Matt Yglesias, a longtime left-wing journalist and political commentator, posted a short “common sense” Democratic platform to restore the party’s following, overtly rejecting the entirety of the progressive plan. Like Teixeira, Yglesias slammed the progressives’ obsessions with climate, race, and anti-social behavior in particular.

    Based on what we all saw the other night—the most improbable political comeback in American history and a realignment of the electorate—it is clear that both Teixeira and Yglesias are right. The progressive movement has enfeebled the Democratic Party and made it unappealing to a majority of voters. In order to stave off long-term minority-party status, Democrats must move on from contemporary progressivism and must realign themselves with the needs and wants of their traditional voters. The party must change.

    There’s only one problem—and it reminds me of the old joke:

    Q: How many psychiatrists does it take to change a light bulb?

    A: Only one, but the light bulb really has to want to change.

    Teixeira, Yglesias, James Carville, and a host of other Democrats are inarguably correct about the state of their party, the malign influences on it, and the necessity of change.

    The problem is that the party has to want to change first, which is not as easy as it sounds.

    Indeed, there are several very important reasons why the Democratic Party will not change—why it cannot change.

    The most obvious and overpowering of these is the capture of the institutions.

    For decades, conservatives have noted that the far-left controls all of the institutions of cultural transmission in this country (and in the West more generally). We have noted as well that this is hardly an accident, a fateful coincidence. It is by design and the result of a century-long effort by Marxist revisionists, executed with dedication and determination.

    In my book, The Dictatorship of Woke Capital, I spend an entire chapter discussing that which the infamous East German Marxist student-leader Rudi Dutschke later called “the long march through the institutions.”  In brief, after World War I, the Marxists of Europe realized that the workers of the world were never going to unite and throw off their chains, meaning that the long-anticipated revolution was never going to occur—or at least it was never going to occur on its own.  The revolution and the triumph of Communism were not, as Marx had declared, historically inevitable.  They would have to be incited.

    Antonio Gramsci, György Lukács, and the scholars at the Frankfurt School (helmed by Max Horkheimer) collectively decided that the only way to accomplish this incitement was to alter the consciousness of the workers, to strip them of their institutionally created false consciousness and liberate them “from the circumstances that enslave them.”  And the way to do that, in turn, was, as Horkheimer put it, to mount a “historical effort to create a world which satisfies the needs and powers of men.”  In short, they would have to change society by changing its institutions of consciousness and cultural transmission.  Hence, the “long march.”

    Near the end of that chapter, I note how shockingly successful the long march has been, especially in the United States.  Whereas Marx was a crackpot who knew almost nothing about economics, history, or the conditions of the working class, his post-war successors turned out to be quite brilliant and attuned to the nature of the relationship between man and society.  In less than half a century, the critical theorists “managed to do precisely what Gramsci and Lukács had suggested needed doing a half-century earlier”:

    They stripped away the veneer of false consciousness—or, more accurately, they stripped away the consciousness that had existed previously, replacing it with their own consciousness, one rooted in skepticism and alienation, which would become the overarching themes in higher education and every single endeavor subsequently undertaken by those who passed through the American system of higher education from the 1970s on.

    Conservatives have dealt with the repercussions of the Long March and the takeover of the institutions for a long time. And they’ve adapted to it as best they can. They’ve created their own intellectual organizations (think tanks), their own media environment, and a host of other competing institutions designed to blunt the impact of the Long March. While this effort has been impressive and important in resisting the far-left’s takeover of the culture, it has also been a strictly rearguard undertaking. Conservatives are constantly having to defend themselves and what’s left of the traditional culture from the advancing institutions. With the left firmly in charge of the educational, religious, news, and entertainment establishments, the best conservatives can do is to “hang on” to whatever scraps are still up for grabs.

    The catch here is that this is an existential challenge not just for conservatives but for “common-sense” non-progressive liberals as well. These institutions were not taken over by “liberals” or moderate Democrats. They were taken over by leftists, by radicals, by the very progressives whom Teixeira and Yglesias have identified as the cause of the Democrats’ disconnect with the electorate. In other words, changing the Democratic Party and restoring it to its former common-sense, working-class roots is an undertaking that will run into the very same ivy-covered wall that has stymied conservatives for decades.

    It is no mere coincidence that Ruy Teixeira works for the American Enterprise Institute (a conservative-ish think tank) and, before that, worked for the Brookings Institution (a center-left think tank). There really is no home for a guy like him in traditional academia. Likewise, it’s no coincidence that Matt Yglesias left traditional news media to start his own outlet (Vox.com) and now does most of his work on Substack, an “alternative” media platform. He too is out of place in the contemporary institutional arena. Such is the nature of the game.

    The difference between conservatives and the center-left is that conservatives have invested heavily in building their own institutions, while the denizens of the center-left have not really understood until now (if they do, indeed, understand at all) that the takeover of the institutions was meant to undermine their worldview as much as conservatives.’ For the most part, they do not have their own alternative institutions and therefore do not have their own means for fighting the far-left’s cultural takeover.

    It is largely inarguable that the nation would be far better off with a Democratic Party dominated by non-progressives, but that’s not especially likely, at least not anytime in the foreseeable future.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 11/15/2024 – 20:55

  • More Young Men Are Now Religious Than Women In The US
    More Young Men Are Now Religious Than Women In The US

    Younger generations of women are less religious than their male counterparts in the United States, according to data from a Statista Consumer Insights survey.

    As Statista’s Anna Fleck reports, this marks a shift, as historically, U.S. women have been the more religious group.

    As this chart shows, for both genders, religion is becoming less widespread overall.

    Infographic: More Young Men Are Now Religious Than Women in the U.S. | Statista

    You will find more infographics at Statista

    Christianity is the dominant religion in the U.S., by a long shot.

    Statista data shows that 51 percent of Gen Z males self-identify as Christian, with the next biggest religious groups Islam (six percent), Buddhism (two percent).

    Only six percent of Gen Z men are atheists and 17 percent non-religious.

    For Gen Z women, 48 percent said their religion is Christianity, while only two percent said Islam and two percent Buddhism.

    Six percent of Gen Z women are atheists and 22 percent identify as non-religious.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 11/15/2024 – 20:30

  • Vitamin D Supplements Lower Blood Pressure In Older Adults With Obesity: Study
    Vitamin D Supplements Lower Blood Pressure In Older Adults With Obesity: Study

    Authored by George Citroner via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    High blood pressure often affects older and obese people; vitamin D supplements may help lower it.

    Sathit/Shutterstock

    A new study has found that taking 600 international units (IU) of vitamin D per day—the amount typically recommended for adults—lowers blood pressure in older adults, especially those who are obese.

    Experts caution that exceeding the recommended intake, even below the safe upper limit (UL), does not necessarily translate to additional benefits.

    Supplementation Reduced Blood Pressure

    The study, published Tuesday in the Journal of the Endocrine Society, involved 221 older obese adults who received vitamin D supplements at either 600 IU per day or 3,750 IU per day over one year. Currently, the Institute of Medicine (IOM) recommends a daily intake of 600 IU.

    Partcipants’ overall systolic blood pressure decreased by 3.5 mm Hg after one year, and diastolic blood pressure decreased by 2.5 mm Hg after one year.

    Those who took higher doses of 3,750 IU daily had a slightly higher decrease of 4.2 mm Hg for systolic blood pressure. In comparison, those who took the lower 600 IU per day generally reported a reduction of 2.8 mm Hg after one year.

    The authors concluded that the differences between the high- and low-dose vitamin D groups were not statistically significant.

    People with a higher body mass index (BMI) of over 30 saw more significant reductions in blood pressure, especially in the high-dose group. People who took blood pressure medication with their vitamin D also observed substantial decreases in their overall blood pressure.

    All participants also received daily supplements that included 1,000 milligrams of calcium.

    No Significant Benefits From Higher Doses

    The study’s findings showed that regular supplementation resulted in a decrease in blood pressure among participants. However, a comparison of the two dosage groups found that higher dosages of vitamin D did not provide further health benefits.

    “More vitamin D is not better in terms of blood pressure,” study author Dr. Ghada El-Hajj Fuleihan from the American University of Beirut Medical Center told The Epoch Times in an email. “Indeed, 3,750 IU/day does not lower blood pressure more than 600 IU/day, which is the Institute of Medicine recommended dose.”

    These results “need to be validated in a trial with blood pressure as the primary outcome,” she added.

    The research team considered the UL for vitamin D intake established by the IOM (4,000 IU daily) when selecting doses for participants. “3,750 IU/day is below the IOM UL, and was specifically selected to be so,” Fuleihan wrote.

    The higher dose is unlikely to cause harmful health effects, she added. “None of our patients had signs or symptoms of vitamin D intoxication,” she noted. Symptoms of vitamin D intoxication include nausea, vomiting, and kidney stones.

    Fuleihan emphasized that the decision to supplement vitamin D should ultimately be made in consultation with a patient’s primary health care provider.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 11/15/2024 – 20:05

  • Trump's Coming War On The Mexican Drug Cartels
    Trump’s Coming War On The Mexican Drug Cartels

    Authored by Anders Corr via The Epoch Times,

    President-elect Donald Trump has declared war on the drug cartels in Mexico. “The drug cartels are waging war on America, and it’s now time for America to wage war on the cartels,” he said in one of his toughest videos ever.

    Photos of fentanyl victims are displayed at The Faces of Fentanyl Memorial at the U.S. Drug Enforcement Administration headquarters in Arlington, Va., on Sept. 27, 2022. Alex Wong/Getty Images

    And it wasn’t the first time. He strongly advocated for many of the same actions in his first term and got results.

    Trump’s incoming appointees support that tough approach. The potential future “border czar,” Thomas Homan, said on Nov. 12 that Trump is committed to deploying the “full might of the United States Special Operations to take them out.” The appointed defense secretary, Pete Hegseth, said in 2023 that military “precision strikes” on the cartels might be needed to deter them from operating “in the open with impunity.”

    The United States has every ethical reason to launch a war on the cartels. They use chemical precursors from China to produce the vast majority of the illegal fentanyl that causes most of the 82,000 opioid overdose deaths in 2022 in the United States. That’s over 27 times more deaths every year than happened from the 9/11 attacks.

    Fentanyl poisoning is deliberate and far worse in the number of deaths than anti-U.S. terrorism. Those who sell illegal fentanyl in the United States, when it results in death, are justly convicted of murder.

    Yet China and Mexico get off scot-free. Beijing uses its supply of precursors as leverage against the United States on issues like Taiwan, which proves that the Chinese Communist Party (CCP) intends the deaths that result when Washington does not submit. If we want Beijing to stop the shipment of precursors, the CCP demands that we stop following the law to supply Taiwan with the weapons it needs for its self-defense. Some have called these CCP actions a form of blackmail, chemical warfare, or genocide. Arguably, they are all three.

    Just as the mullahs in Iran used Hamas to attack Israel, the CCP is using Mexican cartels to attack the United States. The risk for Hamas and now the cartels is that they could be targeted in response. Trump published an “action plan to destroy the drug cartels” in December. He is threatening to designate them as terrorist organizations, cut them off from the international financial system, hit them with cyberattacks, deport or execute foreign drug dealers and gang members, finish the border wall, and eliminate cartel leaders. This could be done with cruise or drone-fired missiles.

    If Mexico fails to help or take over these tasks themselves, Trump could unmask the Mexican politicians who cooperate with the cartels, entirely close the border, impose tariffs on Mexico, and impose a naval blockade to stop precursor shipments.

    The falsely glamorous image of being a cartel leader with a grand hacienda, pool, caravan, and armed guards posted on the perimeter wall will not seem so glamorous when these expensive homes and vehicles attract Hellfire missiles on a regular basis, forcing drug kingpins into less glamorous digs in hill camps and Mexico City’s back alleys. Neither will it be honorable to be a high government official in Mexico when Trump starts unmasking them as on the cartel payroll.

    None of this will be particularly easy. The Mexican government opposes U.S. military force on Mexican territory. Designating the cartels as terrorists and using covert operations is one response. Mexico is America’s largest trade partner and could withhold drug enforcement and immigration cooperation, though there is not much of that anyway.

    The United States should not attempt to take and hold territory permanently in Mexico, as this would be a violation of the U.S.-led international order that we help enforce by protecting Taiwan and Ukraine against China and Russia, for example. We should not become the enemy we oppose. But short cross-border targeted attacks on cartels would not be dissimilar to U.S. operations in Pakistan, including the killing of Osama bin Laden. America needs to rapidly and vigorously defend itself against all attacks, including novel offensives like fentanyl, or we lose our deterrent credibility.

    Another difficulty is diplomatic. A naval, drone, or special operations campaign in Mexico could cause the United States stress at the United Nations and with our allies. But ethics are on our side because we are under attack with building U.S. civilian casualties that are greater than in any war in U.S. history. The new U.S. ambassador to the U.N., Elise Stefanik, is tough as nails and up to the job of defending us there.

    Trump’s critics note that a finished border wall could still be tunneled under, from a house on the Mexican side to a house on the U.S. side, for example. Many such tunnels reportedly already exist, making it difficult for U.S. law enforcement to catch the smugglers. And none of this would stop fentanyl from coming in through the millions of small mail packages flown into the United States from China and around the world. If producing fentanyl is difficult in Mexico, it could be moved to Afghanistan, Burma (Myanmar), or Nigeria. There are plenty of global criminal organizations that would welcome the chance to profit and care little about the deaths of innocent Americans.

    But not fighting the worst drug kingpins and most prolific illegal labs, wherever they are found, is to acquiesce in the deaths of U.S. innocents and is therefore not an option. Destroying as many of the cartel bosses and labs as possible serves to not only stop at least some of them but also strengthens deterrence against others.

    Accelerating plans for a war on the cartels will make officials in Mexico, and those from around the world, much more pliable to Trump’s demands. Their caving in advance of Trump’s war would be the best of all worlds and something that happened in 2019 by Mexican negotiators when he made similar plans. However, Mexico quickly fell back into its old ways over the last four years.

    So this time, Trump may not be as willing to make a deal. He might just start with the public disclosure of bribery in Mexico City as justification for his military strikes against the worst of the cartel leaders and their illegal fentanyl labs out in the country. The nexus between the cartel bosses and corrupt politicians is a target-rich environment, and Trump has appropriate plans for both.

    Views expressed in this article are opinions of the author and do not necessarily reflect the views of The Epoch Times or ZeroHedge.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 11/15/2024 – 19:15

  • Zelensky Denounces Scholz Call As 'Pandora's Box' Of Appeasing Putin
    Zelensky Denounces Scholz Call As ‘Pandora’s Box’ Of Appeasing Putin

    Russian media reports have said the Swiss government is willing to play host to any future direct negotiations between Moscow and Ukraine to end the war.

    Switzerland’s Federal Department of Foreign Affairs was cited in Izvestia as responding to a question on whether it would mediate by hosting talks: “Traditionally, Swiss foreign policy is centered on offering its services as a mediator whenever both parties agree,” the Swiss government agency said.

    Via AFP

    TASS writes of potential Kremlin reluctance as follows: “However, Moscow remains highly skeptical about Bern’s neutrality, given Switzerland’s support for anti-Russian sanctions and its active cooperation with NATO forces, the newspaper reports.”

    “Experts suggest that, alongside Switzerland, several countries in Asia, Africa, and South America could also serve as potential hosts for negotiations between the two leaders,” the state media commentary continues.

    Russia is likely to prefer a host country which is neither in the EU or NATO, which could rule out candidates like Hungary or Turkey.

    Things are beginning to thaw in terms of diplomatic openings, especially given the Friday phone call between German Chancellor Olaf Scholz and Russian President Vladmir Putin. Such efforts have been boosted given Trump is vowing to end the Ukraine war as soon as he takes office.

    Scholz had urged the Russian leader to “negotiate with Ukraine” in order to enact a “just and lasting peace.”

    But Ukraine is angry, worried about getting pressured into a ‘bad deal’ which will result in conceding territory with inadequate security guarantees. Zelensky is worried that the West is ‘normalizing’ communications with Putin, essentially. But that is how diplomacy has to happen in the real world.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Zelensky blasted the call and accused Scholz of opening “Pandora’s box” – with Ukraine’s foreign ministry saying in a statement: “Talk only give[s] Putin hope of easing his international isolation.”

    “What is needed are concrete, strong actions that will force him to peace, not persuasion and attempts at appeasement, which he sees as a sign of weakness and uses to his advantage,” a statement said.

    The Kremlin in turn hailed the Scholz phone call, which we detailed earlier, as “positive”. Russia is in the diplomatic driver’s seat at this point, which is a result of the reality of Ukraine fast losing ground in the east.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 11/15/2024 – 18:50

  • Will Tulsi Be Able To Direct The Intelligence 'Community'?
    Will Tulsi Be Able To Direct The Intelligence ‘Community’?

    Authored by Ray McGovern via ConsortiumNews.com,

    The next director of national intelligence needs courage, political smarts and strong presidential backing to fulfill her duty to oversee and provide advice on covert action…

    President-elect Donald Trump’s selection of Tulsi Gabbard to be director of national intelligence (DNI) will cause shockwaves in and among the 18 fiefdoms that now comprise the U.S. intelligence community.

    Gabbard will be fighting an uphill battle if she tries to herd those 18 cats into a cohesive whole and restore integrity to intelligence analysis. The hill’s incline will be still steeper, if she takes seriously her duty to warn the president of the frequently noxious blowback of C.I.A. covert actions. I cannot overcome the urge to quote from “The Princess Bride”: Good luck stormin’ the castle, Tulsi … It will take a miracle!

    In short, the odds are against her. Whether she succeeds depends, first and foremost, on how strongly the president backs her.  Unlike most former DNIs, she has already demonstrated uncommon courage, as well as smarts and political skill.

    On the other hand, she has had virtually no experience managing a large institution, much less a “community” well versed in internecine warfare to protect individual rice bowls, and populated with careerist bureaucrats all too accustomed to telling the ultimate boss, the president, what he wants to hear.

    Important Duties

    The DNI is in charge of preparing The President’s Daily Brief (PDB), National Intelligence Estimates and the annual Threat Assessment required by Congress. What is less well known is her role in covert action — a favorite of the C.I.A.’s clandestine service.

     Executive Order 12333 (July 2008) stipulates:

    “The Director of National Intelligence (DNI) shall oversee and provide advice to the President and the NSC with respect to all ongoing and proposed covert action programs.”

    Thus, what the EO says. My own experience suggests that this covert-action-related duty has been more honored in the breach than in the observance, so to speak. Director of Central Intelligence William Colby was, in my personal experience, the only director to give intelligence analysts a look at some covert action proposals and ask for comment. I served directly under Colby as an acting national intelligence officer in the mid-70s.

    Colby, at left, briefing President Gerald Ford and his senior advisers on the deteriorating situation in Vietnam, April 28, 1975. (David Hume Kennerly, U.S. National Archives and Records Administration, Public domain)

    Will DNI Tulsi Gabbard (assuming she is confirmed by the Senate) step up to this task? It would take uncommon courage. Was the current DNI, Avril Haines, informed beforehand that the C.I.A. would blow up the Nord Stream pipelines? If so, did she give it her blessing? Or was she kept in the dark?

    Blowing Up Pipelines …

    My guess is that DNI Gabbard would have promptly recognized the folly in that C.I.A. “can-do” attitude/escapade and would have briefed the president on its longer-term implications. She is a good listener to analysts who she asks to brief her. I know that, too, from personal experience responding to her questions when she was one of Hawaii’s representatives in the House.

    It would take a courageous and politically astute person and strong backing and trust from the president for any DNI to be able to fulfill the duty to  “oversee and provide advice … on covert action programs.”

    … and Blowing Off the Analysts

    Sizable covert action programs require a sanity check from analysts with substantive expertise, as sad experience has shown. Recall the Bay of Bigs operation of April 1961.  At President John Kennedy’s request, historian Arthur M. Schlesinger Jr. investigated the affair. His conclusion, set down in a MEMORANDUM FOR THE PRESIDENT dated June 30, 1961, speaks for itself:

    “The trouble with the Cuban [Bay of Pigs] operation, for example, was not that the intelligence and operations were combined, but precisely that the Cuban operation evaded systematic intelligence judgment. The Intelligence Branch (DDI) of the CIA was never informed of the existence of the Cuban operation. The Office of National Estimates was never asked to comment on the assumption, for example, that discontent had reached the point in Cuba where a successful landing operation would provoke uprisings behind the lines and defections from the Militia.

    I gather that if its opinion had been invited, DDI would have given quite a different estimate of the state of opinion in Cuba from that on which the operation was based. …

    The Bureau of Intelligence and Research of the Department of State knew even less about the Cuban operation.”

    DNI Position: A Creature of 9/11

    As most are aware, there was enough intelligence available before 9/11 to prevent it. But the cats would not be herded. C.I.A. would not share with F.B.I. and vice versa. NSA would share with no one. Here’s one account that will turn your stomach.

    Tenet listening to President George W. Bush’s address on Sept. 11, 2001, in the President’s Emergency Operations Center. (U.S. National Archives via Flickr, Public domain)

    The congressional oversight committees as well as the administration and the intelligence community were not only intent on covering up what had happened, but needed to make it appear that remedial action was being taken.

    Enter the 9/11 Commission and its recommendations. Here, they said, was the problem: George Tenet, as director of central intelligence (head of the whole community) as well as chief of the C.I.A. was overburdened.

    In fact, Tenet was the antithesis of an effective head of the intelligence community; he screwed up royally. But he also knew “where the bodies were buried” — which key administration and congressional officials had been exposed to some of the disregarded intelligence. So it was not deemed safe to lay the blame where it clearly belonged.

    A fiction was devised. The problem was said to be that “no one was in charge of the intelligence community.” So the 9/11 Commission recommended that a new superstructure be created to coordinate the community (and let no one be held accountable).

    On July 22, 2004, immediately after the 9/11 Commission report was released, I found myself with 9/11 commissioner (and former senator from Washington) Slade Gorton in the BBC blue room in Washington. I had the temerity to remind him that it was far from the case that “no one was in charge” of the intelligence community; that Tenet had all the authority he needed.

    Gorton turned to me, smiled and said: “Of course we know all that; but we in the Commission and in Congress just had to do something so the American people would see that we were doing something.”

    Yuck.

    The national intelligence director, and the newly created bureaucracy, is what it is. Maybe Tulsi Gabbard can take the reins and make the community work. It will take a miracle; let’s hope for one.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 11/15/2024 – 18:25

  • Food Additives Exposed: What Lies Beneath America's Food Supply
    Food Additives Exposed: What Lies Beneath America’s Food Supply

    Authored by Charles Cornish-Dale via The Epoch Times,

    Scientists at the University of Texas, Dallas recently discovered that a common food additive can make flesh translucent – literally. Applying a solution of the yellow food colouring tartrazine to the skin of live mice allowed scientists to see right through the skin, into the tissues beneath, potentially offering a simple and inexpensive alternative to conventional imaging technologies like ultrasound.

    Through the skin covering the skull, the scientists could look directly at blood vessels on the surface of the murine brain, and through the skin of the abdomen they observed internal organs and even the process known as peristalsis, the contractions that move food through the digestive passage.

    Pretty cool, huh?

    The physics behind this discovery aren’t actually all that complicated. Basically, when added to water, tartrazine changes the water’s refractive index—the way it bends light—so that it matches the refractive index of molecules like lipids in the skin, reducing the degree to which light scatters as it passes through the skin. Instead of scattering, the light travels straight and true, meaning you get to see what’s on the other side.

    The process is totally reversible. It only takes a few minutes, the tartrazine solution can be washed off, and when it is the effects disappear. What tartrazine is absorbed by the skin is metabolized and excreted through the urine.

    The researchers’ next goal is to test the solution on humans. Human skin is about 10 times thicker than a mouse’s, so it’s likely a larger dose will be needed, and it’s not clear if the delivery method—just rubbing the stuff on the skin—will be adequate.

    A miraculous discovery, for sure, and one that will no doubt benefit medicine. But it’s also a reminder of an unpleasant, dangerous truth about the food supply in America today: that it’s full of substances whose properties and safety we know virtually next to nothing about. There are thousands upon thousands of additives—texturizers, colorings, humectants, anti-fungals, anti-caking agents, preservatives—in Americans’ food that have never been independently tested by the Food and Drug Administration (FDA) or by scientists who aren’t employed by the companies that make those chemicals and add them to their food.

    As we’re discovering, many of those additives—the ones we know about and have begun to test—turn out to be extremely harmful, with links to every single chronic health condition you could care to name, from cancer and obesity to neurological and behavioral conditions like Alzheimer’s and autism. Tartrazine, which is found in Twinkies, Mountain Dew, candy, and cereals, among other foods, has been linked to hyperactivity in children and cancer. In the European Union, foods containing tartrazine must carry a warning label: “May have an adverse effect on activity and attention in children.”

    It sounds absurd—insane, actually—but it’s not a glitch or an organized system of corporate deception. We’re not talking about companies lying to regulators or acting beyond the boundaries of the law. No, this is all above board. The system even has a name. The FDA calls it “generally recognized as safe” or “GRAS” for short.

    The GRAS system was first introduced by the FDA in 1958 after the passage of the Food Additive Amendments, to “grandfather” through additives that were already used in food. The new additive regulations were intended to ensure ingredients capable of causing long-term harm never entered the food supply, but something very different happened. The GRAS designation mutated into a system that allowed companies to introduce and safety-test additives themselves without the FDA ever getting a look-in.

    This happened in large part because the FDA simply couldn’t keep up with demands from companies to test their new additives for the burgeoning processed-food category. So companies started testing additives themselves and adding them to their food products without any consultation with the regulator.

    Companies did this for decades, and instead of stepping in to assert its authority, the FDA did what any poorly staffed, hopelessly compromised organization would do: It simply chose to regularize the process, which was completed in 2016.

    According to one study, since 2000, there have been only 10 applications to the FDA for full approval of a new food additive, out of a total of 766 that have been added to the American food supply. The safety of the other 756 was self-determined by the manufacturers themselves, in secret.

    And so we’ve ended up in a situation where a company can produce a new food additive, decide it’s safe by whatever means it chooses, and then bring it to market without any scrutiny at all from the FDA. Like I say, nobody knows the exact amount, but a common estimate is that there are as many as 10,000 food additives in use in the United States, compared to around 2,000—all known quantities, by contrast—that are permitted in the EU.

    Thankfully, the FDA and the GRAS system are now firmly in the sights of Robert F. Kennedy Jr., who has been tasked by president-elect Trump with Making America Healthy Again.

    The “FDA’s war on public health is about to end,” Kennedy said in a Tweet last month.

    He listed a whole range of compounds and treatments that he claims the FDA has suppressed, from psychedelics and peptides to “sunshine, exercise, nutraceuticals and anything else that advances human health and can’t be patented by Pharma.”

    “If you work for the FDA and are part of this corrupt system, I have two messages for you,” he continued.

    “1. Preserve your records, and 2. Pack your bags.”

    Strong stuff.

    Although Trump has yet to specify exactly what role Kennedy will play in the new administration, Kennedy himself has already made clear that other priorities, beside root-and-branch reform of agencies like the FDA, the Environmental Protection Agency, and the United States Department of Agriculture, will include fluoridation of the water supply, vaccinations, environmental pollution, and processed food. This is a comprehensive program, and if Kennedy can make meaningful changes in all of these areas in four years, he will have done the American people and their health an enormous service.

    If anybody can get to the bottom of why Americans are so sick, it’s Robert F. Kennedy Jr., a man who has spent decades campaigning on environmental and health issues, and suffered personal loss and public vilification as a result—but still kept on going.

    He knows as much as anybody the corruption that lies beneath the façade of public health in America, and now, at long last, he’s in a position to do something about it.

    Views expressed in this article are opinions of the author and do not necessarily reflect the views of The Epoch Times or ZeroHedge.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 11/15/2024 – 17:40

  • "Why Are We Hiding It From The Public?" – Five Takeaways From Congressional UFO Hearing
    “Why Are We Hiding It From The Public?” – Five Takeaways From Congressional UFO Hearing

    On Wednesday a bipartisan group of lawmakers hosted a congressional hearing on unidentified anomalous phenomena (UAP), where witnesses testified on potential threats to national security from incursions into US airspace.

    Led by Nancy Mace (R-SC) and hosted by the House Oversight Committee, the hearing titled “Unidentified Anomalous Phenomena: Exposing the Truth” featured former DoD official Luis Elizondo, former NASA Associate Administrator of Space Policy and Partnerships Michael Gold, journalist Michael Shellenberger, and retired U.S. Navy Rear Admiral Tim Gallaudet.

    The group discussed ongoing interest by congressional lawmakers into UAPs, as well as NASA’s potential role in reporting sightings, the origins of the alleged aircraft, and the Pentagon’s ongoing coverup into UAP documents and materials.

    “One of Congress’s most important responsibilities is oversight of the executive branch in general and the military and intelligence community in particular,” said Shellenberger, who think that the government is unconstitutionally usurping congressional authority by withholding the information.

    According to the Epoch Times, here are five takeaways from the hearing:

    1. Ongoing Bipartisan Interest From Congress

    The bipartisan UAP caucus—Mace, Rep. Tim Burchett (R-Tenn.), Rep. Andy Ogles (R-Tenn.), Rep. Anna Paulina (R-Fla.), Rep. Eric Burlison (R-Mo.), and Rep. Jared Moskowitz (D-Fla.)—were joined by other House members on Wednesday for the nearly two and a half hour hearing.

    Mace, concerned that the U.S. government is withholding UAP materials it has officially compiled since the 1940s, said Congress and the public deserve to know what the government’s taxpayer-funded research on the topic has yielded, even if they are dead ends.

    “If we’re spending money on something that doesn’t exist, why are we spending the money? And if it does exist, why are we hiding it from the public?” Mace asked. She said national security is at stake if those objects are the technology of foreign adversaries.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The possibility that some UAP, including those in videos released by the Pentagon, could be foreign technology, was echoed by Ogles.

    “It is clear, from my experience and what I’ve seen, that there is something out there. The question is, ‘Is it ours, is it someone else’s, or is it otherworldly?’” Ogles asked.

    Any attempts to restrict Congress from gaining access to that information would be criminal, he added.

    The Pentagon’s All-Domain Anomaly Resolution Office, which is tasked with studying and cataloging UAP reports, has hundreds of sightings that remain “uncharacterized and unattributed” while displaying “unusual flight characteristics or performance capabilities,” Rep. Robert Garcia (D-Calif.) said.

    “Now, we shouldn’t prejudge what they might be. I’m certainly not going to. We need evidence that we are detecting things, and we know that we don’t understand them, and this is worth investigating,” he added.

    2. Elizondo Testifies

    Elizondo, one of the key witnesses at the hearing, is famous for feeding the story of the Pentagon’s former UFO program to The New York Times in 2017.

    That article resulted in a resurgence of public interest and media reporting on UFOs, and was accompanied by several Department of Defense fighter jet videos that purportedly showed unidentified craft.

    One video, titled “GOFAST,” showed a tic-tac-shaped craft, which some have speculated to be an advanced drone. One of the pilots who followed the craft when it was spotted in 2004, Commander David Fravor, testified at last year’s congressional UAP hearing that he believed the craft was superior to both contemporary military tech and anything we are “looking to develop in the next 10-plus years.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Elizondo said on Wednesday that some UAP are “advanced technologies not made by our government or any other government” but that both the United States and its adversaries are in possession of “UAP technologies.”

    “I believe we are in the midst of a multi-decade secretive arms race, one funded by misallocated taxpayer dollars and hidden from our elected representatives and oversight bodies,” he said.

    Elizondo has claimed since 2017 that he was previously the director of the Pentagon’s 2009 UFO program, which was officially called the Advanced Aerospace Weapons System Application Program.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The Pentagon has said this program, sometimes referred to as the Advanced Aerospace Threat Identification Program (AATIP), officially ended in 2012, but that an unofficial group of Pentagon researchers used the AATIP name moving forward. Elizondo says he was the director of AATIP.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    “Luis Elizondo had no assigned responsibilities for AATIP while assigned to OUSD(I) [Office of the Under Secretary of Defense for Intelligence],” Pentagon spokesperson Susan Gough told The Epoch Times.

    3. NASA’s Role in UAP Reporting

    Gold, who was also a member of NASA’s UAP Independent Study Team, told Congress that commercial airline pilots need an official database to report potential UAP sightings. He suggested that his former employer’s Aviation Safety Reporting System (ASRS) is a good place to start.

    “This system, which is administered by NASA and funded by the FAA, provides a confidential means for reporting of safety violations in a voluntary and non-punitive manner,” Gold said. “Over 47 years, the ASRS has collected nearly 2 million reports. ASRS is the perfect tool to collect UAP data, which could then be collated by NASA and shared with the public at large.”

    NASA is already one of the most respected U.S. agencies, Gold added, which gives it a unique position in reestablishing the public’s trust in the government and UAP.

    “For relatively little cost and effort, NASA could create an AI [artificial intelligence] or ML [machine learning] algorithm that could search the agency’s archives for anomalous phenomena.”

    4. Aliens, Drones, or Something Else?

    While this year’s UAP hearing was lighter on speculations of non-human intelligence, the topic was still addressed.

    Mace probed Elizondo about purported UAP crash retrieval programs in the U.S. government, a central topic of discussion in last year’s hearing. Elizondo answered in the affirmative when asked if those programs were “designed to identify and reverse engineer alien craft.”

    “In regards to these aircraft being piloted by whatever they might be—non-human biologics—would you agree that it’s likely that they are being piloted by some mind-body connection?” Luna asked.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Elizondo, who emphasized that he was more interested in the objects’ flight characteristics than speculating on their origin, said it was safe to presume intelligent control of some kind because they “seem to anticipate [pilots’] maneuvers.”

    Garcia asked all four witnesses what could be the source of UAP. Both Gallaudet and Elizondo said nonhuman, higher intelligence, but Shellenberger and Gold said they don’t know.

    “I think we must be modest in our assumptions that we’re looking for intelligence that could be biological. It might not,” Gold said. “But I think the ultimate answer is going to surprise us all.”

    The Pentagon said earlier this year, even among its unsolved cases, “if more and better quality data were available, most of these cases also could be identified and resolved as ordinary objects or phenomena.” Those could be drones, satellites, or even meteorological events, it said.

    5. The Pentagon’s Role in UFOs/UAP

    The witnesses and lawmakers present agreed that the Pentagon has been “over-classifying” documents and materials related to UAP sightings, which sometimes get labeled “top secret” and are not subject to the Freedom of Information Act (FOIA).

    “For what purpose is the federal government over-classifying? Because that’s what they’re doing. They’re over-classifying and forbidding the public from getting access to this.” Rep. Andy Biggs (R-Ariz.) said.

    Elizondo offered two explanations. For one, it could be a holdover policy from the Cold War, when the United States didn’t want to reveal to the Soviets our awareness of foreign military technology or disclose our own. The Pentagon might also be uninterested in revealing information related to problems—including foreign incursions into U.S. airspace—they lack answers for, Elizondo added.

    Shellenberger mentioned government researcher John Greenewald Jr., who runs The Black Vault, an online database of more than 3 million government documents obtained through FOIA requests.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Greenewald says that the government has often denied the existence of specific UAP records, only to admit they exist after he files a FOIA appeal. But in one case, the Navy responded that the videos contain sensitive information, are classified, and exempt from disclosure.

    The Navy, for instance, falls back on its UAP Security Classification Guide for denying many FOIA requests, Greenewald told The Epoch Times. The guide says any UAP information obtained or developed through the use of classified sources or methods will receive the highest classification level applicable. The Pentagon has a similar policy.

    When the Pentagon declined to release video footage from U.S. fighter jets shooting down suspected UFOs over Alaska in 2023, the Defense Department said the footage remained classified.

    However, that same year the Pentagon released videos of a Russian fighter jet forcing down a U.S. MQ-9 reaper drone. Greenewald pointed out that all MQ-9 Reaper drone footage of UAP remains classified “so it doesn’t reveal drone capabilities.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    “When you get into over secrecy, over classification, them not wanting to be open and honest about things—whether it be about UAP or anything for that matter—the public trust erodes,” Greenewald said.

    In response to a request for comment from The Epoch Times, the Department of Defense said it takes public interest in UAP seriously.

    “The department is fully committed to openness and accountability to Congress and the American people, which it must balance with its obligation to protect sensitive information, sources, and methods,” Gough said.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 11/15/2024 – 17:20

  • VDH: Restoring Deterrence Will Prevent Endless Wars
    VDH: Restoring Deterrence Will Prevent Endless Wars

    Authored by Victor Davis Hanson,

    On January 3, 2020, the Trump administration conducted a drone strike near Baghdad International Airport, killing Iranian Major General Qassem Soleimani.

    Soleimani had a long record of waging surrogate wars against Americans, especially during the Iraq conflict and its aftermath.

    After the Trump cancellation of the Iran Deal, followed by U.S. sanctions, Soleimani reportedly stepped up violence against regional American bases—most of which Trump himself ironically wished to remove.

    A few days later, Iran staged a performance-art retaliatory strike against Americans in Iraq and Syria, assuming Trump had no desire for a wider Middle East war.

    So, Iran launched 12 missiles that hit two U.S. airbases in Iraq. Supposedly, Tehran had warned the Trump administration of the impending attacks that killed no Americans. Later reports, however, suggested that some Americans suffered concussions, while more damage was done to the bases than was initially disclosed.

    Nonetheless, this Iranian interlude seemed to reflect Trump’s agenda of avoiding “endless wars” in the Middle East while restoring deterrence that prevented, not prompted, full-scale conflicts.

    Yet in a second Trump administration, rethreading the deterrence needle without getting into major wars may become far more challenging. The world of today is far more dangerous than when Trump left in 2021.

    An inept Biden administration has utterly destroyed U.S. deterrence abroad through both actual and symbolic disasters:

    • the Chinese dressing down of U.S. diplomats in Anchorage;

    • the humiliating skedaddle from Afghanistan;

    • the brazen flight of a Chinese spy balloon across the U.S.;

    • the invasion of Ukraine by Russia;

    • the October 7, 2023 massacre of 1200 Israelis;

    • the serial Houthi attacks on international shipping in the Red Sea;

    • the visible restraint of Israeli from fully replying to Iranian missile attacks on its homeland;

    • and renewed bellicosity on the part of both North Korea and China toward American allies such as Japan, South Korea, and Taiwan.

    Of course, a second-term Trump must radically reform the Pentagon and beef up the military while warning enemies of the consequences to follow from any unwise aggression.

    But if opponents believe such admonitions remain only vocal threats, then empty verbiage surely will erode deterrence further—such as Joe Biden’s serial and empty braggadocio, “Don’t!”

    Biden’s past theatrical finger-shaking translated into aggressors like Putin going into Ukraine, Iran sending missiles into Israel, and the Houthis serially hitting shipping in the Red Sea.

    Given the past messes of the Iraqi, Libyan, and Syrian interventions, and the catastrophic Biden humiliation in Afghanistan, Trump in 2024 is much more emphatic about the need to avoid such overseas dead-end entanglements or even the gratuitous use of force that historically can sometimes lead to tit-for-tat entanglements.

    Still, Trump’s selection of J.D. Vance as vice president, along with Tulsi Gabbard, RFK, Jr., and Tucker Carlson as close advisors, coupled with the announcements that former Secretary of State Mike Pompeo and prior UN Ambassador Nikki Haley will not be in the administration, may be misinterpreted by scheming foreign adversaries as proof of Trump neo-isolationism.

    Moreover, the U.S. is battered by an unsustainable $37 trillion national debt and a nonexistent southern border that saw 12 million illegal aliens enter with impunity.

    So, the use of force abroad is now often seen in a zero-sum fashion as coming at the expense of unaddressed American needs at home.

    Moreover, a woke, manpower-short military has not achieved strategic advantages from wars abroad, while disparaging and alienating the very working-class recruits who disproportionately fight and die in them.

    Recently, even as President-elect Trump’s inner circle emphasized an end to endless conflicts, Trump warned Russian Federation President Vladimir Putin not to escalate his attacks against Ukraine. Yet that advice was followed by a Russian massive drone onslaught against civilian Ukrainian targets.

    Putin no doubt wishes to encourage American enemies to test Trump’s deterrent rhetoric against his campaign’s domestic promises to mind America’s own business at home.

    Is there a way to square the deterrence circle?

    Trump will have to speak clearly and softly while carrying a club. And for the first few months of his administration, he will be tested as never before to make it clear to Iran and its terrorist surrogates, China, North Korea, and Russia that aggression against US interests will be swiftly and quietly met with disproportionate and overwhelming repercussions.

    Yet Trump will likely have to rely on drones, missiles, and air strikes and not on major engagements, to deter enemies from aggression—and his domestic critics from claiming he turned into a globalist interventionist.

    He is not.

    Trump remains a Jacksonian. But such deterrence entails warning from time to time the reckless and adventurous abroad that our allies have no better friend than America and our adversaries no worse enemy.

    In other words, Trump must remind Americans only by periodically deterring enemies can he prevent endless wars.

    Views expressed in this article are opinions of the author and do not necessarily reflect the views of ZeroHedge.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 11/15/2024 – 17:00

  • Election Week Saw Huge Money-Market Fund Inflows, Bank Deposits Rise, Loan Volumes Shrink
    Election Week Saw Huge Money-Market Fund Inflows, Bank Deposits Rise, Loan Volumes Shrink

    Money market funds saw massive inflows for the second straight week (+$81.6BN), pushing the total assets under management to a new record high of $6.66TN…

    Source: Bloomberg

    And while MM funds surged, total US bank deposits dropped modestly (-$7.5BN on a seasonally-adjusted basis)…

    Source: Bloomberg

    Though interestingly, on a non-seasonally-adjusted basis, total deposits rose by a modest $3.7BN during the week ending 11/6 (which included the election)…

    Source: Bloomberg

    Excluding foreign deposits, US banks saw domestic deposits rise on both an SA (+$12BN) and NSA (+$16.7BN) basis…

    Source: Bloomberg

    Loan volumes shrank significantly during election week…

    Source: Bloomberg

    Finally, the decoupling between bank reserves at The Fed and the total US equity market capitalization has reached an extreme…

    Source: Bloomberg

    With liquidity being drawn down from The Fed’s reverse repo facility at a pace, we wonder how long that spread can be maintained.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 11/15/2024 – 16:41

  • The Great Splainin' Cometh
    The Great Splainin’ Cometh

    Authored by James Howard Kunstler,

    “The meltdown has gotten so heavy liberal bureaucrats are ready to form antigovernment militias and fretting about black helicopters”

    – Max Blumenthal

    “Many Democrats were considering how to navigate a dark future, with the party unable to stop Mr. Trump from carrying out a right-wing transformation of American government. Others turned inward, searching for why the nation rejected them. They spoke about misinformation and the struggle to communicate the party’s vision in a diminished news environment inundated with right-wing propaganda”

    – The New York Times

    In July 27, 1794, the non-insane members of the Convention, or national legislative body in Paris, suddenly turned on the rabid Jacobin leader Maximillian Robespierre and overthrew his ruling tyrannical bunch — who had killed 40,000 of their fellow countrymen in the paranoid orgy known as The Reign of Terror.

    The next day, Robespierre rode the tumbrel to his own appointment with “the national razor” and the Thermidorian Reaction was on!

    By the way, in one of their many acts disordering French society, the Jacobins had changed the calendar, renamed all the months, and changed the weeks from seven to ten days (to eliminate Sundays as a holy day of rest in their anti-church crusade). Thus, Thermidor, the month of mid-summer.

    This was but a small part of their proto-communist agenda, but you see in it the flavor of their radical extremism.

    The Woke Democrats of recent times were our Jacobins, and the election of November 5, 2024, marks the kick-off of America’s Thermidorian Reaction. The crazies have been overthrown and our country awaits a restoration of norms in culture and law. No more sexualizing of children, no more flood of criminal mutts across the US border, no more furtive censorship of public speech, no more creative lawfare, no more women on the battlefield, no more “anti-racist” racism in the workplace, no more intel takeover of everyone’s private life. . . you get the picture.

    Many abiding mysteries about how this happened — even of what exactly did happen — remain to be sorted out by law and by history. That is probably because so much of the Woke Revolution was provoked by state-of-the-art mind-fuckery out of the giant intel blob’s psy-ops lab.

    This blob, you understand, had grown to be a colossal racketeering operation with many branches and ever-spreading roots, and it cast its spells over the populace to protect these interests — which, of course, involved huge revenue streams.

    Perhaps its most potent spell was the manipulation of women’s emotion, harnessing female psychodrama as the propellant for mass social discord. In a nation of absent fathers, damaged children, and broken male-female relations, Donald Trump was painted as the ultimate archetypal tyrant Daddy figure to deflect the public’s attention from the actual tyranny growing under the US intel blob and its Globalist sidekicks. Case in point: RussiaGate, a long-running hysteria of fabricated accusations, a fabulous medley of scurrilous gossip, engineered at the highest levels of our government for the express purpose of wrecking Mr. Trump’s first term in office. “Witch hunt” was exactly the right term.

    Many more psychodramas followed, all of them artificially cooked up by various branches of the blob: impeachments #1 and #2; the FBI-induced J-6 riot and the fake House J-6 inquiry that followed; the roll-out of DOJ-inspired fake criminal and civil cases that tied-up Mr. Trump in courtrooms through the year, and most especially the hostile news media’s presentation of all these things as one great big everlasting frenzy of on-screen women shrieking at the Daddy-figure, Donald Trump, like thirteen-year-old girls in fugues of hormonal disruption.

    The voters, subject to years of trips laid on them, were eventually able to see through all this induced psychodrama as to how they were being manipulated, and on November 5, they finally revolted. Their quandary was probably epitomized by the absurdity of watching men in women’s sports — spiking volleyballs on the girls’ heads, bashing them on the lacrosse field, humiliating them in the swim lanes — and, more to the point, being helpless to do anything about it, because the officials in-charge under “Joe Biden” said it must be, no matter what you think and feel about what you are seeing.

    The New York Times, your field-guide to blob-think, is warning its dwindling readership of psychodrama addicts that Donald Trump will now take out his “grievances” on the noble, self-sacrificing bureaucracy that manages things so well in this land. As usual, The Times misleads and misinforms. These are the grievances of the nation that has seen its law and its culture twisted into new orders of wickedness that leave daily life in the USA perverted, dishonored, and grotesquefied.

    So now Mr. Trump has picked a cabinet that scares the blob to death — for good reason. They are aiming to systematically disarm and disassemble the blob. They are a team of serious and intelligent warriors and they mean business, in particular Gaetz, Gabbard, Kennedy, Ratcliffe, and Homan, with Elon and Vivek riding shotgun. (A new FBI Director has not yet been named.) You must wonder how the blob is planning to defend itself, for it surely will resist.

    Many of us believe that the two recent assassination attempts against the now-President-elect were blob-sponsored operations. Everybody expects they’ll try again. But it’s possible that the American system still has enough mojo to self-correct. A whole lot of public officials have a whole lot of ‘splainin’ to do. It looks like they will be compelled to now, including the public health officers who brought us Covid-19 and the mandated, ineffective-and-harmful mRNA vaccines.

    There’s every reason to believe that the ‘splainin’ can take place in correct proceedings according to law: hearings, grand juries, courts. We do have actual laws against racketeering, abuse of power, election fraud, bribery, malicious prosecution, sedition, treason, and conspiracy to commit all those crimes. Pay attention: all that is distinct from lawfare, which is making-up crimes, faking crimes, and faking procedure. You are going to see a demonstration of how law differs from lawfare. It ought to have a salutary effect on our national esprit. And that should motivate us to get on with the job of repairing the damage done to our country.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 11/15/2024 – 16:20

Digest powered by RSS Digest